™
ODYSSEY, Q-VISION HF Series™ X-ray Generators
Service Manual
Manual Part No. DC30-011 Revision W
EU Authorized Representative: Medizintechnik Berlin GmbH Altentreptower, Strasse 59 12683 Berlin - Germany Phone: +49-302-82 4726 Fax: +49-302-82 6382 E-mail:
[email protected]
This manual is copyrighted and all rights are reserved. No portion of this document may be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated, or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable form without prior consent in writing from Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC. (QMI) This Service Manual is incomplete without Operator’s Manual part number DC30-010.
Copyright© 2010 QMI
Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC 2002-B Orville Drive North Ronkonkoma, NY 11779-7661 USA Phone: (631) 567-5800 Fax: (631) 567-5074 E-mail:
[email protected] www.quantummedical.net
Made in U.S.A.
Revision History
REVISION
DATE
TYPE OF MODIFICATION
E
1/12/02
Incorporated ECO 0647, 0651, 0687
F
2/25/02
Incorporated ECO 0714, 0718, 0738, 0742
G
5/15/02
Incorporated ECO 0642, 0748, 0753, 0770, 0787, 0803, 0809, 0821, 0827, 0829, 0830, 0847, 0859, 0881, 0888
H
9/26/02
Incorporated ECO 0787
J
11/11/02
Incorporated ECO 0936, 1003, 1009, 1010, 1017, 1028, 1030
K
3/31/03
Incorporated ECO 1093, 1102, 1103, 1107, 1115, 1124, 1146
L
7/11/03
Incorporated ECO 1255, 1256
M
7/29/03
Incorporated ECO 1269, 1270, 1272
N
12/19/03
Incorporated ECO 1144, 1216, 1347, 1359, 1362, 1380, 1383, 1400
P
9/10/04
Incorporated ECO 1346, 1438, 1485, 1518
Q
4/22/05
Incorporated ECO 1565, 1570, 1600, 1606, 1607
R
12/20/05
Incorporated ECO 1660, 1663, 1679
S
5/22/07
Assigned new part number to Non-QMI HSS version manual; Incorporated ECO 1697, 1715, 1757, 1794, 1890
T
5/8/2008
Incorporate ECO 1895, 1920, 1932, 1977, 1985
U
11/21/2008
Incorporate ECO 2045, 2050, 2068, 2093, 2105
V
9/1/2009
Incorporate ECO 1980, 2160, 2166, 2169
W
1/15/2010
Incorporate ECO 2220, 2228, 2276
Page Number
Rev
i thru xii
W
1-1 thru 1-22
Page Number
Rev
Page Number
Rev
4-1 thru 4-20
W
B-1 thru B-56
W
W
5-1 thru 5-96
W
C-1 thru C-7
W
2-1 thru 2-56
W
6-1 thru 6-67
W
D-1 thru D-66
W
3-1 thru 3-72
W
A-1 thru A-16
W
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
i
Revision History
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Revision W
ii
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 - SPECIFICATIONS SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS ................................................................. 1-3 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................. 1-5 GENERATOR CABINET SPECIFICATIONS ......................................... 1-5 OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL SPECIFICATIONS ............................... 1-5 ODYSSEY HF Control Panel: ..................................................... 1-5 Q-VISION HF Control Panel: .................................................... 1-5 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................. 1-5 POWER REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................... 1-6 SINGLE-PHASE X-RAY GENERATORS ............................................... 1-7 25 kW Single Phase (Model QG-25) ........................................... 1-7 25 kW Single Phase (Model QG-25-5)* ...................................... 1-7 32 kW Single Phase (Model QG-32) ........................................... 1-7 32 kW Single Phase (Model QG-32-5)* ...................................... 1-7 40 kW Single Phase (Model QG-40) ........................................... 1-8 40 kW Single Phase (Model QG-40-5)* ...................................... 1-8 32 kW Single Phase, Stored Energy ........................................... 1-8 40 kW Single Phase, Stored Energy ........................................... 1-8 50 kW Single Phase, Stored Energy ........................................... 1-8 THREE-PHASE X-RAY GENERATORS ................................................ 1-9 32 kW Three Phase (Model QG-32-2) ........................................ 1-9 32 kW Three Phase (Model QG-32-3) ........................................ 1-9 40 kW Three Phase (Model QG-40-2) ........................................ 1-9 40 kW Three Phase (Model QG-40-3) ........................................ 1-9 50 kW Three Phase (Model QG-50-2) ........................................ 1-9 50 kW Three Phase (Model QG-50-3) ........................................ 1-9 65 kW Three Phase (Model QG-65) ..........................................1-10 80 kW Three Phase (Model QG-80) ..........................................1-10 HIGH-SPEED STARTER POWER REQUIREMENTS ............................1-10 GENERATOR AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLIES ..........................................1-15 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................1-15 SYSTEM OPTIONS ..............................................................................1-19 SYSTEM OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ...................................................1-19 NON-OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ........................................................1-20
CHAPTER 2 - ASSEMBLY & INSTALLATION OVERVIEW .......................................................................................... 2-3 PRE-INSTALLATION GUIDELINES ................................................... 2-3 Verify Equipment Location ........................................................ 2-3 Electrical Requirements ............................................................ 2-5 UNPACKING .................................................................................. 2-5 INSTALLATION .................................................................................... 2-6 REQUIRED TOOLS AND MATERIALS ............................................... 2-6
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
iii
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 2 - ASSEMBLY & INSTALLATION (CONT’D) GENERATOR CABINET SETUP ......................................................... 2-6 Transformer Line Tap Adjustment (Single Phase Non-SE Systems) 2-8 Transformer Line Tap Adjustment (Single Phase SE Systems) ....2-10 AC Input (Mains) Connection ...................................................2-12 High Voltage (H.V.) Tank ........................................................2-15 High Voltage Cables ................................................................2-18 INTERFACE BOARD SETTINGS & CONNECTIONS ............................2-21 Door Interlock Switch Connection ............................................2-22 "In Use" Light Switch Connection .............................................2-22 Collimator Connections ............................................................2-23 Tube Stand/Peripheral Equipment Connections .........................2-23 Internal +28 VDC Power Supply Option (QG-28VPS) .................2-23 Tube Rotor Boost Voltage Verification (Systems without High (Dual) Speed Starter Option) ..........................................2-24 RADIOGRAPHIC SYSTEM EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS ....................2-25 Tube Rotor Cable (Systems without High (Dual) Speed Starter Option) ......................................................................2-25 Tube Rotor Cable (Systems with AID External High Speed Starter QG-HSS Option Only) ........................................2-27 Tube Rotor Cable (Systems with Internal High Speed Starter Q-HSS Option Only) ....................................................2-30 Table/Wall Bucky Connections .................................................2-34 Table/Wall Ion Chamber Connections (AEC Option Only) ...........2-34 Interfacing to Canon Digital Radiographic Receptor (When Applicable) .................................................................2-35 Interfacing to CMT Digital Radiographic Receptor (When Applicable) .................................................................2-36 Interfacing to Siemens Ion Chambers (When Applicable) ...........2-36 Interfacing to Pausch Tomography System (When Applicable) ...2-39 OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL SETUP ..............................................2-41 ODYSSEY Operator Control Panel ............................................2-41 OCP Pedestal Mounting (QG-PDL Option) .................................2-41 OCP Wall Mounting (QG-WM Option) .......................................2-43 Q-VISION Operator Control Panel ............................................2-44 Integrated Workstation Operator Control Panel .........................2-46 Optional Remote Expose Switch Connection .............................2-47 INITIAL POWER UP ......................................................................2-47 TRANSFORMER TAP VALIDATION ..................................................2-48 Q-VISION OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL - NETWORK SETTINGS VERIFICATION ............................................................2-49 ROTOR DRIVE BOARD A10 (AY40-013T) PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION ............................................................................2-55
CHAPTER 3 - CALIBRATION OVERVIEW .......................................................................................... 3-3 REQUIRED TOOLS AND MATERIALS ............................................... 3-3
Revision W
iv
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 3 - CALIBRATION (CONT’D) SYSTEM CONFIGURATION/CALIBRATION .............................................. 3-3 ACCESSING SERVICE MODE ........................................................... 3-4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION .............................................................. 3-6 Printer On/Off Setting ............................................................... 3-7 Generator Configuration/Derating Settings ................................. 3-8 AEC Setting ............................................................................. 3-9 Rotor Drive Setting ................................................................. 3-10 Edit Facility/Welcome Facility Utility ......................................... 3-11 Tube Type Setting .................................................................. 3-12 Edit Digital Settings ................................................................ 3-13 Ion Chamber/Receptor Configuration ....................................... 3-14 Tomo Setting ......................................................................... 3-18 SYSTEM SETTINGS ...................................................................... 3-21 Set Date Screen ..................................................................... 3-22 Set Time Screen ..................................................................... 3-23 Film/Screen Defaults Screen ................................................... 3-23 APR Format Setting ................................................................ 3-25 Language Setting ................................................................... 3-26 Back Up MAS Setting .............................................................. 3-27 Generator Timeout Setting ...................................................... 3-28 Date/Time Format Setting ...................................................... 3-28 SYSTEM CALIBRATION ................................................................. 3-29 GENERAL CALIBRATION PROCEDURE NOTES ................................ 3-32 Film Speed Setting on non-AEC Systems .................................. 3-33 A/D Calibration ...................................................................... 3-34 kV Calibration Function ........................................................... 3-37 Filament Offset Calibration ...................................................... 3-39 MA Calibration ....................................................................... 3-43 AEC CALIBRATION ....................................................................... 3-46 AEC Calibration Procedures ..................................................... 3-48 NON-AEC REPRODUCIBILITY VERIFICATION ................................. 3-66 AEC REPRODUCIBILITY VERIFICATION (ONLY PERFORM ON UNITS EQUIPPED WITH QG-AEC OPTION) .............................. 3-67 NON-AEC LINEARITY VERIFICATION ............................................. 3-67 AEC LINEARITY VERIFICATION (ONLY PERFORM ON UNITS EQUIPPED WITH QG-AEC OPTION) ................................... 3-68 MAXIMUM DEVIATION: KVP, TIME, MA, MAS ................................. 3-68
CHAPTER 4 - THEORY OF OPERATION OVERVIEW .......................................................................................... 4-3 OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL CIRCUIT ............................................ 4-3 Microcontroller U3 Operation ..................................................... 4-3 Flash Memory U2 ..................................................................... 4-3 EEPROM U17 Operation ............................................................ 4-4 LCD Controller U12 Operation ................................................... 4-4
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
v
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 4 - THEORY OF OPERATION (CONT’D) Switching Power Supply Circuit ................................................. 4-5 Front Panel Key Activation Detection Circuit ............................... 4-5 Jumpers Installation ................................................................. 4-5 TechVision Compatibility .......................................................... 4-5 GENERATOR LOGIC CIRCUIT ......................................................... 4-5 Generator/OCP Communication ................................................ 4-6 Master and Slave Microcontroller Operation ............................... 4-6 FILAMENT CONTROL REGULATOR CIRCUIT .................................... 4-7 KVP & FILAMENT CONTROL CIRCUIT .............................................. 4-7 LINE MONITOR CIRCUIT (NON-SE SINGLE-PHASE AND THREE-PHASE SYSTEMS) .............................................................. 4-8 Input Line Monitor Circuit ......................................................... 4-8 Capacitor Discharge Circuit ....................................................... 4-9 Auto-Shutoff Circuit ................................................................. 4-9 Three-Phase Line Monitor Circuit .............................................4-10 LINE MONITOR CIRCUIT (STORED ENERGY SYSTEMS) ...................4-10 Battery Monitor Circuit ............................................................4-10 Storage Capacitor Discharge Circuit .........................................4-10 Generator Auto-Shutoff Circuit .................................................4-11 Battery Charger Circuit ............................................................4-11 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT ..............................................................4-12 +48 VDC Power Supply ...........................................................4-12 +15 VDC Power Supply ...........................................................4-12 +24 VDC Power Supply ...........................................................4-12 ROTOR BOARD CIRCUIT (NON-HIGH SPEED STARTER SYSTEMS) ...4-13 ROTOR BOARD CIRCUIT (QUANTUM INTERNAL HIGH SPEED STARTER SYSTEMS) .........................................................4-13 HSS Control Board A20A1 (AY40-035S) ....................................4-14 HSS Drive Board A20A2 (AY40-036S) .......................................4-15 AEC BOARD CIRCUIT ....................................................................4-16 Standard Type AEC .................................................................4-16 Universal Type AEC .................................................................4-17 +300 VDC Power Supply .........................................................4-18 AEC Control Circuitry ...............................................................4-18 Tomography Circuitry ..............................................................4-20
CHAPTER 5 - SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS OVERVIEW .......................................................................................... 5-3 DISPOSAL OF BATTERIES AND ACCUMULATORS (DIRECTIVE 2006/66/EC) .............................................................. 5-3 SERVICE MAINTENANCE ................................................................ 5-4 Visual Inspection ..................................................................... 5-4 TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................... 5-5 Warning Messages ................................................................... 5-5 Error Codes ............................................................................. 5-5 Optional +28 VDC Power Supply Troubleshooting .....................5-48
Revision W
vi
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 5 - SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS (CONT’D) SERVICE REPORTS ....................................................................... 5-49 Accessing Service Reports - ODYSSEY X-ray Generators ............ 5-49 Accessing Service Reports - Q-VISION Operator Control Panel ... 5-56 Accessing Service Reports - Integrated X-ray Generators .......... 5-63 REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ........................................ 5-72 Generator Cabinet Cover Removal ........................................... 5-72 Generator Cabinet Cover Replacement ..................................... 5-72 High Voltage (H.V.) A17 Tank Removal .................................... 5-73 High Voltage (H.V.) Tank A17 Installation ................................ 5-74 Power Modules A18 and A19 (P/N AY20-047) Removal ............ 5-75 Power Modules A18 and A19 (P/N AY20-047) Replacement ....... 5-77 Logic Board A1 (P/N AY40-006S) Removal ............................... 5-78 Logic Board A1 (P/N AY40-006S) Replacement ......................... 5-78 KVP Control Board A2 (P/N AY40-003S) Removal ..................... 5-80 KVP Control Board A2 (P/N AY40-003S) Replacement ............... 5-80 Filament Control Board A5 (P/N AY40-007T) Removal ............... 5-82 Filament Control Board A5 (P/N AY40-007T) Replacement ........ 5-82 Power Supply Board A6 (P/N AY40-005T) Removal ................... 5-83 Power Supply Board A6 (P/N AY40-005T) Replacement ............. 5-83 Line Monitor Board A8 Removal .............................................. 5-84 Line Monitor Board A8 Replacement ........................................ 5-84 Stored Energy Systems Line Monitor/Charger Board A8 (AY40-028T) Removal ........................................................... 5-85 Stored Energy Systems Line Monitor/Charger Board (AY40-028T) A8 Replacement ................................................ 5-86 Rotor Drive Board A10 (P/N AY40-013T) Removal .................... 5-87 Rotor Drive Board A10 (P/N AY40-013T) Replacement .............. 5-87 Standard AEC Control Board A11 (P/N AY40-031S) Removal ..... 5-88 Standard AEC Control Board A11 (P/N AY40-031S) Replacement 5-88 Universal AEC Control Board A11 (P/N AY40-027S) Removal ..... 5-89 Universal AEC Control Board A11 (P/N AY40-027S) Replacement 5-89 OCP Microprocessor Board A16 (P/N AY40-004S1) Removal (Not Applicable on Q-VISION or Integrated Generators) .......... 5-90 OCP Microprocessor Board A16 (P/N AY40-004S1) Replacement (Not Applicable on Q-VISION or Integrated Generators) .......... 5-90 Q-HSS Equipped Systems Only: High-Speed Starter Control Board A20A1 (P/N AY40-035S) Removal ................................. 5-91 Q-HSS Equipped Systems Only: High-Speed Starter Control Board A20A1 (P/N AY40-035S) Replacement ........................... 5-91 Q-HSS Equipped Systems Only: High-Speed Starter Driver Board A20A2 (P/N AY40-036S) Removal ................................. 5-92 Q-HSS Equipped Systems Only: High-Speed Starter Driver Board A20A2 (P/N AY40-036S) Replacement ........................... 5-92 Stored Energy System - Battery Tray Removal ......................... 5-93 Stored Energy System - Battery Tray Replacement ................... 5-95
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
vii
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 5 - SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS (CONT’D) REPLACEMENT PARTS AND ORDERING INFORMATION ...................5-96 ORDERING INFORMATION ............................................................5-96
CHAPTER 6 - DIAGRAMS Single-Phase (Non-STORED ENERGY) X-ray Generators, 25, 32 and 40 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2) ....................................... 6-3 Single-Phase (Non-STORED ENERGY) X-ray Generators, 25, 32 and 40 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2) ................................. 6-4 Single-Phase (STORED ENERGY) X-ray Generators, 20, 32 40 and 50 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2) ....................................... 6- 5 Single-Phase (STORED ENERGY) X-ray Generators, 20, 32, 40 and 50 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2) ....................................... 6-6 Three-Phase X-ray Generators, 32 and 40 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2) .......................................................... 6-7 Three-Phase X-ray Generators, 32 and 40 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2) ....................................................................... 6-8 Three-Phase X-ray Generators, 50, 65 and 80 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2) ....................................................................... 6-9 Three-Phase X-ray Generators, 50, 65 and 80 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2) ......................................................................6-10 Three-Phase X-ray Generators, 50, 65 and 80 kW (with QMI-HSS) Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2) .................................................6-11 Three-Phase X-ray Generators, 50, 65 and 80 kW (with QMI-HSS) Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2) .................................................6-12 Generator System Cabling Diagram (Internal High-Speed Starter) ..........6-13 Generator System Cabling Diagram (External High-Speed Starter Systems) 6-14 System Cabling Diagram (with Q-Connect Option) ................................6-15 HF Generator to Canon/TechVision System Interconnection Diagram (Non-Widescreen) .............................................................................6-16 HF Generator to Canon/TechVision System Interconnection Diagram (Widescreen) .......................................................................6-17 17 x 17 Midwest Bucky Interconnection Diagram ..................................6-18 17 x 17 Progeny and L-F Bucky Interconnection Diagram ......................6-19 14 x 36 Midwest Bucky Interconnection Diagram ..................................6-20 Single-Phase 208 - 260 VAC Input (Non-STORED ENERGY) X-ray Generators, 25, 32 and 40 kW Interconnection Diagram .......................6-21 Single-Phase 380 - 480 VAC Input (Non-STORED ENERGY) X-ray Generators, 25, 32 and 40 kW Interconnection Diagram .......................6-22 Single-Phase (STORED ENERGY) X-ray Generator, 20 kW Interconnection Diagram ....................................................................6-23 Single-Phase (STORED ENERGY) X-ray Generators, 32, 40 and 50 kW Interconnection Diagram .........................................................6-24 Three-Phase (380-480) Input (32, 40 and 50 kW without High Speed Starter) X-ray Generators Interconnection Diagram ....................6-25
Revision W
viii
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 6 - DIAGRAMS (CONT’D) Three-Phase (208-240) Input (32, 40 and 50 kW without High Speed Starter) X-ray Generators Interconnection Diagram ................... 6-26 Three-Phase (50, 65 and 80 kW with AID High Speed Starter) X-ray Generators Interconnection Diagram .................................................. 6-27 Three-Phase (32, 40 and 50 kW without High Speed Starter, with Universal AEC Board) X-ray Generators Interconnection Diagram ......... 6-28 Three-Phase (65 and 80 kW with AID High Speed Starter, Universal AEC Board) X-ray Generators Interconnection Diagram ........................ 6-29 Three-Phase (208-240) Input (32, 40 and 50 kW without High Speed Starter, with Universal AEC Board) X-ray Generators Interconnection Diagram AEC6-30 Three-Phase (208-240) Input (50 kW with QMI High Speed Starter) X-ray Generator Interconnection Diagram .................................................................... 6-31 Three-Phase (208-240) Input (50 kW with QMI High Speed Starter and Tomography Interface) X-ray Generator Interconnection Diagram ........ 6-32 Three-Phase (65 and 80 kW with QMI High Speed Starter) X-ray Generator Interconnection Diagram .................................................... 6-33 Three-Phase (65 and 80 kW with QMI High Speed Starter and Tomography Interface) X-ray Generator Interconnection Diagram ........................... 6-34 Operator Control Panel - ODYSSEY/QUEST Wiring Diagram ................... 6-35 Q-Connect Option System Interconnection Diagram ............................. 6-36 Operator Control Panel Circuit Block Diagram (Non-Q-VISION OCP) ....... 6-37 Generator Logic Circuit Block Diagram ................................................. 6-38 Filament Regulator Control Circuit Block Diagram ................................. 6-39 KVP & Filament Control Circuit Block Diagram ...................................... 6-40 Single-Phase (Non-STORED ENERGY) and Three-Phase Line Monitor Circuit Block Diagram ........................................................................ 6-41 Single-Phase STORED ENERGY Line Monitor Circuit Block Diagram ........ 6-42 Interface Board A9 (AY40-023T/AY40-023T1) Schematic Diagram ......... 6-43 Interface Board, Digital Receptor A9 (AY40-034T) Interface Diagram ..... 6-44 Interface Board, Digital Receptor A9 (AY40-061T) Interface Diagram ..... 6-45 Power Supply Board A6 (AY40-005T) Schematic Diagram 46 Rotor Circuit Block Diagram ................................................................ 6-47 QMI High-Speed Starter Circuit Block Diagram ..................................... 6-48 Logic Board A1 (AY40-006S) Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram ......... 6-49 KVP Control Board A2 (AY40-003S) Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram 6-50 Filament Control Board A5 (AY40-007T) - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram ........................................................................................... 6-51 Power Supply Board A6 (AY40-005T) - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram ........................................................................................... 6-52 Line Monitor Board A8 (AY40-022T1), Single-Phase Systems - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram ......................................................... 6-53 Line Monitor/Battery Charger Board A8 (AY40-028T), Stored-Energy Systems - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram ................................... 6-54 Line Monitor Board A8 (AY40-022T2/T3), Three-Phase Systems - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram ......................................................... 6-55 Line Monitor Board A8 (AY40-053S2/AY40-053S3), Three-Phase QMI High-Speed Starter Systems - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram ...... 6-56
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
ix
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 6 - DIAGRAMS (CONT’D) Interface Board (No HSS Non-Digital) A9 (AY40-023T) - Terminal Block/Jumper Location Diagram ..........................................................6-57 Digital Interface Board (No HSS with Digital Receptor) A9 (AY40-034T) Terminal Block/Jumper Location Diagram ............................................6-58 Interface Board (HSS Non-Digital) A9 (AY40-061T) Terminal Block/Jumper Location Diagram ..............................................................................6-59 Digital Interface Board (HSS with Digital Receptor) A9 (AY40-062T) Terminal Block/Jumper Location Diagram ............................................6-60 Rotor Drive Board A10 (AY40-013T) - Terminal Block Location Diagram .6-61 Standard AEC Board A11 (AY40-031S) - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram ...........................................................................................6-62 Universal AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S) - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram ...........................................................................................6-63 OCP Control Board A16A1 (AY40-004S1) - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram ..............................................................................6-64 OCP Interface Board A1A1 (AY40-073S) - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram ...........................................................................................6-65 QMI High-Speed Starter Control Board A20A1 (AY40-035S) - Test Point/Potentiometer Location Diagram ................................................6-66 QMI High-Speed Starter Driver Board A20A2 (AY40-036S) - Test Point/Fuse Location Diagram ..............................................................6-67
APPENDIX A - AEC CALIBRATION WITH DIGITAL RECEPTOR OR CR FILM PLATE OVERVIEW .......................................................................................... A-3 SPECIAL CANON DR SYSTEM CONFIGURATION INSTRUCTIONS ....... A-3 AEC CALIBRATION WITH DIGITAL RECEPTOR OR CR FILM PLATE INSTALLED .................................................................................. A-4 AEC Calibration Instructions - One Ion Chamber Per Panel ......... A-8 AEC Calibration Instructions - Single Panel, Dual Ion Chambers A-13
APPENDIX B - CALIBRATION (AGFA DIREX) OVERVIEW .......................................................................................... B-3 REQUIRED TOOLS AND MATERIALS ............................................... B-4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION/CALIBRATION ............................................. B-4 ACCESSING SERVICE MODE ........................................................... B-4 FACTORY RESET ........................................................................... B-8 Factory Reset .......................................................................... B-8 Backup Configuration Utility ...................................................... B-9 GENERATOR CONFIGURATION ..................................................... B-10 Generator Settings ................................................................. B-13 Tube Settings ........................................................................ B-15 Ion Chamber Configuration .................................................... B-17 Film/Screen Default Settings ................................................... B-21
Revision W
x
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Table of Contents
APPENDIX B - CALIBRATION (AGFA DIREX) (CONT’D) Copy Film Screen Utility .......................................................... B-23 GENERATOR CALIBRATION .......................................................... B-25 General Calibration Procedure Notes ........................................ B-26 A/D Calibration ...................................................................... B-27 kV Calibration ........................................................................ B-30 Filament Offset Calibration ...................................................... B-32 MA Calibration ...................................................................... B-37 AEC CALIBRATION ....................................................................... B-40 Ion Chamber Balancing (Three-field Chambers) ....................... B-43 AEC MAS Balance Verification .................................................. B-45 Film Screen Selection ............................................................. B-47 The AEC Calibration Menu ...................................................... B-50 Optical Density Calibration ...................................................... B-51 AEC Optical Density Calibration ............................................... B-52 AEC KV Calibration Procedure ................................................. B-55
APPENDIX C - LOG4VIEW ERROR LOGGER APPENDIX D - (QG-DIG-CXDI CANON/QUANTUM INTEGRATION) CALIBRATION OVERVIEW ......................................................................................... D-3 REQUIRED TOOLS AND MATERIALS ............................................... D-4 ACCESSING GENERATOR SERVICE TOOLS ...................................... D-4 Accessing Generator Service Tools - Q-VISION Operator Control Panel ......................................................................... D-5 Accessing Generator Service Tools - Workstation-Based Operator Control Panel ........................................................... D-7 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION/CALIBRATION ............................................D-10 GENERATOR CONFIGURATION .....................................................D-12 Generator Settings Tab ...........................................................D-12 Generator Calibrations Tab .....................................................D-13 Tube Settings Tab ..................................................................D-13 Physical Receptors Tab ...........................................................D-15 Receptors Tab .......................................................................D-16 Ion Chambers Tab .................................................................D-18 Licensing Tab ........................................................................D-20 GENERATOR CALIBRATION ..........................................................D-21 A/D Tab ................................................................................D-24 kVp Calibration Tab ................................................................D-28 Filament Offset Calibration ......................................................D-31 MA Calibration Tab .................................................................D-41 AEC CALIBRATION .......................................................................D-45 Ion Chamber Balancing (Three-field Chambers) .......................D-47 AEC MAS Balance Verification ..................................................D-50 The AEC Calibration Tab .........................................................D-52
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
xi
Table of Contents
APPENDIX D - (QG-DIG-CXDI CANON/QUANTUM INTEGRATION) CALIBRATION (CONT’D) Base OD Calibration Procedure ............................................... D-56 AEC kVp Calibration Procedure ............................................... D-58 Copy Receptor Calibration Tab ................................................ D-62
Revision W
xii
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter
1
SPECIFICATIONS
1-1
1-2
Chapter 1 Specifications
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS The tables below show model numbers of components in each type of HF SeriesTM X-ray Generator system (hereinafter referred to as the "HF Series X-ray Generators").
Note: The X-Ray Control Models shown in the following tables are not used if the HF generator system is integrated with computed radiographic (CR) or digital radiographic (DR) workstation computer (e.g., Agfa NX, Canon CXDI, etc.). Single-Phase Model Generators SYSTEM TYPE
CATALOG NO.
ODYSSEY HF 32 kW
SYSTEM MODEL
GENERATOR CABINET MODEL
X-RAY CONTROL MODEL*
QG-32
QG-32G
QG-3200
ODYSSEY HF 32 kW
QG-32-5
QG-32G-5
QG-3200
ODYSSEY HF 40 kW
QG-40
QG-40G
QG-4000
QG-40-5
QG-40G-5
QG-4000
QG-3200
QG-4000 ODYSSEY HF 40 kW Q-VISION HF 32 kW
QGV-32
QG-32
QG-32G
QGV-32-5
QG-32-5
QG-32G-5
Q-VISION HF 40 kW
QGV-40
QG-40
QG-40G
QGV-40-5
QG-40-5
QG-40G-5
QGV-32
QGV-40 Three-Phase Model Generators
SYSTEM TYPE
CATALOG NO.
ODYSSEY HF 32 kW
QG-3200
ODYSSEY HF 40 kW
QG-4000
ODYSSEY HF 50 kW
QG-5000
SYSTEM MODEL
GENERATOR CABINET MODEL
QG-32-2
QG-32G-2
QG-32-3
QG-32G-3
QG-40-2
QG-40G-2
QG-40-3
QG-40G-3
QG-50-2
QG-50G-2
QG-50
QG-50G
X-RAY CONTROL MODEL QG-3200
QG-4000
QG-5000
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
1-3
Chapter 1 Specifications
Three-Phase Model Generators SYSTEM TYPE
CATALOG NO.
SYSTEM MODEL
GENERATOR CABINET MODEL
X-RAY CONTROL MODEL
ODYSSEY HF 65 kW
QG-6500
QG-65
QG-65G
QG-6500
ODYSSEY HF 80 kW
QG-8000
QG-80
QG-80G
QG-8000
QGV-32-2
QG-32-2
QG-32G-2
QGV-32-3
QG-32-3
QG-32G-3
Q-VISION HF 40 kW
QGV-40-2
QG-40-2
QG-40G-2
QGV-40-3
QG-40-3
QG-40G-3
Q-VISION HF 50 kW
QGV-50-2
QG-50-2
QG-50G-2
QGV-50
QG-50
QG-50G
Q-VISION HF 65 kW
QGV-65
QG-65
QG-65G
QGV-65
Q-VISION HF 80 kW
QGV-80
QG-80
QG-80G
QGV-80
Q-VISION HF 32 kW
QGV-32
QGV-40
QGV-50
STORED ENERGY (SE) Model Generators SYSTEM TYPE
SYSTEM MODEL
GENERATOR CABINET MODEL
X-RAY CONTROL MODEL
ODYSSEY HF 32 kW
QG-3200-SE
QG-32-SE
QG-32G-SE
QG-3200
ODYSSEY HF 40 kW
QG-4000-SE
QG-40-SE
QG-40G-SE
QG-4000
ODYSSEY HF 50 kW
QG-5000-SE
QG-50-SE
QG-50G-SE
QG-5000
Q-VISION HF 32 kW
QGV-32-SE
QG-32-SE
QG-32G-SE
QGV-32-SE
Q-VISION HF 40 kW
QGV-40-SE
QG-40-SE
QG-40G-SE
QGV-40-SE
Q-VISION HF 50 kW
QGV-50-SE
QG-50-SE
QG-50G-SE
QGV-50-SE
Revision W
1-4
CATALOG NO.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 1 Specifications
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS The following are physical specifications of the HF Series X-ray Generators: GENERATOR CABINET SPECIFICATIONS Width: Depth: Height: Weights: Single-Phase (non-SE units): 32, 40 and 50 kW Stored Energy (SE) units: 50, 65, 80 kW Three-Phase units):
24.0 inches (609.6 mm) 20.0 inches (508.0 mm) 34.7 inches (881.4 mm) 298 lbs. (135.2 kg) 431 lbs. (195.5 kg) 380 lbs. (712.4 kg) w/o internal HSS 388 lbs. (176.0 kg) w/internal HSS
OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL SPECIFICATIONS
Note: X-Ray Control Panels below are utilized with HF generator systems integrated with computed radiographic (CR) or digital radiographic (DR) workstation computers (e.g., Agfa NX, Canon CXDI, etc.).
The Q-VISION all-in-one operator control is not powered from the generator cabinet; it requires a separate 100-240 VAC, 3A power input. ODYSSEY HF Control Panel: Width: Depth: Height (without pedestal): Height (with pedestal): Weight (without pedestal): Weight (with pedestal):
17.9 inches (454.7 mm) 12.25 inches (311.2 mm) 3.3 inches (83.8 mm) 36.5 inches (927.4 mm) 5 lbs. (2.3 kg) 25 lbs. (11.3 kg)
Q-VISION HF Control Panel: Width: Depth (without stand): Depth (with stand): Height: Weight:
18.7 inches (476.0 mm) 1.9 inches (49.0 mm) 7.125 inches (181.0 mm) 14.4 inches (365.0 mm) 13 lbs. (5.9 kg)
SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS System Compatibility: Tube Compatibility:
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Compatible with all Quantum Medical Imaging tube stands, overhead tube cranes, radiographic tables and wall stands Toshiba Models E7239X, E7242X, E7252X, E7254X, E7255X, E7813X, E7869X Varian Models RAD-8, RAD-13, RAD-14, RAD-21, RAD-44, RAD-56, RAD-60, RAD-68, RAD-74, RAD-92, A192, A272, A292
Revision W
1-5
Chapter 1 Specifications
Collimators:
Dunlee Models PX 1302, PX 1429, PX 1436, PX 1312, DU 309, DA 1092, MX100 replacement tube for GE Radiographic Systems (For tube types not listed, consult factory.) Huestis Manual, Model 150MC Huestis Automatic, Model 150PBL Huestis Selectable, Model 150A, Progeny Linear MC150 (Manual) Progeny Linear II and Linear IV (Automatic)
Note: The HF Series radiographic systems are compatible with any automatic collimating system that provides an isolated normally open switch that closes when the Automatic Collimation System presents an “EXPOSURE READY” mode to the control; they are also compatible with any beam limiting device that complies with 21 CFR Subchapter J intended for radiographic equipment.
POWER REQUIREMENTS In order to assure the proper operation of our equipment and subsequently, the production of high-quality radiographs, it is essential that all power requirements, as specified in the tables that follow, are suitably met by the facility in which the equipment is installed. This includes usage of the proper size conductor between distribution transformer and disconnect switch, connection to a supply transformer of sufficient capacity (specified in terms of KVA), insuring the AC input voltage tolerance meets specification (±5% or ±10% depending on model), and voltage regulation of 5% at full load is maintained. All wiring and grounding at the installation site must be in accordance with applicable National Electric Code (NEC) and/or local electrical codes. THe generator requires a 3-phase "Y" connection, measured line-to-line, balanced to earth or neutral. The "Y" connection can be 4-wire (L1, L2, L3, Neutral) and GND or 3-wire (L1, L2, L3) and GND. The 4-wire connection may be required by local electrical code and in connection where a roughly balanced 3-phase source exists (e.g., when using a delta-to-Y transformer). Note that failure to comply with the above requirements not only may result in improper generator operation and/or performance, but it will also void the warranty, as the warranty is exclusive of the following conditions: •
"Failure of customer to prepare the site or provide power requirements or operating environmental conditions in compliance with any applicable instructions or recommendations of QMI.
•
"Failure of customer to provide the proper incoming power required to support the equipment in accordance with the recommendation of QMI.
•
"Improper or extraordinary use of the Product, improper maintenance of the Product, or failure to comply with any applicable instructions or recommendations of Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC.
Revision W
1-6
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 1 Specifications
NOTE: All single-phase x-ray generator input ratings assume the use of a single-phase distribution transformer. When utilizing two legs of a 3phase transformer, review the National Electrical Code and any applicable local electrical code(s) to ensure the correct rating distribution transformer (in terms of KVA) is used to assure line stability. This configuration would require an increase in the overall power (KVA) of the distribution transformer, depending on whether the input line transformer is Wye or Delta type. Under no circumstances should a Delta type transformer be used for input power to a 3-phase generator. SINGLE-PHASE X-RAY GENERATORS Non-Stored Energy Single-phase x-ray generators require three-wire line inputs in either of the following two configurations: •
one hot wire, one neutral wire, and one earth ground wire
•
two hot wires and one earth ground.
Refer to Table 1-1 for power requirements of single-phase (non-stored energy) HF Series Generators. 25 kW Single Phase (Model QG-25) Line Voltage: Momentary Current: Long Term Current: Mode of Operation:
208-260 VAC (±5%), 100 Amps, 50/60 Hz 200 Amps (@208VAC) less than 1.0 Amp Intermittent operation
25 kW Single Phase (Model QG-25-5)* Line Voltage: Momentary Current: Long Term Current: Mode of Operation:
380 - 480 VAC (±10%), 60 Amps, 50/60 Hz 110 Amps @ 415 VAC less than 1.0 Amp Intermittent operation
32 kW Single Phase (Model QG-32) Line Voltage: Momentary Current: Long Term Current: Mode of Operation:
208-260 VAC (±5%), 120 Amps, 50/60 Hz 240 Amps (@208VAC) less than 1.0 Amp Intermittent operation
32 kW Single Phase (Model QG-32-5)* Line Voltage: Momentary Current: Long Term Current: Mode of Operation:
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
380 - 480 VAC (±10%), 75 Amps, 50/60 Hz 140 Amps @ 415 VAC less than 1.0 Amp Intermittent operation
Revision W
1-7
Chapter 1 Specifications
40 kW Single Phase (Model QG-40) Line Voltage: Momentary Current: Long Term Current: Mode of Operation:
208-260 VAC (±5%), 150 Amps, 50/60 Hz 300 Amps (@208VAC) less than 1.0 Amp Intermittent operation
40 kW Single Phase (Model QG-40-5)* Line Voltage: Momentary Current: Long Term Current: Mode of Operation:
380-480 VAC (±10%), 100 Amps, 50/60 Hz 170 Amps @ 415 VAC less than 1.0 Amp Intermittent operation
32 kW Single Phase, Stored Energy Line Voltage: Momentary Current: Long Term Current: Mode of Operation:
105-130 (±10%), 10 Amps, 50/60 Hz 210-250 VAC (±10%), 10 Amps, 50/60 Hz 13 Amps @ 115 VAC 7 Amps @ 230 VAC less than 1.0 Amp Intermittent operation
40 kW Single Phase, Stored Energy Line Voltage: Momentary Current: Long Term Current: Mode of Operation:
105-130 (±10%), 10 Amps, 50/60 Hz 210-250 VAC (±10%), 10 Amps, 50/60 Hz 13 Amps @ 115 VAC 7 Amps @ 230 VAC less than 1.0 Amp Intermittent operation
50 kW Single Phase, Stored Energy Line Voltage: Momentary Current: Long Term Current: Mode of Operation:
105-130 (±10%), 10 Amps, 50/60 Hz 210-250 VAC (±10%), 10 Amps, 50/60 Hz 13 Amps @ 115 VAC 7 Amps @ 230 VAC less than 1.0 Amp Intermittent operation
Note: Models QG-25-5, QG-32-5, and QG-40-5 are not UL classified.
Revision W
1-8
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 1 Specifications
THREE-PHASE X-RAY GENERATORS Three-phase x-ray generators require three "hot" wires and one earth ground wire. Refer to Tables 1-2 and 1-3 for power requirements of three-phase HF Series Generators. 32 kW Three Phase (Model QG-32-2) Line Voltage: Momentary Current: Long Term Current: Mode of Operation:
208-240 VAC (±5%), 70 Amps, 50/60 Hz 140 Amps (@220 VAC) less than 1.0 Amp Intermittent operation
32 kW Three Phase (Model QG-32-3) Line Voltage: Momentary Current: Long Term Current: Mode of Operation:
380-480 VAC (±10%), 60 Amps, 50/60 Hz 117 Amps (@440 VAC) less than 1.0 Amp Intermittent operation
40 kW Three Phase (Model QG-40-2) Line Voltage: Momentary Current: Long Term Current: Mode of Operation:
208-240 VAC (±5%), 85 Amps, 50/60 Hz 170 Amps (@220 VAC) less than 1.0 Amp Intermittent operation
40 kW Three Phase (Model QG-40-3) Line Voltage: Momentary Current: Long Term Current: Mode of Operation:
380-480 VAC (±10%), 60 Amps, 50/60 Hz 125 Amps (@440 VAC) less than 1.0 Amp Intermittent operation
50 kW Three Phase (Model QG-50-2) Line Voltage: Momentary Current: Long Term Current: Mode of Operation:
208-240 VAC (±5%), 110 Amps, 50/60 Hz 220 Amps (@220 VAC) less than 1.0 Amp Intermittent operation
50 kW Three Phase (Model QG-50-3) Line Voltage: Momentary Current: Long Term Current: Mode of Operation:
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
380-480 VAC (±10%), 80 Amps, 50/60 Hz 144 Amps (@440 VAC) less than 1.0 Amp Intermittent operation
Revision W
1-9
Chapter 1 Specifications
65 kW Three Phase (Model QG-65) Line Voltage: Momentary Current: Long Term Current: Mode of Operation:
380-480 VAC (±10%), 90 Amps, 50/60 Hz 190 Amps (@440 VAC) less than 1.0 Amp Intermittent operation
80 kW Three Phase (Model QG-80) Line Voltage: Momentary Current: Long Term Current: Mode of Operation:
380-480 VAC (±10%), 100 Amps, 50/60 Hz 200 Amps (@440 VAC) less than 1.0 Amp Intermittent operation
HIGH-SPEED STARTER POWER REQUIREMENTS A High-Speed Starter (HSS) unit is optional on Models QG-40 and QG-50, and is standard equipment on Models QG-65 and QG-80. The external HSS (QG-HSS) configuration requires a separate 200 - 240 VAC, 20A line input. Note that a separate 200- 240 VAC line input is not required on generators equipped with Internal High Speed Starter (Q-HSS) configuration.
Revision W
1-10
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 1 Specifications
Table 1-1. HF Series Generators Electrical Wiring Requirements (208 - 260 VAC Single-Phase Input Units)
QG-40
MAX. INPUT LINE RESISTANCE (AT FULL-LOAD RMS)
QG-400, QG-4000, QGV-40
QG-32
*RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER CAPACITY
QG-320, QG-3200, QGV-32
*SERVICE RATING
MAX. POWER OUTPUT (kW) 25
DISCONNECT TO GENERATOR 15 FT. (5 M) MAX.
GENERATOR MODEL NO. QG-25
NOMINAL LINE VOLTAGE (VAC)
GENERATOR CATALOG NO. QG-250
208
#4 AWG
100 AMPS
30 KVA
0.06 OHMS
240
#4 AWG
80 AMPS
30 KVA
0.08 OHMS
208
#2 AWG
120 AMPS
40 KVA
0.04 OHMS
240
#2 AWG
100 AMPS
40 KVA
0.05 OHMS
208
#1 AWG
150 AMPS
50 KVA
0.035 OHMS
240
#1 AWG
120 AMPS
50 KVA
0.04 OHMS
32
40
*
NOTE: All installations must meet the requirements of local electrical codes. The above values are recommended as typical (unless otherwise specified).
1. All wire must be copper. 2. Actual wire size depends on power quality and distance between mains power and the generator. 3. All wiring and grounding must be in accordance with National Electric Code (NFPA #70) or local electrical codes. 4. The disconnect switch must be located within reach of the operator. 5. Input Voltage: 208-257 (±5%) VAC 50/60 Hz (configured at time of installation). 6. Line Regulation: 5% at full load. 7. Ground wire size is 4 AWG. 8. Specifications are subject to change. 9. Specifications for single-phase “stored energy” Models QG-20-SE, QG-32-SE, QG-40-SE and QG-50-SE are as follows: 105-130 VAC (±10%), 10 Amps, 50/60 Hz 210-250 VAC (±10%), 10 Amps, 50/60 Hz
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
1-11
Chapter 1 Specifications
Table 1-2. HF Series Generators Electrical Wiring Requirements (380 - 480 VAC Single-Phase Input Units)
MAX. INPUT LINE
RESISTANCE
RMS)
(AT FULL-LOAD
DISTRIBUTION
*RECOMMENDED
TRANSFORMER
CAPACITY
RATING
*SERVICE
DISCONNECT
TO GENERATOR
40
15 FT. (5 M) MAX.
32
NOMINAL LINE
QG-400-5, QG-40-5 QG-4000-5, QGV-40-5
25
VOLTAGE (VAC)
QG-320-5, QG-32-5 QG-3200-5, QGV-32-5
MAX. POWER
QG-25-5
OUTPUT (kW)
MODEL NO.
GENERATOR
GENERATOR
CATALOG NO.
QG-250-5
380
#6 AWG
60 AMPS
32 KVA
0.028 OHMS
415
#6 AWG
55 AMPS
32 KVA
0.028 OHMS
480
#6 AWG
40 AMPS
32 KVA
0.032 OHMS
380
#6 AWG
75 AMPS
40 KVA
0.024 OHMS
415
#6 AWG
70 AMPS
40 KVA
0.024 OHMS
480
#6 AWG
60 AMPS
40 KVA
0.028 OHMS
380
#4 AWG
100 AMPS
50 KVA
0.015 OHMS
415
#4 AWG
90 AMPS
50 KVA
0.020 OHMS
480
#6 AWG
70 AMPS
50 KVA
0.024 OHMS
*
*NOTE: All installations must meet the requirements of local electrical codes. The above values are recommended as typical (unless otherwise specified).
1. All wire must be copper. 2. Actual wire size depends on power quality and distance between mains power and the generator. 3. All wiring and grounding must be in accordance with National Electric Code (NFPA #70) or local electrical codes. 4. The disconnect switch must be located within reach of the operator. 5. Input Voltage: 380-480 (±10%) VAC 50/60 Hz (configured at time of installation). 6. Ground wire size is 4 AWG. 7. Specifications are subject to change.
Revision W
1-12
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 1 Specifications
Table 1-3. HF Series Generators - Electrical Wiring Requirements (380-480 VAC Three-Phase Input Units) MAX. INPUT LINE RESISTANCE
80
(AT FULL-LOAD RMS)
65
*RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER CAPACITY
QG-80
50
*SERVICE RATING
QG-8000, QGV-80
QG-65
40 (QG-40-3)
DISCONNECT TO GENERATOR 15 FT. (5 M) MAX.
QG-6500, QGV-65
QG-50
32 (QG-32-3)
NOMINAL LINE VOLTAGE (VAC)
QG-500, QG-5000, QGV-50
MAX. POWER OUTPUT (kW)
GENERATOR MODEL NO.
GENERATOR CATALOG NO.
QG-320, QG-3200, QG-32-3, QGV-32-3, QG-400, QG-4000, QG-40-3 QGV-40-3
380
#6 AWG
60 AMPS
50 KVA
0.23 OHMS
440
#6 AWG
60 AMPS
50 KVA
0.33 OHMS
480
#6 AWG
50 AMPS
50 KVA
0.4 OHMS
380
#4 AWG
80 AMPS
65 KVA
0.17 OHMS
440
#6 AWG
80 AMPS
65 KVA
0.20 OHMS
480
#6 AWG
75 AMPS
65 KVA
0.24 OHMS
380
#4 AWG
90 AMPS
80 KVA
0.12 OHMS
440
#4 AWG
90 AMPS
80 KVA
0.17 OHMS
480
#4 AWG
90 AMPS
80 KVA
0.19 OHMS
380
#4 AWG
100 AMPS
100 KVA
0.10 OHMS
440
#4 AWG
100 AMPS
100 KVA
0.14 OHMS
480
#4 AWG
100 AMPS
100 KVA
0.16 OHMS
*
*NOTE: All installations must meet the requirements of local electrical codes. The above values are recommended as typical (unless otherwise specified).
1. All wire must be copper. 2. Actual wire size depends on power quality and distance between mains power and the generator. 3. All wiring and grounding must be in accordance with National Electric Code (NFPA #70) or local electrical codes. 4. The disconnect switch must be located within reach of the operator. 5. Input Voltage: 380-480 (±10%) VAC 50/60 Hz (configured at time of installation). 6. Voltage is three-phase Y-configuration, measured line-to-line, balanced to earth ground. (Note: Additional Neutral wire may be used if required by local electrical code.) 7. Ground wire size is 4 AWG. 8. Specifications are subject to change.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
1-13
Chapter 1 Specifications
Table 1-4. HF Series Generators Electrical Wiring Requirements (208-240 VAC Three-Phase Input Units)
MAX. INPUT LINE RESISTANCE (AT FULL-LOAD RMS)
QG-500, QG-5000, QG-50-2 QGV-50-2
*RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER CAPACITY
40
*SERVICE RATING
QG-400, QG-4000, QG-40-2 QGV-40-2
DISCONNECT TO GENERATOR 15 FT. (5 M) MAX.
32
NOMINAL LINE VOLTAGE (VAC)
MAX. POWER OUTPUT (kW)
GENERATOR MODEL NO.
GENERATOR CATALOG NO.
QG-320, QG-3200, QG-32-2 QGV-32-2
208
#6 AWG
70 AMPS
40 KVA
0.026 OHMS
240
#6 AWG
60 AMPS
40 KVA
0.023 OHMS
208
#4 AWG
90 AMPS
50 KVA
0.017 OHMS
240
#6 AWG
70 AMPS
50 KVA
0.024 OHMS
208
#4 AWG
110 AMPS
65 KVA
0.014 OHMS
240
#4 AWG
90 AMPS
65 KVA
0.016 OHMS
50
*
*NOTE: All installations must meet the requirements of local electrical codes. The above values are recommended as typical (unless otherwise specified).
1. All wire must be copper. 2. Actual wire size depends on power quality and distance between mains power and the generator. 3. All wiring and grounding must be in accordance with National Electric Code (NFPA #70) or local electrical codes. 4. The disconnect switch must be located within reach of the operator. 5. Input Voltage: 208-257 (±5%) VAC 50/60 Hz (configured at time of installation). 6. Voltage is three-phase Y-configuration, measured line-to-line, balanced to earth ground. (Note: Additional Neutral wire may be used if required by local electrical code.) 7. Line Regulation: 5% at full load. 8. Ground wire size is 4 AWG. 9. Specifications are subject to change.
Revision W
1-14
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 1 Specifications
GENERATOR AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLIES The HF Series X-ray Generator supplies the following supply voltages for powering X-ray room equipment: • • •
24 VDC, 1.5A 24 VAC, 150W (collimator lamp not to exceed 150W) 115 VAC, 3A
NOTE: The above voltage outputs are not to be used as power sources for collimator lamps or for inductive loads (e.g., motorized tables, solenoids, etc.)
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Table 1-5 provides performance specifications of single-phase (non-stored energy) HF Series Generators. Table 1-5. HF Series Single-Phase Generator Performance Specifications
N/A
Cat. No. QG-3200, QGV-32
Cat. No. QG-4000, QGV-40
N/A
Models QG-32, QG-32-5
Models QG-40, QG-40-5
Maximum kW mA Stations; Small Focus (S) Large Focus (L)
N/A
32
N/A
25S, 75S, 150S 100L, 200L, 250L, 320L, 400L, 500L
kVp Range (kVp) kVp increments (kVp/step) 150 kVp option Time Range (sec.)* Minimum Exposure Time (sec.)
N/A N/A N/A N/A
40-125 1.0 Yes 0.001 - 6.3
40 25S, 75S, 150S 100L, 200L, 250L, 320L, 400L, 500L 40-125 1.0 Yes 0.001 - 6.3
N/A
0.001
0.001
mAs Range† High-SpeedStarter Ripple Voltage (output)
N/A
0.025-600
0.025-600
N/A N/A
No 5%
No 5%
* †
Time measured at 75% of the peak kVp waveform NOTE: AEC TECHNIQUES SHOULD HAVE EXPOSURE TIMES EXCEEDING 8 MILLISECONDS. mAs is tube dependent
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
1-15
Chapter 1 Specifications
Refer to Table 1-6 for performance specifications of single-phase stored energy (SE) HF Series Generators. Table 1-6. HF Series Single-Phase STORED ENERGY Generator Performance Specifications
N/A
Cat. No. QG-3200-SE, QGV-32-SE
Cat. No. QG-4000-SE, QGV-40-SE
Cat. No. QG-5000-SE, QGV-50-SE
N/A
Model QG-32-SE (STORED ENERGY)
Model QG-40-SE (STORED ENERGY)
Model QG-50-SE (STORED ENERGY)
N/A
32
40
50
mA Stations; Small Focus (S) Large Focus (L)
N/A
25S, 50S, 75S, 150S 100L, 160L, 200L, 250L, 320L, 400L
25S, 50S, 75S, 150S 100L, 200L, 250L, 320L, 400L, 500L
25S, 50S, 75S, 150S 100L, 200L, 250L, 320L, 400L, 500L, 600L
kVp Range (kVp)
N/A
40-125
40-125
40-125
kVp increments (kVp/step)
N/A
1.0
1.0
1.0
150 kVp optional?
N/A
No
No
No
Time Range (sec.)*
N/A
0.001 - 6.3
0.001 - 6.3
0.001 - 6.3
Minimum Exposure Time (sec.)*
N/A
0.001
0.001
0.001
mAs Range
N/A
0.025-400
0.025-500
0.025-500
High-SpeedStarter
N/A
No
No
No
Ripple Voltage (output)
N/A
5%
5%
5%
Maximum kW
*
Maximum exposure time is a function of kV and mAs settings and the age of the batteries; Time measured at 75% of the peak kVp waveform NOTE: AEC TECHNIQUES SHOULD HAVE EXPOSURE TIMES EXCEEDING 8 MILLISECONDS.
mAs is tube dependent; the generator may not reach maximum mAs due to tube type. In AEC mode, the mAs is limited to 600.
Revision W
1-16
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 1 Specifications
Refer to Table 1-7 for performance specifications of three-phase HF Series Generators. Table 1-7. HF Series Three-Phase Generator Performance Specifications
Maximum kW mA Stations; Small Focus (S) Large Focus (L)
kVp Range (kVp) kVp increments (kVp/step) 150 kVp optional? Time Range (sec.)* Minimum Exposure Time (sec.) mAs Range† High-Speed Starter Ripple Voltage (output)
Cat. No. QG-3200-2, QG-3200-3 QGV-32-2, QGV-32-3
Cat. No. QG-4000-2, QG-4000-3 QGV-40-2, QGV-40-3
Cat. No. QG-5000-2, QG-5000-3 QGV-50, QGV-50-2
Model Model QG-32-2, QG-32-3 32
Model Model QG-40-2, QG-40-3 40
Model QG-50-2, QG-50 50
25S, 75S, 150S 100L, 200L, 250L, 320L, 400L, 500L
25S, 75S, 150S 100L, 200L, 250L, 320L, 400L, 500L
25S, 75S, 150S 100L, 200L, 320L, 400L, 500L, 650L
25S, 75S, 150S 100L, 200L, 320L, 400L, 500L, 650L, 800
40-125
40-125 (40-150 with QG-150 option)
40-125 (40-150 with QG-150 option)
40-150
40-150
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Yes
Yes
Yes
Standard
Standard
0.001 - 6.3
0.001 - 6.3
0.001 - 6.3
0.001 - 6.3
0.001 - 6.3
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.001
0.025-600
0.025-600
0.025-800
0.025-800
0.025-800
No
Option
Option
Yes
Yes
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
* †
Cat. No. QG-6500, QGV-65
Cat. No. QG-8000, QGV-80
Model Model QG-65
Model Model QG-80
65
80 25S, 75S, 150S 100L, 200L, 320L, 400L, 500L, 650L, 800
Time measured at 75% of the peak kVp waveform NOTE: AEC TECHNIQUES SHOULD HAVE EXPOSURE TIMES EXCEEDING 8 MILLISECONDS. mAs is tube dependent; the generator may not reach maximum mAs due to tube type. In AEC mode, the mAs is limited to 600.
High-Speed Starter Duty Cycle: do not to exceed two activations within any one minute period
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
1-17
Chapter 1 Specifications
Table 1-8. Accuracy Specifications
Accuracy Specifications kVp Accuracy:
kVp = ± ( 4.0% kV )
mA Accuracy:
mA = ± ( 5.0% mA + 1 mA )
Time Accuracy:
mAs Accuracy:
Revision W
1-18
time = ± ( 2.0% time + 1 msec. ) time = ± ( 1.0% time + 1 msec. ) time = ± ( 0.5% time + 1 msec. )
mAs = ± ( 5.0% mAs + 0.5 mAs )
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 1 Specifications
SYSTEM OPTIONS The following lists the available options for HF Series X-Ray Generators. Note that some options, such as QG-150 and Q-HSS, may only be used on certain generator models (refer to Tables 1-5 through 1-7 for compatibility): •
R80-HS: Exposure Hand Switch and R80-FS Foot Switch
•
QG-PDL: Operator Control Panel Pedestal Mount (used with ODYSSEY control panel)
•
QG-WM: Operator Control Panel Wall Mount (used with ODYSSEY control panel)
•
QGV-WM: Operator Control Panel Wall Mount (used with Q-VISION control panel)
•
QG-150: 150 kV High Voltage Transformer (standard equipment on Models QG-65 and QG-80)
•
Q-HSS: Internal High (Dual) Speed Starter Unit (standard equipment on Models QG-65 and QG-80
•
Q-Connect: Enables ethernet connection to a PC computer using Quantum’s "QBus" network integration software; required on systems utilizing a touchscreen operator control panel
•
QG-28VPS: Internally mounted Auxiliary +28 VDC/8A Power Supply (only available with three-phase input generators)
•
QG-TOMO: Provides interface for operation with Siemens and Pausch tomographic systems (not available with Q-VISION HF Series OCP’s)
•
TechVision: Supplementary x-ray control panel, mounts on tube support device. Refer to the TechVision Remote Control Panel Service and Operator’s Manuals for complete installation and operation instructions.
NOTE: The use of ACCESSORY equipment not complying with the equivalent safety requirements of this equipment may lead to a reduced level of safety of the resulting system. Consideration relating to the choice shall include: -use of the accessory in the PATIENT VICINITY -evidence that the safety certification of the ACCESSORY has been performed in accordance with the appropriate IEC 601-1 and/or IEC 601-1-1 harmonized national standard.
SYSTEM OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Ambient Temperature: +10°C to +40°C Relative Humidity: 30 to 75%, non-condensing Atmospheric Pressure: 700 hPa to 1060 hPa Typical Heat Output of Generator Cabinet: 3600 BTU per hour Typical Heat Output of operator control panel (OCP): 130 BTU per hour
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
1-19
Chapter 1 Specifications
NOTE: The above calculations are typical, based upon average usage. Air circulation around the electronic cabinet must be provided. This includes the sides, back, front and top of cabinet.
NON-OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Ambient Temperature: Relative Humidity: Atmospheric Pressure:
-18°C to +70°C 20 to 95%, non-condensing 500 hPa to 1060 hPa
Figure 1-1. HF Series X-ray Generator Cabinet Dimensions
Revision W
1-20
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 1 Specifications
Figure 1-2.
Odyssey HF Series X-ray Generator Operator Control Panel Dimensions
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
1-21
Chapter 1 Specifications
7.125 (181.0)
14.4 (365.0)
18.7 (476.0)
Figure 1-3. Q-VISION HF Series X-Ray Generator Operator Control Panel Dimensions
Revision W
1-22
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter
2
ASSEMBLY & INSTALLATION
2-1
2-2
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
OVERVIEW This chapter provides procedures for installing the HF Series x-ray generator, from pre-installation guidelines to final system inspection prior to operational readiness. These procedures should be reviewed carefully before beginning the actual installation. Preparing the X-ray generator for operation requires completion of the following tasks: •
Installing the X-ray generator cabinet
•
Installing the Operator Control Panel (OCP)
•
Making the Electrical Cable Connections
•
Power-up
•
Calibrating the generator
•
Inspecting the system
•
Verifying programmed techniques WARNING! Equipment installation and servicing procedures should be performed by properly trained and qualified service personnel only.
PRE-INSTALLATION GUIDELINES While site planning is the customer's responsibility, the following are recommended guidelines. Verify Equipment Location In radiology site preparation, it is essential to verify the location and space allocated for the equipment is sufficient. See Figures 1-1 through 1-3 for HF Series x-ray generator dimensions. The room plan should show the following for the equipment: •
All working and parked positions
•
Overall dimensions
•
Total equipment weights and power outputs
•
Structural mounting and attachment methods
Ensure sufficient air circulation space is provided between the rear side of Generator Cabinet and wall (4.0" min.). The floor where the generator is installed should be flat and approximately level (minor shimming is acceptable) and capable of supporting a load of 500 lbs. (226.8 kg). If the generator is equipped with the "Q-Connect option" (ethernet adapter for connection to Q-VISION or for integration with a Digital Radiographic System), the associated computer monitor functions as the generator operator control panel (OCP). If the workstation is qualified to standard UL 60950/IEC
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
2-3
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
60950 for Information Technology Equipment, the workstation must be placed outside the radius of the patient environment, shown in Figure 2-1. Only devices conforming to UL 60601-1/IEC 60601-1 may be placed within this environment. Consult with the user of the system when determining the location for the workstation computer; consider all areas the patient may access, including the room entrance and/or exit, when establishing the patient environment.
2.5 m
1.5 m
1.5 m
1.5 m
Figure 2-1. Patient Environment
Revision W
2-4
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
Electrical Requirements
NOTE Examine all cartons and crates carefully at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have delivery driver write a "Damaged Shipment Note" on copies of freight bill, sign it, and file appropriate carrier claim. Should you discover concealed damage, immediately notify the transporting agent and ask for an "Inspection of Damage". Carrier will not accept concealed damage claim if filed after 15 days from date of receipt of merchandise.
In addition to providing for the physical requirements of the equipment, it is also vital to prepare for the power requirements. Refer to Chapter 1, SPECIFICATIONS for model-dependent power specifications. This information should be used to prepare system wiring and cabling. UNPACKING The HF Series x-ray generator is shipped in a single crate. To unpack, proceed as follows: 1. Remove packing list and use it as a guide to open the remaining cartons. Do not dispose of packing material until packing list is matched with actual parts received. Should there be a shortage or damage, notify Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC.’s customer service department immediately. The manufacturer is relieved of any responsibility for damage during shipment after unit is picked up by the carrier. WARNING! The X-ray generator cabinet can weigh as much as 430 lbs. (195 kg), depending on configuration. Use lifting straps and hoist or other suitable lifting device to transport generator. The H.V. Tank weighs approximately 100 lbs. and requires two persons to lift. 2. Remove the Generator Cabinet from its crate (lifting straps and hoist or other suitable lifting device is recommended). 3. Using a hand truck from the rear side of the cabinet, lift the generator and place it as close to its final installation location as possible. WARNING! When unpacking the generator; keep upright at all times. Verify there is no damage caused during shipping, with no apparent oil leakage from H.V. Tank; check that the tank lid and oil plug (in tank lid) are secure. 4. Locate the OCP and Pedestal (optional) or Wall Mount Bracket (optional) and place on the side (not applicable on Q-VISION equipped systems or with integrated systems (e.g., Agfa, Canon, etc.).
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
2-5
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
INSTALLATION The following paragraphs provide information necessary for installing the Generator Cabinet and Operator Control Panel (OCP), including all required external equipment cable connections with the X-ray generator. CAUTION! This equipment contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling components or printed circuit boards. REQUIRED TOOLS AND MATERIALS The following lists the tools and materials required to perform the procedures included in this chapter: •
Hoist with lifting straps (or other suitable lifting device)
•
Tape measure
•
Standard hand tools
•
Drill bit, suitable size for installing floor mounting hardware
•
Bubble level
•
Various wiring connectors and cable ties
GENERATOR CABINET SETUP 1. Loosen six (6) phillips head screws (3 each on left and right sides of cabinet) and remove three (3) phillips head screws (in lower front side) securing generator cabinet cover to generator chassis (see Figure 2-1a). Grasp cover on each side, lift up slightly and remove.
Figure 2-1a. Generator Cabinet Cover Screw Locations
Revision W
2-6
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
WARNING! Approximately 200 VDC is present on each battery tray. This voltage is live even when generator cabinet power switch is set to OFF. Use extreme caution when servicing battery tray(s). 2. On stored energy (SE) units, open the two (2) modular fuse holders located on the front of each battery tray. Note that there are two pairs of fuses on 32 kW and 40 kW units, one pair for each battery tray. 3. If mounting generator to floor, mark locations of the four mounting holes on floor in accordance with dimensions given in Figure 2-2. Drill four holes using proper diameter drill bit (depending on mounting hardware used).
Figure 2-2. Generator Cabinet Mounting Hole Locations 4. Position the generator chassis in its mounting location and place a level on flat horizontal surface of chassis. If chassis is not level, add shim(s) below generator as required until level. 5. After all cable connections that require access to the rear of the generator are complete, secure cabinet to floor using 3/8" diameter mounting hardware suitable for floor construction type.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
2-7
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
Transformer Line Tap Adjustment (Single Phase Non-SE Systems) WARNING! Extreme care MUST be exercised to ensure the safety of service or other personnel in the area when working with live AC mains. Proceed as follows: 1. Using a calibrated DVM, measure the AC input (mains) voltage (i.e., lineto-line or line-to-neutral, when applicable). 2. Verify that power to x-ray generator is disconnected. 3. Adjust transformer taps by relocating the leads on the top side of transformer terminal block TB2 to match the input line voltage as closely as possible. Refer to Figure 2-3 for 208 - 260 VAC single-phase input line tap configurations, and Figure 2-4 for 380 - 480 VAC single-phase input line tap configurations.
NOTE STORED ENERGY (SE) models can operate between 105 and 130 VAC and non-SE, single-phase models between 200 and 270 VAC. Refer to Chapter 1, SPECIFICATIONS.
Figure 2-3. Single-Phase 208 - 260 VAC Single-Phase Input AC Transformer Line Tap Connections
Revision W
2-8
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
Figure 2-4. Single-Phase 380 - 480 VAC Single-Phase Input AC Transformer Line Tap Connections 4. For single-phase non-SE models, it is necessary to insure that the line resistance meets the maximum allowed as stated in Chapter 1, SPECIFICATIONS. If line resistance exceeds the specification, the generator must be derated. Refer to Chapter 3, CALIBRATION for derating instructions. 5. Verify Line Monitor Board A8 "line input jumper" is configured correctly based on the installation site’s measured line input voltage as follows: a. For 208 - 260 VAC input models (QG-25, QG-32 and QG-40), refer to Line Monitor Board A8 (AY40-022T1) Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS and, if necessary, set "line input" jumpers to match the line input supply voltage (i.e., 208 - 260 VAC, three "240" jumpers are installed). Also, for 208 - 260 VAC line input configurations, fuses A8F1 and A8F3 should be 1/2A. b. For 380 - 480 VAC input models (QG-25-5, QG-32-5 and QG-40-5), refer to Line Monitor Board A8 (AY40-022T2) Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS and, if necessary, set "line input" jumpers to match the line input supply voltage (i.e., for 342403 VAC input, install jumper"380"; for 404-459 VAC input, install jumper "430"; for 460-528 VAC input, install jumper "480"). Also, for 380 - 480 VAC line input configurations, fuses A8F1 and A8F3 should be 1/4A.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
2-9
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
Transformer Line Tap Adjustment (Single Phase SE Systems) WARNING! Extreme care MUST be exercised to ensure the safety of service or other personnel in the area when working with live AC mains. 1. Using a calibrated DVM, measure the AC input (mains) voltage (i.e., lineto-line or line-to-neutral, when applicable). 2. Verify that power to x-ray generator is disconnected. 3. Adjust transformer taps by relocating the leads on the left side of transformer terminal block TB1 to match the input line voltage as closely as possible. Refer to Figure 2-5 for STORED ENERGY (SE) input line tap configurations. 6. Refer to Line Monitor/Battery Charger Board A8 (AY40-028T) Test Point/ Jumper Location Diagram in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS and verify "line input" jumpers are configured to match the line input supply voltage (115 or 230 VAC). Also, for 115 VAC line input configurations, fuses A8F5 and A8F7 should be 2A; for 230 VAC line input configurations, these fuses should be 1A.
Figure 2-5. STORED ENERGY Input AC Transformer Line Tap Connections
Revision W
2-10
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
WARNING! Extreme care MUST be exercised to ensure the safety of service or other personnel in the area when working with live AC mains. Proceed as follows: 1. Using a calibrated DVM, measure the AC input (mains) voltage (i.e., lineto-line). 2. Verify that power to x-ray generator is disconnected. 3. Adjust transformer taps by relocating the leads on the top side of transformer terminal block TB2 to match the input line voltage as closely as possible. Refer to Figure 2-6 for input line tap configurations.
TAP ADJUSTMENT LEADS
5
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
208-240 VAC LINE INPUT CONFIGURATION
480 VAC
415 VAC
4 LA40-056 REV. C
440 VAC
380 VAC
3
480 VAC
2
440 VAC
5
415 VAC
208 VAC
4
380 VAC
198 VAC
3
480 VAC
240 VAC
2
440 VAC
220 VAC
5
415 VAC
208 VAC
4
380 VAC
198 VAC
3
240 VAC
240 VAC
2
PHASE B
220 VAC
220 VAC
PHASE A
208 VAC
PHASE B
198 VAC
PHASE A
7
8
LA40-033 REV. F
380-480 VAC LINE INPUT CONFIGURATION
Figure 2-6. Three-Phase Input AC Transformer Line Tap Connections 4. For three-phase models, it is necessary to insure that the line resistance meets maximum allowed as stated in Chapter 1, SPECIFICATIONS. If line resistance exceeds the specification, the generator must be derated. Refer to Chapter 3, CALIBRATION for derating instructions.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
2-11
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
5. On Line Monitor Board A8 (part number AY40-053S2 used on 380-480 VAC line input configuration, part number AY40-053S3 used on 208-240 VAC line input configuration), verify 380/430/480 jumper is configured correctly based on incoming line voltage measurement as follows (see Line Monitor Board A8 Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS): AC INPUT VOLTAGE (MEASURED)
JUMPER POSITION
342-403 VAC
380
404-459 VAC
430
460-528 VAC
480
198-252 VAC
240 (3 jumpers)
AC Input (Mains) Connection WARNING! Verify incoming power supply (mains disconnect) is turned OFF and all mains cables are de-energized before connecting to the generator. All electrical connections must be made in compliance with local and/or NEC requirements. The generator is factory configured to accept line input specified when the order was placed. However, if it is necessary to change the generator line input configuration, refer to the previous procedure entitled "Transformer Line Tap Adjustment". Non-STORED ENERGY (SE) version generators require a mains disconnect box (with switch) before the x-ray generator (refer to your local code). This switch should be within reach of the operator. A separate earth ground, #6 AWG insulated wire, must be installed. This wire must be the only wire connected to the generator ground terminal.
Revision W
2-12
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
For non-SE generators, connect AC input cable as follows: 1. Mount cable clamp (included with system) to the hole on the lower right or left side of generator cabinet chassis (see Figure 2-7). LINE INPUT CABLE CLAMP (TYPICAL)
GENERATOR CHASSIS
Figure 2-7. Line Input Cable Clamp Installation 2. Route the AC input cable through cable clamp to Terminal Block TB1 and tighten cable clamp. 3. On single-phase systems: a. Connect ground wire to ground lug mounted on rear wall of generator chassis, to the left of terminal block TB1 (see Figure 2-8). TERMINAL BLOCK TB1 GROUND LUG
Figure 2-8. Single-Phase Systems - Ground Lug and Terminal Block TB1 Locations
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
2-13
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
b. Connect mains line and neutral wires to TB1 terminals L1 and L2, respectively. Do not turn mains power on at this time. 4. On three-phase systems: a. Connect Phase A, B and C wires to TB1 terminals L1 through L3, respectively. Do not turn mains power on at this time. (See Figure 2-9). TERMINAL BLOCK TB1
GROUND LUG
Figure 2-9. Ground Lug and Terminal Block TB1 Locations b. If available, connect Neutral wire to TB1 terminal L4 (N). (Neutral connection may be required; check local electrical code.) 5. On STORED ENERGY (SE) type generators, the battery tray fuse(s) are shipped in the non-inserted position to minimize battery discharge and high voltage hazards. With fuse in holder, close the fuse holder(s). The SE system can be plugged into a standard switched 115/230 VAC grounded receptacle. The switch controlling the receptacle should be within reach of the operator control console. For 115 VAC installations, a 25-foot power cord with a hospital-grade plug is factory pre-wired to the generator. For 230 VAC installations, a 25-foot "HAR" power cord is factory pre-wired to the generator. If power cord is replaced, ensure that impedance between the protective contact in the mains plug and any accessible metal part which is protectively earthed does not exceed 0.1 Ohms.
Revision W
2-14
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
High Voltage (H.V.) Tank The HF Series X-ray Generator is shipped with the H.V. Tank installed at the factory. Locate the Pressure Relief Screw on the top side of the H.V. Tank near the front right corner (see Figure 2-10). To permit venting, loosen screw two (2) turns (counterclockwise) and leave in this position.
PRESSURE RELIEF SCREW: AT TIME OF INSTALLATION, TURN SCREW COUNTERCLOCKWISE TWO (2) TURNS AND LEAVE IN THIS POSITION.
HV TANK (TOP VIEW)
Figure 2-10. H.V. Tank (Top View) The following instructions are provided should it be necessary to install the H.V. Tank. When installing the H.V. Tank, keep it upright at all times. See Figure 2-11 and proceed as follows: WARNING! After completing the following procedure, double-check the H.V. Tank wiring connections to make sure they are correctly connected. Incorrect wiring can cause damage to the generator. Ensure that ground wires are connected.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
2-15
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
CAUTION! The H.V. Tank weighs approximately 92 lbs. (41.7 kg). Lift with proper assistance. 1. Loosen four (4) screws securing the clear plastic high-voltage acrylic protection panel from the generator chassis and remove panel. 2. Position H.V. Tank on Tank Mounting Brackets so mounting holes in tank align with those in mounting brackets. Secure tank to brackets using four (4) 1/4-20 x 3/4" hex head screws, flat washers and lock washers. 3. Connect H.V. Tank cable terminal PC1 to Power Module A19 IGBT lower right terminal. Tighten screw securely. 4. Connect H.V. Tank cable terminal PC2 to right terminal lug on Capacitor C7. Tighten nut securely. 5. Connect H.V. Tank cable terminal PA1 to left terminal lug on Capacitor C4. Tighten nut securely. 6. Connect H.V. Tank cable terminal PA2 to Power Module A18 lower left IGBT terminal. Tighten screw securely. 7.
Locate ground wires for H.V. Tank (yellow/green) and securely fasten to H.V. Tank ground stud (GND) using 8/32 kep nut (provided on stud).
8. Insert plug A17P1 (16-pin plug on Cable Assembly AY51-017) into connector A17J1 on the H.V. Tank and tighten plug securely. 9. Re-install the clear plastic high-voltage protection panel on the generator chassis and re-tighten four (4) mounting screws.
Revision W
2-16
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
Figure 2-11. H.V. Tank Connections
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
2-17
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
High Voltage Cables It is important that these instructions be followed for the proper installation of the High Voltage Cable terminals into the tube housing and H.V. Tank receptacles. Use proper handling to ensure cable terminals and receptacles are clean and free of moisture. Connect High Voltage Cables, respecting proper anode and cathode polarity, as follows: 1 BEFORE INSERTING CABLE, LOOSEN SET SCREW COAT WITH INSULATING COMPOUND BEFORE INSERTING
2 TIGHTEN RING NUT ONTO RECEPTACLE
3 FULLY TIGHTEN SET SCREW
Figure 2-12. High Voltage Cable Connection to H.V. Tank
Revision W
2-18
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
CAUTION! When routing the High Voltage Cables into the generator cabinet through the access openings, the anode and cathode cable must each be routed separate from all other system cables, except the Tube Rotor Cable, as shown in Figure 2-13. Doing so will reduce the possibility of electromagnetic noise coupling and subsequent degradation of system performance.
ALL OTHER CABLES
ROTOR CABLE
HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES
GENERATOR CABINET (VIEWED FROM REAR)
Figure 2-13. Routing High Voltage Cables into the Generator Cabinet
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
2-19
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
1. If not already done so, assemble onto the High Voltage Cable end a cable retaining nut, grounding washer and strain relief (see Figure 2-14). Ensure the 10-32 x 1/4" locking screw is turned out so as not to interfere with engagement.
Figure 2-14. High Voltage Cable Assembly (Typical) 2. The High Voltage Cable terminals and tube housing and H.V. Tank receptacles must be clean and dry. Be sure compression gaskets are in place on the cable terminal. 3. To insure proper locking and grounding of the cable sheath, do not omit the compression gasket on the cable terminal, as it is necessary for proper contact between cable nut and flare. 4. Insert the cable terminal into the receptacle socket (watch the nipple on the terminal to ensure correct positioning of the contact pins). Coat the entire surface of the cable terminal insulator with insulating compound (supplied with cables) using clean, dry plastic spoon or wooden stick. Do not use fingers. Fully cover the entire surface with a heavy coat (approximately 1/16" to 1/8"). Build a pyramid at the tip of the terminal with the height of the compound even with the contact ends. 5. With terminal key aligned with receptacle key way, insert the cable terminal into receptacle until all excess compound has oozed out. Make sure the contact pins are engaged in the holes in the socket insulator. Wipe off any excess compound. 6. Tighten the cable nut while holding the cable firmly in place. Re-tighten after calibration as some loosening may take place after the housing has been heated and cooled. With cable nut properly tightened, secure with 10-32 x 1/4" locking screw.
Revision W
2-20
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
INTERFACE BOARD SETTINGS & CONNECTIONS The generator’s Interface Board A9 provides the means for electrically connecting external system components, such as collimators, tube stands, buckies, etc., and verifying the correct Rotor Boost Voltage setting (non-high speed starter systems only). Figure 2-15 shows connection locations on a typical non-digital (filmbased) system Interface Board; Figure 2-16 shows connection locations on a typical digital imaging system Interface Board. COLLIMATOR CONNECTIONS TERMINAL BLOCK TB1
DOOR INTERLOCK TERMINAL BLOCK TB6
JP1 INSTALLED ON SYSTEMS WITH MANUAL COLLIMATOR JP2 INSTALLED ON SYSTEMS WITH NON-BUCKY TABLE RECEPTOR
24VDC
SPARE
CO L R D Y
MIDWEST BUCKY SWITCHES (SEE TABLE/WALL BUCKY CONNECTION INSTRUCTIONS) 24V RTN
15V RTN
GN D.
15 VDC
24VAC
C H ASSIS
24 VAC
C HASSIS G ND.
TUBESTAND TERMINAL BLOCK TB2
JP3 INSTALLED ON SYSTEMS WITH NON-BUCKY WALL RECEPTOR
250 VAC SLO-BLO 8 AM P
220VAC
110VAC
EXPOSURE HOLD CONNECTIONS (AUTO COLL.)
X-RAY ON LIGHT TERMINAL BLOCK TB5
WALL STAND BUCKY POWER TERMINAL BLOCK TB4
TUBE ROTOR BOOST VOLTAGE JUMPER (REV. R AND HIGHER BOARDS ONLY)
TABLE BUCKY POWER TERMINAL BLOCK TB3
Figure 2-15. Non-Digital System Interface Board A9 - Connection Locations
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
2-21
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
COLLIMATOR CONNECTIONS TERMINAL BLOCK TB1
TUBESTAND TERMINAL BLOCK TB2
DOOR INTERLOCK TERMINAL BLOCK TB6
TUBE ROTOR BOOST VOLTAGE JUMPER (REV. J AND HIGHER BOARDS ONLY)
24V
SPARE
24V RTN
15V
15V RTN
COLL RDY
GND
24VAC
24VAC
CH GND
D8
D12
R19 R16
F13
F18
F19
D7
D13
D20
D19
D2
EXPOSURE HOLD CONNECTIONS (AUTO COLL.)
D4
R17 D14
K3
R12
R11
1 TB5
TABLE BUCKY POWER TERMINAL BLOCK TB3
WALL STAND BUCKY POWER TERMINAL BLOCK TB7
X-RAY ON LIGHT TERMINAL BLOCK TB5
Figure 2-16. Digital System Interface Board A9 - Connection Locations Door Interlock Switch Connection To wire a door interlock circuit, remove jumper and connect door interlock wires (supplied by installer) to terminal block TB6 pins 1 and 2 on Interface Board A9 [(P/N AY40-023T/or AY40-061T on internal high-speed starter systems) or (AY40-034T/or AY40-062T on internal high-speed starter systems)]. See Figures 2-15 or 2-16 for terminal board TB6 location. When the door is closed, the circuit will be continuous (contacts closed). "In Use" Light Switch Connection To wire an "X-ray On" or "In-Use light", connect wires from light circuit (supplied by installer) to terminal board TB5 pins 1 and 2 on Interface Board A9 [(P/N AY40-023T/or AY40-061T on internal high-speed starter systems) or (AY40-034T/or AY40-062T on internal high-speed starter systems)] (On AY40-062T boards, pin 3 is not used). See Figures 2-15 or 2-16 for terminal block TB5 location. When the X-ray generator is in either PREP or EXPOSE states, the circuit will be continuous (contacts closed).
Revision W
2-22
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
Collimator Connections Terminal block TB1 (see Figures 2-15 or 2-16 for terminal block TB1 location) provides 24 VAC (TB1-1 and TB1-2) and chassis ground (TB1-3) outputs for connection to a collimator. On systems equipped with a manual collimator, verify jumper A9JP1 is installed; remove A9JP1 if system is equipped with an automatic collimator. Also available on terminal block TB2 is the COL RDY terminal (at TB2-4) for connection to automatic collimator with "exposure hold" interlock (use CHASSIS GND terminal TB2-7 for return). Refer to collimator manual for specific connection details. Tube Stand/Peripheral Equipment Connections Interface Board A9 Terminal block TB2 (see Figures 2-15 or 2-16 for terminal board TB2 location) provides +28 VDC (TB2-1) and +28 VDC RTN (TB2-2) terminals for connection of a tube stand power input cable, when applicable. Maximum load current is 1.5A at these terminals. Internal +28 VDC Power Supply Option (QG-28VPS) If generator is equipped with +28 VDC Internal Power Supply Option (QG-28VPS), see Figure 2-16a and connect the tubestand/wallstand’s power supply input leads as follows: 1. Positive lead to terminal P2-1 (+) on power supply 2. Negative lead to terminal P2-2 (-) on power supply OUTPUT VOLTAGE ADJ. POT.
P2-2 (-)
P2-1 (+)
Figure 2-16a. Internal +28 VDC Power Supply Option (QG-28VPS) Location
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
2-23
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
The output of the +28 VDC Power Supply is adjusted depending on the type of Quantum product it will supply power to, as indicated below: Table 2-1a: Internal +28 VDC Power Supply Option (QG-28VPS) Adjustment Quantum Product Type
Adjust Power Supply Output To:
Model RS-580 Overhead Tube Crane
+30 VDC
Model QV-800 Universal System
+28 VDC
Model QW-420-T, QW-420-T-D Vertical Tilting Wall Stand
+28 VDC
When using the +28 VDC Power Supply Option to provide power for a Model RS-580 Overhead Tube Crane, the +30 VDC output is intended for operating the tube crane’s transverse and longitudinal electromagnetic locks (brakes). Refer to the RS-580 Service Manual for connection instructions. CAUTION! The Internal +28 VDC Power Supply Option (QG-28VPS) is only available with 3-phase generators, and is intended to supply power to a single, external device. Tube Rotor Boost Voltage Verification (Systems without High (Dual) Speed Starter Option) Ensure Interface Board A9 [P/N AY40-023T (non-digital systems, revision R or later boards only)/AY40-023T1 (non-digital stored energy systems, revision K or later boards only)/AY40-034T (digital systems, revision J or later boards only)] Tube Rotor Boost Voltage Jumper is configured correctly depending on the type of tube the generator is being interfaced with according to table below: Table 2-1: Tube Rotor Boost Voltage Jumper Setting TUBE TYPE
JUMPER POSITION
ROTOR BOOST VOLTAGE SETTING
Toshiba E7252X, E7813X, E7242X, E7239X
Pins 1-2
100 VAC Stator
All others (220 VAC stator)
Pins 2-3
220 VAC Stator
Revision W
2-24
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
RADIOGRAPHIC SYSTEM EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS The following paragraphs provide instructions for cable connections between the HF Series x-ray generator and the x-ray tube, table, and wall bucky, as necessary. Refer to Generator Interconnection Diagrams in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS for additional guidance. Ensure the generator is configured with the correct value rotor phase capacitor C1 (on the Generator door) for tube installed in the system (refer to Table 2-2). Table 2-2: Standard Single-Speed Rotor Phase Capacitor Configuration Tube Type
Rotor Phase Capacitors
E7239X, E7242X
25 uF
E7254X, E7255X, ALL VARIAN, ALL DUNLEE (including MX100 Replacement for GE Radiographic System)
30 uF
E7813X, E7252X
45 uF
Tube Rotor Cable (Systems without High (Dual) Speed Starter Option) Route the X-ray Tube Rotor Cable AY51-014 through the middle cable access opening located in the top rear wall of the generator chassis. Connect one end of the cable to the appropriate terminals on Terminal Block TB1 on Rotor Drive Board A10 (P/N AY40-013T) as shown in Figure 2-17. Connect the opposite end to the X-ray tube’s terminal strip (refer to appropriate interconnection diagram in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS for tube connections).
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
2-25
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
2
TEST POINT 7 ROTOR RUN
10 1
PD1
U6
TP10 R45 R22
TP7
1
TP6
9
D17 + C7
C16
D8 C15
B
C E
R41
+
R46
D15
TP15
Q6
C E
R11
B
D1
C E
B
C
TP11 C4
R30
R33 R4 R5 R7 D2 R8
U1 C3
R3 D14
R27 R19
C
R6
TP8
Q9 U5 7 8
R17 R16 R32
TP9
R26 Q3
B
B
D3
R12
D6
Q5
C E
R29 TP14
Q10
R15
C1 D11 D10
Q7
Q8
E
PD4 TP5
D9
D7 D12
TEST POINT 10 +15 VDC
9
J3
J4
Q2
R9
E B
R10
R36
U2
U3 U4
R25 Q4
R20 D4
Q1
D5
R24
MOV4 T1
POTENTIOMETER R20 TUBE CURRENT ADJ. POTENTIOMETER R24 TUBE CURRENT ADJ.
G
T1
G
T2
T2
MOV1
TEST POINT 3 AC RETURN
TP4
J5 3
TP3
1
C6
TEST POINT 4 PHASE
R14 10W
MOV3
C2
R2 10W
J1 4
TP2
1
TP13
K2 R37
D18
TP12
C8
TERMINAL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SIGNAL MAIN PHASE COMMON NOT USED NOT USED GROUND
TEST POINT 12 200 VAC
MOV2 R35 C14 1
PD3
PD2 TB1
TP1
TEST POINT 13 60 VAC
7
TEMP
TERMINAL BLOCK TB1
TEST POINT 1 COMMON
TEST POINT 2 MAIN
Figure 2-17. Rotor Board AY40-013T Tube Rotor Cable Connections
Revision W
2-26
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
Tube Rotor Cable (Systems with AID External High Speed Starter QG-HSS Option Only) Refer to Figure 2-18, the AID High Speed Starter installation manual and/or the appropriate interconnection diagram in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS for high speed starter connections. Note: This procedure applies only to sys-
tems equipped with the externally-connected AID High Speed Starter option.
1. Connect one end of X-ray Tube Rotor Cable AY51-032T to the appropriate connector/terminals on AID High Speed Starter LC102 terminal block TS2 (see Figure 2-18). 2. Connect the opposite end to the X-ray tube’s terminal strip. 3. Route the X-ray Tube Rotor Cable AY51-033 (Toshiba tubes) through the middle cable access opening located in the top rear wall of the generator chassis. 4. Connect one end of the High Speed Starter Cable AY51-033 to the appropriate connector/terminals on AID High Speed Starter terminal strips TB1 and TB2 and connect to Cable Assembly AY51-032T (temperature sense connector). 5. Connect the opposite end of the High Speed Starter Cable AY51-033 to connector J8 on Logic Board A1, AY40-006S. 6. Connect 220 VAC power input to High Speed Starter. 7.
The AID High Speed Starter was factory pre-configured for the x-ray tube supplied with the generator. Verify boost and brake settings are correct according tube manufacturer’s data sheets (refer to Table 2-3). Verify the high speed starter is configured with the correct capacitors for the tube used with the system: Toshiba E7252X and E7813X should be configured for 45 uF. All other tube types require 30 uF.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
2-27
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
Table 2-3: AID High Speed Starter DIP Switch Settings TUBE TYPE
RUN VOLTAGE (180 HZ)
HSS SWITCH SW1 (BOOST TIME)
HSS SWITCH SW2 (BRAKE TIME)
TOSHIBA E7813X, E7252X
220 VAC (#6 tap*)
60 VAC (75 VAC #3 tap*)
1.2 seconds: SW1-1 = OFF SW1-2 = ON SW1-3 = ON SW1-4 = OFF SW1-5 = OFF
2.0 seconds: SW2-1 = OFF SW2-2 = ON SW2-3 = OFF SW2-4 = ON SW2-5 = OFF
TOSHIBA E7254X, E7255X
490 VAC (use 370 VAC tap #10*)
165 VAC (75 VAC #3 tap*)
2.0 seconds: SW1-1 = OFF SW1-2 = ON SW1-3 = OFF SW1-4 = ON SW1-5 = OFF
2.0 seconds: SW2-1 = OFF SW2-2 = ON SW2-3 = OFF SW2-4 = ON SW2-5 = OFF
VARIAN (ALL 3 INCH DIA.)
320 VAC (use 370 VAC tap #10*)
100 VAC (75 VAC #3 tap*)
1.0 seconds SW1-1 = ON SW1-2 = OFF SW1-3 = ON SW1-4 = OFF SW1-5 = OFF
2.0 seconds: SW2-1 = OFF SW2-2 = ON SW2-3 = OFF SW2-4 = ON SW2-5 = OFF
VARIAN (ALL 4 INCH DIA.)
450 VAC (use 370 VAC tap #10*)
100 VAC (75 VAC #3 tap*)
2.2 seconds SW1-1 = ON SW1-2 = ON SW1-3 = OFF SW1-4 = ON SW1-5 = OFF
2.0 seconds: SW2-1 = OFF SW2-2 = ON SW2-3 = OFF SW2-4 = ON SW2-5 = OFF
Revision W
2-28
START VOLTAGE (180 HZ)
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
Figure 2-18. AID High Speed Starter Connections
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
2-29
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
Tube Rotor Cable (Systems with Internal High Speed Starter QHSS Option Only) The Q-HSS High Speed Starter is factory pre-configured for the x-ray tube supplied with the generator and, with the exception of the Rotor Cable, does not require any field connections or adjustments. Tables 2-3a and 2-3b are provided in the event tube replacement is necessary or if the HSS Power Driver Board AY40-036S needs replacement. The table indicates the proper connections of the various transformer voltage inputs (380, 220, 120, 80, 60 and 0 VAC) to the HSS Driver Board at Terminal Block TB1 for each of the compatible tubes used with the generator. Also, ensure the generator is configured with the correct value rotor capacitors for the installed tube as indicated in Table 2-3a. Table 2-3a: Quantum High-Speed Starter Rotor Phase Capacitor Configuration Tube Type
Rotor Phase Capacitors
E7813X, E7252X, E7869X
Install one (1) 40 uF cap (low speed), two (2) 12 uF in series (high speed)
E7254X, all Varian, all Dunlee (except MX100 GE replacement, see below)
Install one (1) 25 uF cap (low speed), two (2) 12 uF in series (high speed)
Dunlee MX100 Replacement for GE Radiographic System
Install one (1) 25 uF cap (low speed), two (2) 15 uF in series (high speed)
If not already connected, connect transformer input wires to HSS Driver Board AY40-036S terminal block TB1 plug for correct tube type in accordance with table below: Table 2-3b: HSS Driver Board AY40-036S Boost and Run Voltage Requirements: Transformer Input Wires to Terminal Block Plug TB1 TB1-1
TB1-3
TB1-5
TB1-6
TB1-7
HIGH SPEED BOOST VOLTAGE
LOW SPEED BOOST VOLTAGE
HIGH SPEED RUN VOLTAGE
LOW SPEED RUN VOLTAGE
COMMON
TOSHIBA E7255, E7254
WIRE #5 (380 VAC)
WIRE #4 (220 VAC)
WIRE #3 (120 VAC)
WIRE #2A (80 VAC)
WIRE #1 (0 VAC)
TOSHIBA E7252, E7813
WIRE #4 (220 VAC)
WIRE #3 (120 VAC)
WIRE #2A (80 VAC)
WIRE #2 (60 VAC)
WIRE #1 (0 VAC)
TUBE MODEL
Revision W
2-30
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
Table 2-3b: HSS Driver Board AY40-036S Boost and Run Voltage Requirements: Transformer Input Wires to Terminal Block Plug TB1 TB1-1
TB1-3
TB1-5
TB1-6
TB1-7
HIGH SPEED BOOST VOLTAGE
LOW SPEED BOOST VOLTAGE
HIGH SPEED RUN VOLTAGE
LOW SPEED RUN VOLTAGE
COMMON
VARIAN RAD 92, RAD 60, RAD 56, RAD 44, A292, A272; DUNLEE DA 1092, DU309, PX 1302, PX 1312, PX 1429, PX 1436
WIRE #5 (380 VAC)
WIRE #4 (220 VAC)
WIRE #3 (120 VAC)
WIRE #2 (60 VAC)
WIRE #1 (0 VAC)
VARIAN RAD 21, RAD 14, RAD 13, A192; TOSHIBA E7869X DUNLEE MX100 Replacement for GE
WIRE #5 (380 VAC)
WIRE #4 (220 VAC)
WIRE #2A (80 VAC)
WIRE #2 (60 VAC)
WIRE #1 (0 VAC)
TUBE MODEL
NOTE 1: Stow unused WIRE #2 (60 VAC) or WIRE #2A (80 VAC) in unused terminal block TB1-2 location. NOTE 2: Terminal block location TB1-4 is not used. Non-Overhead Tube Crane Rotor Cable Wiring Instructions Refer to Figure 2-18a and the steps below to connect the Rotor Cable to the HSS Driver Board x-ray tube on a system not using an Overhead Tube Crane. 1. Route the X-ray Tube Rotor Cable from the tube through the middle cable access opening located in the top rear wall of the generator chassis. 2. Connect the MAIN (BLK) conductor to terminal 1 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 Terminal Block TB2. 3. Connect the PHASE (RED) conductor to terminal 3 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 Terminal Block TB2. 4. Connect the COMMON (WHT) conductor to terminal 6 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 Terminal Block TB2. 5. Connect the TEMP SENSE (ORN) conductor to terminal 1 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 Terminal Block TB4. 6. Connect the TEMP SENSE (GRN) conductor to terminal 2 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 Terminal Block TB4.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
2-31
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
7.
Connect the opposite end to the X-ray tube’s terminal strip.
ROTOR CABLE
WHT
RED
BLK
A20A2TB2
L5A
GRN L4A
TB1 L5B
L4
L5
R28
D31
D4
ORN
R11C17
L4B
R16
A20A2TB4 TP2
R5
D6
ROTOR CABLE CONNECTIONS:
BE
R68
R15
B E
R71
PHASE (RED) TO A20A2TB2-3 R67
DANGER
R73 R72
C2
HIGH VOLTAGE
R13
COMMON (WHT) TO A20A2TB2-6
D12 J1
BE
R18
R17
D11
R2
DANGERC21
TP1
HIGH VOLTAGE
MAIN (BLK) TO A20A2TB2-1
C7
C33
C6
D14
TEMP SENSE (ORN) TO A20A2TB4-1
R64
R66
R26
R20
TEMP SENSE (GRN) TO A20A2TB4-2
R50
R43
C28
C42 R58 J3
C47
R54
C37
U9
TP10
1 C30
C27
C29
R42
R47
R63
C51
20
C49
R55 R60
D22
TP6
TP8
HSS DRIVER BOARD A20A2 (AY40-036S) Figure 2-18a. Non-Overhead Tube Crane System Rotor Cable Connections Overhead Rotor Cable Wiring Instructions Refer to Figure 2-18b and the steps below to connect the Rotor Cable to the x-ray tube on a system using an Overhead Tube Cranes: 1. Route the X-ray Tube Rotor Cable from the tube through the middle cable access opening located in the top rear wall of the generator chassis. 2. Connect the MAIN (BLK 0) conductor to terminal 1 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 Terminal Block TB2. 3. Connect the PHASE (BLK 1) conductor to terminal 3 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 Terminal Block TB2. 4. Connect the COMMON (BLK 2) conductor to terminal 6 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 Terminal Block TB2.
Revision W
2-32
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
5. Connect the TEMP SENSE (BLK) conductor to terminal 1 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 Terminal Block TB4. 6. Connect the TEMP SENSE (WHT) conductor to terminal 2 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 Terminal Block TB4. 7.
Connect the opposite end to the X-ray tube’s terminal strip. ROTOR CABLE
TUBE TEMP CABLE LX1-D160 X6.1sw;3ws
BLK 2
BLK 1
BLK 0
A20A2TB2
L5A
WHT L4A
TB1 L5B
L4
L5
R28
D31
D4
BLK
R11C17
L4B
R16
A20A2TB4 TP2
R5
D6
ROTOR/TEMP CABLE CONNECTIONS:
BE
R68
B E
R71
R73 R72
PHASE (BLK 1) TO A20A2TB2-3 R67
DANGER
R15
HIGH VOLTAGE
C2
R13
COMMON (BLK 2) TO A20A2TB2-6
D12 J1
BE
R18
R17
D11
R2
DANGERC21
TP1
HIGH VOLTAGE
MAIN (BLK 0) TO A20A2TB2-1
C7
C33
C6
D14
TEMP SENSE (BLK) TO A20A2TB4-1
R64
R66
R26
R20
TEMP SENSE (WHT) TO A20A2TB4-2
R50
R43
C28
C42 R58 J3
C47
R54
C37
U9
TP10
1 C30
C27
C29
R42
R47
R63
C51
20
C49
R55 R60
D22
TP6
TP8
HSS DRIVER BOARD A20A2 (AY40-036S) Figure 2-18b. Overhead Tube Crane System Rotor Cable Connections
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
2-33
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
Table/Wall Bucky Connections Wall stand and/or table buckies are interconnected to the HF Series x-ray generator via Interface Board A9, P/N AY40-023T terminal blocks A9TB4 (Wall Stand) and A9TB3 (Table) or Digital Interface Board AY40-034T terminal blocks A9TB7 (Wall Stand) and A9TB3 (Table) using 5-conductor, 18AWG cable (P/N EL75-025), which is provided with the table and/or wall stand. IMPORTANT! When interfacing to a 14" x 17" Midwest table or wall bucky, switches A9SW1 or A9SW2, respectively, must be set to the "M" position. For 14" x 36" Midwest, Progeny, or LF type buckies, switches A9SW1 or A9SW2 must not be set to the "M" position. Refer to bucky manufacturer’s installation manual (provided with system) for specific bucky wiring information and to Figures 2-15, 2-16, and in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS, Figures 6-6 through 6-9. Bucky cable entrance/exit is provided through the access opening in the top rear panel of the generator chassis. DO NOT route cables through an opening containing a High Voltage Cable (see Figure 2-13). When connecting a table bucky, remove jumper JP2 on Interface Board A9. When connecting a wall bucky, remove jumper JP3 on Interface Board A9. Table/Wall Ion Chamber Connections (AEC Option Only) Systems equipped with standard type AEC (AEC Board AY40-031S): If using a wall ion chamber, connect wall ion chamber cable to AEC Board A11, P/N AY40-031S connector J2. If using a table ion chamber, connect table ion chamber cable to AEC Board A11 connector J4. Table 2-4 shows AID type ion chamber connector pin assignments. Route the ion chamber cable(s) as necessary to exit through the access opening in top rear side of generator chassis, and secure as required. DO NOT route through an opening containing a High Voltage Cable (see Figure 2-13). Table 2-4: AID ICX-153 or ICX-1153 Ion Chamber 9-Pin Sub-D Connector Pin-Outs
Revision W
2-34
9-PIN SUB-D CONNECTOR PIN
FUNCTION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
NONE FIELD 2 SELECT FIELD 1 SELECT RESET OUTPUT FIELD 3 SELECT NEGATIVE SUPPLY POSITIVE SUPPLY GROUND
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
(Note: Perform ion chamber balance procedure in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions provided with chamber.) Typically, when the HF Series x-ray generator is shipped with an AID ICX ion chamber, the chamber jumpers are pre-set in the following configuration: Table 2-5: AID ICX-153 or ICX-1153 Ion Chamber Jumper Configuration JUMPER
POSITION
FUNCTION
61135A W1
1-2 & 3-4
LOW ACTIVE RESET
61135A W2, W3, W4
1-2 & 3-4
LOW ACTIVE FIELD SELECT
61135A W5, W6
1-2 & 3-4
A-B-C = 2-1-3
61135A W7
2-3
POSITIVE OUTPUT SIGNAL
CAUTION! The ion chamber must be electrically isolated from the bucky to ensure proper AEC system performance. For systems equipped with universal type AEC (AEC Board AY40-027S): Up to four ion chambers can be used. Connect ion chambers as follows: •
Wall#1 ion chamber to A11J8
•
Wall#2 ion chamber to A11J12
•
Table ion chamber to A11J10
•
Auxiliary ion chamber to A11J13
Note that to connect a Siemens ion chamber AEC cable to universal AEC Board A11 requires an interface cable assembly AY51-061 for each chamber. This cable assembly adapts the ion chamber connector to 9-pin D-Sub type used on the AEC Board, and provides a separate 300 VDC wire for connection to A11TB1. Route the ion chamber cable(s) as necessary to exit through the access opening in top rear side of generator chassis, and secure as required. DO NOT route through an opening containing a High Voltage Cable (see Figure 2-13). Interfacing to Canon Digital Radiographic Receptor (When Applicable) The digital radiographic receptor is interconnected to the HF Series x-ray generator via Interface Board A9, P/N AY40-034T terminal blocks A9TB7 (Wall Stand) and A9TB3 (Table), respectively, using 4-conductor, 18AWG cable. Refer to the digital receptor manufacturer’s installation manual for more detailed wiring instructions.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
2-35
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
Digital receptor cable entrance/exit is provided through the access opening in the top rear panel of the generator chassis. DO NOT route signal cables through an opening containing a High Voltage Cable (see Figure 2-13). When connecting to a table digital receptor, remove jumper JP2 on Interface Board A9. When connecting to wall digital receptor, remove jumper JP3 on Interface Board A9. Interfacing to CMT Digital Radiographic Receptor (When Applicable) Refer to CMT digital receptor installation manual for detailed wiring instructions. Interfacing to Siemens Ion Chambers (When Applicable)
Note: When interfacing the generator to a Siemens table/wall ion chamber and a Quantum table/wall ion chamber (AID type), only the Siemens ion chambers require the use of cable assembly AY51-061. The Quantum table/wall ion chamber can be connected directly to AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S) connector J10 (TABLE) or J8 (WALL). Interfacing of the HF Series x-ray generator to Siemens table and/or wall ion chambers, such as in Siemens Tomography System, is facilitated using the "universal" type AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S) located on the front side of the generator cabinet PCB door. The VERTIX wall stand and MULTIX table ion chambers are connected as shown in Figure 2-19. Note that cable assemblies AY51-061 shown in the illustration should already be connected to both the MULTIX table AEC cable EK14 and the VERTIX wall stand AEC cable. Any additional ion chambers used with the system are connected as described in "Table/Wall Ion Chamber Connections (AEC Option Only)" procedure included in this chapter.
Figure 2-19. AEC Ion Chamber Connections (Siemens Tomography System)
Revision W
2-36
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
Secure the ion chamber cables to the PCB Door using cable ties as shown in Figure 2-20.
SECURE ONE ION CHAMBER CABLE CONNECTOR HERE
SECURE OTHER ION CHAMBER CABLE CONNECTOR HERE
Figure 2-20. Siemens Ion Chamber Cable Management Interfacing to Siemens Tomography System (When Applicable) The Siemens tomo interface cable (supplied with the Siemens system) has attached to it at one end three plugs identified as "KK1B G1,G2 X10", "KK1B G1,G2 X11" and "KK1B G1,G2 X12". Plugs "X10" (TABLE), "X11" (WALL) and "X12" (TOMO SWEEP TIME) will need to be cut off and the wire ends stripped to allow connection to the universal AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S) pluggable
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
2-37
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
terminal blocks A11TB10, A11TB12 and A11TB11, respectively. Refer to Figure 2-21 for Siemens tomo interface cable wire connections. Secure the tomo interface cable securely using cable ties.
Figure 2-21. Siemens Tomo/Ion Chamber Interface Cable Interconnection Diagram Check that jumper JP1 is installed on Universal AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S). If not, install a jumper.
Revision W
2-38
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
Interfacing to Pausch Tomography System (When Applicable) To interface the HF Series generator to Pausch tomo system, two lengths of 10-conductor shielded cable is required (supplied with the HF Series generator). No wire terminations are required for interconnecting the cables. Refer to Figure 2-22 for Pausch tomo/generator interface wiring. After interfacing, secure the tomo interface cable securely using cable ties as required. Check that jumper JP1 is not installed on Universal AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S). If installed, remove this jumper. IMPORTANT! Be sure to re-program the tomo sweep times on the Pausch tomography system to correspond with available time settings selectable at the HF Series generator Operator Control Panel.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
2-39
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
Figure 2-22. Pausch Tomography System Interconnection Diagram
Revision W
2-40
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL SETUP The HF Series X-ray Generator is available with several different types of operator control panel (OCP) configurations. These include: •
ODYSSEY Operator Control Panel
•
Q-VISION Touch-Screen Operator Control Panel
•
Integrated Workstation Control Panel (e.g., Canon DR Workstation, Agfa NX Workstation, etc.)
The paragraphs that follow describe the installation and setup procedures for each type control panel. ODYSSEY Operator Control Panel The ODYSSEY Operator Control Panel (OCP) is provided with a 50-ft. interconnect cable. Extended length OCP cables are available; part number QGCBL65 is 65-ft. length, and part number QG-CBL85 is 85-ft. length. The OCP can be placed directly on a shelf, table top, or on top of the Generator Cabinet, resting on its rubber-tipped feet. It may also be mounted on a pedestal (requires QG-PDL option) or on a wall-mounted bracket (requires QG-WM option). The following are installation instructions for each option. OCP Pedestal Mounting (QG-PDL Option) 1. On systems equipped with Pedestal Mount option QG-PDL, mount the OCP on the pedestal as follows: Turn the OCP over and rest it on a surface covered with soft material. 2. Remove four (4) OCP front panel screws. 3. Turn over the OCP. Lift up OCP front panel to access OCP mounting holes (if necessary, insert a small flat blade screwdriver under the edge of the panel, in the upper left side, and lift up panel). 4. Position the OCP on the pedestal aligning the pedestal mounting holes in the bottom of OCP with the mounting holes in the top flange of the pedestal. 5. Secure the OCP to the pedestal using four (4) 1/4-20 x 3/4" pan head phillips screws, flat washers and nuts. 6. Re-install four (4) OCP front panel screws. CAUTION! The OCP serial cable shield (yellow/ green wire) provides a protective earth ground from the OCP to the generator cabinet. Verify both ends of the OCP serial cable are properly secured to grounded mounting screws as described in the following step. 7.
Connect OCP serial cable (P/N AY51-018) between connector A16J1 on the OCP and connector J5 on CPU Board A1 (P/N AY40-006T).
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
2-41
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
8. Connect the yellow/green ground wires at each end of OCP serial cable to the nearest mounting screw on OCP Control Board A16A1 (AY40-004S) and Logic Board A1 (AY40-006S). 9. Ensure the connector screws and PCB mounting screws are fully tightened. CAUTION! The OCP serial cable shield is electrically connected to the connector shells at either end of the cable. It is recommended the OCP serial cable connectors not be removed so as not to compromise integrity of cable shield connections. If necessary to remove connector, verify that after the connectors are re-installed, there is less than 0.1 ohm resistance between connector shell at one end of cable and the connector shell at opposite end of the cable. 10. If mounting OCP to floor, either transfer drill four mounting holes in floor using the OCP base plate as a guide or mark the floor in accordance with dimensions given in Figure 2-23, and then drill holes where marked. Drill holes using a #W drill bit (0.390" diameter). After OCP cable connection is complete, secure OCP to floor using 3/8" hardware suitable for floor type.
Figure 2-23. OCP Mounting Hole Locations
Revision W
2-42
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
OCP Wall Mounting (QG-WM Option) (DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN INCHES) 1.00
10.25
11.01
.44 2X 1.00
MOUNTING CONFIGURATION A (SIDE VIEW)
6.50
6.50
O.203 THRU 6X
(REAR VIEW)
15.00
MOUNTING CONFIGURATION B (SIDE VIEW)
(TOP VIEW)
Figure 2-24. QG-WM Wall Mount Option Installation Configurations On systems equipped with Wall Mounting option QG-WM, mount the OCP to the wall as follows: 1. Secure the Wall Mount to the wall using hardware suitable for wall construction type (each screw capable of supporting 15 lbs. pull load). 2. Turn the OCP over and rest it on a surface covered with soft material. 3. Remove four (4) OCP front panel screws. 4. Turn over the OCP. Lift up OCP front panel (if necessary, insert a small flat blade screwdriver under the edge of the panel, in the upper left side, and lift up panel) to access OCP mounting holes.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
2-43
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
5. Position the OCP on the Wall Mount bracket aligning the mounting holes in the bottom of OCP with the mounting holes in the wall bracket. 6. Secure the OCP to the Wall Mount Bracket using four (4) 1/4-20 x 3/4" pan head phillips screws, flat washers and nuts. 7.
Re-install four (4) OCP front panel screws.
8. Connect one end of the OCP serial cable (P/N AY51-018) to connector J3 on the OCP. Route the OCP serial cable through the access opening in the Wall Mount Bracket and connect to connector J5 on CPU Board A1 (P/N AY40-006T). Ensure the connector screws are fully tightened. DO NOT route serial cable through an opening containing a High Voltage Cable (see Figure 2-13). Q-VISION Operator Control Panel The Q-VISION Operator Control Panel (OCP) is an all-in-one PC, with the computer integrated with the touch-screen monitor in a single case. The QVISION OCP is provided with a Power/Expose Control Box (AY20-271), which contains a two-stage, hand-held PREP/EXPOSE switch and a built-in generator ON/STANDBY rocker switch for remotely powering on/off the Generator. Cables for interconnection of the Q-VISION OCP and Power/Expose Control Box to the generator are available in either 50-ft. or a 100-ft. interconnect lengths, as specified at the time of order. In order to interface Q-VISION with the generator, the generator must be equipped with the "Q-Connect" option, which provides an OCP Interface Board (AY40-073S) that enables Ethernet connectivity to the generator’s Logic Board AY40-006S. The Q-VISION OCP monitor is intended for use as a "touch-screen" input device; however, a keyboard and mouse are provided for use by field service technicians if and when it becomes necessary to perform operations external to the Q-VISION program environment (such as when performing operating system functions). The Q-VISION OCP can be placed directly on a flat surface such as a table top or desk, or on can be wall-mounted using Wall Mount option QGV-WM. Refer to the Q-Connect Option System Interconnection Diagram in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS and proceed as follows: 1.
Connect AC power adapter plug to power jack on the All-in-One PC (Q-VISION) in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions (provided with PC).
2. If optional keyboard and/or mouse are provided, connect these in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions (provided with PC). 3. Connect Ethernet cable from All-in-One PC (Q-VISION) to an Ethernet Switch provided with Q-VISION OCP. 4. Connect Ethernet cable EL75-058-XXX between Ethernet Switch and Generator OCP Interface Board (AY40-073S) connector J1 (see Figure 2-24a). 5. Install the Ethernet Switch Power Supply connector, and plug transformer into 110 VAC, 60Hz electric outlet (220 VAC, 50Hz power source applica-
Revision W
2-44
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
tions are compatible with the supplied dual voltage power adaptor). See Figure 2-24b.
ETHERNET CABLE CONNECTION
GENERATOR LOGIC BOARD (AY40-006S)
OCP INTERFACE BOARD (AY40-073S)
Figure 2-24a. OCP Interface Board - AY40-073S (Ethernet Connection)
Figure 2-24b. Ethernet Switch Box (Grounded)
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
2-45
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
6. The Power/Expose Control Box (AY20-271) must be installed between the Generator and the "Non-patient Area" in which the Q-VISION OCP and the Operator will be positioned. The Power/Expose Control Box should be securely mounted in close proximity to the Operator’s position for easy access to the ON/ STANDBY Switch, and in clear view of the Q-VISION OCP. A 30-inch expansion cable for the 2-stage Expose Switch is hardwired to the Power/Expose Control Box.
6-PIN MODULAR PLUG
Figure 2-24c. Power/Expose Control Box 7.
A prefabricated 50-ft. or 100 ft. cable with 6-pin modular plugs (AY51243-XXX), is supplied for connecting the Power/Expose Control Box to the generator OCP Interface Board (AY40-073S). See Figure 2-24c. DO NOT route cable through an opening in the generator containing a High Voltage Cable (see Figure 2-13).
8. On systems provided with a Wall Mount Kit (option QGV-WM), install the wall mount components (VESA Mount Adapter, VESA Mount Plate, and Wall Mount Bracket) in accordance with instructions provided with the Wall Mount Kit. 9. Ensure wall attachment hardware is suitable for wall construction type (each screw capable of supporting 25 lbs. pull load). Integrated Workstation Operator Control Panel If the generator is to be integrated with an external digital imaging workstation computer for operation as a generator control panel, the "Q-Connect" option must be installed in the generator. This option provides an Ethernet adapter to enable connection of the generator to the workstation personal computer (PC). Typically, this adapter is factory installed, and is ready for use when the unit is shipped. If the Q-Connect Ethernet adapter is needed,
Revision W
2-46
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
upgrade kits are available (contact Quantum Technical Support for more information). Refer to the Integration System Service Manual provided, depending on the the type system integration, for system interconnection and software installation instructions. A general Q-Connect Option System Interconnection Diagram is provided in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS in this manual for reference. Optional Remote Expose Switch Connection
1 4
TP10 C43 R23
1
TP9
R37 JP12
R18C41
1
C27
U19 R34 R35
1
1
COMM
RS-232
D19
1
JP6
EXPOSE PREP
GND
11
JP7
R16 R11
R13 R12
1
D2 D3 D4
10
JP16 20
TP1
RESET
1
U10
JP11
D16
1
PD6 PD7
DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE
This option is not applicable on generators equipped with Q-Connect option. Optional remote expose switch (R80-HS) is wired into the OCP Board A16A1 (P/N AY40-004S) at TB1 as shown in Figure 2-25, below. If desired, removing jumpers JP6 and JP7 on OCP Control Board A16A1 (AY40004S1) disables the operation of the PREP and EXPOSE buttons on the operator control panel (see figure below).
TB1
Figure 2-25. Operator Control Panel (OCP) Control Board Terminal Block TB1 Connections for Remote Expose Switch INITIAL POWER UP With the generator completely assembled and when electrical checks are complete, the system is ready for initial power up. Proceed as follows:
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
2-47
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
1. Set ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 2. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel or Power/ Expose Control Box on Q-VISION equipped generators to the on ( ) position. 3. The system begins the start up sequence (the "Welcome Screen" is displayed and "Testing. Standby." is flashing). After a few seconds, the normal operation screen will display. IMPORTANT! If the system is a STORED ENERGY (SE) type, and it has been longer than one month since being shipped from factory, allow the system approximately four hours to re-charge the batteries before taking any exposures. The system must be turned on with auto-shutoff disabled to re-charge. Refer to "Generator Time-out Setting" paragraph in Chapter 3, CALIBRATION for detailed instructions. 4. If necessary, the operator control panel LCD display intensity can be increased or decreased by adjusting the rotary potentiometer on the rear side of the operator console. TRANSFORMER TAP VALIDATION 1. On single-phase non-SE versions, using a DMM, measure the DC voltage across the (+) and (-) terminals of the Anode DC capacitor bank (i.e., C13C16). The voltage should be 400 (±20) VDC. If not, re-check line voltage and adjust transformer taps as required. (Refer to "Transformer Line Adjustment" procedure in this chapter for detailed instructions.) 2. On SE versions, verify that 220VAC (±10%) exists between A8P1-4 and A8J1-7. If these voltages are out of range, test the incoming AC line and confirm the correct taps have been selected at TB1. Monitor the charger output voltages at A8TP2 (positive supply) and A8TP3 (negative supply) while allowing the chargers to recharge the battery tray(s) until each test point rises to ±205 (±1.0) VDC. Note: Charging to these levels may take up to 2 hours. If these levels cannot be achieved, check the integrity of the batteries in the affected side of each tray. 3. On three-phase models (see Figures 6-49 and 6-50), correct transformer tap connections will yield 220 VAC measured between phases A, B and C as follows: a. Phase A located on Line Monitor Board A8 Fuse F4. b. Phase B located on Line Monitor Board A8 Fuse F5. c. Phase C located on Line Monitor Board A8 Fuse F6. d. In addition, using a DMM, measure 265 VAC between terminal block TB1 (neutral) and each Phase A, B and C.
Revision W
2-48
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
DC voltage measurement should be made across the (+) and (-) terminals of the anode DC capacitor bank (i.e., capacitors C13 - C16). The measured voltage should be +400 (±20) VDC. If not, re-check line voltage and adjust transformer taps as required to achieve as close to +400 VDC as possible. Q-VISION OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL - NETWORK SETTINGS VERIFICATION NOTE! Both the generator cabinet and Q-VISION network IP addresses are set at the factory to assure initial communication between the two components. If the generator will be conncetred to the internet (such as when utilizing the remote servicing feature), the factory default IP addresses must be changed in accordance with facility Inoformation Technology (IT) administrator’s requirements. If system is equipped with a Q-VISION operator control panel, verify Generator Network Settings as follows: 1. Set ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 2. Set the power on/standby switch on the Power/Expose Control Box to the on ( ) position. 3. The system begins the start up sequence. After a few seconds, the Q-VISION control panel screen will display.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
2-49
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
4. Touch the Help button located on the lower right corner of the QVISION screen (shown on right). The Generator Help Services Screen (Figure 2-25a) appears:
Figure 2-25a. Generator Help Services Screen 5. Touch the Login button at the lower left corner of the screen. A password entry keypad displays.
Figure 2-25b. Enter Password Screen 6. In the Enter Password screen, enter the default Service Technician password (58623) using the keypad, then select Enter. The word "Login" is replaced with "FieldTech" on the Generator Help Services screen to indicate successful login.
Revision W
2-50
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
7. On the Generator Help Services screen, select Service option. The General Service Options Menu appears:
Figure 2-25c. General Service Options Menu 8. Select Network Settings. The following screen appears:
Figure 2-25d. Network Settings Screen 9. The Network Settings Screen displays the network configuration settings of the personal computer housed within the all-in-one Q-VISION operator control panel. Verify the fields are set as follows:
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
2-51
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
•
DHCP = Off
•
IP Address = 10.0.0.71
•
Subnet mask = 255.255.255.1
•
Default gateway = 10.0.0.1
•
Preferred DNS server = 10.0.0.3
10. If necessary, each of these fields can be modified by selecting the field, and then entering the correct information using the data input Touch Pad that appears. Note that the touch pad display includes numerical input buttons 0 through 9, including a decimal point, a plus sign (+), a minus sign (-), a clear (Clr) button, a delete (Del), a Cancel button and an Enter button; however, erroneous input via the numbers buttons will cause the displayed address to turn red, indicating that an error has been made either in acceptable value or entry format. Should an input error occur, it can be corrected by touching the Del button, followed by touching the correct key. The Clr button clears the Address window, and allows immediate re-entry of Address values. 11. Touch the Apply button to save new settings. 12. Return to the Generator Help Services Screen by touching the Back to Service button at lower left corner of screen. 13. On the Generator Help Services screen, select Generator Service. The Generator Service Options Menu appears:
ONLY PRESS THESE BUTTONS WHEN DIRECTED TO DO SO BY TECHNICAL SUPPORT
Figure 2-25e. General Service Options Menu
Revision W
2-52
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
14. Select Service Configuration. The following screen appears:
CURRENT IP ADDRESS OF GENERATOR Q-NODE
Figure 2-25f. Service Configuration Screen 15. The Service configuration Screen displays the network configuration settings of the generator cabinet, specifically of the Q-Node board (located on the Logic Board A1), which is a component of the Q-Connect generator option. The current Generator IP Address appears in the Generator IP Address field as shown in Figure 2-25f (10.0.0.175 is assigned at the factory as the default address). 16. Touch the Identify button. An audible tone will be emitted by the Power/ Expose Control Box if the Q-VISION OCP and the generator cabinet IP are communicating properly via the ethernet network connection.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
2-53
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
17. If the generator IP address needs to be changed, press the Load button to causes the lower portion of the "Service Configuration" screen to populate with data relevant to the Generator with the IP Address shown in the top portion of the screen, as shown below:
Figure 2-25g. Service Configuration Screen 18. To change the IP Address, SubnetMask, or DefaultGateway field, touch the ... button to the right of the field to open a data input Touch Pad, which operates in the same manner as described previously on the Network Settings Screen. 19. After all changes are made, touch Save button. This saves the new IP Address settings for the Generator.
Note: The Generator Q-Node and Q-VISION Subnet Addresses must match in order for the Service Configuration program to become operational. Once communication between the QVISION OCP Computer and the Generator has been established, the technician may then set the Generator IP Address in accordance with instructions provided by the cognizant IT professional for the facility at which the System is installed.
Revision W
2-54
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
ROTOR DRIVE BOARD A10 (AY40-013T) PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION
Note: This procedure is not required on systems equipped with high speed starter option. Refer to Rotor Drive Board A10 (AY40-013T) Terminal Block Location Diagram in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS and verify Rotor Drive Board adjustments as follows: 1. Set A10R20 to approximately mid range. 2. Connect one channel of oscilloscope to A10TP15 and second channel to A10TP14. 3. Press and hold the PREP key for approximately 3 seconds. Verify that during the run cycle, the amplitude of the phase and main pulses are +14 VDC to +15 VDC and waveforms are as shown in Figure 2-26 (i.e., the peaks of waveforms at TP15 and TP14 should be between 2.5 and 3.0 milliseconds apart). 2.5 - 3.0 ms
14.0 to 15.0V(peak) A10TP15 Waveform 14.0 to 15.0V(peak) A10TP14 Waveform
Figure 2-26. Rotor Board Phase and Main Pulses 4. Press and hold PREP key for approximately 3 seconds. 5. Verify the peak voltage at A10TP14 after PREP has been pressed for at least 2 seconds (rotor in boost mode) is greater than 14 VPEAK. If necessary, adjust A10R20 to achieve the correct voltage. 6. Set A10R24 to approximately midrange. 7. Press and hold PREP key for approximately 3 seconds.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Revision W
2-55
Chapter 2 Assembly & Installation
8. Verify the peak voltage at A10TP15 after PREP key has been pressed for at least 2 seconds (rotor in boost mode) is greater than 14 VPEAK. If necessary, adjust A10R24 to achieve the correct voltage. 9. Connect a DMM between A10TB1-1 and A10TB1-3. 10. Press the PREP key and verify the voltages as follows: • For 110 VAC stator tubes (Toshiba E7242X, E7813X, E7252X, E7239X) 96 - 140 VAC during boost, 54 - 66 VAC during run • For 220 VAC stator tubes (all others tubes not listed above) 183 - 227 VAC during boost, 54 - 66 VAC during run 11. Install cabinet cover. 12. Proceed with system calibration procedure described in Chapter 3, CALIBRATION.
Revision W
2-56
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging
Chapter
3
CALIBRATION
3-1
3-2
Chapter 3 Calibration
OVERVIEW This chapter provides instructions for configuring and calibrating the HF Series X-ray generator following installation. For additional information, NEMA Standards Publication/No. XR8-1979(R1994), Test Methods for Diagnostic X-ray Machines for Use During Initial Installation is recommended as a reference.
IMPORTANT NOTE: If the generator is equipped with the Q-Connect option" (Ethernet Adapter) for Agfa DiRex Integration (i.e., the Agfa NX workstation computer functions as the operator control panel), proceed to Appendix B, CALIBRATION (Agfa DiRex) for generator configuration and calibration instructions. If the generator is equipped with the "Q-Connect option" (Ethernet Adapter) for use with a Q-VISION operator control panel (OCP), or it is integrated with a workstation computer other than an Agfa DiRex Integration (e.g., the Canon DR Integration System, Agfa NX-DR Series Integration), refer to Appendix D, CALIBRATION (Insight - Canon) for generator configuration and calibration instructions. REQUIRED TOOLS AND MATERIALS The following lists the tools and materials required to perform the procedures contained in this chapter: •
Digital Voltmeter: Fluke Model 87 (or equivalent)
•
kV and mAs meter: Radcal Dynalyzer III (or equivalent)
•
Radiation meter (0-1000 mR)
•
Oscilloscope, 50 Mhz storage: Tek 2210 (or equivalent)
•
5 CM, 10 CM, 15 CM, 25 and 30 CM acrylic phantoms (required for calibrating systems equipped with QG-AEC option).
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION/CALIBRATION The HF Series x-ray generator has been factory configured and calibrated. It is necessary, however, to perform the following procedures to validate system compliance. Perform the procedures in the sequence presented, unless otherwise instructed.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-3
Chapter 3 Calibration
ACCESSING SERVICE MODE Calibration and configuration can only be performed by accessing the X-ray generator’s Service Mode. To gain access to the Service Mode, password entry is required. This is to prevent unintended and/or unauthorized changes to system settings. To access the Service Menu, proceed as follows: 1. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 2. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (
) position, then to the on (
) position.
3. The "Welcome Screen" appears with "Testing. Stand by." displayed in the lower portion of screen (see Figure 3-1.).
PRESS TO ACCESS PASSWORD MENU
Figure 3-1. Welcome Screen 4. Within five seconds of start up, press the upper left field select key as shown in Figure 3-1). The Password menu displays:
FIELD SELECT KEYS
Figure 3-2. Password Menu
Revision W
3-4
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
5. In the Password menu, enter the default Service Technician password (58623) using the field select keys next to the corresponding numbers. (This password enables access to Service Mode for modification of system configuration, calibration and settings and for access to the APR Edit utility.) 6. Upon validation of the password, the Service Mode Menu displays:
Figure 3-3. Service Menu The Service Menu offers a selection of service-oriented system utilities, each of which is described briefly below: •
Configuration utility: Provides access to system configuration settings, such as AEC type, rotor drive settings, tube type, etc.
•
Calibration utility: Provides access to system calibration functions, such as filament, mA, kVp calibration and, if equipped with QG-AEC option, AEC and film/screen calibrations.
•
Reports utility: Provides access to Service Reports menu, which provides Generator, Tube, Error Warnings, and Diagnostic reports (refer to Chapter 5, SERVICE MAINTENANCE for more information).
•
Self-Test utility: Currently not accessible.
•
Last Calibration Date: Currently not accessible.
•
Settings utility: Provides access to system settings, such as the language, date, time, date format (international or U.S.) and backup time/mAs settings.
•
APR Edit utility: Used to edit existing APR screens or use to create new screens (refer to Chapter 4, APR EDITOR in the operator’s manual for more information).
Pressing the key next to the Exit field returns the system to the Start Up screen (see Figure 3-1).
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-5
Chapter 3 Calibration
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Press the key next to the Configuration field to access system configuration functions. The Service Configuration Menu displays:
Figure 3-4. Service Configuration Menu The Service Configuration Menu provides access to the system's configuration settings. For proper operation of the generator, the settings must accurately reflect the actual configuration of both the generator and the components to which it is interfaced. Typically, these settings are made at the factory in accordance with sales order specifications. However, it is recommended that you review the current configuration settings for accuracy. The following briefly describes the various Service Configuration Menu selections:
Revision W
3-6
•
Printer: Enables data output to an external label printer when one is interfaced to the generator
•
Generator Model setting: Accesses the generator maximum power output derating setting (from 80% to 100%). Access to other functions is restricted to authorized QMI factory personnel only
•
AEC setting: displays AEC option setting (i.e., AEC "Standard", AEC "Universal", AEC OFF)
•
Rotor Drive setting: Accesses the rotor drive settings - 60 Hz (no high speed starter), 50 Hz (no high speed starter), Quantum internal highspeed starter (QMI HSS), or AID external high-speed starter (AID HSS)
•
Edit Welcome/Facility: Accesses the facility name text editing and, on ODYSSEY systems, the dealer name text editing utilities, which provide functions necessary to edit the information appearing on the "Welcome Screen" displayed during start-up
•
Main: returns the system to the Service Menu (see Figure 3-3)
•
Tube Type setting: Accesses the Tube Type Setting screen, for selection of x-ray tube model used with system
•
Edit Digital: Accesses the digital receptor settings including digital receptor type (i.e., Canon, Konica, CMT, Generic, or NONE), Universal system type (i.e., Quantum QV-800, Pausch COSMOS-2, or NONE), and PREP HOLD setting (on or off).
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
•
Ion Chamber Configuration setting: Accesses the Ion Chamber Configuration screen, which is used to configure each ion chamber interfaced with the system (two separate ion chambers, of either slope or level type, can be interfaced to the generator)
•
Tomo setting - Accesses the Tomo configuration screens for setting up the system for interfacing with the Siemens or Pausch tomography systems (available settings are Siemens, Pausch, or OFF (none))
To change a configuration setting, press the key next to the configuration selection to be changed. After all configuration settings are set appropriately, press the key next to the Main field. The configuration settings are saved in non-volatile read-only memory (NVROM) and the system returns to the main Service Menu (see Figure 3-3). The following paragraphs provide specific instructions for setting each of the available configuration selections. Printer On/Off Setting When configured to do so, the HF Series X-ray generator will print post-exposure factors (kVp, mA, time, mAs, etc.) to an externally interfaced device such as a label printer. The label printer must comply with the following serial communication protocol: 9600 baud rate, no handshake, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit, no parity. To connect a printer, attach an RS-232 serial cable between the printer and the RS-232 A16J2 9-pin connector on the rear panel of the Operator Control Panel. The Service Configuration Screen displays the current printer setting. When set to On, the generator will provide serial output data to an externally connected printer. When set to Off, serial data output for a printer is disabled. Note: The printer setting has no affect on upload or download functionality using Q-Ware software.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-7
Chapter 3 Calibration
Generator Configuration/Derating Settings The Generator Configuration Screen, shown below, displays the generator model and the power output derating setting (presented as a percentage of total power output (kW) capacity).
PRESS THIS KEY TO SET THE POWER OUTPUT DERATING PERCENTAGE
Figure 3-5. Generator Configuration Screen The power output derating function is used to limit the power output of the system to a percentage of the maximum power capacity. For example, on a 50 kW system, setting the "KW%" to 90% will limit the maximum power output to 45 kW (50kW x .9 = 45kW). To set the power output derating, proceed as follows: 1. Press the key next to the KW% field to choose a derating percentage (choices are 80%, 85%, 90%, 95% or 100% [i.e., no derating]). 2. Press the key located next to the Save field. The derating percentage setting is saved in non-volatile read-only memory (NVROM) and the system returns to the Service Configuration Menu (see Figure 3-4).
Revision W
3-8
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
AEC Setting The Service Configuration menu, shown below, displays the generator’s current AEC setting.
PRESS THIS KEY TO SELECT AEC SETTING
Figure 3-6. Choosing AEC Setting 1. Verify the AEC setting is correct as follows: •
Select "AEC Standard" if generator is equipped with standard type AEC Board A11 (AY40-031S)
•
Select "AEC Universal" if generator is equipped with universal type AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S)
•
Select "AEC OFF" if generator is not equipped with optional AEC
2. Press the key located next to the AEC field to select the appropriate AEC setting. 3. To exit the screen and return to the Service Menu, press the key next to the Main field.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-9
Chapter 3 Calibration
Rotor Drive Setting The Service Configuration Menu, shown below, displays the current tube rotor drive setting. The tube rotor drive setting is pre-set at the factory and normally should not be changed (unless replacement of tube with different type). If you need to change the tube rotor drive setting, proceed as follows:
PRESS THIS KEY TO SELECT ROTOR DRIVE
Figure 3-7. Rotor Drive Configuration Menu 1. Press the key located next to the Rotor field to scroll through the available rotor drive settings (60 Hz, 50 Hz, QMI HSS, or AID HSS). 2. To exit the screen and return to the Service Menu, press the key next to the Main field. NOTE: On systems equipped with high-speed starter option (HSS), tube "high-speed" mode will only be activated when selected exposure factors exceed the limits used for low-speed operation.
Revision W
3-10
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
Edit Facility/Welcome Facility Utility The Edit Facility/Edit Welcome utility allows editing of the Facility and Dealer names as they appear on the Welcome Screen, which displays when the system is first turned on (see Figure 3-1). Selecting Edit Welcome from the Service Configuration menu opens the Edit Welcome menu, which offers a choice of editing either the facility name or the dealer name. Either choice will open the Edit Sentence screen (see Figure 3-8).The editing functions available in the Edit Facility and Edit Dealer screens are identical to those used in the Edit Sentence screen described in Chapter 4, APR EDITOR of the operator’s manual. (Note: The maximum number of characters for the facility nameor dealer name field is 48.)
Figure 3-8. Edit Facility/Edit Welcome Screen
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-11
Chapter 3 Calibration
Tube Type Setting The Tube Configuration Screen, shown below, displays the current tube model setting. Also provided are the Heat Alarm (Heat % Limit) and Tube Derating (Tube%) functions. The tube model setting is preset at the factory and normally should not be changed, except after replacing the existing tube with a different type tube. (Note: Consult Quantum Service Department
before attempting to re-configure generator with a tube type that is different than the factory-configured tube type.)
PRESS THIS KEY TO RESET ALL TUBE CALIBRATION VALUES
PRESS THIS KEY TO SELECT TUBE
Figure 3-9. Tube Configuration Screen CAUTION! Pressing the Save Tube key will require system re-calibration, including AEC calibration. In addition, tube statistics will be cleared. Proceed only if necessary. 1. Press the key located next to the Model field until the correct tube model is displayed. 2. The Tube Derating key provides derating of the generator’s maximum mAs output in percentages of 80%, 85%, 90%, 95% or 100% (i.e., no derating). For example, if at a particular kV and mA the tube normally allows a 10 mAs exposure, then at 80% derating, the tube would permit only an 8 mAs exposure. Derating the tube can extend the life of the tube. Press the key next to the Tube % Derating field to choose a derating percentage. 3. The Heat Alarm (Heat % Limit) key provides a heat protection function for the x-ray tube. For example, setting the Heat Alarm for 80% will cause the generator to produce an audible alarm and a visual "Heat Alarm" indication on the OCP when the tube has reached 80% of its total heat unit capacity. The total tube heat unit capacity is dependent on the tube type. The Heat Alarm setting has an adjustment range of anywhere between 50% up to 100% in 10% increments. Note: At 100% setting, the heat alarm is effectively disabled. Press the key next to the Heat % Limit field to select the percentage of the total tube heat capacity at which alarm activation will occur.
Revision W
3-12
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
4. If the tube type has been changed, press the Save Tube key. The tube model setting is saved in non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) and the system returns to the Service Configuration Menu (see Figure 3-4). Note that if the Previous, No Save key is pressed when the tube type is changed, any changes made in the Tube Configuration Screen will not be saved (i.e., the previous tube’s calibration values will be retained). Edit Digital Settings The Edit Digital Screen, shown below, contains the Digital Receptor settings, including the digital receptor type, Universal System type, and "Prep Hold" settings for the generator. To make these settings, proceed as follows: PRESS THIS KEY TO SELECT DIGITAL RECEPTOR PRESS THIS KEY TO SELECT UNIVERSAL SYSTEM TYPE PRESS THIS KEY TO ENABLE OR DISABLE PREP HOLD FUNCTION
Figure 3-10. Edit Digital Screen 1. To set the Digital Receptor type, press the key located next to the Digital Receptor field until the correct digital receptor setting is displayed (Canon = Canon digital receptor installed, Konica = Konica digital receptor installed, CMT = CMT digital receptor installed, NONE = nondigital receptor installed, including all CR systems). 2. The Universal setting is used to enable or disable operator selection of a table receptor when the generator is used with a "Universal" C-arm x-ray system, such as the Quantum QV-800 or Pausch COSMOS-2 system or with a Canon CXDI-50G portable DR receptor using two ion chambers (wall and table). When set to NONE, the table receptor is selectable by the operator. 3. Setting the Prep Hold setting to ON configures the generator to send a "Prep Hold" signal to the DR system (notifies the DR system that a Prep cycle has been initiated; the generator must receive a "Prep Hold Release" signal from the DR system to proceed with the Expose cycle). Setting the Prep Hold setting to Off configures the generator for "normal" operation (i.e., non-interrupted Prep cycle). 4. To exit the screen and return to the Service Menu, press the key next to the Previous Screen field.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-13
Chapter 3 Calibration
Ion Chamber/Receptor Configuration The Ion Chamber Configuration Screen, shown below, displays available ion chambers that can be interfaced to the HF Series X-ray generator. This screen also provides relay on/off settings for activating either the table and/or wall receptor when the receptor keys on the OCP are pressed. Note: On systems equipped with a "Standard" type AEC (i.e., the generator is equipped with standard type AEC Board A11, AY40-031S), the "Ion Chamber Wall 2" and "Ion Chamber Auxilliary" selections are not used. These choices are only effective if the generator is configured with "Universal" type AEC (i.e., if generator is equipped with universal type AEC Board A11, AY40-027S").
PRESS THESE KEYS TO SELECT ION CHAMBER TO CONFIGURE
NOT USED ON "STANDARD" AEC SYSTEMS
Figure 3-11. Ion Chamber Configuration Screen 1. Press the key located next to the ion chamber you want to configure: Wall Ion Chamber, Table Ion Chamber, Ion Chamber Wall 2, or Ion Chamber Auxilliary (Ion Chamber Wall 2 and Ion Chamber Auxilliary only used on systems equipped with AEC Board A11, AY40027S). Be sure that the selected ion chamber is properly interfaced to the AEC Board A11 as described in Chapter 2, ASSEMBLY & INSTALLATION.)
Revision W
3-14
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
2. The system displays the ION CHAMBER Configuration Screen, as shown in the example below: INDICATES SELECTED RECEPTOR (WALL/TABLE/ WALL 2/ AUXILLIARY)
PRESS THESE KEYS TO SELECT ION CHAMBER DETECTOR
NOTE: AID ICX-153 or ICX-1153 RIGHT LOAD USES THIS CONFIGURATION. FOR AID ICX153 or ICX-1153 LEFT LOAD, SET A=3 AND C=2.
ACTIVATES OR DISABLES WALL/TABLE RECEPTOR WHEN SELECTED RECEPTOR KEY IS PRESSED
Figure 3-12. ION CHAMBER Configuration Screen (AID ICX-153 or ICX-1153 Right Hand Load Configuration Shown) The ION CHAMBER Configuration Screen displays the assignment of ion chamber detectors (detector A, B, or C) with respect to the generator’s ion chamber detector select signals (i.e., FIELD SELECT 1, FIELD SELECT 2 and FIELD SELECT 3) output from AEC Control Board A11 (AY40-031S/ AY40-027S). In other words, assigning "1" to field "A" will enable ion chamber detector "1" when the UPPER LEFT chamber detector field is selected on the Operator Control Panel (OCP). The ION CHAMBER Configuration Screen also provides settings that facilitate proper interfacing of the generator with different ion chamber and receptor types. These include Polarity, Wall Relay ON/OFF, Table Relay ON/OFF, Invert, and Slope/Level settings.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-15
Chapter 3 Calibration
Ion Chamber Configuration Configure the Wall and/or Table ion chamber as follows: IMPORTANT: The AID ICX-153 or ICX-1153 ion chamber, which is the default chamber type shipped with standard AEC type generators, requires that detector "A" = 2, "B" = 1, and "C" = 3. The factory default orientation of the ion chamber mounting in the bucky is with the front side toward the tube. However, it may be necessary to mount the chamber with the back side forward (e.g., for left side loading wall stands). In this case, in the ION CHAMBER Configuration screen, simply switch assignment of chamber detector A to "3" and detector C to "2". No wiring modifications are necessary. Table 3-1. Ion Chamber Configuration Settings for Generator with Standard AEC (AEC Board AY40-031S is Installed) Standard AEC Systems Setting
Wall Ion Chamber Settings
Table Ion Chamber Settings
Polarity
+
+
Wall Relay
Off
Off
Table Relay
Off
Off
Invert
No
No
Slope/Lvl
Slope
Slope
Table 3-2. Ion Chamber Configuration Settings for Generator with Universal AEC Option (Requires AEC Board AY40-027S) Universal AEC Systems Ion Chamber Type Siemens (Level)
AID (Slope) Tomo Systems
AID (Slope) Non-Tomo Systems
Setting
Wall Ion Chamber Settings
Table Ion Chamber Settings
Wall Ion Chamber Settings
Table Ion Chamber Settings
Wall Ion Chamber Settings
Table Ion Chamber Settings
Polarity
+
+
+
+
+
+
Wall Relay
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Table Relay
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Invert
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Slope/Lvl
Level
Level
Slope
Slope
Slope
Slope
Revision W
3-16
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
Table 3-3. Ion Chamber Configuration Settings for Generator with Digital Interface Option (Requires Digital Interface Board AY40-034T) Digital Receptor Systems (w/AY40-031S) Setting
Wall Ion Chamber Settings
Table Ion Chamber Settings
Polarity
+
+
Wall Relay
On
Off
Table Relay
Off
On
Invert
No
No
Slope/Lvl
Slope
Slope
Table 3-1 shows the ion chamber and receptor settings for the generator when equipped with standard AEC (i.e., Standard AEC Board A11 (AY40-031S) is installed). Table 3-2 shows the ion chamber and receptor settings for the generator when equipped with universal AEC (i.e., Universal AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S) is installed). Table 3-3 shows the ion chamber and receptor settings for the generator when equipped with standard AEC and "Digital Interface" option (i.e., Standard AEC Board A11 (AY40-031S) and Digital Interface Board A9 (AY40-034T) are installed). Detailed instructions are as follows: 1. Press the key located next to the ion chamber detector (Field A, Field B or Field C) until the desired detector setting (1, 2, 3 or Off) is indicated in corresponding box of ion chamber graphic on the right side of the ION CHAMBER Configuration screen (see Figure 3-12). 2. The "Polarity" setting (+ or -) controls whether the ion chamber on the selected receptor port is a (+) positive logic (i.e., active high) or (-) negative logic (i.e., active low) model. The positive logic model presents a DC voltage or ramp ranging from 0 to some positive voltage to indicate exposure value. The negative logic model presents a DC voltage or ramp ranging from 0 to a negative voltage. This setting is ignored unless the "Universal AEC" selection is chosen. The "Standard AEC" board is always "positive". 3. The "Invert" setting controls the sense of the signals that select the individual field for the chamber. If "Invert" is set to No, the idle (non-PREP/EXPOSE) state of the individual field selection is "1" and the state during PREP/EXPOSE is "0" if the field is selected (called "Low Active"). If "Invert" is set to Yes the idle (non-PREP/EXPOSE) state of the field selection is "0" and the state during PREP/EXPOSE is "1" if the field is selected (called "High Active"). This setting is ignored unless the "Universal AEC" selection is chosen. The "Standard AEC" board is always "Not Inverted".
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-17
Chapter 3 Calibration
4. The "Slope/Lvl" setting determines if the ion chamber connected to the selected receptor AEC output is of the "slope/ramp" (Slope) or a DC Level (Level) type. This setting is ignored unless the "Universal AEC" selection is chosen. The "Standard AEC" board is always "Slope". 5. When all ion chamber settings are appropriately configured, press the key located next to the Previous Screen field. 6. Repeat above steps for each of the other ion chambers interfaced with the generator. Receptor Relay Configuration The "Wall Relay" setting controls whether the "Wall Relay" on the Universal AEC Board A11 AY40-027S is energized. Similarly, the "Table Relay" setting controls whether the "Table Relay" on the Universal AEC Board A11 AY40-027S is energized. These settings provide +28 VDC output for operation of a Siemens bucky. If this field is set to ON, the relay is asserted when: • The receptor switch that accesses this receptor is depressed on the OCP panel or • When an APR Technique requests this receptor. The wall or table relay will remain energized until a receptor with "Wall Relay" OFF or "Table Relay" OFF, respectively, is selected. Depending on the configuration of the generator, set the receptor relays as indicated in Table 3-1, 3-2, or 3-3. Tomo Setting Important! On generators that will be interfaced to a tomography system; Set Tomo Mode to "Off" prior to performing generator calibration, then set Tomo Mode back to "On" following calibration. The generator may be interfaced to operate with either a Siemens or Pausch tomography system (refer to Chapter 2, ASSEMBLY & INSTALLATION for wiring instructions). The generator must be equipped with a "Universal" type AEC Board (i.e., AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S) must be installed). To configure the generator for tomo operation, proceed as follows:
Revision W
3-18
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
1. Select Tomo from the Service Configuration Menu (see Figure 3-4). The system displays the Tomo menu (see Figure 3-13).
PRESS THIS KEY TO SET TOMO MODE PRESS THIS KEY TO SET TOMO TIME SELECTIONS
Figure 3-13. Setting Tomography System Interface Configuration 2. Press the key next to the Tomo field until the desired tomography system interface setting (Siemens, Pausch, or OFF (none)) is displayed. If no tomography option is interfaced, set to OFF. Otherwise, set to either Siemens or Pausch as required. 3. Press the key next to Tomo Times field. Depending on whether "Siemens" or "Pausch" tomo was selected, the appropriate Tomo Times screen (see Figure 3-14 or 3-15) is displayed:
ON SIEMENS TOMO SYSTEMS, DO NOT CHANGE ANY TOMO TIME SETTINGS
Figure 3-14. Tomo Times Screen - Siemens Tomo Selected
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-19
Chapter 3 Calibration
8°, TIME 1
8°, TIME 2
20°, TIME 1
20°, TIME 2
30°, TIME 1
30°, TIME 2
40°, TIME 1
40°, TIME 2
Figure 3-15. Tomo Times Screen - Pausch Tomo Selected 4. Press the Factory Reset key. All tomo sweep time settings will be set to factory default values as shown in the sample screens above (the time values shown are in milliseconds). Depending on the type tomography system, proceed as follows: a. If interfacing to a Siemens tomography system, do not change any of the default tomo sweep time settings. The settings must reflect the values shown in Figure 3-14. Press the key next to Previous Screen field to exit Tomo Times screen. b. If interfacing to a Pausch tomography system, the default tomo sweep times for each key on the tomo system are shown in Figure 315. These values may be changed as desired by the user. The time range for each key is from 0.4 seconds (400 milliseconds) up to 4.0 seconds (4000 milliseconds). Please note that the last key (40°, TIME 2) is non-configurable in the current generator design; this output is parallel connected to (and therefore will have the same time setting) as the 40°, TIME 1 output. IMPORTANT: When interfacing the generator to a Pausch tomography system, be sure to set the tomo sweep times on the generator, as described above, to correspond exactly with the tomo sweep times programmed on the Pausch system. c.
Revision W
3-20
Verify all tomo times are correct and then press the key next to the Previous Screen field to save and exit.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
SYSTEM SETTINGS In the Service Menu (see Figure 3-3), press the key next to the Settings field to access the Service Settings Menu, shown below:
Figure 3-16. Service Settings Menu The Service Settings Menu provides access to various system settings. The following briefly describes the various Service Settings Menu selections: •
Set Date setting: Accesses the Set Date Screen for setting current date
•
Set Time setting: Accesses the Set Time Screen for setting current time
•
Film/Screen Defaults: Sets the film/screen combination that is used as the default for each of the available receptors used with the generator (i.e., Wall 40", Wall 72", Table 40", Wall2, and/or Auxilliary receptor). This setting applies to AEC and APR AEC mode exposures only. Each receptor used with the system requires that AEC calibration be performed using the selected film/screen combination.
•
APR Format: Configures the APR Procedure Screens to display or not display the Film Speed and/or CM (thickness) screen fields when the generator is operated in APR mode.
•
Main: returns the system to the Service Menu (see Figure 3-3)
•
Language setting: Sets language used for operator control panel display screens/menus (i.e., English, French, Spanish, German, or Italian).
•
Back Up Time/MAS setting: Displays current, system-wide, AEC exposure back up mAs setting (only functions on systems equipped with QG-AEC option). The system allows for selection of a mAs setting between 10 and 600 mAs (in 10 mAs increments). Note: APR procedures have a separately configurable back up time/mAs setting which, when lower in value, will override the system back up time/mAs setting. Refer to APR Edit chapter in the Operator’s Manual for APR procedure back up time/mAs settings.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-21
Chapter 3 Calibration
•
Generator Timeout: Sets the delay time for generator to automatically shut down if no keys are pressed on operator control panel (selectable in 30 minute increments between 0 minutes up to 180 minutes). If "0" is
selected, the generator will not timeout, however, the filament will turn off if one hour of inactivity. •
Date Format setting: Sets date/time format (options are "US" or "International)
To change a setting, press the key next to the system setting you want to change. After all system settings are set appropriately, press the key next to the Main field. The system settings are saved in non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) and the system returns to the main Service Menu (see Figure 3-3). The following paragraphs provide specific instructions for configuring each of the above system settings. Set Date Screen The Set Date screen, shown below, displays the current date setting. To change the date setting, proceed as follows:
USE THESE KEYS TO SET DAY
USE THESE KEYS TO SET MONTH
USE THESE KEYS TO SET YEAR
Figure 3-17. Setting the Date 1. Adjust the month, date or year setting using the appropriate keys as shown in Figure 3-17, above, until desired date is displayed. 2. To exit the screen and return to the Start Up Screen, press the key next to the Main field.
Revision W
3-22
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
Set Time Screen The Set Time screen, shown below, displays the current time setting. To change the time setting, proceed as follows:
USE THESE KEYS TO SET HOURS
USE THESE KEYS TO SET MINUTES
Figure 3-18. Setting the Time 1. Adjust the hours or minutes setting using the appropriate keys as shown in Figure 3-18, above, until desired time is displayed. 2. To exit the screen and return to the Start Up Screen, press the key next to the Main field. Film/Screen Defaults Screen The Film/Screen Default Screen (see Figure 3-19) is used to configure the default film/screen combination for the various image receptors used with the generator. This setting applies to AEC and APR AEC mode exposures only. If the selected film/screen combination has not already been calibrated, it must be calibrated according to the AEC Calibration procedures later in this chapter using the selected film/screen combination setting. The generator has been pre-configured with seven different film/screen combination selections designated "Wall 40"", "Wall 72"", "Table 40"", "100 Speed", "200 Speed", "800 Speed", and "Film/Screen7". If the Digital Receptor setting in Service Configuration Menu is enabled, an eighth option entitled "Digital" will be also be selectable. Note that the factory default film/screen combination names may be changed using the film/screen combination name edit utility as described in Service Manual.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-23
Chapter 3 Calibration
The Film/Screen Defaults screen, shown below, displays the current receptor film/screen combination settings. To change the default film/screen settings, proceed as follows USE THESE KEYS TO SET FILM/SCREEN COMBINATION
THESE KEYS ONLY USED ON UNIVERSAL TYPE AEC SYSTEMS
Figure 3-19. Film/Screen Defaults Screen 1. Wall 40 FS setting: Press the key next to the Wall 40 FS: field until the desired film/screen combination name appears. The selected film/screen combination is now the film/screen combination used when "WALL 40" image receptor is selected for exposures using AEC and APR AEC mode exposures. 2. Wall 72 FS setting: Press the key next to the Wall 72 FS: field until the desired film/screen combination name appears. The selected film/screen combination is now the film/screen combination used when "WALL 72" image receptor is selected for exposures using AEC and APR AEC mode exposures. 3. Table 40 FS setting: Press the key next to the Table 40 FS: field until the desired film/screen combination name appears. The selected film/ screen combination is now the film/screen combination used when "TABLE" image receptor is selected for exposures using AEC and APR AEC mode exposures. 4. Wall2 FS setting (enabled only generators equipped with "Universal" type AEC [i.e., AEC Board A11 AY40-027S is installed]): Press the key next to the Wall2 FS: field until the desired film/screen combination name appears. The selected film/screen combination is now the film/ screen combination used when "WALL2" (AUX) image receptor is selected for exposures using AEC and APR AEC mode exposures. 5. Auxilliary FS setting (enabled only generators equipped with "Universal" type AEC [i.e., AEC Board A11 AY40-027S is installed]): Press the key next to the Auxilliary FS: field until the desired film/screen combination name appears. The selected film/screen combination is now the film/ screen combination used when "AUX" image receptor is selected for exposures using AEC and APR AEC mode exposures.
Revision W
3-24
NOTE
The "default" film/screen combination settings automatically link specific calibrated film/ screen combinations used in non-APR and APR exposures using AEC. However, the operator may choose any available calibrated film/ screen combination using the Film/Screen selection keys provided in the AEC and APR mode screens.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
APR Format Setting The APR Format Setting key (shown below) permits the operator to configure the APR Procedure Screens to display or not display the Film Speed and/or CM (thickness) screen fields when the generator is operated in APR mode. To change the APR Format setting, proceed as follows:
PRESS THIS KEY TO SELECT APR FORMAT SETTING
Figure 3-20. Choosing Language and Date Format Settings Press the key next to the APR Format field to scroll through available APR Format options: •
All Windows - APR Procedure Screens will display both Film Speed and CM (thickness) screen fields
•
No CM - APR Procedure Screens will not display the CM (thickness) screen field
•
No FS - APR Procedure Screens will not display the film speed screen field
•
No FS, No CM - APR Procedure Screens will not display the film speed nor the CM (thickness) screen fields
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-25
Chapter 3 Calibration
Language Setting The Service Settings Menu, shown below, displays the current language setting. The default language setting is English. To change the language setting, proceed as follows:
PRESS THIS KEY TO SELECT LANGUAGE
Figure 3-21. Choosing Language and Date Format Settings
NOTE
It may be preferable to set the Language to "English" prior to performing calibration procedures, then reset to the desired language after calibration is completed.
Press the key next to the Language field to scroll through available languages (English, French, Spanish, German, Italian, etc.) until desired language is displayed.
Revision W
3-26
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
Back Up MAS Setting The AEC Backup Setting screen, shown below, displays the current AEC backup mAs setting. Note that this is the system-wide backup mAs setting, and as such, will be effective on all AEC exposures. The procedure-specific back up time is set using the APR Edit function (refer to APR Edit chapter in the Operator Manual for instructions on setting individual procedure backup mAs). Note: The lower of the two backup settings will take precedence when
set to unequal values.
To change the system-wide backup mAs setting, proceed as follows:
USE THESE KEYS TO SET BACK UP MAS
Figure 3-22. Choosing an AEC Backup MAS Setting 1. Adjust the backup mAs setting using the appropriate keys as shown in Figure 3-22 above until desired backup mAs is displayed. The maximum back up mAs setting is 600; note that on certain model generators, such as the Stored Energy models, the maximum mAs capability of the generator is less than 600 mAs. Therefore, the backup mAs setting should not exceed the maximum MAS output of the generator. Refer to Chapter 1, SPECIFICATIONS for a list of the mAs ratings by model number. 2. To save the indicated backup mAs setting and return to the Service Settings Menu, press the key next to the Save field or the Previous Screen field.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-27
Chapter 3 Calibration
Generator Timeout Setting The Service Settings Menu, shown below, displays the current automatic generator power shutdown setting. The time period selected represents the amount of delay time, after which if no user activity is detected, the system automatically enters Automatic Power Stand By mode. This mode is entered to help reduce power consumption while protecting system electronics. To set the generator time-out setting, proceed as follows: PRESS PRESS THIS THIS KEY KEY TO TO SELECT SELECT GENERATOR GENERATOR TIMEOUT TIMEOUT SETTING SETTING
PRESS THIS KEY TO SELECT DATE FORMAT
Figure 3-23. Setting Generator Timeout Setting Press the key next to the Generator Timeout field to scroll through available time period settings (0, 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180 minutes) until desired setting is displayed. Note: Selecting "0" disables automatic timeout function. Date/Time Format Setting The Date Format field (see Figure 3-23) displays the current date/time format setting. To change the date/time format setting, proceed as follows: 1. Press the key next to the Date Format field to select either "US" (e.g., JUN 11,01 2:00 pm) or Int’l (e.g., 11 JUN 01 14:00) date/time format used for display of date and time on all applicable system screens. 2. To exit the screen and return to the Start Up Screen, press the key next to the Main field
Revision W
3-28
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
SYSTEM CALIBRATION CAUTION! Before calibrating unit, perform warm-up procedures recommended by tube manufacturer or the warm-up procedure described in Chapter 3 of the Operator’s Manual. Important! On generators that will be interfaced to a tomography system; Set Tomo Mode to "Off" during prior to performing generator calibration, then set Tomo Mode back to "On" following calibration. To access the system calibration functions, press the key next to the Calibration field in the Service Menu (see Figure 3-3). The Service Calibration menu displays, shown below:
Figure 3-24. Service Calibration Menu The Service Calibration menu provides access to the system's various calibration functions. The generator was pre-calibrated at the factory, however, the system will need to be re-calibrated to assure proper operation, verify compliance and set AEC optical density. These procedures should be performed in the order presented in this chapter. The following is a brief description of each of the Service Calibration Menu selections: •
Factory Reset: Accesses the Factory Reset Menu, which provides a list of resettable system calibration and configuration parameters including: » Apr (user-customized APR procedures) » Tube curves » AEC (AEC calibration values) » Sentence (Modified Sentences) » History (Error Log) » Objects (all other of the program variables and subroutines excluding the above parameters; includes kV, mA, and filament calibration values)
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-29
Chapter 3 Calibration
» All (all of the above) » Ship (Reserved for factory use only)
Figure 3-25. Factory Reset Menu When reset, the selected parameter(s) are returned to factory preset (default) values. Table 3-4 shows the system configuration default values. Factory Reset may be necessary following NVRAM replacement (on OCP Control Board AY40-004S1), following tube replacement, or when abnormal values or unusual text appear in any of the system’s screens. Note: The "Q-WARE" generator software application can be
used to make a back-up copy of the generator’s calibration values and edited APR techniques before performing a Factory Reset. This data can later be downloaded back to the generator following reset thereby eliminating the need to re-calibrate or re-program the generator, however, re-verification is required. Table 3-4. Factory Default System Settings Setting
Default
AEC
On
ROTOR TYPE
Rotor 60 Hz
DIGITAL RECEPTOR
None
NOTE
Following a Factory Reset, the KV, filament and MA Calibration procedures, described in this chapter, must be performed before using the system.
ION CHAMBERS (TABLE, WALL, WALL2, AUXILLIARY)
Revision W
3-30
DETECTORS
A=2 B=1 C=3
POLARITY
+
WALL RELAY
OFF
TABLE RELAY
OFF
INVERT
NO
SLOPE/LVL
SLOPE
WALL 40 FILM SCREEN
Wall 40"
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
Table 3-4. Factory Default System Settings Setting
Default
WALL 72 FILM SCREEN
Wall 72"
TABLE 40 FILM SCREEN
Table 40"
WALL2 40 FILM SCREEN
Wall 40"
AUXILLIARY FILM SCREEN
800 Speed
LANGUAGE
English
BACKUP MAS
600
GENERATOR TIMEOUT
60
DATE FORMAT
US
APR TECHNIQUES
Factory Values
•
KV Calibration: Accesses KV calibration function
•
Filament Offset: Accesses tube filament offset calibration function
•
MA Calibration: Accesses mA calibration function
•
AEC Calibration: Accesses the AEC optical density, Reciprocity, and AEC kVp calibration functions (active on systems equipped with AEC option only). Note that all of the AEC Calibrations must be performed for each table and/or film/screen combination used with the x-ray system. Selection of each film/screen type used with the system is explained in "SYSTEM SETTINGS" paragraph contained in this chapter.
•
Main: Returns to the Service Menu. This function is also provided in each of the calibration screens accessed from the Service Calibration
•
A/D Calibration: Accesses the analog-to-digital (A-D) converters calibration function
To enter any of the factory default settings, press the key next to the calibration function you want to access. The Next Calibrate and Previous Calibrate fields are provided in each of the calibration screens accessed from the Service Calibration menu. Pressing the key next to the Next Calibrate field advances the system to the next calibration function (menu). Pressing the key next to the Previous Calibrate field returns the system to the Service Calibration menu. The paragraphs that follow describe the procedures for performing each of the above calibration functions. Following initial system installation, these procedures should be performed in the order presented in this chapter.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-31
Chapter 3 Calibration
GENERAL CALIBRATION PROCEDURE NOTES WARNING! The following calibration procedures involve taking x-ray exposures. All personnel should be behind the protective barriers. X-rays can be dangerous unless proper precautions and procedures are adhered to. The following notes apply in general to all calibration procedures, including AEC calibration procedures. Please review these notes prior to performing calibration. •
The top right button typically is used to advance to the next step of a particular calibration procedure.
•
Use the button next to the Next Calibrate field to advance to the next calibration procedure.
•
Use the button next to the Prev Calibrate field to return to the previous calibration procedure.
•
In calibration procedures having multiple "steps", the last step is indicated when "Measure, Calibrate" appears in the top right screen field. Pressing the key next to "Measure, Calibrate" field saves the calibration values. After saving the calibration values, press either the Next Calibrate key to proceed with the next calibration procedure or Prev Calibrate key to return to the previous calibrate procedure. IMPORTANT! Following a calibration procedure, unless the "Measure, Calibrate" key is pressed, no change is made to the currently saved calibration value(s).
•
The screen always displays the correct KV, MA, time and thickness (in CM) value required for performing each calibration procedural step. Ensure the correct values are set prior to performing each procedural step.
•
Throughout AEC calibration, the film/screen being calibrated is displayed on every AEC calibration screen in the top left field.
•
When calibrating AEC using a wall stand mounted receptor, ensure that the x-ray beam is perpendicular to image receptor and that the correct ion chamber detector(s) is selected.
•
Upon completing calibration procedures, it is recommended that Q-Ware program be used to upload calibration data (and APR technique data if editing was performed) as a backup in case a problem occurs requiring recalibration of the generator. To obtain a copy of the Q-Ware program, contact Quantum Medical Imaging’s Customer Service Department. IMPORTANT! Use the same configuration of bucky, grid, ion chamber and film cassette/screen that will be used with the "Film/Screen" being calibrated.
Revision W
3-32
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
IMPORTANT! Always place a cassette in the holder when taking any measurements or when calibrating, even if the calibration step does not require a film to be exposed. Film Speed Setting on non-AEC Systems The following procedure applies only to generators not equipped with automatic exposure control (AEC) option. The factory default film speed setting for the wall 72", wall 40" and table 40" receptors is 400. If the facility uses a film with speed other than 400, it is necessary to set the generator for the appropriate film speed. Proceed as follows: 1. From the Service Calibration Menu (see Figure 3-24), press the key next to AEC Calibration field. The AEC Calibration Menu screen is displayed: FILM/ SCREEN COMBINATION SELECTION KEY
EDIT FILM SCREEN NAME KEY FILM SPEED ADJUSTMENT KEYS
Figure 3-26. AEC Calibration Menu 2. Using the up and down keys next to the film speed field, set the film speed to the desired value. 3. If desired, the film/screen combination name can be edited. For example, the system default "Wall 40" film/screen combination name may be changed to "Kodak", "AGFA", or to whatever text is required. For instructions on film/screen combination name editing, refer to "Editing a Film/ Screen Combination Name" procedure in the AEC calibration section of this chapter. 4. Repeat above steps for both wall and table receptors, as necessary.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-33
Chapter 3 Calibration
A/D Calibration The A/D (analog/digital converter) calibration utility is used to adjust and calibrate specific operating voltages within the x-ray generator against a traceable calibrated voltage measurement instrument, such as a DMM. Once A/D calibration has been performed, the A/D calibration utility may then be used as a diagnostic tool allowing the technician to "read" these voltage measurements without having to remove the cover from the generator cabinet and without connecting a meter. Table 3-5 shows the various voltage levels (with tolerances) that can be adjusted and calibrated using this utility, and it provides the location of the test point to which a calibrated voltmeter must be connected for measuring the actual voltage level: Table 3-5. A/D Calibration Voltages Voltage Level
Calibration Accuracy
Test Point Measurement Location
+400V Cathode
±8 VDC
+/- bus bars on Capacitor Bank next to Power Module A19 (left side looking into generator cabinet)
+400V Anode
±8 VDC
+/- bus bars on Capacitor Bank next to Power Module A18 (right side looking into generator cabinet)
+5VDC
±0.1 VDC
TP1 on Logic Board AY40-006S
+15VDC
±0.2 VDC
TP3 on KVP Control Board AY40-003S
-15VDC
±0.2 VDC
TP5 on KVP Control Board AY40-003S
+24VDC
±0.3 VDC
TP8 on Power Supply Board AY40-005T
+24V Brake
±0.3 VDC
Terminal TB2-1 on Interface Board AY40-023T (or AY40-034T)
The following procedure adjusts and calibrates the generator to verify accurate system measurement of selected operating voltages. The same procedure applies to any of the voltage levels available for selection. Voltage measurement accuracy is verified using your pre-calibrated voltmeter (traceable to NIST standard) as the benchmark. Once calibrated, the generator’s CPU continuously monitors these internal voltages and will terminate or not allow exposure if certain tolerances are exceeded.
Revision W
3-34
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
Proceed as follows:
VOLTAGE SELECTIONS VOLTAGE SELECTIONS
Figure 3-27. A/D Calibration Menu WARNING! The following procedure requires that power be applied to the generator. Extreme care must be exercised to ensure the safety of service or other personnel in the area. 1. In the A/D Calibration menu, shown in Figure 3-27, select a voltage level to calibrate (choices are 400V Cathode, +5 VDC, +15 VDC, -15 VDC, 400V Anode, +24 VDC, or +24 V Brake). The A/D calibration screen, such as the sample +15 VDC calibration screen shown in Figure 3-28, is displayed: VOLTAGE LEVEL READ BY GENERATOR INCREASE/ DECREASE VOLTAGE KEYS SAVE A/D CALIBRATION
Figure 3-28. Sample A/D Voltage Calibration Screen (+15 VDC is shown) 2. Verify the voltage displayed in the top center of the screen is the correct voltage level to calibrate. 3. Refer to Table 3-5 and connect a voltmeter to the test point corresponding to the voltage level selected for calibration.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-35
Chapter 3 Calibration
4. On the voltmeter, observe the measured voltage value. Ideally, the value appearing in the Value in Gen (top right field) will match the reading on the voltmeter. If not, adjust the value in the Measure #1 field up or down by pressing the key next to the up or down arrow, respectively, until the Measure #1 field is set to the value displayed on the voltmeter (to within Calibration Accuracy ranges shown in Table 3-5). Each time the key is pressed changes the voltage value up/down in one-tenth volt increments. 5. Press key next to the Save Calibrate field to save the calibration entry. 6. Press the key next to Previous Screen to return to the A/D Calibration menu.
Revision W
3-36
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
kV Calibration Function This procedure calibrates the generator to verify accurate system measurement of peak tube potential (kVp). The generator’s ability to measure peak tube potential accurately is verified using a pre-calibrated kVp meter (Dynalyzer or equivalent) as a benchmark. Access the KV Calibration Screen, shown below, and proceed as follows: CENTER DISPLAY BOX
PRESS TO PROCEED TO 100 KV CAL. 50 KV INCREASE/ DECREASE KEYS
Figure 3-29. KV Calibration Screen (50 kV Calibration) WARNING! To avoid injury to personnel, ensure that system power is removed prior to making and removing any electrical connections. 1. Connect a kVp bleeder tank in series between X-ray tube and the generator’s H.V. Transformer (A17), or use a non-invasive kVp meter. 2. Verify 50 KVP appears in the center display box of the KV Calibration Screen and First Measure appears in the top right field. 3. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA, 100 mS). 4. On the kVp meter, observe the measured kV value. (Ideally, this value should be 50 kVp.) 5. If not 50 kVp, adjust the value in the Measure KVP#1 field up or down by pressing the key next to the up or down arrow, respectively, until the Measure KVP#1 field is set to the value displayed on the kVp meter. Each time the key is pressed changes the kV value up/down in one-tenth increments.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-37
Chapter 3 Calibration
6. Press key next to the First Measure field to proceed to 100 kV calibration setting. The following screen should be displayed: SAVE KV CALIBRATION
100 KV INCREASE/ DECREASE KEYS
Figure 3-30. KV Calibration Screen (100 kV Calibration) 7.
Verify 100 KVP appears in the center display box and Measure, Calibrate appears in the top right field.
8. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 100 kVp, 200L mA, 100 mS). 9. On the kVp meter, observe the measured kV value. (Ideally, this value should be 100 kVp.) 10. If not 100 kVp, adjust value in Measure KVP#2 field up or down by pressing the key next to the up or down arrow, respectively, until Measure KVP#2 field is set to value displayed on kVp meter. Each time the key is pressed changes the KV value up/down in one-tenth increments. 11. Press key next to the Save Calibrate field to save the 50 and 100 kV calibration entries. The KV Calibration Screen (First Measure) should be displayed. 12. To proceed to filament calibration, press the key next to the Next Calibration field.
Revision W
3-38
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
Filament Offset Calibration This procedure establishes the filament current offset and gain corrections. Filament current measurement accuracy is verified using a pre-calibrated Dynalyzer (or equivalent), non-invasive kV meter, or mAs meter as a benchmark. Ensure precision of the measurement instrument is sufficient enough to assure generator accuracy requirements can be met. The Filament Offset Calibration procedure may be performed using an oscilloscope, however, it is not the preferred method. Using this method, the objective is to achieve the "flattest" possible large and small filament waveforms, with no spikes or peaks as shown in Figure 3-31 below.
Small Filament Before
After
FLAT CURVE, NO PEAKS
Large Filament Before
After
FLAT CURVE, NO PEAKS
Figure 3-31. Filament Offset Current Measurement (Using an Oscilloscope) Access the Filament Calibration Menu (shown in Figure 3-31) and proceed as follows:
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-39
Chapter 3 Calibration
WARNING! To avoid injury to personnel, ensure system power is removed prior to making and removing any electrical connections. 1. If using a Dynalyzer, a kVp bleeder tank should be connected in series between tube and High-Voltage (H.V.) Transformer A17. 2. If using a mAs meter, remove two (2) green/yellow wires marked "MAS METER", connected to A17P1-9 and A17P1-10, from the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure 3-32). Connect the mAs meter in series between removed wires. The MAS meter should remain connected throughout calibration. (Important: These wires must be re-connected when finished calibration.) MAS METER CONNECTION
MAS METER HOOK-UP WIRES (NORMAL POSITION) H.V. TANK (TOP VIEW)
MAS METER
GROUND STUD
MAS METER LEADS
GREEN/YELLOW WIRES (2X)
GREEN/YELLOW WIRES (2X) CONNECTOR A17P1
HIGH VOLTAGE TANK A17 (AY20-031 or AY20-032)
GENERATOR CABINET (PCB DOOR OPEN)
Figure 3-32. MAS Meter Connection
Revision W
3-40
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
3. If using an oscilloscope, connect the scope leads between test point TP7 on KVP Control Board A2 (AY40-003S) and ground. Set scope for 1.0 volt/ division, and 50 ms/division time base. This will give a 100 mA/volt equivalent for filament current measurement as shown in the sample waveforms in Figure 3-31. 4. Access the Small Filament Calibration Screen: SAVE SMALL FILAMENT CALIBRATION INCREASE/ DECREASE FILAMENT CURRENT KEYS
Figure 3-33. Filament Calibration Screen (Small Filament) 5. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box of the Filament Calibration Screen (i.e., 70 kVp, 75S mA, 15 msec). If using an oscilloscope, set time to 50 msec. 6. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or mAs meter, observe the measured current value. (Ideally, this value should be 75 mA or 1.125 mAs.) If using an oscilloscope, observe the small filament current pulse waveform for "flatness" (see Figure 3-31). 7.
If not 75 mA, or if waveform is not flat, (adjust the small filament offset value in the Small Filament field up or down (pressing up arrow increases mAs, pressing down arrow decreases mAs). Note: The DAC value displayed in the field adjacent to the up/down arrows increases as the mAs value decreases, and decreases as the mAs value increases. Retake exposure at same settings and adjust small filament offset value if necessary. Repeat this step until measured mA is 75, or until waveform is relatively flat.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-41
Chapter 3 Calibration
8. When measured mA is 75, or when waveform is sufficiently flat, press the key next to the Small Filament field. The large filament calibration screen is displayed: SAVE LARGE FILAMENT CALIBRATION
INCREASE/ DECREASE FILAMENT CURRENT KEYS
Figure 3-34. Filament Calibration Screen (Large Filament) 9. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box of the Filament Calibration Screen (i.e., 70 kVp, 300L mA, 15 msec). If using an oscilloscope, set time to 50 msec. 10. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or mAs meter, observe the measured current value. (Ideally, this value should be 300 mA or 4.5 mAs.) 11. If not 300 mA, or if waveform is not flat, adjust the large filament offset value in the Large Filament field up or down (up increases mA, down decreases mA). 12. Re-take exposure at same settings and adjust large filament offset value if necessary. Repeat this step until measured mA is 300, or until waveform is relatively flat. 13. When measured mA is 300, filament calibration is complete. 14. To proceed to mA calibration, press the key next to the Next Calibration field. Note: An error message appears if the filament current is set too low, which indicates the filament offset value for the filament being calibrated is set too high. If this occurs, increase the filament current by lowering the filament offset value (i.e., by pressing the Filament Small or Filament Large up arrow key).
Revision W
3-42
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
MA Calibration This procedure calibrates the generator to verify accurate system measurement of tube current (mA). Current measurement accuracy is verified using a pre-calibrated mAs meter (Dynalyzer or equivalent) as a benchmark. Ensure precision of the measurement instrument is sufficient enough to assure generator accuracy requirements can be met. An oscilloscope may be used for mA measurement, however, it will likely not be precise enough to assure generator mA accuracy. To use an oscilloscope for mA measurement, connect scope leads between test point TP7 on KVP Control Board A2 (AY40-003S1) and ground. Set scope for 1.0 volt/division, and 50 ms/division time base. This will give a 100 mA/volt equivalent for mA measurement (see Figure 3-35a for sample mA measurements using scope).
Figure 3-35a. Filament Offset Current Measurement Using an Oscilloscope Proceed as follows: WARNING! To avoid injury to personnel, ensure system power is removed prior to making and removing any electrical connections. 1. If not already done so, connect a kVp bleeder tank in series between tube and High-Voltage (H.V.) Transformer A17. If using a mAs meter, connect the mAs meter leads between pins A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 on H.V. Transformer A17. This connection is made by removing the two green/yellow wires connecting A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 to the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure 3-21) and connecting the removed wires to the mAs meter. (Note: The MAS meter should remain
connected throughout calibration. These wires must be re-connected when finished calibration.)
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-43
Chapter 3 Calibration
2. Verify 75S MA appears in the center display box of the MA Calibration menu and First Measure appears in the top right field. PROCEED TO 400L CALIBRATION
CENTER DISPLAY BOX
INCREASE/ DECREASE 75S MA KEYS
Figure 3-35. MA Calibration Screen (First Measure) 3. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 60 kVp, 75S mA, 100 mS). 4. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or on mAs meter, observe the measured mA value. (Ideally, this value should be 75 or 7.5 mAs.) 5. If not 75 mA, adjust the value in the Measure MA#1 field up or down by pressing the key next to the up or down arrow, respectively, until the Measure MA#1 field is set to the value displayed on the mAs meter. Each time the key is pressed changes the MA value up/down in one-tenth increments. 6. Press key next to the First Measure field to proceed to 400L mA calibration setting. The following menu should be displayed: SAVE MA CALIBRATION
INCREASE/ DECREASE 400L MA KEYS
Figure 3-36. MA Calibration Menu (Second Measure)
Revision W
3-44
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
7.
Verify 400L MA appears in the center display box and Measure, Calibrate appears in the top right field.
8. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 60 kVp, 400L mA, 100.0 mS). 9. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or on mAs meter, observe the measured mA value. (Ideally, this value should be 400 mA or 40 mAs.) 10. If not 400 mA, adjust the value in the Measure MA#2 field up or down by pressing the key next to the up or down arrow, respectively, until the Measure MA#2 field is set to the value displayed on the kVp meter. Each time the key is pressed changes the MA value up/down in one-tenth increments. 11. Press key next to the Save Calibrate field to save the 75S and 400L mA calibration entries. The MA Calibration Menu (First Measure) should be displayed. 12. Take 60 kVp, 75S mA, 100 ms and 60 kVp, 400L mA, 100 ms exposures. The measured kVp values should correspond with the indicated kVp settings within 3% tolerance; and the measured mA values should correspond with the indicated mA settings at least within 4%+1 mA. If not, repeat kVp and/or mA calibration as described in the previous paragraphs. Note: The Power Supply Board’s +48 VDC output may require adjusting (using potentiometer A6R17) up to +55 VDC (max.) in cases where long-length high tension cables are used and/or a heavy duty x-ray tube is installed. This can be determined by measuring the mA output (using a Dynalyzer or mAs meter), of an exposure taken at 40 - 50 kVp and the highest mA station available. The mA measured should be the same as the indicated mA (within specified tolerance). If mA output is too low, increase the +48 VDC voltage output as required, but do not exceed +55 VDC. 13. If the system is equipped with QG-AEC option, perform AEC Calibration procedures. Otherwise, calibration is complete. To return to the Service Calibration screen, press the key next to the Main field. CAUTION! If using a mAs meter, re-connect the green/yellow wire marked "MAS METER" to the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure 3-32).
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-45
Chapter 3 Calibration
AEC CALIBRATION IMPORTANT! Before performing each AEC calibration procedure, verify the correct Film/Screen is displayed on the calibration screen (shown in top left field). The Film/Screen setting is selected in the AEC Calibration Menu. Refer to Appendix A for instructions on AEC calibration of systems using a digital receptor (DR) or a computed radiographic (CR) film plate. The following calibration procedures must be performed on systems equipped with QG-AEC option (automatic exposure control). Each film/screen combination used with the system requires calibration for AEC in order to ensure that when a given film/screen combination is selected by the user, it produces films having a preset optical density, referred to as the "base optical density". The HF Series X-ray generator provides for calibration of up to seven different film/screen combinations (eight including "Digital" on systems with digital receptor enabled). Each of the image receptors used with the system can be configured to use a particular film/screen combination using the Service Settings Menu (see Figure 3-16). (Refer to SYSTEM SETTINGS paragraph in this chapter for instructions on system settings.) For example, when the operator presses the WALL key on the operator control panel and selects the WALL 72" receptor, the system can be programmed to use the "Wall 72"" designated film/screen combination (i.e., the film/screen type used with the wall stand at 72" SID). On the same system, a different film/screen type, designated as "Table 40" for example, could be configured for use with the TABLE receptor. Typically, on a system using a wall stand and radiographic table, three separate film/screen combinations are used: • • •
Wall 72" - Used when the operator selects wall receptor at 72 inch source-to-image distance (SID) Wall 40" - Used when the operator selects wall receptor at 40 inch source-to-image distance (SID) Table 40" - Used when the operator selects table receptor at 40 inch source-to-image distance (SID)
NOTE
The factory default Wall 72", Wall 40" and Table 40" film/screen combination names can be changed, if desired, using the Edit F/S Name utility provided on the AEC Calibration Menu. This applies to the factory default "100 Speed", "200 Speed", "800 Speed", and "Film/Screen 7" film/screen combination names as well.
On generators equipped with "Universal" type AEC (AEC Board A11 AY40-027S installed), two additional image receptors and their corresponding film/screens (default names are "WALL2" and "AUXILLIARY") can also be configured similar to those listed above. It is important to note that each different type of film/screen combination used with the receptors be calibrated in accordance with the AEC Calibration procedures described in this chapter. The design of the HF Series x-ray generator assumes that a limited number of films and screens are used in a facility (up to seven). Whether or not AEC is used, the only method of specifying film speed is in the AEC Calibration Menu (see Figure 3-40). With seven available film/screens, the operator should have a sufficient selection of film/screen options for use with the system.
Revision W
3-46
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
The AEC Calibration Menu To access the AEC Calibration function, press the key next to the AEC Calibration field in the Service Calibration Menu (see Figure 3-24). The AEC Calibration menu displays: COPY FILM SCREEN KEY
FILM/ SCREEN COMBINATION SELECTION KEY
EDIT FILM SCREEN NAME KEY FILM SPEED ADJUSTMENT KEYS
Figure 3-37. AEC Calibration Menu NOTE: In normal AEC mode, select the appropriate receptor (Wall 72", Wall 40", or Table 40") prior to selection of a film/screen combination for AEC calibration. The AEC Calibration menu provides access to the system's various AEC calibration functions, briefly described as follows: • Film Screen/Combination Selection Key - Selects the film/ screen combination you want to calibrate (system default choices are Wall 72", Wall 40", Table 40", 100 Speed, 200 Speed, 800 Speed, Film/Screen 7, and DIGITAL (if "Digital Receptor" is enabled in the Service Configuration Menu) • AEC OD Calibration - Calibrates the optical density for the currently selected film/screen and ion chamber combination • Reciprocity Calibration - Calibrates the reciprocity failure law correction factor for the currently selected film/screen and ion chamber combination • AEC KV Calibration - Calibrates the tube voltage settings used in conjunction with the currently selected film/screen and ion chamber combination • Main - Returns to the Service Calibration Menu (see Figure 3-27) • Copy Film/Screen - Accesses the Copy Film/Screen Menu. The Copy Film/Screen Menu is a utility that enables AEC calibration data to be copied from one calibrated film/screen combination
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-47
Chapter 3 Calibration
setting to another (for example, it is useful for copying "Wall 40" to "Table 40 " film/screen combination on systems configured with both a wall stand and table). • Edit F/S Name - Provides editing utilities for modifying the name of a film/screen combination • FILM SPEED - Selects the film speed of the currently selected film screen combination. True speed may be set from "50" to "1600" in increments of 10. AEC Calibration Procedures Calibration of film/screen combinations should be performed in the following sequence, assuming a typical radiographic system having one ion chamber in the wall stand (72" and 40" SID), and a second ion chamber used in a radiographic table (40" SID). If the system is using a wall stand and 200 and 400 speed films, calibrate the Wall 72" film screen combination using 200 speed film first, followed by Wall 72" using 400 speed film. If the system only has a table receptor, perform all AEC calibrations (i.e., ion chamber balance, AEC MAS balance, AEC optical density, Reciprocity, and AEC KVP procedures). If the generator is interfaced with a digital receptor (DR system) or computed radiography system (CR System), refer to Appendix A, AEC CALIBRATION WITH DIGITAL RECEPTOR OR CR FILM PLATE for AEC calibration procedures. IMPORTANT NOTE: Typically, the AEC calibration parameters for each of the various receptors used with the generator are quite similar. Therefore, the HF Series generator’s calibration data "COPY" function can be used to copy the calibration parameters from one receptor (i.e., a calibrated receptor) to the other receptors. For example, after completing AEC calibration of 72" Wall film/screen, the "COPY" function can be used to copy the 72" film/screen calibration data to 40" Wall film/screen.
NOTE
The film speed setting affects the mAs setting used with non-AEC APR techniques. With the film speed set for 400, for example, assume an APR technique is programmed to use 10 mAs. If the film speed is changed to 100, the system automatically adjusts the same APR technique to now use 40 mAs (4 x 10 mAs = 40 mAs).
After copying AEC data, the only further AEC calibration usually required for the 40" film/screen is performing AEC OD Calibration to set the "AEC Ref" value. Similarly, the 40" Wall film/screen calibration data can be copied to the 40" Table, however, the table ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer must be adjusted as required. Be sure to verify the AEC films for each SID/receptor meet applicable regulatory agency requirements. If required, further optical density accuracy can be attained by performing the "AEC KV Calibration" procedure.
Revision W
3-48
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
AEC Ion Chamber Balancing (Three-field Chambers) On systems using a three-field ion chamber, the chamber detectors must be balanced prior to performing AEC calibration (refer to the ion chamber manufacturer’s instruction manual). When balanced, the mAs will be approximately the same (±5%) for exposures taken using any of the three chambers, or with two or more chambers selected simultaneously. This procedure must be performed on each ion chamber used in the system (for example, both table and wall ion chambers when equipped with two). Before proceeding, check that the ion chamber detectors have been correctly configured so when the chamber select keys on the operator control panel are pressed, the appropriate ion chamber detector is enabled. If not, refer to "Table/Wall Ion Chamber Configuration Screens" procedure described previously in this chapter and re-configure. Proceed as follows: 1. If not already done so, a kVp bleeder tank should be connected in series between tube and High-Voltage (H.V.) Transformer A17. If using a mAs meter, connect the mAs meter between pins A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 on H.V. Transformer A17. 2. Access Service Settings Menu (see Figure 3-16) and select Back Up Time/MAS. 3.
In AEC Backup Setting screen (see Figure 3-22), make a note of the Backup mAs setting, then change the Backup MAS to "40".
4. Press the AEC Mode key on the operator control panel to enter AEC mode. 5. Using a lead sheet, cover the UPPER RIGHT and CENTER ion chamber detectors. 6. Place 20 CM acrylic over UPPER LEFT ion chamber detector. 7. Set OCP for 100 KV, 200L MA, select the UPPER LEFT ion chamber detector and take an exposure. Note the measured mAs reading. 8. Repeat above steps with the CENTER ion chamber detector selected and UPPER LEFT and UPPER RIGHT detectors covered with lead. The measured mAs reading should be within 5% of the mAs reading noted in the previous step. If not, adjust the CENTER detector gain potentiometer located on the ion chamber amplifier (refer to ion chamber manufacturer’s documentation for details), re-take exposure and verify it is within tolerance. Repeat as necessary. 9. Access the Service Settings Menu and reset Backup mAs to original setting noted previously.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-49
Chapter 3 Calibration
NOTE: If the system is equipped with "universal" type AEC (i.e., AEC Board A11 is part number AY40-027S), and the ion chamber is "level" type (i.e., Siemens), adjust the appropriate detector gain potentiometer on AY40-027S in accordance with the table below: Table 3-6. Universal AEC Board A11 Detector Gain Adjustment Potentiometers (Siemens Ion Chamber Only) ION CHAMBER
DETECTOR
AEC BOARD A11 (AY40-027S) POTENTIOMETER
TABLE
1
R61
TABLE
2
R63
TABLE
3
R66
WALL#1
1
R54
WALL#1
2
R55
WALL#1
3
R56
WALL#2
1
R53
WALL#2
2
R58
WALL#2
3
R57
10. Repeat above steps with UPPER RIGHT ion chamber detector selected and UPPER LEFT and UPPER CENTER detectors covered with lead. The measured mAs reading should be within 5% of the mAs reading noted in the previous step. If not, adjust the UPPER RIGHT detector gain potentiometer, re-take exposure and verify it is within tolerance. Repeat as necessary. 11. Access Service Settings Menu and select Back Up Time/MAS. Return the AEC Backup Setting to desired back up mAs.
Revision W
3-50
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
AEC MAS Balance Verification
NOTE
To avoid reciprocity compensation, the exposures for mAs balance verification ideally should not exceed 100 ms.
The generator AEC mAs balance was pre-calibrated at the factory. However, verification of AEC mAs balance assures AEC calibration accuracy. When balanced, the mAs at the specified exposures will be approximately the same (±6%). This procedure only needs to be performed once prior to AEC calibration of the film/screen combination(s) used with the system. Proceed as follows: 1. If not already done so, connect a kVp bleeder tank in series between tube and High-Voltage (H.V.) Transformer A17. If using a mAs meter, connect the mAs meter between pins A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 on H.V. Transformer A17. This connection is made by removing the two green/yellow wires connecting A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 to the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure 3-32) and connecting the removed wires to the mAs meter. (Note: These wires must be reconnected when finished calibration.) 2. Place 20 cm of acrylic in the X-ray beam. (Where practical, adjust acrylic thickness to obtain approximately 100 millisecond exposures.) 3. If calibrating a" level" type ion chamber, ensure all three ion chamber detectors are selected. 4. Press the AEC mode key on the operator control panel. 5. Set the operator control panel for 110 kVp (100 kVp if calibrating a "level" type (Siemens) ion chamber - requires AY40-027S AEC board), 75S mA and take an exposure. 6. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or mAs meter, note the measured mAs value. 7. Set the operator control panel for 110 kVp (100 kVp if calibrating a "level" type (Siemens) ion chamber - requires AY40-027S AEC board) and the highest available mA station. Take an exposure. 8. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or mAs meter, note the measured mAs value. 9. The mAs values noted must be within ±5%. If not, adjustment of the dV/dt potentiometer on AEC Board A11 is necessary: • If the generator is equipped with "standard" type AEC (i.e., AEC Board A11 is part number AY40-031S), adjust potentiometer A11R12 to increase or decrease the mAs value.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-51
Chapter 3 Calibration
• If the generator is equipped with "universal" type AEC (i.e., AEC Board A11 is part number AY40-027S), and the ion chamber is "level" type (i.e., Siemens) , adjust potentiometer A11R82 to increase or decrease the mAs value. • If the generator is equipped with "universal" type AEC (i.e., AEC Board A11 is part number AY40-027S), and the ion chamber is "slope" type (i.e., AID), adjust potentiometer A11R87 to increase or decrease the mAs value. 10. Re-take exposure at the above settings. Repeat until the two measured values are within range. 11. Take an exposure at 110 kVp (100 kVp if calibrating a "level" type (Siemens) ion chamber), 75S mA, 10 cm. Verify mAs value is within ±5% of previous measurements. 12. Take an exposure at 110 kVp (100 kVp if calibrating a "level" type (Siemens) ion chamber), a mid-range mA value, 10 cm. Verify mAs value is within ±5% of previous measurements. CAUTION! If using a mAs meter, re-connect the green/yellow wire marked "MAS METER" to the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure 3-32). Editing a Film/Screen Combination Name The system default Film/Screen Combination names are: Wall 72", Wall 40", Table 40", 100 Speed, 200 Speed, 800 Speed, Film/Screen7, and DIGITAL (if "Digital Receptor" is enabled in the Service Configuration Menu). These names, however, can be changed to suit individual requirements. The following procedure describes the steps necessary to edit the name of a film/screen combination using the "Edit F/S Name" utility. Proceed as follows: 1. If not already done so, access the AEC Calibration Menu (see Figure 3-37). 2. Press the key next to the "Film/Screen" field (top left key) until the desired film/screen combination is displayed. The possible default selections are "Wall 72", "Wall 40"", "Table 40", "100 Speed", "200 Speed", "800 Speed", "Film 7", and "Digital" (if "Digital Receptor" is enabled in the Service Configuration Menu).
Revision W
3-52
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
3. Press the key adjacent to the Edit F/S Name field. The film/screen name Edit Sentence screen appears: USE THIS KEY TO INSERT SELECTED CHARACTER
USE THESE KEYS TO SELECT CHARACTER
USE THESE KEYS TO SELECT CHARACTER POSITION USE THIS KEY TO DELETE SELECTED CHARACTER
CENTER DISPLAY BOX (SHOWS CURRENT FILM/SCREEN NAME)
Figure 3-38. Sample Film/Screen Name Edit Sentence Screen 4. Use the up and down keys next to the Sentence Position field to select the location to insert, replace or delete a character. For example, if the text string "Wall 40" is displayed in the center display box as shown in the sample screen above, choosing character location "0" selects the letter "W", location "1" selects the letter "a", and so on. Note that the character in the selected location appears in the Character field. 5. To delete the selected character, press the key next to the Delete Character field. To insert a new character or to replace the selected character with a new character, use the up and down keys next to the Character field to scroll through all available alphanumeric characters (begins with a "no character" or blank space) until the character you want appears in the Character field window. To insert the selected character in the position chosen, press the key next to the Insert Character field. To replace the character in the selected location with the new character, press the key next to the Replace Character field. 6. When done editing the film/screen name, select Previous, Save to save the new settings and return to the AEC Calibration Menu or select Previous, No Save to ignore the changes and return to the AEC Calibration Menu. To restore film/screen name to the factory default name, press the key next to the Factory Reset field.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-53
Chapter 3 Calibration
AEC Optical Density Calibration Procedure This procedure calibrates the generator’s AEC system to a user-selectable optical density setting (e.g., 1.3). When calibrating the first film/screen combination, which should be the slowest speed film and/or largest SID, set "AEC Ref" to 2000, and adjust the MASTER GAIN potentiometer on the ion chamber for desired optical density. Proceed as follows: An AEC Calibration Worksheet is provided in Table 3-8 for recording calibration data. Table 3-7. AEC Calibration Procedure Sequence
Revision W
3-54
FILM/SCREENS TO BE CALIBRATED
REQUIRED AEC CALIBRATION PROCEDURES/SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
WALL STAND 72" SID FILM/SCREEN (SLOWEST SPEED, LARGEST SID)
1. Perform "Ion Chamber Balancing" procedure. 2. Perform "AEC MAS Balance" procedure for wall stand ion chamber. 3. Perform "AEC Optical Density (OD) Calibration": a. Set desired "base" optical density b. Set "AEC Ref" to 2000. c. Adjust ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer until base optical density is achieved in developed films. 4. Perform "Reciprocity Calibration". 5. Perform "AEC KV Calibration".
WALL STAND 40" SID FILM/SCREEN
1. Copy "Wall 72" film/screen to "Wall 40". 2. Perform "AEC Optical Density (OD) Calibration", however, DO NOT re-adjust the ion chamber MASTER GAIN potentiometer. Adjust "AEC Ref" to obtain desired (set) optical density. 3. Perform "Reciprocity Calibration". 4. Perform "AEC KV Calibration".
TABLE 40" SID FILM/ SCREEN
1. If system includes a wall stand, copy "Wall 40" film/screen to "Table 40". 2. Perform "Ion Chamber Balancing" procedure for table ion chamber. 3. Perform "AEC Optical Density (OD) Calibration": a. Set desired "base" optical density b. Set "AEC Ref" to 2000. c. Adjust ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer until base optical density is achieved in developed films. 4. Perform "Reciprocity Calibration". 5. Perform "AEC KV Calibration".
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
Table 3-8. AEC Calibration Worksheet Film/Screen Combination:
Table 40
Wall 40
Wall 72
Other1
Other2
AEC OD CALIBRATION Setting:
50 kVp, 200L mA, 5 cm
Optical Density: AEC Ref. RECIPROCITY Setting:
First Cal. - 50 kVp, 400L mA, 15 cm
Optical Density: Setting:
Middle Cal. - 50 kVp, 75S mA, 15 cm
Optical Density: Setting:
Save Cal. - 50 kVp, 25S mA, 15 cm
Optical Density: AEC KV CALIBRATION Setting:
Step 1 - 50 kVp, 200L mA, 5 cm
Optical Density: Step 2 - 60 kVp, 200L mA, 10 cm
Setting: Optical Density: Setting:
Step 3 - 80 kVp, 200L mA, 15 cm
Optical Density: Setting:
Step 4 - 100 kVp, 200L mA, 20 cm
Optical Density: Setting:
Step 5 - 110 kVp, 200L mA, 25 cm
Optical Density: Setting:
Step 6 - 120 kVp, 200L mA, 30 cm
Optical Density: Setting:
*Step 7 - 130 kVp, 200L mA, 30 cm
Optical Density: Setting:
*Step 8 - 140 kVp, 200L mA, 30 cm
Optical Density: * Only required on 150 kVp systems
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-55
Chapter 3 Calibration
1. Place a film cassette in the tray and collimate down to film size. 2. If not already done so, access the AEC Calibration Menu (see Figure 3-37). 3. Press the key next to the Film/Screen Combination field (upper left field) to select a film/screen combination to calibrate. Verify the receptor in which the film cassette is inserted is selected as indicated on the AEC Calibration Menu screen. 4. The FILM SPEED field shows the current film speed setting for the selected film/screen combination. To select a different film speed, press the up or down keys next to the FILM SPEED field until the desired film speed setting is displayed. 5. When film/screen combination name and film speed settings are correct, press the key next to the AEC OD Calibration field to proceed with AEC Calibration. The AEC Optical Density Calibration Screen, shown below, is displayed:
AEC REF ADJUSTMENT KEYS
BASE OPTICAL DENSITY SELECT KEYS
Figure 3-39. AEC Optical Density Calibration Screen 6. This screen is used to calibrate the selected film/screen combination to a user defined optical density setting (e.g., 1.30). Set the receptor and ion chamber detector selections to those that will be used with this film/screen combination and ensure x-ray tube is at correct SID. Ensure the ion chamber has been balanced. 7. Press the up or down key located next to the Optical Density field until the desired "base" optical density setting is displayed. (Note: The "base optical density" setting establishes the optical density of the films produced when the operator selects this film/screen combination in either APR AEC or AEC mode.)
Revision W
3-56
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
8. If the selected film/screen combination is the first one to be calibrated with the system (if so, it should be combination having slowest speed and/or largest SID), perform the following steps: a. Verify the AEC Ref field is set to 2000. If not, use the up and down keys next to the AEC Ref field to set the AEC Ref value to "2000". b. If not already done so, set the Optical Density value to the desired film optical density value (for example, 1.30). c. Place 5 CM of acrylic in the X-ray beam. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA). d. Develop film and measure optical density using a calibrated densitometer. e. If the system is equipped with AEC Board A11 part number AY40-031S, proceed as follows: i. If the measured optical density corresponds with base optical density setting, press the Next Calibrate key to save the setting and proceed to Reciprocity Calibration. If not, adjust potentiometer A11R22 (if calibrating the table receptor) or A11R23 (if calibrating the wall receptor), and repeat exposure. Continue until the measured optical density equals the base optical density setting (at least to within 5% of base optical density setting). ii. If the measured optical density still does not equal the Base Optical Density setting, set A11R22 or A11R23 to mid-range, then adjust the ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer until roughly the desired optical density of film is obtained. Further fine-tuning can then be achieved by adjusting potentiometer A11R22 (table) or A11R23 (wall) as described in the previous step. NOTE: If the measured optical density still does not equal the Base Optical Density setting even with the ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer set to maximum gain position, increase each chamber detector gain and perform the "AEC MAS Balance Verification" procedure. Repeat AEC Optical Density calibration. If the measured optical density still does not equal the Base Optical Density setting after adjusting the MASTER GAIN and gain of individual detectors, reduce the AEC Reference until you obtain the desired optical density. f.
If the system is equipped with AEC Board A11 part number AY40-027S, proceed as follows:
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-57
Chapter 3 Calibration
i. If the measured optical density corresponds with base optical density setting, press the Next Calibrate key to save the setting and proceed to Reciprocity Calibration. If not, adjust potentiometer A11R77 (if calibrating the table receptor) or A11R79 (if calibrating the wall receptor), and repeat exposure. Continue until the measured optical density equals the base optical density setting (at least to within 5% of base optical density setting). ii. If the measured optical density still does not equal the Base Optical Density setting, set A11R77 or A11R79 to mid-range, then adjust the ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer until roughly the desired optical density of film is obtained. Further fine-tuning can then be achieved by adjusting potentiometer A11R77 (table) or A11R79 (wall) as described in the previous step. NOTE: If the measured optical density still does not equal the Base Optical Density setting even with the ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer set to maximum gain position, increase each chamber detector gain and perform the "AEC MAS Balance Verification" procedure. Repeat AEC Optical Density calibration. If the measured optical density still does not equal the Base Optical Density setting after adjusting the MASTER GAIN and gain of individual detectors, reduce the AEC Reference until you obtain the desired optical density. 9. If the selected film/screen combination is not the first one to be calibrated with the system, perform the following steps: a. Using the up and down keys next to the Optical Density field, set the optical density value to the desired film optical density value (for example, 1.30). This is referred to as the "base optical density" for this film/screen combination. b. Place 5 CM of acrylic in the X-ray beam. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA). c. Develop film and measure optical density using a calibrated densitometer. d. If the measured optical density corresponds with base optical density setting, press the Next Calibrate key to save the setting and proceed to Reciprocity Calibration. If film density is too low, press the AEC Ref up arrow key and increase AEC Ref value, then repeat exposure. If density is too high, press the AEC Ref down arrow key and decrease AEC Ref value, then repeat expo-
Revision W
3-58
NOTE
The series of AEC optical density measurements should be repeated as many times as required until optical density is sufficiently accurate to meet regulatory and facility requirements.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
sure. Continue until the measured optical density equals the base optical density setting (at least to within 5% of base optical density setting). 10. Press the key next to the Next Calibrate field to advance to Reciprocity Calibration. IMPORTANT! To ensure AEC optical density is correctly calibrated to the desired "base" optical density setting, either the AEC Ref value must be adjusted to obtain the desired base optical density (which is verified in the exposed film using a densitometer) or the Optical Density setting in the AEC Optical Density Calibration Menu must be set to the actual measured film density. For example, the calibrator would like the system AEC optical density setting to be "1.30". The calibrator must then adjust the "AEC Ref" value until the actual measured optical density of the film is 1.30. However, if the actual measured optical density is 1.29 and you decide not to continue to adjust the AEC Ref to achieve exactly 1.30 film optical density, then change the Optical Density setting in the AEC Optical Density Calibration Menu to "1.29". Note that 1.29 is now the "base" AEC optical density for the film/screen being calibrated.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-59
Chapter 3 Calibration
Reciprocity Calibration Procedure The Reciprocity Calibration Screen, shown below, is used to establish reciprocity failure compensation. The image receptor and chamber field settings remain the same as those used in the AEC Optical Density procedure. This procedure requires three exposures; the first at approximately 100200 milliseconds, the second at approximately one second and the third at approximately three seconds. The amount of acrylic specified in the following steps (i.e., 15 CM) should give appropriate exposure times for 40 inch SID, 400 speed film. However, the amount of acrylic may need to be adjusted for other film/screen combinations to compensate for differences in SID and/or film speed. For example, to calibrate at 72 inch SID, the amount of acrylic would be reduced to 10 CM.
NOTE
Reciprocity Calibration must be performed for each film/ screen combination used with system.
ENTER OD MEASUREMENT KEY MEASURED OPTICAL DENSITY KEYS BASE OPTICAL DENSITY SETTING
Figure 3-40. Reciprocity Calibration Screen Proceed as follows: 1. Place a film cassette in the tray and collimate down to film size. 2. Place 15 cm of acrylic in the X-ray beam. 3. Verify the receptor in which the film cassette is inserted is selected as indicated on the AEC Reciprocity Calibration screen. 4. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 50 kVp, 400L mA). 5. Develop the film and measure the optical density using a calibrated densitometer. 6. Press the up or down key located next to the Measured OD field until the optical density value displayed equals the measured optical density value (the Measured OD up arrow key increases the optical density value and the Measured OD down arrow key decreases the optical density value).
Revision W
3-60
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
7. Press the key next to the First Cal field to save the first (50 kVp, 400L mA) reciprocity calibration point entry. The Reciprocity Calibration screen is updated for the middle reciprocity calibration point. 8. Place a film cassette in the tray. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 50 kVp, 75S mA). 9. Press the up or down key located next to the Measured OD field until the optical density value displayed equals the measured optical density value. 10. Press the key next to the Middle Cal field to save the middle (50 kVp, 75S mA) reciprocity calibration point entry. The Reciprocity Calibration screen is updated for the final reciprocity calibration point. 11. Place a film cassette in the tray. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 50 kVp, 25S mA). 12. Press the up or down key located next to the Measured OD field until the optical density value displayed equals the measured optical density value. 13. Press the key next to the Save Calibrate field to save the calibration data for the 50 kVp, 25S mA reciprocity calibration point. 14. Press the key next to the Next Calibrate field.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-61
Chapter 3 Calibration
AEC KV Calibration Procedure The AEC KV Calibration screen, shown below, is used to calibrate the tube voltage to the "base optical density" setting. There are a total of six kV calibration points for a 125 kV system (50, 60, 80, 100, 110, and 120 kV); 150 kV systems require an additional two kV calibration points (130 and 140 kV). The image receptor and chamber field settings remain the same as those used in the Reciprocity Calibration procedure. KVP MEASURE SELECT FIELD MEASURED OPTICAL DENSITY KEYS BASE OPTICAL DENSITY SETTING
Figure 3-41. AEC KV Calibration Screen Proceed as follows: 1. Place indicated thickness of acrylic (5 CM for first calibration point) in the X-ray beam. 2. Place a film cassette in the tray and collimate down to film size. 3. Verify the receptor in which the film cassette is inserted is selected as indicated on the AEC KV Calibration screen. 4. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA). 5. Develop the film and measure the optical density using a calibrated densitometer. 6. Press the up or down key located next to the Measured OD field until the optical density value displayed equals the measured optical density value (the Measured OD up arrow key increases the optical density value and the Measured OD down arrow key decreases the optical density value). DO NOT TAKE ANY FURTHER EXPOSURES AT THIS SETTING.
NOTE Calibration of the first step (50 kVp) is not required as long as AEC Optical Density Calibration procedure in the previous steps was performed prior to AEC KV Calibration. A verification that the "Measured OD" is the same as the "Optical Density" setting is all that is required.
7. Press the key next to the Measure OD field to save the first kV calibration point entry (50 kV, 5 CM). The AEC KV Calibration screen is updated for the next kV calibration point (60 kV, 10 CM).
Revision W
3-62
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
NOTE
The series of AEC kV calibration exposures and optical density measurements may be repeated as many times as desired to improve calibration precision.
8. Repeat the previous steps for the 60, 80, 100, 110, 120, and, if 150 kV system, 130 and 140 kV calibration points, placing the specified thickness of acrylic in the x-ray beam as indicated on the AEC KV Calibration screen for each kV calibration point. 9. Upon completion of final kV calibration point (i.e., 120 kV on 125 kV systems, 140 kV on 150 kV systems), press key next to the Measure OD field. The field will now display Save Calibrate. Press this key again to save the calibration data for the final kV calibration point.
IMPORTANT! Data will be lost if Save Calibrate is not pressed! 10. Press the key next to the Next Calibrate field to return to the AEC Calibration menu (see Figure 3-37). 11. The series of six AEC KV calibration exposures (with optical density measurements) may be repeated as many times as desired to improve calibration accuracy. Repeating is recommended if the desired and measured optical densities differ significantly. 12. This completes AEC calibration for this particular film/screen combination. Repeat AEC calibration procedures for all additional film/ screen combinations that will be used with the system.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-63
Chapter 3 Calibration
Optical Density Accuracy Verification Take several sample AEC films to verify optical density meets facility and/ or applicable statutory or regulatory requirements (or at least within ±10% of desired (base) optical density). If not repeat AEC Optical Density and KV calibrations. Copy Film/Screen Utility On the AEC Calibration Menu (see Figure 3-37), an AEC calibration data copy utility is provided (Copy Film/Screen key). Following calibration of the first film/screen combination, stored AEC calibration data, such as the kV curves and AEC reference data, can be copied from the first film/ screen combination to other film/screen combinations used with the system to reduce calibration time. For example, if the preceding calibration was done for the wall stand 40 inch SID film/screen combination (i.e., Wall 40"), calibration data can be copied to the radiographic table’s 40 inch SID film/screen combination (i.e., Table 40") using the Copy Film/Screen utility. Although all required AEC Calibration procedures must still be performed, this will set the calibration values for the Table 40" film/screen combination to fairly accurate settings, thereby reducing the number of exposures required for calibration. The Copy Film/Screen utility is most beneficial when the film screen combination being copied to has the same cassette screen, film speed, ion chamber and grid as the film/screen combination it is being copied from. Nevertheless, calibration is likely to be expedited even when one or more of these elements differ. Proceed as follows: 1. If not displayed, access the AEC Calibration Menu (see Figure 3-37). 2. Press the key next to the Film/Screen field (upper left field) until the the film/screen combination you want to copy calibration data to is displayed. 3. Press the key next to the Copy Film/Screen field.
Revision W
3-64
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
4. The Copy/Film Screen screen appears: DISPLAYS DESTINATION FILM/SCREEN NAME PRESS THIS KEY TO SELECT THE FILM/SCREEN TO COPY CALIBRATION DATA FROM
Figure 3-42. Copy Film/Screen Screen 5. Press the key next to the "From" field until the name of the film/ screen combination from which calibration data will be copied appears. CAUTION! Before proceeding, check to make sure the "from" and "to" film/screen copy selections are correct. Selecting Copy Film/Screen as directed in the next step causes existing calibration data for the film/screen being copied "to" to be overwritten with calibration data of the "from" film/screen. 6. Press the key next to the Copy Film/Screen field. All AEC calibration data is now copied from the Wall 40" film/screen combination to the Table 40" film/screen combination. To abort without copying, press the key next to the MAIN field. The AEC Calibration Menu is displayed. IMPORTANT NOTES: 1. Upon completing calibration procedures, it is recommended that the Q-Ware program be used to upload calibration data (and APR technique data, if APR editing was performed) as a backup in case a problem occurs that requires re-calibration of the generator. To obtain a copy of the QWare program, contact Quantum Medical Imaging’s Customer Service Department. 2. Be sure to only use calibrated film/screens in all programmed APR procedures. If the APR default film screen is different than the calibrated film screen, the procedure must be edited to use the calibrated film screen.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-65
Chapter 3 Calibration
NON-AEC REPRODUCIBILITY VERIFICATION 1. Set the Dynalyzer (or equivalent) for 75% trigger level on kVp. Ensure that the meter is set to measure mR. 2. Set the generator Operator Control Panel to Manual mode, 45 kV, 100 milliseconds exposure time, Normal Density. 3. Using Table 3-9 below, locate the model number of this generator and set the Operator Control Panel to the maximum mA setting shown in "SAMPLE 1 mA" column (large filament), then take 10 consecutive exposures recording the measured mR values in Non-AEC Reproducibility Data Sheet Table 3-10. Table 3-9. Reproducibility Verification - mA Setting by Model SAMPLE 1 mA
SAMPLE 2 mA
SAMPLE 1 mA
SAMPLE 2 mA
QG-20-SE
250
200
QG-40-2
500
400
QG-25
400
320
QG-40-3
500
400
QG-25-5
400
320
QG-40-SE
450
400
QG-32
500
400
QG-40-5
500
400
QG-32-2
500
400
QG-50
650
500
QG-32-3
500
400
QG-50-2
650
500
QG-32-SE
400
320
QG-50-SE
500
600
QG-32-5
500
400
QG-65
800
650
QG-40
500
400
QG-80
800
650
MODEL
MODEL
4. After the tenth exposure, select (coefficient of variation) COEFF VAR on Dynalyzer; reading must be less than or equal to 0.05. If a Dynalyzer is not used, calculate the C.O.V. (coefficient of variation) according to the following: C=
s X
=
1 X
n
i=1
(xi - x)2 n-1
1/2
Where C= Coefficient of Variation s = standard deviation x = Mean value of mR readings xi = ith observation sampled n = number of observations sampled
Revision W
3-66
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 3 Calibration
AEC REPRODUCIBILITY VERIFICATION (ONLY PERFORM ON UNITS EQUIPPED WITH QG-AEC OPTION) 1. Set the Dynalyzer (or equivalent) for 75% trigger level on kVp. Ensure that the meter is set to measure mR. 2. Place 10 CM of acrylic in the X-ray field, and set the generator Operator Control Panel to AEC mode, 45 kV, Normal Density. 3. Using Table 3-9, locate the model number of this generator and set the Operator Control Panel to the maximum mA setting shown in "SAMPLE 1 mA" column (large filament), then take 10 consecutive exposures recording the measured mR values in AEC Reproducibility Data Sheet Table 3-11. 4. After the tenth exposure, select (coefficient of variation) COEFF VAR on Dynalyzer; reading must be less than or equal to 0.05. If a Dynalyzer is not used, calculate the C.O.V. (coefficient of variation) as above. NON-AEC LINEARITY VERIFICATION 1. Set the Dynalyzer (or equivalent) for 75% trigger level on kVp. Ensure that the meter is set to measure mR. 2. Set the generator Operator Control Panel to Manual mode, 50 kV (60kV if 150kV, max output Generator), 100 milliseconds exposure time, Normal Density. 3. Using Table 3-9, locate the model number of the generator and set the Operator Control Panel to the mA setting shown in "SAMPLE 1 mA" column (large filament), then take 10 consecutive exposures recording the measured mR and mAs values in Non-AEC Linearity Data Table 3-12. 4. Set the Operator Control Panel to adjacent mA station (indicated in the "SAMPLE 2 mA" column of Table 3-9) and take 10 consecutive exposures recording measured mR and mAs values in Non-AEC Linearity Data Table 3-12. 5. Calculate the linearity using the worksheet provided in Table 3-12, and confirm it meets the required limit (< 0.1).
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
3-67
Chapter 3 Calibration
AEC LINEARITY VERIFICATION (ONLY PERFORM ON UNITS EQUIPPED WITH QGAEC OPTION) 1. Set the Dynalyzer (or equivalent) for 75% trigger level on kVp. Ensure that the meter is set to measure mR. 2. Place 10 CM of acrylic in the X-ray field, and set the generator Operator Control Panel to AEC mode, 50 kV (60kV if 150kV, max output Generator), Normal Density. 3. Using Table 3-9, locate the model number of the generator and set the Operator Control Panel to the mA setting shown in "SAMPLE 1 mA" column (large filament), then take 10 consecutive exposures recording the measured mR and mAs values in AEC Linearity Data Table 3-13. 4. Set the Operator Control Panel to adjacent mA station (indicated in the "SAMPLE 2 mA" column of Table 3-9) and take 10 consecutive exposures recording the measured mR and mAs values in AEC Linearity Data Table 3-13. 5. Calculate the linearity using the worksheet provided in Table 3-13, and confirm it meets the required limit (Configuration screen and set the Rotor Type to "QMI HSS". Check if jumper JP1 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 (AY40-036S) is installed. If not, install it.
2. Faulty HSS Control Board A20A1 (AY40-035S).
2. Using oscilloscope, observe the following signals on HSS Control Board A20A1 (AY40-035S) (Note: Synchronize the trigger on CH1 when it is falling.): • CH1 - connect to U7-16 and GND • CH2 - connect to TP19 and GND • CH3 - connect to TP14 and GND Press PREP. Verify during PREP the signal on TP19 is 0 Volts (low) and TP14 is oscillating all the time. If TP19 is oscillating, replace HSS Control Board A20A1.
Revision W
5-34
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Table 5-1. Error Messages and Possible Cause(s)
Error Message Not Rotating (Cont’d)
Possible Cause(s) 3. Blown Fuse and/or IGBT on HSS Driver Board A20A2 (AY40-036S).
Remedial Action 3. Verify blown fuse as follows: a. Power off the Generator. WARNING! Wait at least five minutes for capacitors to discharge. Verify voltage is discharged. b. Unplug TB1 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 (AY40-036S). c. Using ohmmeter, check if fuses F1, F3 and F4 are open. If a fuse is blown, do the following: a. On HSS Control Board A20A1 (AY40-035S), short TP19 to TP1. b. Connect oscilloscope leads to the following test points on HSS Driver Board A20A2: U4-7 and TP16 U1-7 and TP17 U5-7 and TP16 U3-7 and TP18 c. Turn on the generator. Press PREP and capture waveforms on the oscilloscope. d. The gate pulses should be between 12-14 volts on each channel. If not, replace HSS Driver Board A20A2 (AY40036S). Otherwise, replace blown fuse(s).
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-35
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Table 5-1. Error Messages and Possible Cause(s)
Error Message Not Rotating (Cont’d)
Revision W
5-36
Possible Cause(s)
Remedial Action
4. Faulty connection between HSS Control Board A20A1 (AY40-035S) and HSS Driver Board A20A2 (AY40-036S).
4. Verify following cable connections are good: a. AY51-146 check: On HSS Driver Board A20A2 (AY40036S), connect oscilloscope leads between test points TP1 and TP10 and between TP5 and TP10. Press PREP and check the signals. If there are no signals, check the AY51-146 cable connection between J3 on HSS Control Board A20A1 and J1 on HSS Driver Board A20A1. If signals are present and cable is good, replace HSS Control Board A20A1. b. AY51-131 check: Verify AY51131 cable between J5 on HSS Control Board A20A1 and J4 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 is good and connectors are properly seated. c. AY51-130 check: Verify AY51130 cable between J4 on HSS Control Board A20A1 and J2 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 is good and connectors are properly seated.
5. Faulty/improper connection at HSS Driver Board A20A2 (AY40-036S) TB1.
5. Verify connection of AC voltages on A20A2TB1 matches the Tube Type used (refer to Chapter 2, ASSEMBLY & INSTALLATION for correct configuration). Check TB1 plug to ensure it is properly seated.
6. Faulty connection between HSS Driver Board A20A2 (AY40-036S) and Tube Rotor.
6. Verify wiring between TB4 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 and Tube Rotor is good. Correct if necessary.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Table 5-1. Error Messages and Possible Cause(s)
Error Message
Possible Cause(s)
Remedial Action
7. Faulty connection between HSS Driver Board A20A2 (AY40-036S) and Rotor Phase Capacitors.
7. Verify wiring between TB3 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 and Phase Capacitors is good. Correct if necessary.
8. Incorrect Rotor Phase Capacitor configuration for x-ray tube.
8. Verify Rotor Phase Capacitor configuration is correct (refer to Chapter 2, Assembly & Installation).
NVRam
Non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) returned incorrect checksum.
Check A16U17. Call Technical Service/Support.
OCP Micro
Non-Q-Connect Systems only: Operator Control Panel microprocessor (A16U3) returned incorrect checksum.
Check A16U3. Call Technical Service/Support.
Phase Missing
Hardware has detected that at least one phase of a three-phase generator is not present.
1. Check the connections to AutoTransformer T1 (settings are at terminal block TB2). 2. Verify the phases are available from the utility service by measuring with volt-meter. 3. If above are satisfactory, replace Line Monitor Board A8 (AY40022T2).
Please Wait
Exposure attempted while System was not ready (no READY Icon displayed).
Allow more time for System to reach its ready state (READY icon displayed on Overlay). Note: Maximum of two high-speed starts per minute are permitted.
Not Rotating (Cont’d)
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-37
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Table 5-1. Error Messages and Possible Cause(s)
Error Message
Possible Cause(s)
Remedial Action
Plus 15V
Missing or incorrect +15 VDC supply voltage.
1. Access Service Mode>Calibration>AD Calibration menu. Verify +15 VDC voltage is within tolerance per Table 3-8. If not, calibrate in accordance with "A/D Calibration Procedure" in Chapter 3. 2. Check for +15 VDC (±10%) on Power Supply Board A6 (AY40005T) test point TP10. If 0 VDC, check fuse F3 on Interface Board A9 (AY40-023T). If F3 is open, replace fuse. If there still is no +15 VDC at A6TP10, replace Power Supply Board. 3. If voltage at A6TP10 is not 0 VDC, but is too low, check if another board is shorting the +15 VDC output. Disconnect output cable A6J2 and measure voltage at A6TP10. If within range, check other boards for shorts. If not within range, replace Power Supply Board.
Plus 24V
Missing or incorrect +24 VDC supply voltage.
1. Access Service Mode>Calibration>AD Calibration menu. Verify +24 VDC voltage is within tolerance per Table 3-8. If not, calibrate in accordance with "A/D Calibration Procedure" in Chapter 3. 2. Check for +24 VDC (±10%) on Power Supply Board A6 (AY40005T) test point TP8. If 0 VDC, check fuse F4 on Interface Board A9 (AY40-023T). If F4 is open, replace fuse. If there still is no +24 VDC at A6TP8, replace Power Supply Board.
Revision W
5-38
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Table 5-1. Error Messages and Possible Cause(s)
Error Message
Possible Cause(s)
Plus 24V (Cont’d)
Remedial Action 3. If voltage at A6TP8 is not 0 VDC, but is too low, check if another board is shorting the +24 VDC output. Disconnect output cable A6J2 and measure voltage at A6TP8. If within range, check other boards for shorts. If not within range, replace Power Supply Board.
Plus 5V
Missing or incorrect +5 VDC supply voltage.
1. Access Service Mode>Calibration>AD Calibration menu. Verify +5 VDC voltage is within tolerance per Table 3-8. If not, calibrate in accordance with "A/D Calibration Procedure" in Chapter 3. 2. Check for +5 VDC (±10%) on Power Supply Board A6 (AY40005T) test point TP1. If 0 VDC, check fuse F8 on Interface Board A9 (AY40-023T). If F8 is open, replace fuse. If there still is no +5 VDC at A6TP1, replace Power Supply Board. 3. If voltage at A6TP1 is not 0 VDC, but is too low, check if another board is shorting the +5 VDC output. Disconnect output cable A6J2 and measure voltage at A6TP1. If within range, check other boards for shorts. If not within range, replace Logic Board A1 (AY40006S).
Prep WDT
Exposure sequence disabled due to loss of communication with PREP watchdog timer.
Call Technical Service/Support.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-39
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Table 5-1. Error Messages and Possible Cause(s)
Error Message
Possible Cause(s)
Receptor Not Ready
The signal on the Receptor Ready terminal of the Digital Interface Board A9 (AY40-034T) is not ready within 500 ms from the time PREP was initiated. This can be caused by: 1. PREP was initiated before the DR system could complete the image acquisition and processing cycle of the previously acquired image. 2. The DR system has malfunctioned. 3. The Digital Interface Board A9 (AY40-034T) has malfunctioned.
Rotor Current
(Note: This error is only applicable with QMI High-Speed Starter equipped systems) 1. Incorrect/no reference voltage on Control Board.
2. Incorrect overvoltage adjustment.
3. Faulty connection between HSS Driver Board A20A2 (AY40-036S) and Tube Rotor.
Revision W
5-40
Remedial Action
1. Wait until image acquisition and processing cycle is complete before attempting to re-expose. 2. Verify the digital receptor (DR) system is properly connected and is operating normally. 3. Replace the Digital Interface Board A9 (AY40-034T).
1. On HSS Control Board A20A1 (AY40-035S), measure voltage between test points TP17 and TP1(GND). Voltage measurement should read +5.00 ±0.02 VDC. If not, replace HSS Control Board A20A1. 2. On HSS Control Board A20A1 (AY40-035S), connect DVM between U20-7 and TP1(GND). Adjust potentiometer R48 for voltage measurement of 2.8 - 3.0 volts for small tubes (3") and 4.5 for large tubes (4"). If proper adjustment cannot be achieved, replace HSS Control Board A20A1 (AY40035S). If voltage is still incorrect, replace tube. 3. Verify wiring between TB2 and TB4 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 and Tube Rotor is good. Correct if necessary.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Table 5-1. Error Messages and Possible Cause(s)
Error Message
Possible Cause(s)
Remedial Action
Rotor Current (Cont’d)
4. Faulty connection between HSS Driver Board A20A2 (AY40-036S) and Rotor Phase Capacitors.
4. Verify wiring between TB3 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 and Phase Capacitors is good. Correct if necessary.
Rotor Overrun
Tube has been rotating for longer than 30 continuous seconds.
Set OCP power on/standby switch to standby; set ON/OFF circuit breaker on generator cabinet to OFF. Call Technical Service/Support.
Rotor Temp
Tube rotor is too hot. Tube thermal switch is activated. Systems equipped with a Standard Rotor (Non-High-Speed Starter): 1. Check if the tube’s temperature switch is open. If so, allow tube to cool for approximately 15-30 minutes. 2. After cooling, press PREP. If the error recurs, check the wiring from the tube to Rotor Drive Board A10 (AY40-013T), In particular, check connections to A10TB1-6 and A10TB1-7. 3. Connect a jumper wire between A10TB1-6 and A10TB1-7 and press PREP. If Rotor Temp error does not appear, check the rotor cable. 4. Check the temperature switch in the tube. The switch should be N.C. 5. Connect DMM to A10TP9. This test point should be logic low. If not, jumper this test point to ground and check if error message does not repeat. If it re-occurs, check connection A10J3-3 (orange wire) to Logic Board A1 connector J10-3. If this is good, replace the Logic Board.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-41
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Table 5-1. Error Messages and Possible Cause(s)
Error Message Rotor Temp (Cont’d)
Possible Cause(s)
Remedial Action
Systems equipped with a QMI Internal High-Speed Starter:
1. Check if the tube’s temperature switch is open. If so, allow tube to cool for approximately 15-30 minutes. 2. After cooling, press PREP. If the error recurs, proceed with next step. 3. Turn off generator. 4. On HSS Driver Board A20A2 (AY40-036S), measure resistance between TB4-1 and TB4-2. If approximately 0 ohms, skip to step 6. If high impedance, wait 15-30 minutes until temperature of tube drops sufficiently. 5. If after cooling the problem persists, check the wiring connection between TB4 and the tube rotor temperature switch. If the connection is correct, verify tube thermal switch operation. 6. If wiring and tube thermal switch are good, check resistance across F5. If approximately 0 ohms, go to next step, otherwise change the fuse and check wiring connection between tube and terminal blocks TB2 and TB4. 7. Check the wiring connection between J4 on HSS Control Board A20A1 (AY40-035S) and J2 on HSS Driver Board A20A2 (AY40036S) and the connection between J2 on HSS Control Board A20A1 and J8 on Logic Board A1 (AY40006S). If connections are good, call for Technical Service/Support.
Revision W
5-42
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Table 5-1. Error Messages and Possible Cause(s)
Error Message
Possible Cause(s)
Remedial Action
Save Configuration
Cable connections to Generator check out, but configuration data is corrupt.
1. Power Generator OFF then ON. 2. Use Backup Configuration.
Stuck Button
Button down at power-up.
1. Take finger off button 2. Check keyboard buttons for proper operation.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-43
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Table 5-1. Error Messages and Possible Cause(s)
Error Message
Possible Cause(s)
Remedial Action
Table Bucky
The table bucky has been selected but did not return the ready signal to start exposure. (This may take up to five seconds after exposure is requested.)
1. Verify the following did not occur: The "TABLE" receptor key on the OCP was selected on a system not equipped with a table receptor. 2. Check the bucky cable connections at both ends (i.e., Interface Board A9 (AY40-023T or AY40034T) terminal block TB3 and the table bucky). Refer to bucky interconnection diagrams contained in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS for proper wire connections. 3. On Interface Board A9, verify 120 VAC bucky power fuse F11 (2A, 250V slow-blow) is not open. 4. On Interface Board A9, check if switch SW1 is in correct position ("M" position if table is equipped with Midwest bucky, non-"M" position for all other type buckies). 5. Verify fuse in bucky is not open. Recycle bucky power by turning generator off, then on. If error still occurs, replace bucky control board. 6. On Logic Board A1 (AY40-006S), check for an active low signal at J4-4 during expose. If not present, replace Logic Board (including firmware). If present, check cable connection between Interface Board A9J6 and Logic Board A1J4. If connection is good, replace Interface Board.
Tube Limits
Backup time was reached based on current AEC technique factors exceeding exposure tube limits.
1. Modify technique factor(s) (e.g., reduce kVp). Re-take exposure. 2. Verify ion chamber cable connections are correct and secure.
Revision W
5-44
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Table 5-1. Error Messages and Possible Cause(s)
Error Message
Possible Cause(s)
Remedial Action
Uncalibrated Film Screen Selected
Film Screen never calibrated, or calibration data corrupt
Calibrate in accordance with instructions provided in Chapter 3 (non-QBus Systems) or Appendix B (DiRex Systems) or Appendix D (all other QBus Systems).
Unhandled Exception
An unknown error occurred.
Call Technical Service/Support.
V24 Brake
Missing or incorrect +24 VDC supply voltage (supplies voltage for operation of external equipment, e.g., tube stand, wall stand, etc.).
1. Access Service Mode>Calibration>AD Calibration menu. Verify +24V brake voltage is within tolerance per Table 3-8. If not, calibrate in accordance with "A/D Calibration Procedure" in Chapter 3. 2. Check for +24 VDC at TB7 on Interface Board A9 (AY40-023T). 3. Check fuse F9 on Interface Board A9. 4. If the above actions do not correct problem, replace Line Monitor Board A8.
Vref+
Missing or incorrect positive voltage reference (Vref+) value returned.
Call Technical Service/Support.
Vref-
Missing or incorrect positive voltage reference (Vref-) value returned.
Call Technical Service/Support.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-45
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Table 5-1. Error Messages and Possible Cause(s)
Error Message
Possible Cause(s)
Remedial Action
Wall Bucky
The wall bucky has been selected but did not return the READY signal to start exposure. (This may take up to five seconds after exposure is requested.)
1. Verify the following did not occur: The "WALL" receptor key on the OCP was selected on a system not equipped with a wall receptor. 2. Check the bucky cable connections at both ends (i.e., Interface Board A9 (AY40-023T or AY40034T) terminal block TB4 and the table bucky). Refer to bucky interconnection diagrams contained in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS for proper wire connections. 3. On Interface Board A9 (AY40-023T or AY40-034T), verify 120 VAC bucky power fuse F12 (2A, 250V slow-blow) is not open. 4. On Interface Board A9, check if switch SW1 is in correct position ("M" position if wall stand is equipped with Midwest bucky, non"M" position for all other type buckies). 5.Verify fuse in bucky is not open. Recycle bucky power by turning generator off, then on. If error still occurs, replace bucky control board. 6. On Logic Board A1 (AY40-006S), check for an active low signal at J4-5 during expose. If not present, replace Logic Board (including firmware). If present, check cable connection between Interface Board A9J6 and Logic Board A1J4. If connection is good, replace Interface Board.
Warning Using default APR tree
Occurs in conjunction with "APR Tree Load Error".
Because of a load error the default APR tree will be used. This WILL NOT overwrite the current APR tree if it exists. You will get this message until you fix the tree. Load APR editor and fix the tree.
Revision W
5-46
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Table 5-1. Error Messages and Possible Cause(s)
Error Message Warning Using default configuration
Possible Cause(s) Occurs in conjunction with "Configuration Load Error".
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Remedial Action Because of a load error the default configration will be used. This overwrites the current configuration, if one exists.
Revision W
5-47
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Optional +28 VDC Power Supply Troubleshooting The following steps apply only to systems equipped with the internallymounted +28 VDC Power Supply Option (QG-28VPS). The QG-28VPS provides a regulated +28 VDC output source to power peripheral x-ray equipment such as tube stands, wall stands, etc. If a problem with the power supply is suspected, proceed as follows: 1. Disconnect Power Supply QG-28VPS output wires at pins P2-1 and P2-2. 2. With the generator power turned on, measure the DC output across Power Supply QG-28VPS pins P2-1 and P2-2. It should measure between +26.5 and +27.5 VDC on systems intended for use with Quantum QW-420-T/-D wall stand, and between +29.5 and +30.5 VDC on systems intended for use with RS-580 Overhead Tube Crane. Adjust voltage output if necessary using potentiometer on power supply. 3. If no output exists at terminals P2-1 and P2-2, verify 220 VAC input to power supply at terminals P1-L and P1-N. If 220 VAC is present, replace power supply. 4. If no 220 VAC at power supply input, check for open Fuse F7 on Interface Board A9 (AY40-061T used on non-digital systems/ AY40-062T used on digital systems).
Revision W
5-48
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
SERVICE REPORTS The HF Series X-ray Generator provides a variety of service reports to assist the Service Technician in maintaining the proper operation of the system, and to help troubleshoot problems when they occur. The way in which Service Reports is accessed and the appearance of the Service Reports screens differ depending on the operator control panel configuration of the HF Series X-ray generator. There are three operator control panel configurations: •
ODYSSEY operator control panel
•
Q-VISION operator control panel
•
Workstation-based operator control panel (generator is integrated with either a digital radiography (DR) or computed radiography (CR) system)
Refer to the appropriate section that follows depending on the type operator control panel your system uses. Accessing Service Reports - ODYSSEY X-ray Generators The following instructions apply to ODYSSEY HF SeriesTM X-ray Generator systems. Service Reports are accessed as follows: 1. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 2. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (
) position, then to the on (
) position.
3. The system begins the start up sequence ("Quantum Medical Imaging" is displayed and "Testing. Standby." is flashing). (See Figure 5-1.) 4. Within five seconds of start up, press the upper left field select key to access the Password menu. 5. In the Password menu, enter the default Service/Support Technician password (58623) using the field select keys next to the corresponding numbers.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-49
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
6. Upon validation of the password, the Service Mode Menu displays. Press the key next to the Reports field. The Service Reports Menu displays:
THIS KEY FOR FACTORY USE ONLY
Figure 5-1. Service Reports Menu The Service Reports Menu provides access to various types of system information. The following briefly describes the various Service Report Menu selections:
Revision W
5-50
•
Generator Report: Provides total exposure count, average kV and mA exposure settings, and the total time of all exposures taken on generator.
•
Last 100 Exposures Report: Provides a chronological listing of the last 100 exposures. Each exposure (event) can be viewed showing the time and date the exposure occurred, and the exposure settings (i.e., kVp, mA, time, AEC on/off status, and receptor selected). The Next Error and Previous Error keys are used to "scroll" up or down through the exposure report.
•
Tube Report: Provides total exposure count, average kV and mA exposure settings, and the total time of all exposures taken on currently installed x-ray tube.
•
Errors & Warnings Report: Provides a chronological listing of up to 100 error and/or warning messages. Each error or warning message (event) can be viewed showing the event name, the time and date the event occurred, and the exposure settings at the time the event occurred. The Next Error and Previous Error keys are used to "scroll" up or down through the exposure report.
•
Diagnostic: Not functional at time this manual was printed.
•
Checksums: Displays the software revision levels and checksums of OCP Control Board A16A1 (AY40-004S1) Microcontroller U3 (referred to as "Internal" program) and Flash Memory U2 ("External" program and "Database").
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
To select a report, press the key next to the report you want to view. Otherwise, press the key next to the Main field to return to the main Service Menu (see Figure 3-3). The following paragraphs provide detailed descriptions of each of the various report screen selections.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-51
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Generator Reports
Figure 5-2. Generator Reports Screen The Generator Reports screen, shown above, provides the following information:
Revision W
5-52
•
Total Exposure (Expos.) Count - Indicates total number of exposures taken on generator
•
Average (Aver.) KV - Indicates mean KV value averaged over the total exposures taken on generator
•
Average (Aver.) MA - Indicates mean mA value averaged over the total exposures taken on generator
•
Total Expos. TIME - Indicates sum of exposure times (in seconds) of all exposures taken on generator
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Tube Reports
Figure 5-3. Tube Reports Screen The Tube Reports screen, shown above, provides the following information: •
Total Exposure Count - Indicates total number of exposures taken with currently installed x-ray tube
•
Average (Aver.) KV - Indicates mean KV value averaged over the total exposures taken with currently installed x-ray tube
•
Average (Aver.) MA - Indicates mean mA value averaged over the total exposures taken with currently installed x-ray tube
•
Total Expos. SECS - Indicates sum of exposure times (in seconds) of all exposures taken with currently installed x-ray tube
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-53
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Events/Warnings Reports
PRESS THESE KEYS TO SCROLL UP/DOWN THROUGH EVENTS
EVENT TYPE
Figure 5-4. Event Reports Screen The Event Report screen, shown above, displays the most recent error or warning event that occurred on the system. The "event type" is displayed as shown in Figure 5-4 above, along with the exposure factors, time and date the event occurred. Pressing the key adjacent to the Previous Error field displays the Event Report of the event that occurred prior to the one currently displayed. Pressing the key adjacent to the Next Error field displays the Event Report of the error that occurred after the one currently displayed (i.e., the next most recent event). To return back to the main Service Menu, press the key next to Main field. The system retains up to 100 of the most recent Event Reports.
Revision W
5-54
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Service Checksum Report INTERNAL/ EXTERNAL PROGRAMMED MEMORY VERSIONS INTERNAL/ EXTERNAL PROGRAMMED MEMORY CHECKSUMS
Figure 5-5. Service Checksum Report Screen The Service Checksum Report screen, shown above, lists the software revision levels and checksum values for the various programmed devices used in the generator and for the database loaded into OCP Data Memory. The OCP Microcontroller Board A16A1 contains flash memory that is loaded with the indicated versions (and checksums) of internal and external programs (in addition to that in the microcontroller) and databases. To return to the main Service Menu, press the key next to Main field.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-55
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Accessing Service Reports - Q-VISION Operator Control Panel The following instructions apply to generators utilizing a Q-VISION operator control panel (OCP). The two types of service reports/utilities available on systems equipped with a Q-VISION OCP are: •
Statistics Report
•
Error Log Viewer utility
Below is a description of how each is accessed, and what information is provided in each report. Statistics Report 1. To gain access to the Generator Service programs, touch the Help button located on the lower right corner of the Q-VISION screen (shown on right). The Generator Help Services Screen (Figure 5-5a) appears:
Figure 5-5a. Generator Help Services Screen
Revision W
5-56
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
2. Touch the Login button at the lower left corner of the screen. A password entry keypad displays.
Figure 5-5b. Enter Password Screen 3. In the Enter Password screen, enter the default Service Technician password (58623) using the keypad, then select Enter. The word "Login" is replaced with "FieldTech" on the Generator Help Services screen to indicate successful login. 4. On the Generator Help Services screen, select Service option. The General Service Options Menu appears:
Figure 5-5c. General Service Options Menu
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-57
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
5. Select Generator Service. The following screen appears:
ONLY PRESS THESE BUTTONS WHEN DIRECTED TO DO SO BY TECHNICAL SUPPORT
Figure 5-5d. Generator Service Options Menu
Revision W
5-58
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
6. Select the Insight utility option. The "Insight" Service Utility Menu displays:
EXPANDERS
Figure 5-5e. Insight Service Utility Menu
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-59
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
7. The Insight screen features seven expandable service utilities Receptor Info, Exposure Info, Lock Info, Direct Set, A/D Monitor, Statistics, and Exposure log - for viewing and, where applicable, changing settings of the Generator. Press the Statistics expander. The Statistics Screen displays:
Figure 5-5f. Statistics Screen The Statistics Screen provides access to various types of system information. The following briefly describes the various Statistics Screen selections:
Revision W
5-60
•
Exposure Count: Indicates total number of exposures taken on generator
•
Average KVP: provides mean KV value averaged over the total exposures taken on generator
•
Average mA: provides mean mA value averaged over the total exposures taken on generator
•
Average Time: provides the sum of exposure times (in seconds) of all exposures taken on generator
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Events/Warnings Log Every time a significant action or event occurs in the generator, its occurrence is recorded in a special location on the Q-VISION computer known as a "log file". This includes normal operations as well as warnings and errors, because all may be useful in viewing normal system operation, as well as viewing abnormal (error) conditions. These errors and events may be useful to help diagnose problems. Hence, an event/warning log viewing utility, referred to as a "Log Viewer" is provided with Q-VISION equipped systems. To access the Log Viewer, proceed as follows: 1. Access the General Service Options menu as described in the previous Statistics Report procedure. In the General Service Options menu, select Log Viewer. The Log Viewer screen appears (see Figure 5-5g):
Figure 5-5g. Log Viewer Screen 2. The left column panes of the Log Viewer screen include filters that can be used to focus the Log Viewer contents by selecting particular programs to view (listed in the AppDomain pane), Log Files to view (items listed in the Logger pane), and/or by selecting particular events types (levels) to view (items listed in the Level pane). 3. To view only generator related error messages, select "Quantum.Generator.Master.MasterGenerator" in the Logger pane and select "ERROR" in the Level pane, then touch Apply Filter button.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-61
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
4. The Log Viewer displays all generator error messages that have occurred (see Figure 5-5h).
Figure 5-5h. Log Viewer Screen - Filtered for Error Messages (Sample) 5. The Log Viewer lists error messages including the date and time stamp when each occurred. Touching the top of the DateTime column toggles the sorting of messages by date and time, from oldest to newest or newest to oldest; touching the top of the Message column toggles the sorting of messages alpha-numerically from A to Z or Z to A. 6. If the error messages extend out to multiple pages, touch the First button to advance directly to the first page; touch the Last button to advance directly to the last page; use the Last button to advance directly to the last page; touch the Previous button to advance to the previous page; touch the Next button to advance to the next page. 7. Touch the Back to Service button to return to the General Service Options Menu.
Revision W
5-62
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Accessing Service Reports - Integrated X-ray Generators The following instructions apply to integrated X-ray generators. On integrated generator systems, as in the Agfa NX Workstation integration or the QG-DIG-CXDI Canon/Quantum Integration, the external imaging system’s workstation computer functions as the generator’s operator control panel. The following instructions describe how to access the Generator Statistics Screen on a DiRex integrated system, followed by instructions describing how to access the Generator Statistics Screen on a QG-DIG-CXDI Canon/ Quantum Integration System or Agfa NX-DR Series Integration System.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-63
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
DiRex Integrated System - Statistics Screen The Statistics Screen is accessed as follows: 1. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 2. Set the power on/standby switch on the Q-Connect Control Panel (OCP) to the standby ( ) position, then to the on ( The green power LED lamp should illuminate.
) position.
3. From the Main OCP Overlay Menu, double click the generator status icon. The "Enter Password" screen appears. 4. In the Enter Password screen, enter the default Service Technician password (58623) using the keypad, then press Enter. 5. Upon validation of the password, the Service Options Menu displays. Press the Generator Service button.
Figure 5-5i. Service Options Menu
Revision W
5-64
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
6. Press the Generator Service button. The Generator Service Menu appears:
Figure 5-5j. Generator Service Menu
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-65
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
7. Press the Statistics button. The Statistics Screen displays:
Figure 5-5k. Statistics Screen The Statistics Screen provides access to various types of system information. The following briefly describes the various Statistics Screen selections:
Revision W
5-66
•
Exposure Count: Indicates total number of exposures taken on generator
•
Average KVP: provides mean KV value averaged over the total exposures taken on generator
•
Average mA: provides mean mA value averaged over the total exposures taken on generator
•
Average Time: provides the sum of exposure times (in seconds) of all exposures taken on generator
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
QG-DIG-CXDI Canon/Quantum and Agfa NX-DR Series Integration System - Statistics Screen The Statistics Screen is accessed as follows: 1.
To gain access to the Generator Service programs, right mouse click on the "Q" icon appearing on the Windows Task Bar (shown on right). The Generator Service Menu (Figure 5-5l) is displayed:
Figure 5-5l. Generator Service Options Menu
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-67
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
2. Select the Insight utility option. The "Enter Password" screen appears.
Figure 5-5m. Enter Password Screen 3. In the Enter Password screen, enter the default Service Technician password (58623) using the keypad, then press Enter.
Revision W
5-68
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
4. Upon validation of the password, the "Insight" Service Utility Menu displays:
EXPANDERS
Figure 5-5n. Insight Service Utility Menu
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-69
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
5. The Insight screen features seven expandable service utilities Receptor Info, Exposure Info, Lock Info, Direct Set, A/D Monitor, Statistics, and Exposure log - for viewing and, where applicable, changing settings of the Generator. Press the Statistics expander. The Statistics Screen displays:
Figure 5-5o. Statistics Screen The Statistics Screen provides access to various types of system information. The following briefly describes the various Statistics Screen selections:
Revision W
5-70
•
Exposure Count: Indicates total number of exposures taken on generator
•
Average KVP: provides mean KV value averaged over the total exposures taken on generator
•
Average mA: provides mean mA value averaged over the total exposures taken on generator
•
Average Time: provides the sum of exposure times (in seconds) of all exposures taken on generator
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Events/Warnings Log An event/warning log viewing program (Log4View) is used to capture and view errors and other events that occur during use of the integrated X-ray generator (Digital Radiographic System integration), as with the DiRex System or a QG-DIG-CXDI Canon/Quantum Integration System. These errors and events may be useful to help diagnose problems. Log4View is a separate program that is accessible outside of the digital operations. Log4View is installed along with the DiRex, QG-DIG-CXDI Canon/Quantum integration, or NX-DR Quantum/Agfa software installation. It leaves an icon on the desktop that will allow the log to be viewed at any time. Every time any of the interrelated Quantum Programs that form the integration make a significant action, this is recorded in a file. This includes normal operations as well as warnings and errors because all may be useful in both viewing normal system operation, as well as abnormal (error) conditions. Refer to Appendix C, LOG4VIEW USER INSTRUCTIONS for details about using the Log4View application.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-71
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
REMOVAL/REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES The following procedures provide step-by-step instructions for removal and replacement of the repairable components in the generator. WARNING! To prevent electrical shock hazards, make sure power is off and capacitors are discharged before proceeding with any removal/ replacement procedures. Generator Cabinet Cover Removal 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (
) position.
2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 3. Loosen nine (9) screws that secure the Generator Cabinet Cover to the Generator Chassis. 4. Wait two minutes before removing the Generator Cabinet Cover to allow the Capacitor Bank to discharge. 5. Carefully slide the Generator Cabinet Cover up and away from the generator to prevent damaging the circuit boards on the generator front door. 6. Connect a DVM across the Capacitor Bank (C9-C11 on Models QG-20-SE, QG-32-SE, QG-40-SE and QG-50-SE; C9-C16 on all other models) to check that the capacitors are fully discharged. If they are fully discharged, it is safe to work on the generator. Generator Cabinet Cover Replacement 1. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 2. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (
) position.
3. Carefully slide the Generator Cover down onto the Generator Chassis cover screws, taking care not to damage the circuit boards on the front door of the Generator. 4. Tighten the nine (9) cover screws to secure the Generator Cabinet Cover to the Generator Chassis.
Revision W
5-72
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
High Voltage (H.V.) A17 Tank Removal When removing H.V. Tank A17, keep tank upright at all times. Refer to Figure 2-11 and proceed as follows: 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (
) position.
2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 3. Loosen nine (9) screws that secure the Generator Cabinet Cover to the Generator Chassis. 4. Wait two minutes before removing the Generator Cabinet Cover to allow the Capacitor Bank to discharge. 5. Carefully slide the Generator Cabinet Cover up and away from the generator to prevent damaging the circuit boards on the generator front door. 6. Connect a DVM across the positive and negative terminals of the DC Capacitor Bank(s) (C9-C11 on Models QG-20-SE, QG-32-SE, QG-40-SE and QG-50-SE; C9-C16 on all other models) to check that the capacitors are fully discharged. If they are fully discharged, it is safe to work on the generator. 7. When capacitors are fully discharged, remove the Plexiglas shield above the High Voltage Tank. 8. Loosen four (4) screws securing the clear plastic high-voltage acrylic protection panel from the generator chassis and remove panel. 9. Disconnect the anode and cathode high-voltage cables from the High Voltage Tank. 10. Disconnect the Feedback Connector A17P1 from High Voltage Tank connector A17J1. 11. Disconnect H.V. Tank cable PC1 from Power Module A19 lower right IGBT terminal. 12. Disconnect H.V. Tank cable PC2 from the right terminal on Capacitor C7. 13. Disconnect H.V. Tank cable PA1 from the left terminal on Capacitor C4. 14. Disconnect H.V. Tank cable PA2 from Power Module A18 lower left IGBT terminal. 15. Disconnect the yellow/green ground wires from the High Voltage Tank ground stud.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-73
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
16. Remove the four (4) 1/4-20 x 3/4" socket head cap screws, flat washers and lock washers securing the High Voltage Tank to Generator Chassis. 17. Carefully lift the High Voltage Tank out of the Generator Chassis. If the High Voltage Tank is to be shipped, be sure to tighten the vent screw in the front right corner of the tank. High Voltage (H.V.) Tank A17 Installation When installing H.V. Tank A17, keep tank upright at all times. Refer to Figure 2-10 and 2-11 and proceed as follows: WARNING! After completing the following procedure, double-check the H.V. Tank wiring connections to make sure they are correct. Incorrect wiring can cause damage to the generator. 1. Position H.V. Tanks on H.V. Tank Mounting Brackets so that mounting holes in H.V. Tank align with those in mounting brackets. Secure tank to brackets using four (4) 1/4-20 x 3/4" socket head cap screws, flat washers and lock washers. 2. Loosen the vent screw (located in the front right corner of the tank) two full turns. 3. Connect yellow/green ground wires to H.V. Tank ground stud (GND) using 8/32 kep nut and fasten securely. 4. Connect H.V. Tank cable PC1 to Power Module A19 lower right IGBT terminal. 5. Connect H.V. Tank cable PC2 to right terminal on Capacitor C7. 6. Connect H.V. Tank cable PA1 to the left terminal on Capacitor C4. 7. Connect H.V. Tank cable PA2 to Power Module A18 lower left IGBT terminal. 8. Plug Feedback connector A17P1 (16-pin connector on Cable Assembly AY51-017) into connector A17J1 on the H.V. Tank and tighten connector securely. 9. Connect the anode and cathode high-voltage cables to the High Voltage Tank. 10. Re-install the clear plastic high-voltage protection panel on the Generator Chassis and re-tighten four (4) mounting screws. 11. Carefully slide the Generator Cover down onto the Generator Chassis cover screws, taking care not to damage the circuit boards on the front door of the Generator. 12. Tighten the nine (9) cover screws to secure the Generator Cabinet Cover to the Generator Chassis.
Revision W
5-74
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Power Modules A18 and A19 (P/N AY20-047) Removal
POWER MODULE A18
POWER MODULE A19
C7 C6
C3 C4
*C8
*C5
TERMINALS PC1, PC2
*NOTE: C5 AND C8 ONLY INSTALLED ON QG-65 AND QG-80 GENERATORS
TERMINALS PA1, PA2
H.V. TANK (TOP VIEW)
Figure 5-6. Power Module A18 and A19 Cable Connections 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (
) position.
2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 3. Loosen nine (9) screws that secure the Generator Cabinet Cover to the Generator Chassis.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-75
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
4. Wait two minutes before removing the Generator Cover to allow the Capacitor Bank to discharge. 5. Carefully slide the Generator Cabinet Cover up and away from the generator to prevent damaging the circuit boards on the generator front door. 6. Connect a DVM across the DC Capacitor Bank (C9-C16) and verify the capacitors are fully discharged. 7. When capacitors are fully discharged, loosen four (4) screws securing the clear plastic high-voltage acrylic protection panel from the generator chassis and remove panel. 8. Disconnect anode and cathode high-voltage cables from High Voltage Tank. 9. To remove Power Module A18: a. Disconnect IGBT Driver Cable (P/N AY51-015) plug A18A3P5 from IGBT Drive Board A18A3 (P/N AY40-010T) connector J5. b. Disconnect H.V. Tank cable terminal PA2 from Power Module A18 IGBT lower left IGBT terminal. c.
Disconnect the two black jumper wires from Power Module A18 lower right IGBT terminal.
d. Tag and disconnect the red and black cables from Power Module A18 IGBT (+) and (-) bus bars. e. Remove the six (6) 8-32 x 1/4" screws that hold Power Module A18 to the rear wall of the Generator Chassis and remove Power Module. 10. To remove Power Module A19: a. Disconnect IGBT Driver Cable (P/N AY51-023) plug A19A3P5 from IGBT Drive Board A19A3 (P/N AY40-010T) connector J5. b. Disconnect H.V. Tank cable terminal PC1 from Power Module A19 lower right IGBT terminal. c.
Disconnect the two black jumper wires from Power Module A19 lower left IGBT terminal.
d. Tag and disconnect the red and black cables from Power Module A18 IGBT (+) and (-) bus bars. e. Remove the six (6) 8-32 x 1/4" screws that hold Power Module A19 to the back of the Generator Chassis and remove Power Module.
Revision W
5-76
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Power Modules A18 and A19 (P/N AY20-047) Replacement 1. Replace Power Module A18 as follows: a. Install Power Module A18 by securing it to the back of the Generator Chassis using six (6) 8-32 x 1/4" screws. b. Remove tags and connect the red cable to IGBT (+) terminals and the black cable to IGBT (-) terminal on Power Module A18. c.
Connect two black jumper wires between Power Module A18 IGBT terminal and the left side lug of resonant capacitor C4.
d. Connect the IGBT Driver Cable (P/N AY51-015) plug A18A3P5 to IGBT Drive Board A18A3 (P/N AY40-010T) connector J5. e. Connect H.V. Tank cable terminal PA2 to Power Module A18 lower left IGBT terminal. 2. Replace Power Module A19 as follows: a. Install Power Module A19 by securing it to the back of the Generator Chassis using six (6) 8-32 x 1/4" screws. b. Remove tags and connect the red cable to IGBT (+) terminals and the black cable to IGBT (-) terminal on Power Module A19. c.
Connect two black jumper wires between Power Module A19 IGBT terminal and the right side lug of resonant capacitor C7.
d. Connect the IGBT Driver Cable (P/N AY51-023) plug A19A3P5 to IGBT Drive Board A19A3 (P/N AY40-010T) connector J5. e. Connect H.V. Tank cable terminal PC1 to Power Module A19 lower right IGBT terminal. 3. Re-install the clear plastic high-voltage protection panel on the Generator Chassis and re-tighten four (4) mounting screws. 4. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 5. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the on ( ) position. 6. Connect a DVM between the red and black cables on the IGBT and check that the voltage is between 380 VDC and 420 VDC. 7. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (
) position.
8. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-77
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
9. Carefully slide the Generator Cover down onto the Generator Chassis cover screws, taking care not to damage the circuit boards on the front door of the Generator. 10. Tighten the nine (9) cover screws to secure the Generator Cabinet Cover to the Generator Chassis. Logic Board A1 (P/N AY40-006S) Removal CAUTION! The Logic Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the Logic Board or any other circuit board. 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (
) position.
2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 3. Tag and remove all cables connected to Logic Board A1. 4. If the generator is equipped with Q-Connect option, perform the following additional steps: a. Tag and remove ethernet cables connected to OCP Interface Board A1A1 (AY40-073S) connectors J1 and J5. b. Remove one (1) screw and two (2) hex nuts securing the OCP Interface Board A1A1 to Logic Board A1 and remove OCP Interface Board. c.
Note the locations of three (3) OCP Interface Board A1A1 mounting standoffs on Logic Board A1, then remove standoffs from Logic Board A1. Retain standoffs for reassembly.
5. Carefully remove Logic Slave IC U14 and Logic Master IC U9 from Logic Board A1 using a chip puller. Retain IC’s for re-installation into replacement board. 6. Remove screws securing Logic Board A1 to the PCB Door and remove the Logic Board. Logic Board A1 (P/N AY40-006S) Replacement CAUTION! The Logic Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the Logic Board or any other circuit board. 1. Place the new Logic Board A1 on standoffs in PCB Door and secure using four (4) screws. 2. If the generator is equipped with Q-Connect option, perform the following additional steps:
Revision W
5-78
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
a. Install three (3) OCP Interface Board A1A1 mounting standoffs on Logic Board A1 in same locations from which they were removed. b. Place the OCP Interface Board A1A1 on mounting standoffs and secure using one (1) screw and two (2) hex nuts. c.
Connect ethernet cables to the OCP Interface Board A1A1 connectors J1 and J5.
3. Connect all cables to Logic Board A1. Remove tags.
Note: When installing IC's, ensure that pin one on the chip is aligned correctly with pin 1 on the IC socket mounted on the board. Do not use software label to orient IC! 4. Insert Logic Master IC U9 (marked "QLBM") into U9 socket on Logic Board A1. 5. Insert the Logic Slave IC U14 (marked "QLBS") into U14 socket on Logic Board A1. 6. On Logic Boards revision G and higher, verify jumpers JP1, JP6, and JP7 are configured as follows: a. Jumper JP1 - must always be installed b. Jumper JP6 - installed only if system is equipped with highspeed starter (QG-HSS) option. Do not install on standard, single-speed rotor systems (i.e., systems equipped with Rotor Drive Board A10 AY40-013T). c.
Jumper JP7 - install jumper on pins 2-3
7. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 8. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the on ( ) position. 9. Verify generator passes startup self-tests. 10. Access Service Mode, Service Configuration and Settings screens, and verify generator configuration settings are correct. 11. Access Service Mode, AD Calibration screen. Verify all voltages are within tolerance. If not, calibrate in accordance with "A/D Calibration Procedure" in Chapter 3 (ODYSSEY) or Appendix B (DiRex Integration generators), or Appendix D (all other integrated generators). 12. Spot check kVp and mA calibration and, if needed, re-calibrate system.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-79
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
KVP Control Board A2 (P/N AY40-003S) Removal CAUTION! The KVP Control Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the KVP Control Board or any other circuit board. 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (
) position.
2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 3. Tag and remove all cables connected to KVP Control Board A2. 4. Remove four (4) screws securing KVP Control Board A2 to the PCB Door and remove the KVP Control Board. KVP Control Board A2 (P/N AY40-003S) Replacement CAUTION! The KVP Control Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the KVP Control Board or any other circuit board. 1. Verify jumper JP1 on the new KVP Control Board A2 is configured correctly in accordance with the number of power modules used on the system. That is, for single power module systems, install a jumper between pins 2 and 3 of A2JP1 (or solder pins 2 and 3 together). For two power module systems, install a jumper between pins 1 and 2 on A2JP1 (or solder pins 1 and 2 together). 2. Place the new KVP Control Board A2 on standoffs in PCB Door and secure using four (4) screws. 3. Connect all cables to KVP Control Board A2. Remove tags. 4. Before closing the Operator Control Panel, verify that the OCP works properly. 5. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 6. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the on ( ) position. 7. Connect an oscilloscope probe to KVP Control Board A2TP21 and another probe to A2TP22. Set the oscilloscope time base to 5 µsec./div. and the vertical amplitude to 5V/div. 8. Remove plugs from connectors A2J7 (anode) and A2J8 (cathode) on KVP Control Board A2. Connect A2TP26 to ground.
Revision W
5-80
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
9. Press the EXPOSE key. Verify the pulses at each test point are 5.5 µsec. wide and the rising edges of the pulses at A2TP21 are 12 µsec. from the rising edges of the pulses at A2TP22 (see Figure 5-10 for correct waveforms).
APPROX. 1.2 MS DELAY
Figure 5-7. KVP Control Board A2TP21 and A2TP22/A2TP23 and A2TP24 Waveforms 10. If the time between the pulses is not 12 µsec., adjust the oscilloscope time base to 0.5 µsec./div. and adjust Anode Output Potentiometer A2R3 to obtain 12.0 ±0.1 µsec. 11. Move oscilloscope probes to A2TP23 and A2TP24. 12. Press the EXPOSE key. Verify the pulses at each test point are 5.5 µsec. wide and the rising edge of the pulses at A2TP23 are 12 µsec. from the rising edges of the pulses at A2TP24. 13. If the time between the pulses is not 12 µsec., adjust the oscilloscope time base to 0.5 µsec./div. and adjust Cathode Output Potentiometer A2R34 to obtain 12 µsec. ±0.1 µsec. 14. Re-insert plugs in connectors A2J7 (anode) and A2J8 (cathode) on KVP Control Board A2. 15. Perform KV, Filament and MA calibration procedures (refer to Chapter 3, Calibration (ODYSSEY) or Appendix B (DiRex Integration generators), or Appendix D (all other integrated generators).
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-81
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Filament Control Board A5 (P/N AY40-007T) Removal CAUTION! The Filament Control Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the KVP Control Board or any other circuit board. 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (
) position.
2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 3. Tag and remove all cables connected to Filament Control Board A5. 4. Remove four (4) screws securing Filament Control Board A5 to the PCB Door and remove the Filament Control Board. Filament Control Board A5 (P/N AY40-007T) Replacement CAUTION! The Filament Control Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the Filament Control Board or any other circuit board. 1. Place the new Filament Control Board A5 on standoffs in PCB Door and secure using four (4) screws. 2. Connect all cables to Filament Control Board A5. Remove tags. 3. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 4. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the on ( ) position. 5. Filament Control Board A5 contains one potentiometer (A5R25) that is pre-adjusted at the factory. No further adjustments are necessary for the replacement Filament Control Board, however, it is recommended the following voltages be checked to verify proper installation: a. Using a DMM, measure the voltage to ground on either side of fuse A5F1. The voltage should be +48 to +55 VDC. If not, refer to Power Supply Board A6 (AY40-005T) removal and replacement procedure for adjustment instructions. b. Connect a DMM between A5TP11 and A5J2-9. On the OCP, select Manual mode, 50 kV, 100L, 50 msec. Press the PREP key. Verify voltage at A5TP11 is +21.6 - 26.4 VDC. c.
Revision W
5-82
On the OCP, select Manual mode, 50 kV, 150S, 50 msec. Press the PREP key. Verify the voltage at A5TP11 is 1.0 VDC.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
d. Perform Filament calibration procedure (refer to Chapter 3, Calibration (ODYSSEY) or Appendix B (DiRex Integration generators), or Appendix D (all other integrated generators)) and re-check mA calibration). Power Supply Board A6 (P/N AY40-005T) Removal CAUTION! The Power Supply Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the Power Supply Board or any other circuit board. 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (
) position.
2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 3. Tag and remove all cables connected to Power Supply Board A6. 4. Remove four (4) screws securing Power Supply Board A6 to the PCB Door and remove the Power Supply Board. Power Supply Board A6 (P/N AY40-005T) Replacement CAUTION! The Power Supply Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the Power Supply Board or any other circuit board. 1. Place the new Power Supply Board A6 on standoffs in PCB Door and secure using four (4) screws. 2. Connect all cables to Power Supply Board A6. Remove tags. 3. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 4. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the on ( ) position. 5. Check for the following voltages at specified connector pins/test points: a. 24.55 to 27.15 VAC between A6J1-7 and A6J1-8. b. +14.25 to +15.75 VDC between A6TP10 and A6TP1. c.
-14.25 to -15.75 VDC between A6TP5 and A6TP1.
d. +22.8 to +25.2 VDC between A6TP8 and A6TP1. Note: The Power Supply Board’s +48 VDC output may be adjusted (using A6R17) up to +55 VDC (max.) in cases where long-length high tension cables are used and/or a heavy duty x-ray tube is
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-83
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
installed. This can be determined by measuring the mA output (using a Dynalyzer or mAs meter), of an exposure taken at 40 kVp and the highest mA station available. The mA measured should be the same as the indicated mA (within specified tolerance). If mA output is too low, increase the +48 VDC voltage output as required, but do not exceed +55 VDC. Changing this setting will require verification of proper filament and mA calibration (refer to Chapter 3, CALIBRATION). e. +47.5 - +48.5 VDC between A6TP3 and A6TP1 (if necessary, adjust A6R17 to obtain this voltage). 6. Access Service Mode, AD Calibration menu. Verify +15 VDC, -15 VDC, +24 VDC, and +24V Brake voltages are within tolerance per Table 3-8. If not, calibrate in accordance with "A/D Calibration Procedure" in Chapter 3, Calibration (ODYSSEY) or Appendix B (DiRex Integration generators), or Appendix D (all other integrated generators. Line Monitor Board A8 Removal Line Monitor PCB Usage: AY40-022T1 - Used on Single-Phase Systems; AY40-022T2 - Used on 208-240 VAC Three Phase Systems w/AID High Speed Starter; AY40-022T3 - Used on 380-480 VAC Three-Phase Systems w/AID High Speed Starter; AY40-053S2 - Used on 208-240 VAC Three Phase Systems w/QMI High Speed Starter; AY40-053S3 - Used on 380480 VAC Three Phase Systems w/QMI High Speed Starter CAUTION! The Line Monitor Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the Line Monitor Board or any other circuit board. 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (
) position.
2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 3. Tag and remove all cables connected to Line Monitor Board A8. 4. Remove four (4) screws securing Line Monitor Board A8 to the PCB Door and remove the Line Monitor Board. Line Monitor Board A8 Replacement Line Monitor PCB Usage: AY40-022T1 - Used on Single-Phase Systems; AY40-022T2 - Used on 208-240 VAC Three Phase Systems w/AID High Speed Starter; AY40-022T3 - Used on 380-480 VAC Three-Phase Systems w/AID High Speed Starter; AY40-053S2 - Used on 208-240 VAC Three Phase Systems w/QMI High Speed Starter; AY40-053S3 - Used on 380-
Revision W
5-84
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
480 VAC Three Phase Systems w/QMI High Speed Starter CAUTION! The Line Monitor Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the Line Monitor Board or any other circuit board. 1. On the replacement Line Monitor Board A8, verify all jumpers are set to same configuration as removed Line Monitor Board. 2. Place new Line Monitor Board A8 on standoffs in PCB Door and secure using four (4) screws. 3. Connect all cables (except A8J1) to Line Monitor Board. Remove tags. 4. Access Service Mode, AD Calibration menu. Verify +400V Cathode and +400V Anode voltages are within tolerance per Table 3-8. If not, calibrate in accordance with "A/D Calibration Procedure" in Chapter 3 (ODYSSEY) or Appendix B (DiRex Integration generators), or Appendix D (all other integrated generators). Stored Energy Systems Line Monitor/Charger Board A8 (AY40028T) Removal CAUTION! The Line Monitor/Charger Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the Line Monitor/Charger Board or any other circuit board. 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (
) position.
2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 3. Using a DVM, confirm the voltage across both DC Power Supply Capacitor Banks has been discharged to below 5VDC. This will take several minutes following shutdown. 4. Each battery tray has mounted on its front center, two cartridge fuses holders housing F1 and F2. Flip up the fuse holder release levers on top of each holder to open the four battery circuits. 5. Tag and remove cables connected to Line Monitor/Charger Board A8. 6. Remove four (4) hex nuts securing the Line Monitor/Charger Board to PCB Door and remove the Line Monitor/Charger Board.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-85
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Stored Energy Systems Line Monitor/Charger Board (AY40028T) A8 Replacement CAUTION! The Line Monitor Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the Line Monitor Board or any other circuit board. 1. On the replacement Line Monitor/Charger Board A8, verify all jumpers are set to same configuration as removed Line Monitor/ Charger Board. 2. Place new Line Monitor/Charger Board A8 on standoffs in PCB Door and secure using four (4) hex nuts. 3. Reinsert connectors A8P2 through A8P7 into their corresponding jacks A8P2 through A8P7, leaving A8P1 disconnected from A8J1. Remove tags. 4. Pre-adjust potentiometers A8R70 and A8R66 by rotating them fully counterclockwise. 5. Restore the battery circuits by closing the F1 and F2 fuse holders on the two battery trays. 6. Turn the generator ON. Verify that 220VAC (±10%) exists between A8P1-4 and A8J1-7. If these voltages are out of range, test the incoming AC line and confirm the correct taps have been selected at TB1. 7. Once correct, turn OFF the generator and re-attach A8P1 to A8J1. 8. Turn the generator ON. Measure the following A8 test points using a DVM and A8TP13 as ground. Verify these nominal values are within ±5%: • A8TP11 = +24VDC • A8TP12 = +15VDC • A8TP14 = -15VDC • A8TP15 = +283VDC • A8TP16 = -283VDC 9. Over-voltage Fault Threshold Calibration - Using A8TP13 as a ground: a. monitor A8TP21 and adjust A8R19 to measure +2.12VDC (±0.02 VDC). b. monitor A8TP20 and adjust A8R60 to measure +2.12VDC (±0.02 VDC). 10. Charger Voltage Limiter Calibration - Using A8TP13 as a ground:
Revision W
5-86
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
a. Monitor the charger output voltages at A8TP2 (positive supply) and A8TP3 (negative supply) while allowing the chargers to recharge the battery tray(s) until each test point rises to |205| ±1.0 VDC. Note: Charging to these levels may take up to 2 hours. If these levels cannot be achieved, check the integrity of the batteries in the affected side of each tray. b. Once this level has been achieved at A8TP2, adjust A8R70 to produce Output Limiting, which is indicated when yellow LED A8D7 begins to blink. 11. Similarly, once this level has been achieved at A8TP3, adjust A8R66 to produce Output Limiting, which is indicated when yellow LED A8D25 begins to blink. Rotor Drive Board A10 (P/N AY40-013T) Removal NOTE Rotor Drive Board A10 (AY40-013T) is not used on systems equipped with Dual (High) Speed Starter option (QG-HSS [external] or QHSS [internal]).
CAUTION! The Rotor Drive Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the Rotor Drive Board or any other circuit board. 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (
) position.
2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 3. Tag and disconnect Tube Rotor Cable (AY51-014T-XX) from terminal strip A10TB1-1 through A10TB1-7. 4. Tag and remove plugs connected to receptacles A10J1, A10J3, A10J4, and A10J5. 5. Remove four (4) hex nuts securing Rotor Drive Board A10 to the PCB Door and remove the Rotor Drive Board. Rotor Drive Board A10 (P/N AY40-013T) Replacement CAUTION! The Rotor Drive Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the Rotor Drive Board or any other circuit board. 1. Place the new Rotor Drive Board A10 on the PCB Door and secure using four (4) hex nuts. 2. Re-connect plugs to receptacles A10J1, A10J3, A10J4, and A10J5 on Rotor Drive Board. 3. Re-connect Tube Rotor Cable (AY51-014T-XX) wires to terminal strip terminals A10TB1-1 through A10TB1-7. 4. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-87
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
5. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the on ( ) position. 6. Perform Rotor Drive Board adjustments as described in the "Rotor Drive Board A10 (AY40-013T) Adjustment" procedure in Chapter 2, Assembly & Installation. Standard AEC Control Board A11 (P/N AY40-031S) Removal CAUTION! The AEC Control Drive Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the AEC Control Drive Board or any other circuit board. 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (
) position.
2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 3. Tag and remove plugs connected to A11J1 and A11J4. 4. Disconnect any Wall and/or Table bucky cable(s) connected to A11J2, A11J3, and A11J5. 5. Remove four (4) hex nuts securing AEC Control Board A11 to the PCB Door and remove the AEC Control Board. Standard AEC Control Board A11 (P/N AY40-031S) Replacement CAUTION! The AEC Control Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the AEC Control Drive Board or any other circuit board. 1. Place the new AEC Control Board A10 on the PCB Door and secure using four (4) hex nuts. 2. Re-connect any Wall and/or Table bucky cable(s) to A11J2, A11J3 and A11J5 on AEC Control Board. 3. Re-connect plugs toA11J1 and A11J4 and remove tags. 4. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 5. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the on ( ) position. 6. Perform AEC calibration procedures (refer to Chapter 3, CALIBRATION (ODYSSEY) or Appendix B (DiRex Integration generators), or Appendix D (all other integrated generators).
Revision W
5-88
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Universal AEC Control Board A11 (P/N AY40-027S) Removal CAUTION! The AEC Control Drive Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the AEC Control Drive Board or any other circuit board. 6. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (
) position.
7. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 8. Tag and remove plugs connected to A11J1, A11J5, A11J6, A11J7, A11J9 and A11J11. 9. Disconnect any Wall and/or Table bucky cable(s) connected to A11J8, A11J10, A11J12 and A11J13. 10. If present, tag and remove wires connected to A11TB1 (used for Siemens ion chamber). 11. If present, tag and remove wires connected to A11TB10, A11TB12 and A11TB13 (used with Siemens tomography system). 12. Remove four (4) hex nuts securing AEC Control Board A11 to the PCB Door and remove the AEC Control Board. Universal AEC Control Board A11 (P/N AY40-027S) Replacement CAUTION! The AEC Control Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the AEC Control Drive Board or any other circuit board. 1. Place the new AEC Control Board A10 on the PCB Door and secure using four (4) hex nuts. 2. If applicable, re-connect wires to A11TB10, A11TB12 and A11TB13 (used with Siemens tomography system). Remove tags. 3. If present, re-connect wires to A11TB1 (used for Siemens ion chamber) and remove tags. 4. Re-connect any Wall and/or Table bucky cable(s) to A11J8, A11J10, A11J12 and A11J13 on AEC Control Board. 5. Re-connect plugs to A11J1, A11J5, A11J6, A11J7, A11J9 and A11J11 and remove tags. 6. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 7. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the on ( ) position. 8. Perform AEC calibration procedures (refer to Chapter 3, CALIBRATION).
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-89
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
OCP Microprocessor Board A16 (P/N AY40-004S1) Removal (Not Applicable on Q-VISION or Integrated Generators) CAUTION! The OCP Microprocessor Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the OCP Microprocessor Board or any other circuit board. 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (
) position.
2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position.
NOTE The OCP Microprocessor Board A16 (AY40-004S1) is not used on integrated systems or systems equipped with a Q-VISION OCP.
3. Turn the Operator Control Panel upside down and remove the four (4) screws that secure the Operator Control Panel Bottom Cover to the Operator Control Panel housing, taking care not to scratch the front panel. 4. Tag and remove all cables connected to OCP Microprocessor Board A16A1. 5. Remove eight (8) screws securing OCP Microprocessor Board A16A1 to the front panel and remove OCP Microprocessor Board. 6. To remove the LCD Display (P/N EL31-005 on QUEST systems, EL31-004 on ODYSSEY systems), proceed as follows: a. Disconnect the flat cable from A16A1J5 on the OCP Microprocessor Board by pulling on the locking portion of A16A1J5 slightly in order to release the flat cable from the connector. b. Remove the four (4) screws that secure the LCD Display to the front panel and remove LCD Display. OCP Microprocessor Board A16 (P/N AY40-004S1) Replacement (Not Applicable on Q-VISION or Integrated Generators) CAUTION! The OCP Microprocessor Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the OCP Microprocessor Board or any other circuit board. 1. To install the LCD Display (P/N EL31-005 on QUEST systems, EL31-004 on ODYSSEY systems), proceed as follows: a. Verify board jumpers A16A1JP1, A16A1JP4, A16A1JP6, A16A1JP7, A16A1JP10, A16A1JP11 are installed; jumper A16A1JP12 is installed only if system has QUEST operator control panel. b. Secure the LCD Display to front panel using four (4) screws. c.
Revision W
5-90
Connect the flat cable from the OCP Display to A16A1J5. Check that the blue side of the flat cable faces the bottom
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
side of the connector. 2. Place the new OCP Microprocessor Board A16A1 on the OCP front panel and secure using eight (8) screws. 3. Connect all cables to OCP Microprocessor Board A16A1. 4. Re-install the Operator Control Panel Bottom Cover on the Operator Control Panel housing using four (4) screws. 5. Turn on system and verify the OCP works properly. Adjust A16A1R17 until the LCD display is a uniform blue color. Q-HSS Equipped Systems Only: High-Speed Starter Control Board A20A1 (P/N AY40-035S) Removal CAUTION! The High-Speed Starter Control Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the High-Speed Starter Control Board or any other circuit board. 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (
) position.
2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 3. Tag and remove all cables connected to High-Speed Starter Control Board A20A1. 4. Remove four (4) hex nuts securing High-Speed Starter Control Board A20A1 to the PCB Door and remove High-Speed Starter Control Board. Q-HSS Equipped Systems Only: High-Speed Starter Control Board A20A1 (P/N AY40-035S) Replacement CAUTION! The High-Speed Starter Control Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the High-Speed Starter Control Board or any other circuit board. 1. Place the new High-Speed Starter Control Board A20A1 on the PCB Door standoffs and secure using four (4) hex nuts. 2. Connect all cables to High-Speed Starter Control Board A20A1. 3. Connect a DVM between A20A1U20-7 and GND. 4. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 5. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the on ( ) position.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-91
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
6. Adjust potentiometer A20R48 to 2.8 - 3.0 VDC for systems equipped with Toshiba E7183X and E7252X tubes, and 4.4 - 4.6 VDC for all other tube types. Q-HSS Equipped Systems Only: High-Speed Starter Driver Board A20A2 (P/N AY40-036S) Removal CAUTION! The High-Speed Starter Driver Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the High-Speed Starter Driver Board or any other circuit board. 1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (
) position.
2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. WARNING! To prevent electrical shock hazards, make sure power is off and capacitors are discharged before proceeding with any removal/ replacement procedures. 3. Verify capacitors A20A2C4, A20A2C5, A20A2C8, and A20A2C9 are fully discharged - wait at least seven minutes, then measure the voltage across A20A1TP19 and A20A1TP20 and verify it is less than 30 VDC before proceeding. 4. Remove three (3) 6-32 hex nuts securing the clear plastic highvoltage shield to the PCB Door standoffs and remove shield. 5. Tag and remove all cables connected to High-Speed Starter Driver Board A20A2. 6. Remove four (4) screws securing High-Speed Starter Driver Board A20A2 to the front panel and carefully remove High-Speed Starter Driver Board. Q-HSS Equipped Systems Only: High-Speed Starter Driver Board A20A2 (P/N AY40-036S) Replacement CAUTION! The High-Speed Starter Driver Board contains electrostatic sensitive devices. Observe proper grounding precautions before handling the High-Speed Starter Driver Board or any other circuit board. CAUTION! To prevent damage, do not handle High-Speed Starter Driver Board by grasping or touching the heat sinks. 1. On replacement High-Speed Starter Driver Board A20A2, verify jumper JP1 is installed.
Revision W
5-92
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
2. Place the new High-Speed Starter Driver Board A20A2 on the PCB Door standoffs and secure using four (4) hex nuts. 3. Connect all cables to High-Speed Starter Driver Board A20A2. 4. Place clear plastic high-voltage shield on PCB Door standoffs and secure using three (3) 6-32 hex nuts. 5. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 6. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (
) position.
Stored Energy System - Battery Tray Removal
FUSE HOLDER (2X ON 30/40 kW SYSTEMS)
BATTERY TRAY BRACKET (2X ON 30/40 kW SYSTEMS)
CONNECTOR A20TB1
CONNECTOR A21TB1
Figure 5-8. Battery Tray Component Location Caution! These batteries contain Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4) and Lead (Pb). Spent Lead-Acid batteries must never be disposed of indiscriminately. QMI requires its dealers to collect and send them to a secondary lead smelter for recycling. In the U.S., any reseller of automotive-type storage batteries is also required to accept spent cells at no cost to you. Avoid damage to the battery casing. Keep away from fire, flame, sparks, and heat. Use care in handling. Warning! Hazardous voltages (400 VDC) exist inside the Battery Tray Assembly even when power is disconnected from the generator. Use caution when handling; do not put hands/fingers inside Battery Tray Covers.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-93
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
1. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (
) position.
2. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 3. Loosen nine (9) screws that secure the Generator Cabinet Cover to the Generator Chassis. 4. Wait two minutes before removing the Generator Cover to allow the Capacitor Bank to discharge. 5. Carefully slide the Generator Cabinet Cover up and away from the generator to prevent damaging the circuit boards on the generator front door. 6. Connect a DVM across the Capacitor Bank (C9, C10 and C11, C12) to check that the capacitors are fully discharged. 7. When capacitors are fully discharged, open fuse holders for fuses F1 through F4 (see Figure 5-8). 8. Tag and remove red, green/yellow, and black wires from terminal block A20TB1 and A21TB1 (32 and 40 kW systems only). 9. Remove four (4) screws securing left and right side Battery Tray Brackets to sides of Generator Cabinet. 10. Remove screws (two on 20 kW systems, four on 32, 40 and 50 kW systems) securing left and right side Battery Tray Brackets to the Battery Trays. Remove brackets from Generator Cabinet. 11. On 32, 40 and 50 kW systems only: Slide out the top Battery Tray by pulling it slowly towards you. Be careful not to pull out the Battery Tray too far as it may fall to the floor and cause injury. Once the back part of the Battery Tray is accessible, grasp it firmly and carefully lift out the Battery Tray using both hands. 12. Remove the bottom Battery Tray by holding it by the front handle, lifting up and pulling it towards you. Be careful not to catch your fingers between the Battery Tray and the front of the Generator Cabinet. Once the back part of the Battery Tray is accessible, grasp it firmly and carefully lift out the Battery Tray using both hands.
Revision W
5-94
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
Stored Energy System - Battery Tray Replacement 1. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to OFF position. 2. Set the power on/standby switch on the Operator Control Panel (OCP) to the standby (
) position.
3. Slide the bottom Battery Tray into the Generator, pushing it all the way towards the back of the Generator Cabinet. 4. On 32, 40 and 50 kW systems only: Slide the top Battery Tray onto the bottom Battery Tray, pushing it all the way towards the back of the Generator Cabinet. 5. Check that the Battery Tray(s) are properly seated inside the Generator. Attach the two brackets to the Battery Tray(s) and secure the brackets to the Generator. 6. Connect red, green/yellow, and black wires to terminal blocks A20TB1 and A21TB1 (32 and 40 kW systems only). Remove tags. 7. Close fuse holders for fuses F1 through F4. 8. Connect a DVM between the red and the green/yellow wires on A20TB1 and check that the voltage is between 185 VDC and 195 VDC. Connect a DVM between the black and the green/yellow wires on A20TB1 and check that the voltage is between 185 VDC and 195 VDC. If this is a 32 or 40 kW system, repeat this check at terminal block A21TB1. 9. Carefully slide the Generator Cabinet Cover down onto the Generator Chassis, taking care not to damage the circuit boards on the front door of the generator. 10. Tighten the nine (9) cover screws to secure the Generator Cabinet Cover to the Generator Chassis. 11. Verify the Line Monitor/Source Charger Board over-voltage fault threshold and charger voltage limiter are calibrated as described in "Stored Energy Systems Line Monitor/Charger Board (AY40028T) A8 Replacement" procedure contained in this chapter.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
5-95
Chapter 5 Service Instructions
REPLACEMENT PARTS AND ORDERING INFORMATION WARNING! If components that have a direct or indirect influence on safety or radiation protection are replaced, it is essential that only Quantum Medical Imaging specified replacement parts be used. WARNING! For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with same type and rating of fuse. Refer to Figures 6-1 through 6-5 in Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS for a listing of replaceable parts for single phase, stored energy and three-phase X-ray generators and for the locations of the replaceable parts within the system. Use only original replacement parts as supplied or recommended by Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC. ORDERING INFORMATION To order replacement parts for the generator, contact the Service/Support Department at; Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC. 2002-B Orville Drive North Ronkonkoma, NY 11779-7661 USA Phone: (631) 567-5800 (x2) Fax: (631) 567-5074 email:
[email protected] When ordering replacement parts, supply the following information: • Model and serial number of equipment • Part number • Part description • Quantity required • P.O. Number • Shipping Instructions When ordering components or parts not listed in the tables of Figures 6-1 through 6-5, a complete description of the part, including its function and location should be provided with the model number and serial number of the unit. Contact
[email protected] for further information.
Revision W
5-96
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Chapter
6
DIAGRAMS
6-1
6-2
Chapter 6 Diagrams
A11 AEC CONTROL BD. A2 KVP CONTROL BD. AY40-031S (STANDARD) AY40-027S (UNIVERSAL) AY40-003S
A5 FILAMENT CONTROL BD. AY40-007T
A1 LOGIC BD. AY40-006S
A1A1 OCP INTERFACE BD. AY40-073S
**A10 ***A8 ROTOR DRIVE BD. LINE MONITOR BD. AY40-013T AY40-022T1
DB2 RECTIFIER
*A9 INTERFACE BD. AY40-023T
C9-C12 CAPACITORS 2400uF/450VDC
A19 POWER MODULE AY20-047
A18A3/A19A3 IGBT DRIVE BD AY40-010T
A18 POWER MODULE AY20-047 CB1 CIRCUIT BREAKER
*NOTE 1: **NOTE 2: ***NOTE 3: NOTE 4: NOTE 5:
C13-C16 CAPACITORS 2400uF/450VDC
AY40-034T USED WITH DIGITAL RECEPTOR SYSTEMS NOT PROVIDED ON SYSTEMS EQUIPPED WITH HIGH-SPEED STARTER AY40-022T2 USED ON 380- 480 VAC 1-PHASE INPUT SYSTEMS CONTACTOR K3 USED ON 380- 480 VAC 1-PHASE INPUT SYSTEMS ONLY AY40-073S USED ON SYSTEMS EQUIPPED WITH Q-CONNECT OPTION ONLY
DB1 RECTIFIER
C3, C4, C6, C7 CAPACITORS 1500V
A6 POWER SUPPLY BD. AY40-005T
A17 HIGH-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (125 KV = AY20-031, 150 KV = AY20-032)
F1, F2 (3.15A) SLO-BLO FUSES R4A (50 ), R4B (50 ) RESISTORS
R3A (50 ), R3B (50 ) RESISTORS
C1 CAPACITOR
FL1 EMI FILTER
R1A (1.2K ), R1B (1.2K ) RESISTORS
R2A (1.2K ), R2B (1.2K ) RESISTORS
TB1 TERMINAL BLOCK
T1 TRANSFORMER
TB2 TERMINAL BLOCK
K3 CONTACTOR
K1, K2 CONTACTORS
T2 TRANSFORMER
GENERATOR CABINET (PCB DOOR CLOSED)
GENERATOR CABINET (PCB DOOR OPEN)
Figure 6-1. Single-Phase (Non-STORED ENERGY) X-ray Generators, 25, 32 and 40 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-3
Chapter 6 Diagrams
SINGLE-PHASE (NON-SE) (MODELS QG-25, QG-32, QG-40) PARTS LIST A16 OCP CONTROL BD. AY40-004S1
LCD DISPLAY EL31-004
OCP CABLE (50 FT.) AY51-018
CABLE, OCP ON/OFF SWITCH AY51-026
AUX
ODYSSEY OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL (AY10-005) A16 OCP CONTROL BD. AY40-004S1
LCD DISPLAY EL31-005
OCP CABLE (50 FT.) AY51-018
CABLE, OCP ON/OFF SWITCH AY51-026
AEC FIELD
READY •
QUEST OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL (AY10-004)
Figure 6-1. Single-Phase (Non-STORED ENERGY) Xray Generators, 25, 32 and 40 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-4
Chapter 6 Diagrams
***OPTIONAL*** A11 AEC CONTROL BD. A2 KVP CONTROL BD. AY40-031S (STANDARD) AY40-027S (UNIVERSAL) AY40-003S
A5 FILAMENT CONTROL BD. AY40-007S
A1 LOGIC BD. AY40-006S
***A1A1 OCP INTERFACE BD. AY40-073S
A10 ROTOR DRIVE BD. AY40-013T
A8 LINE MONITOR/ SOURCE CHARGER BD. AY40-028T
TB1 TERMINAL BLOCK
A9 INTERFACE BD. AY40-023T1
T1 TRANSFORMER
A19 POWER MODULE AY20-047
A19A3/A18A3 IGBT DRIVE BD AY40-010T
A18 POWER MODULE AY20-047 FL1 EMI FILTER
CB1 CIRCUIT BREAKER C8-C15**** CAPACITORS 2400uF/450VDC K1 CONTACTOR
C7A** CAPACITOR
A6 POWER SUPPLY BD. AY40-005T
C7* CAPACITOR
BATTERY TRAY #2 (32, 40 & 50 KW UNITS ONLY)
A17 HIGH-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER AY20-031
C1 CAPACITOR (440V)
*NOTE 1:
GENERATOR CABINET (PCB DOOR CLOSED)
**NOTE 2: ***NOTE 3:
****NOTE 4:
FUSE HOLDER 30A/600V (EACH WITH 30A/500VAC SLO-BLO FUSE)
C4A** CAPACITOR
BATTERY TRAY #1 R1A (1.2K ), R1B (1.2K ) R4A (1.2K ), R4B (1.2K ) RESISTORS
R2A, R2B, R3A, R3B (50 ) RESISTORS
C4 AND C7 VALUE IS DEPENDENT ON MODEL TYPE (0.5 uF ON 32KW, 1.0 uF ON 40KW & 50KW UNITS) C4A & C7A ONLY USED ON 50 KW UNITS AY40-073S USED ON SYSTEMS EQUIPPED WITH Q-CONNECT OPTION ONLY
C4* CAPACITOR C3, C6 CAPACITOR 1.0 uF/1500V LEAD ACID BATTERIES (30 PER TRAY)
GENERATOR CABINET (PCB DOOR OPEN)
C9-C12 ON 20 KW UNITS; C8 THRU C15 ON 32 & 40 KW UNITS
Figure 6-2. Single-Phase (STORED ENERGY) X-ray Generators, 20, 32 40 and 50 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-5
Chapter 6 Diagrams
SINGLE-PHASE (STORED ENERGY) PARTS LIST
A16 OCP CONTROL BD. AY40-004S1
LCD DISPLAY EL31-004
OCP CABLE (50 FT.) AY51-018
SWITCH, OCP ON/OFF EL50-007-1
AUX
ODYSSEY OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL (AY10-005) A16 OCP CONTROL BD. AY40-004S1
LCD DISPLAY EL31-005
AEC FIELD
OCP CABLE (50 FT.) AY51-018
SWITCH, OCP ON/OFF EL50-007-1
READY •
QUEST OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL (AY10-004)
Figure 6-2. Single-Phase (STORED ENERGY) X-ray Generators, 20, 32, 40 and 50 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-6
Chapter 6 Diagrams
***OPTIONAL*** A11 AEC CONTROL BD. A2 KVP CONTROL BD. AY40-031S (STANDARD) AY40-027S (UNIVERSAL) AY40-003S
A5 FILAMENT CONTROL BD. AY40-007T
A1 LOGIC BD. AY40-006S
A1A1 OCP INTERFACE BD. AY40-073S
* A10 **A8 ROTOR DRIVE BD. LINE MONITOR BD. AY40-013T AY40-053S2
DB2 RECTIFIER
***A9 INTERFACE BD. AY40-023T
C9-C11 CAPACITORS 2400uF/450VDC
A19 POWER MODULE AY20-047
A18A3/A19A3 IGBT DRIVE BD AY40-010T
A18 POWER MODULE AY20-047 CB1 CIRCUIT BREAKER C9-C11, C13-C15 CAPACITORS 2400uF/450VDC
DB1 RECTIFIER
C1 * CAPACITOR
C3, C4, C6, C7 CAPACITORS 1500V A17 HIGH-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (125 KV = AY20-031, 150 KV = AY20-032)
A6 POWER SUPPLY BD. AY40-005T
FL1 EMI FILTER F1, F2 SLO-BLO FUSES (3.15A)
T2 TRANSFORMER R4A, R4B RESISTORS (50 OHM)
R3A, R3B RESISTORS (50 OHM)
R1A, R2B R2A, R2B RESISTORS (1.2K )
TB2 TERMINAL BLOCK
T1A, T1B, T1C TRANSFORMER
*NOTE 1:
GENERATOR CABINET (PCB DOOR CLOSED)
NOT PROVIDED ON SYSTEMS EQUIPPED WITH HIGH-SPEED STARTER **NOTE 2: AY40-053S3 PROVIDED ON MODEL QG-32-2 AND QG-40-2 ***NOTE 3: AY40-034T USED WITH DIGITAL RECEPTOR SYSTEMS NOTE 4: AY40-073S USED ON SYSTEMS EQUIPPED WITH Q-CONNECT OPTION ONLY
TB1 TERMINAL BLOCK
GENERATOR CABINET (PCB DOOR OPEN)
K1 - K3 CONTACTOR
Figure 6-3. Three-Phase X-ray Generators, 32 and 40 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-7
Chapter 6 Diagrams
32, 40 kW THREE-PHASE (MODELS QG-32-2, QG-32-3, QG-40-2, QG-40-3) PARTS LIST
A16 OCP CONTROL BD. AY40-004S1
LCD DISPLAY EL31-004
OCP CABLE (50 FT.) AY51-018
SWITCH, OCP ON/OFF EL50-007-1
AUX
ODYSSEY OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL (AY10-005) A16 OCP CONTROL BD. AY40-004S1
LCD DISPLAY EL31-005
AEC FIELD
OCP CABLE (50 FT.) AY51-018
SWITCH, OCP ON/OFF EL50-007-1
READY •
QUEST OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL (AY10-004)
Figure 6-3. Three-Phase X-ray Generators, 32 and 40 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-8
Chapter 6 Diagrams
***OPTIONAL*** A11 AEC CONTROL BD. A2 KVP CONTROL BD. AY40-031S (STANDARD) AY40-027S (UNIVERSAL) AY40-003S
A5 FILAMENT CONTROL BD. AY40-007T
A1 LOGIC BD. AY40-006S
A1A1 OCP INTERFACE BD. AY40-073S
*A10 **A8 ROTOR DRIVE BD. LINE MONITOR BD. AY40-013T AY40-053S2
DB2 RECTIFIER
***A9 INTERFACE BD. AY40-023T
C9-C12 CAPACITORS 2400uF/450VDC
A19 POWER MODULE AY20-047
A18A3/A19A3 IGBT DRIVE BD AY40-010T
A18 POWER MODULE AY20-047 CB1 CIRCUIT BREAKER C13-C16 CAPACITORS 2400uF/450VDC DB1 RECTIFIER
C1 * CAPACITOR
C3, C4, C6, C7 CAPACITORS 1 uF, 1500V C5, C8 CAPACITORS .5 uF 1500V A17 HIGH-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (125 KV = AY20-031, 150 KV = AY20-032)
A6 POWER SUPPLY BD. AY40-005T
FL1 EMI FILTER F1, F2 SLO-BLO FUSES (3.15A) R4A, R4B RESISTORS (50 OHM) R3A, R3B RESISTORS (50 OHM)
TB2 TERMINAL BLOCK
T2 TRANSFORMER R1A, R1B R2A, R2B RESISTORS (1.2 KOHM)
TB1 TERMINAL BLOCK
T1A, T1B, T1C TRANSFORMER
*NOTE 1:
GENERATOR CABINET (PCB DOOR CLOSED)
NOT PROVIDED ON SYSTEMS EQUIPPED WITH HIGH-SPEED STARTER **NOTE 2: AY40-053S3 PROVIDED ON MODEL QG-50-2 ***NOTE 3: AY40-034T USED WITH DIGITAL RECEPTOR SYSTEMS NOTE 4: C5 AND C8 NOT USED ON MODEL QG-50-2 NOTE 5: AY40-073S USED ON SYSTEMS EQUIPPED WITH Q-CONNECT OPTION ONLY
GENERATOR CABINET (PCB DOOR OPEN)
K1 - K3 CONTACTOR
Figure 6-4. Three-Phase X-ray Generators, 50, 65 and 80 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-9
Chapter 6 Diagrams
QG-50, QG-50-2, QG-65 AND QG-80 THREE-PHASE PARTS LIST
A16 OCP CONTROL BD. AY40-004S1
LCD DISPLAY EL31-004
OCP CABLE (50 FT.) AY51-018
SWITCH, OCP ON/OFF EL50-007-1
AUX
ODYSSEY OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL (AY10-005) A16 OCP CONTROL BD. AY40-004S1
LCD DISPLAY EL31-005
AEC FIELD
OCP CABLE (50 FT.) AY51-018
SWITCH, OCP ON/OFF EL50-007-1
READY •
QUEST OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL (AY10-004)
Figure 6-4. Three-Phase X-ray Generators, 50, 65 and 80 kW Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-10
Chapter 6 Diagrams
***OPTIONAL*** A11 AEC CONTROL BD. A2 KVP CONTROL BD. AY40-031S (STANDARD) AY40-027S (UNIVERSAL) AY40-003S
A5 FILAMENT CONTROL BD. AY40-007T
A1 LOGIC BD. AY40-006S
A1A1 OCP INTERFACE BD. AY40-073S
A20A2 HSS DRIVER BD. AY40-036S
**A8 LINE MONITOR BD. AY40-053S2
DB2 RECTIFIER
***A9 INTERFACE BD. AY40-061T
C9-C12 CAPACITORS 2400uF/450VDC
A19 POWER MODULE AY20-047
A18A3/A19A3 IGBT DRIVE BD AY40-010T
A18 POWER MODULE AY20-047
***OPTIONAL*** +28 VDC POWER SUPPLY CB1 CIRCUIT BREAKER C13-C16 CAPACITORS 2400uF/450VDC DB1 RECTIFIER
C1* CAPACITOR
C3, C4, C6, C7 CAPACITORS 1 uF, 1500V
C2A, C2B CAPACITOR (12 MFD)
C5, C8 CAPACITORS .5 uF 1500V
A20A1 HSS CONTROL BD. AY40-035S
A17 HIGH-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (125 KV = AY20-031, 150 KV = AY20-032)
A6 POWER SUPPLY BD. AY40-005T
FL1 EMI FILTER F1, F2 SLO-BLO FUSES (3.15A) R4A, R4B RESISTORS (50 OHM) R3A, R3B RESISTORS (50 OHM)
TB2 TERMINAL BLOCK
T2 TRANSFORMER R1A, R1B R2A, R2B RESISTORS (1.2 KOHM)
TB1 TERMINAL BLOCK
T1A, T1B, T1C TRANSFORMER
*NOTE 1:
GENERATOR CABINET (PCB DOOR CLOSED)
C1 VALUE IS DEPENDENT ON TUBE TYPE (40 uF FOR E7813 & E7252 TUBES, 25 uF ALL OTHERS) **NOTE 2: AY40-053S3 USED ON MODEL QG-50-2 ***NOTE 3: AY40-062T USED WITH DIGITAL RECEPTOR SYSTEMS NOTE 4: C5 AND C8 NOT USED ON MODEL QG-50-2 NOTE 5: AY40-073S USED ON SYSTEMS EQUIPPED WITH Q-CONNECT OPTION ONLY
GENERATOR CABINET (PCB DOOR OPEN)
K1 - K3 CONTACTOR
Figure 6-5. Three-Phase X-ray Generators, 50, 65 and 80 kW (with QMI-HSS) Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-11
Chapter 6 Diagrams QG-50, QG-50-2, QG-65 AND QG-80 (WITH QMI-HSS HIGH-SPEED STARTER OPTION) THREE-PHASE PARTS LIST
A16 OCP CONTROL BD. AY40-004S1
LCD DISPLAY EL31-004
OCP CABLE (50 FT.) AY51-018
SWITCH, OCP ON/OFF EL50-007-1
AUX
ODYSSEY OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL (AY10-005) A16 OCP CONTROL BD. AY40-004S1
LCD DISPLAY EL31-005
AEC FIELD
OCP CABLE (50 FT.) AY51-018
SWITCH, OCP ON/OFF EL50-007-1
READY •
QUEST OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL (AY10-004)
Figure 6-5. Three-Phase X-ray Generators, 50, 65 and 80 kW (with QMI-HSS) Parts Location Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-12
Chapter 6 Diagrams
RED +24VDC BLACK - GND
L1 N 'X-RAY ON' LAMP
1 2
WALL STAND L2/N L1
TB1 AC Power 115/230 VAC
AC Power 115/230VAC 15A
WALL BUCKY ION CHAMBER
TB1
SW1 1
2
TABLE
DOOR INTERLOCKS
SW2 1
TABLE BUCKY
2
ION CHAMBER
RED +24 VDC BLACK - GND
QUANTUM Q-WARE
2 1
LAPTOP TOOL
2 1
TECHVISION OPTION
FIELD SERVICE
TB6
TB5 TB4
WALL BUCKY REMOTE EXPOSURE CONTROL
QUANTUM X-RAY GENERATOR
BUCKY READY +24 VDC 24V GND RTN GROUND
HANDSWITCH
TB3 TABLE BUCKY
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
TABLE J4
WALL J2
BUCKY READY N/A N/A GROUND
AEC PCB
J2
AY40-031S
N/A 115 VAC RTN BUCKY ON 115 VAC
STANDARD HANDGRIP ETHERNET RJ-45
TB2
GROUND COMMON EXPOSE PREP
12-PIN CIRCULAR
SHIELD GRN/BLK WHITE RED
TUBESTAND
COLLIMATOR
+24 VDC 24V GND RTN N/A EXPOSURE HOLD (COLLIMATOR READY)
COLLIMATOR
N/A N/A EXPOSURE HOLD COMMON
QMI - HSS OPTION *
TB1
4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TB1
1 2 3
24 VAC 24 VAC RTN GROUND
AY40-036S
TB2
MAIN N/A PHASE N/A N/A COMMON
TB4 THERMAL SWITCH THERMAL SW GND
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
BLACK N/A RED N/A N/A WHITE
CATHODE(-)
ORANGE GREEN
VARIAN
RS-422 TECHVISION POWER/DATA
X-RAY TUBE MAIN PHASE COMMON
STANDARD LOGIC PCB
J4
OCP POWER/DATA/CONTROL
9-PIN SUB-D
J5
ROTOR PCB *
AY40-006S
OPERATOR'S CONSOLE
J8
N/A N/A THERMAL SWITCH THERMAL SW GND
TB1
AY40-013T
4
3
2
BLACK RED WHITE
MAIN PHASE COMMON THERMAL SWITCH THERMAL SW GND
N/A N/A GREEN ORANGE
4 3 5 2 1
CATHODE(-) AY51-017
L1 L2 L3 N 1
THREE PHASE OPTION
L2 2
GENERATOR GROUND
L1 1
SINGLE PHASE OPTION
TB1
TB1
TUBESTAND
N/A 115 VAC RTN BUCKY ON 115 VAC
INTERFACE PCB AY40-023T
RS-232 SERIAL COMM PORT
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2
TECHVISION AUXILIARY HANDGRIP M NON-INTEGRATED OPTION
UTILITY SOFTWARE
TB1
ANODE(+)
ANODE(+)
HIGH VOLTAGE
TOSHIBA
CATHODE(-)
DUNLEE X-RAY TUBES X-RAY TUBE NEUTRAL MAY BE OMITTED
NEUTRAL
QG - HSS
GND
AID - HSS
L2
EARTH GROUND
MAIN PHASE COMMON
OPTION *
L1
PHASE C
PHASE B
LOCAL ELECTRICAL CODE. PHASE A
GROUND
GROUND
PHASE B
PHASE A
IF NOT REQUIRED BY
THERMAL SWITCH THERMAL SWITCH
1300/1400
DA10
CENTER PIN INNER PIN OUTER PIN
WHITE-PIN 1 GREEN-PIN 2 BLACK-PIN 3
TS-2 PIN TS-1 PIN
GREEN-PIN 6 ORANGE-PIN 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
BLACK RED WHITE N/A N/A GREEN ORANGE
MAIN PHASE COMMON
THERMAL SWITCH THERMAL SW GND
3 2 1
5 6
*Note: The Standard Rotor PCB ANODE(+)
AY40-013T is removed when the
L1
L1
L3
L2
INCOMING AC POWER
L1
L2
L1
QG-HSS AID High Speed Starter or the QMI-HSS is present in the system.
50-60 Hz 208-260 VAC
208-240 VAC or
200-240VAC
380-480 VAC
20A
SC50-015T REV. M
Figure 6-6. Generator System Cabling Diagram (Internal High-Speed Starter)
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-13
Chapter 6 Diagrams
Figure 6-7. Generator System Cabling Diagram (External High-Speed Starter Systems)
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-14
Chapter 6 Diagrams
RED +24VDC BLACK - GND
L1 N 'X-RAY ON' LAMP
1 2
WALL STAND L2/N L1
TB1 AC Power 115/230 VAC
AC Power 115/230VAC 15A
WALL BUCKY ION CHAMBER
TB1
SW1 1
2
DOOR INTERLOCKS
SW2 1
TABLE BUCKY
TABLE
2
ION CHAMBER RED +24 VDC BLACK - GND
TB6
TECHVISION AUXILIARY HANDGRIP OPTION
QUANTUM X-RAY GENERATOR
WORKSTATION TB5
1 2
TB1 TUBESTAND
TB4 COMPUTER
DISPLAY
WALL BUCKY
INTERFACE PCB
WALL
TABLE
J2
J4
AY40-023T
AEC PCB
J2
TB3 AY40-031S
STANDARD
TABLE BUCKY HANDGRIP POWER
ETHERNET RJ-45
TUBESTAND COLLIMATOR
TB2 QMI - HSS
GENERATOR CONTROL BOX
COLLIMATOR
OPTION *
TB1
AY40-036S
Q-CONNECT OPTION
TB2 TB4
CATHODE(-)
VARIAN X-RAY TUBE J3 A1A1P5
AC POWER
ETHERNET SWITCH
LOGIC PCB AY40-006S/ OCP INTERFACE PCB AY40-073S
A1A1P1
STANDARD ROTOR PCB *
TB1
J8 AY40-013T
THREE PHASE OPTION
L3
CATHODE(-)
N 4
L2
3
1
L1
2
1
TB1
GENERATOR GROUND
L2
AY51-017
L1
2
SINGLE PHASE OPTION
TB1
ANODE(+)
ANODE(+)
HIGH VOLTAGE
TOSHIBA
CATHODE(-)
DUNLEE X-RAY TUBES X-RAY TUBE NEUTRAL MAY BE OMITTED
NEUTRAL
QG - HSS
GND
AID - HSS
L1
EARTH GROUND
MAIN PHASE COMMON
OPTION *
L2
PHASE C
LOCAL ELECTRICAL CODE. PHASE B
GROUND
PHASE A
GROUND
PHASE B
PHASE A
IF NOT REQUIRED BY
THERMAL SWITCH THERMAL SWITCH
*Note: The Standard Rotor PCB AY40-013T is removed when the
1300/1400
DA10
CENTER PIN INNER PIN OUTER PIN
WHITE-PIN 1 GREEN-PIN 2 BLACK-PIN 3
TS-2 PIN TS-1 PIN
GREEN-PIN 6 ORANGE-PIN 5
ANODE(+)
L1
L1
L3
L2
INCOMING AC POWER
L1
L2
L1
QG-HSS AID High Speed Starter or the QMI-HSS is present in the system.
SC50-094T REV. A 50-60 Hz 208-260 VAC
208-240 VAC or
200-240VAC
380-480 VAC
20A
Figure 6-8. System Cabling Diagram (with Q-Connect Option)
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-15
Chapter 6 Diagrams
RS-580/QS-550/QV-800
TECH VISION HANDGRIP OPTION
D-Qix Mini Control
OCP ( Control Panel)
8 PIN CIRCULAR PLUG
OPTION
Serial Comm J1
TechVision Power/Control Cable
AY51-126
J4 CIRCULAR BLACK PLUG
J3 (9 PIN CONNECTOR)
5 PORT SWITCH BOX
REMOTE ON/OFF
J2 CAT 5 ETHERNET CABLE AY51-150
OPTION
(CXDI 50G Only) OCP Serial Cable
POWER BOX SPW CONTROL PC (CXDI-C3S)
CN4 AC 120V/230V INPUT POWER J004
CN2
J003
CAT 5 SERIAL
NETWORK LAN 1 Sensor Cable
HF GENERATOR
LOGIC
TOUCH SCREEN MONITOR
RS232
COM 1 VGA VGA
5 PORT CAT 5
SWITCH BOX CAT 5
BOARD
LAN 2
POWER SUPPLY
X-Ray I/F Receptor Cable
(J5) Interface Board
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Jumper
Jumper
TABLE TB3/ WALL TB4
KEYBOARD
MOUSE
A1 A2 B1 B2 AC120 +/- 10 60hZ 2A AC230 +/- 10 50/60Hz 1.5A INPUT POWER AEC Cable
AEC Control Board
CXDI 50G/40EG/31G IMAGING UNIT
SC50-081 REV. A
Figure 6-9. HF Generator to Canon/TechVision System Interconnection Diagram (Non-Widescreen)
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-16
Chapter 6 Diagrams
RS-580/QS-550/QV-800
TechVision Power/Control Cable
TECH VISION HANDGRIP OPTION
5 PORT SWITCH BOX
REMOTE ON/OFF
J2 CAT 5 ETHERNET CABLE AY51-150
OPTION
(CXDI 50G Only)
POWER BOX SPW CONTROL PC
CN4 AC 120V/230V INPUT POWER
(CXDI-C3S) J004
CN2
J003
CAT 5
NETWORK
SERIAL LAN 1
P1
BOARD
P5
OCP INTERFACE BD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Jumper
Jumper
TABLE TB3/ WALL TB4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
VGA CAT 5
SWITCH BOX CAT 5
CONTROL BOX
Interface Board
RS232
COM 1
VGA
5 PORT
GEN.
X-Ray I/F Receptor Cable
J3
LOGIC
Sensor Cable
HF GENERATOR
TOUCH SCREEN MONITOR
LAN 2
CXDI 50G/40EG/31G IMAGING UNIT
POWER SUPPLY
KEYBOARD
MOUSE
A1 A2 B1 B2 AC120 +/- 10 60hZ 2A AC230 +/- 10 50/60Hz 1.5A INPUT POWER
AEC Cable AEC Control Board
SC50-103 REV. A
Figure 6-10. HF Generator to Canon/TechVision System Interconnection Diagram (Widescreen)
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-17
Chapter 6 Diagrams
NOTE: ON SYSTEMS USING FOUR (4) WIRE MULTI-CONDUCTOR BUCKY CABLE, CONNECT "BUCKY ON" SIGNAL (RED WIRE) TO LINE (B4) TERMINAL ON BUCKY. (THE 115VAC (BLACK WIRE) CONNECTION
Figure 6-11. 17 x 17 Midwest Bucky Interconnection Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-18
Chapter 6 Diagrams
NOTE: ON SYSTEMS USING FOUR (4) WIRE MULTI-CONDUCTOR BUCKY CABLE, CONNECT "BUCKY ON" SIGNAL (RED WIRE) TO LINE (L) TERMINAL ON BUCKY. (THE 115VAC (BLACK WIRE) CONNECTION
Figure 6-12. 17 x 17 Progeny and L-F Bucky Interconnection Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-19
Chapter 6 Diagrams
Figure 6-13. 14 x 36 Midwest Bucky Interconnection Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-20
Chapter 6 Diagrams
GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG)
1 2
K1
D2
D1 1N4005
-
~
2
A19QA
~
A19R1 1
1
AY51-065
A18,A1P5
J4 J3 G2 E2
+
TUBE ROTOR CHART
2
CONNECTION)
+3
A18C1
A18C2
-
-
A18QB
2
A18QA
X-RAY TUBE ROTOR CONNECTION CHART
A+
1
1
AY51-065
DB1
DB2
AY20-047
A19
A18
POWER MODULE
AY20-047
POWER MODULE
AY51-128 (4X)
(SEE NOTE 2)
ANODE
CATHODE AY51-073
TOSHIBA
VARIAN
1- COMM.
5- COMM.
OUTER- COMM.
2- MAIN
4- MAIN
CENTER- MAIN
3- PHASE
3- PHASE
INNER- PHASE
5- T.S.
1- T.S.
T.S.-1
6- T.S.
2- T.S.
T.S.-2
DUNLEE
C-
A18R1
(SEE NOTE 1)
-
J7 J6
J9 J8 G2 E2 3
C16
A19C2
-
AY51-080
+
AY51-079
E1 G1
G2 E2
+
AY51-023
+
X-RAY TUBE (SEE FOR ROTOR
C15 +
J2 J1
J4 J3
J7 J6 2
~
+3
A19QB
(SEE NOTE 1)
-
~
+
A19C1
+
~
9
1N4005
9
1 2
10
7 8
5
3 6
4
C12 10
AY51-127 (4X)
K2
3
C14
1 2 3 4
ROTOR CABLE
+
C13
AY51-066
~
8 7
C11
J5 ANODE
IGBT DRIVE BD.
1 2 3 4
+
6 5
E1 G1
AY51-073 (2X)
3
AY51-088 (2X)
J9 J8
C10
G2 E2
4
L2
C9
R4 A,B 50 OHM 50W
J5 CATHODE
AY51-080
AY25-001
R3 A,B 50 OHM 50W
AY51-066
WHT BLK
440VAC
+
440VAC
+
3.15A SB
+
3.15A SB
F2 BLK WHT
LINE
L1
LOAD
LOAD
LINE
CB1 (SEE NOTE 6) YEL/GRN (10AWG)
F1
TB1
AY51-127 (4X)
AY40-010T AY40-010T IGBT DRIVE BD.
AY51-007
AY51-079
AY51-058 X2
A19,A1P5
E1 G1
WHT BLK RED BLUE
J2 J1
GROUND TO HV TANK
E1 G1
MAIN GROUND STUD
C7
C4
C6
C3
AY51-128 (4X)
2.4K VC-
J3
J2
A6P2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A6P3
A9P2
AY51-005 WHITE (16AWG) BLACK (16AWG) VIOLET BLUE RED BROWN/YELLOW BLUE/YELLOW BLACK/RED
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J4
1 2
TB6
A9P6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
J10
A1P4 RED GREEN/YELLOW BLACK GREEN/YELLOW BLUE VIOLET WHITE WHITE/BLACK YELLOW/WHITE BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE BLUE/YELLOW GREY GREEN/BROWN BROWN GREEN RED/GREEN ORANGE/BLACK BROWN/YELLOW GREEN/ORANGE
24VDC 24VDC RTN 28VDC GROUND BUCKY TABLE BUCKY WALL PREP COLLIMATOR READY BKY T. READY BKY W. READY DOOR SPARE TABLE RDY K2, 24VDC EXPOSE PREP RDY 0VAC 7.5VAC 15VDC 15VDC RTN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J2 V SENSE A V SENSE C GROUND 24VDC AUTO SHUT OFF SYSTEM ON 24VDC MAG. 24VDC MAG. RTN NOT USED FAULT RESET NOT USED NOT USED
A1P3 BLACK/RED WHT/BLK
GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG)
16 14 15 FIL. SMALL
8
A17P1
J1
AY40-006S A1, CPU BD. (LOGIC BD.)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A1P10 A1P9 A2P8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J8 1 2 3 4 5
A1P5 OCP ON RS-485 RS-485 EXP. PREP 28VDC GND 28VDC GND J5
+18 VDC GROUND OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A2P5
+18 VDC GROUND OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A2P6
J3
J5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A5P2
J2
AY40-007T A5, FILAMENT CONTROL BD.
A2P3 AY51-019-2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN AY40-003S A2, KVP BD.
GRN/YEL A1P1
J6
BRN RED ORN YEL GRN BLU VIO GRY WHT BLK
48VDC 48VDCRTN
J7 1 2 3 4
J1
AY51-013 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BLK, L RED, S WHT, C GROUND
A2P7
A11P2 J4
J2
AY40-031S A11, AEC BD. (OPTIONAL)
A11P1 A2P4
J4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
J1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SC50-046T REV. R
A11P3 J3
J5
AY51-020
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
AEC TABLE GRN/YEL
A11P5
A16P1
(SEE NOTE 5)
AY51-018-XX
AY51-012 FILAMENT BOARD GROUND
30VDC 30VDC RTN
1 2 3 4
J3
STUD
SHIELD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
AY51-011
PCB DOOR GROUND
RS 232 MASTER PORT
AY51-008
A1P2
AY40-022T1 A8, LINE MONITOR BD.
RS 232 SLAVE PORT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J9
BROWN (22AWG) RED (22AWG) ORANGE (22AWG) YELLOW (22AWG) GREEN (22AWG) BLUE (22AWG) VIOLET (20AWG) GREY (20AWG) WHITE (22AWG) BLACK (22AWG) BLACK/ORANGE (22 AWG) WHITE/BROWN (22 AWG)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J11
DOOR INTERLOCK
J6
A8P4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2
DOOR INTERLOCK DOOR INTERLOCK RTN
AY40-023T A9, INTERFACE BD.
RED
X - RAY ON
TB5
A1P8
J8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TO WALLSTAND
J2 X-RAY IN USE X-RAY IN USE RTN
A5P1
AY51-021
BLK (16AWG) WHT (16AWG)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TO OCP ASSEMBLY AY10-004 QUEST AY10-005 ODYSSEY
VC+/2.4K
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
GROUND 24 VDC RTN 24 VDC BUCKY READY
GRN/YEL (16AWG) BLACK (16AWG) WHITE (16AWG)
AEC WALL 1
VA -
R1A, R1B R2A, R2B 1.2K/50W
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
7. ADJUST THESE JUMPERS TO THE NEAREST INCOMING AC LINE INPUT. AY51-017
AEC WALL 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2.4K
TO TABLE
6. 40KW SYSTEMS CB1 MUST BE 70 AMP. 32.5 AND 25 KW SYSTEMS CB1 MUST BE 50AMP.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A8P2
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
J2 VA+/2.4K
J3 C1 30UF/440VAC (SEE NOTE 3)
TB4 115 VAC BUCKY W. ON 115 VAC RTN
J5
220 VAC OUT T2 0 VAC OUT T2 120 VAC 0VAC
AY51-004
48VDC 48VDC 48VDCRTN 48VDCRTN 30VDC 30VDC 30VDCRTN 30VDCRTN 15VDC 15VDCRTN
BUCKY READY
A9P5
J1 32VAC 32VAC RTN 15VAC 15VAC RTN 11VAC 11VAC RTN 28VAC 28VAC RTN
J1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
A6P1 AY40-005T A6, POWER SUPPLY BD.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
WHITE(20AWG) BLACK(20AWG) BLUE(20AWG) RED(20AWG)
A8P1
INCOM. L 0VAC ICOM. L 220VAC OUTPUT 220VAC SW. OUTPUT 0VAC SW.
J6
A8P6
BLUE(20AWG) RED(20AWG)
10
A8P3 J3
1 2 3 4
BLUE(20AWG)
EMI FILTER
WHT/BLK BLACK/RED WHT (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
BRN/YEL ORN/BLK
5 3 6 1 2 7 4 9 8 10
AY20258 TMI
GROUND
HV MODULE
A11P4
11
LOAD LINE
220 VAC IN 220 VAC IN 60VAC ROTOR 0 VAC ROTOR
5. AY51-019-2 IS USED FOR AEC OPTION ONLY. NON AEC GENERATORS USE AY51-019-1.
1.5KE68CA A17 AY20-031
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
GND
ROTOR DRIVE BD. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6
17 18
TB3 115 VAC BUCKY T. ON 115 VAC RTN
J4
4
FIL.COMMON
19 20
LINE LOAD
GRN/YEL (16AWG)
A9P4
A10 AY40-013T
4. DISCONNECT A17P1-9 AND 10 FROM GROUND AND CONNECT MAS METER TO THESE WIRES. (WARNING A17P19 AND 10 MUST BE CONNECTED TO GROUND OR MAS METER.)
WHT RED
6
AY51-043
FIL. SHIELD BLK FIL. LARGE
4
TO TUBE STAND
SHIELD 7
220
15 7
5 2 1 3
A2P1
3
1 2 3
J1
1
3. C1 VALUE COULD CHANGE DEPENDING ON TUBE MANUFACTURER OR MODEL. (SEE TUBE DATA SHEET).
9
6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J5
A10P5
CATH. FDBK CATH. RTN MA FDBK MA RTN ANODE RTN ANODE FDBK
0 120
10
(SEE NOTE 4)
A10P4
AY51-017
60VAV
8
24 VDC 24 VDC RTN COLL. READY 15V RTN 15VDC GROUND
2. C3, C4, C6 AND C7 1µF 1500V. C5 AND C8 NOT USED.
A
A10TB1
TB1 J4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
NOTES: 1. C9 THRU C16 2400µF 450VDC.
PA2
C
TO COLLIMATOR
TB2
PA1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7
32VAC 0VAC 16VAC 0VAC 11VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 7VAC 0VAC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
PC2
MA RTN MA SENSE ANODE RTN ANODE FDBK CATHODE RTN CATHODE FDBK
6
260VAC
8 16
BLK (16AWG) 32VAC BLK (16AWG) 0VAC 16VAC BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) 0VAC 11VAC BLK (16AWG) 0VAC BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) 28VAC 0VAC BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) 28VAC BLK (16AWG) 0VAC BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
PC1
AY51-012
240VAC
9
T2
CHASSIS GRN TEMP. FAULT
1 2 3
24 VAC COLL. 24 VAC RTN GROUND
J1
1 BLK 2 RED 3 WHT 4 5 6 T.S. 7 T.S.
AY51-023 AY51-015
5 6
ROTOR MAIN ROTOR PHASE ROTOR COMMON
AY51-012
5
1 2 3 4
AY51-010
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
220VAC
1 2 3 4
BROWN RED ORANGE YELLOW GREEN BLUE VIOLET GREY WHITE
200VAC
4
J3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3
2 3 4
7VAC 0VAC
0VAC
A9P1
280VAC
AY51-070 (2X)
1
2
RED YELLOW GREEN BROWN
AY51-022-1P
-10VAC
220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC
TB1
T1
TB2 1
J7
J1 220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC
AY51-018-XX
1 2 3 4
BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE
A10P1
AY51-019-2
A9P7
AY51-016
A9P3 BROWN (16 AWG) RED (16 AWG) ORANGE (16AWG)
A10P3
SEE NOTE 7
AY51-009-1P
BRN/YEL ORN/BLK
AY51-073
Figure 6-14. Single-Phase 208 - 260 VAC Input (NonSTORED ENERGY) X-ray Generators, 25, 32 and 40 kW Interconnection Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-21
Chapter 6 Diagrams MAIN GROUND STUD
AY51-066
ROTOR CABLE
A18,A1P5
G2
J2 J1
J4 J3
J7 J6
J9 J8 G2 E2
+ +
AY51-023
E1 G1
E1 G1
+
AY51-080
J2 J1
X-RAY TUBE ROTOR CONNECTION CHART
POWER MODULE
ANODE
AY51-128 (4X)
C7
C4
C6
C3
16 14 15 8
A17P1
SHIELD 7
FIL. SHIELD BLK FIL. LARGE
GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG)
FILAMENT BOARD GROUND
8
7
6
4
3
2
5
48VDC 48VDCRTN 16
15
14
13
12
11
J1
A11P1
J5
30VDC 30VDC RTN
A11P5 (SEE NOTE 5)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
GRN/YEL
A16P1
AEC TABLE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
AY10-009-1 T. RAD PLUS TECHVISION AY10-009 T. RAD PLUS
A11P3 J3
ODYSSEY. AY10-005-1 ODYSEY TECHVISION
AY51-020
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TO OCP ASSEMBLY AY10-004 QUEST, AY10-005
BLK (16AWG) WHT (16AWG)
AY40-031S A11, AEC BD. (OPTIONAL)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
AEC WALL 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
AY51-019-2
AY51-012 PCB DOOR GROUND STUD
10
A2P4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
AY51-018-XX
AY40-003S A2,A KVP BD. (SEE NOTE 5)
SC50-047T REV. H J2
AEC WALL 2
GRN/YEL A1P1
A11P2 J4
9
J5
AY51-019-2
8
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
AY40-007T A5, FILAMENT CONTROL BD.
J2
A2P3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
J4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A5P2
7
J3
BLK, L RED, S WHT, C GROUND
1
A1P6
8
A2P5
J6
4
3
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
+18 VDC GROUND OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
9
BLACK/RED WHT/BLK
1
J3 A1P3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J8 1 2 3 4 5
8
AY51-011
A2P8
7
AY40-006S A1, CPU BD. (LOGIC BD.)
+18 VDC GROUND OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
6
BROWN (22AWG) RED (22AWG) ORANGE (22AWG) YELLOW (22AWG) GREEN (22AWG) BLUE (22AWG) VIOLET (20AWG) GREY (20AWG) WHITE (22AWG) BLACK (22AWG) BLACK/ORANGE (22 AWG) WHITE/BROWN (22 AWG)
J1
ADJUST THESE JUMPERS TO THE NEAREST INCOMING AC LINE INPUT.
6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J2 V SENSE A V SENSE C GROUND 24VDC AUTO SHUT OFF SYSTEM ON 24VDC MAG. 24VDC MAG. RTN NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED
40 AND 32 KW SYSTEMS CB1 MUST BE 50 AMP/3 POLES 25 KW SYSTEMS CB1 MUST BE 30AMP/ 3 POLES
7.
J1
AY51-013 BRN RED ORN YEL GRN BLU VIO GRY WHT BLK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A1P10 A1P9
A1P5 OCP ON RS-485 RS-485 EXP. PREP 28VDC GND 28VDC GND J5
AY51-019-2 IS USED FOR AEC OPTION ONLY. NON AEC GENERATORS USE AY51-019-1
6.
4
24VDC 24VDC RTN 28VDC GROUND BUCKY TABLE BUCKY WALL PREP COLLIMATOR READY BKY T. READY BKY W. READY DOOR SPARE TABLE RDY K2, 24VDC EXPOSE PREP RDY 0VAC 7.5VAC 15VDC 15VDC RTN
J7 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
A2P7
5
RED GREEN/YELLOW BLACK GREEN/YELLOW BLUE VIOLET WHITE WHITE/BLACK YELLOW/WHITE BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE BLUE/YELLOW GREY GREEN/BROWN BROWN GREEN RED/GREEN ORANGE/BLACK BROWN/YELLOW GREEN/ORANGE
5.
6
5
A2P1
AY51-017
WHT FIL.COMMON FIL. SMALL RED
CATH. FDBK CATH. RTN MA FDBK MA RTN ANODE RTN ANODE FDBK AY51-012
AY51-023 AY51-015
9
SHIELD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4
A1P4
AY51-008
A1P2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
DISCONNECT A17P1-9 AND 10 FROM GROUND AND
5
AY40-023T A9, INTERFACE BD. A8P4
4.
4
RED
A6P3
J9 A9P6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
C1 VALUE COULD CHANGE DEPENDING ON TUBE MANUFACTURER OR MODEL. (SEE TUBE DATA SHEET)
3
J3 A6P2
J10
1 2
J6
AY51-004
J2
WHT/BLK BLACK/RED WHT (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
10
9
8
7
6
5
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN 1
J4
4
VC-
3
2.4K
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
VC+/2.4K
A8P2
RS 232 MASTER PORT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
DOOR INTERLOCK
TB6 DOOR INTERLOCK DOOR INTERLOCK RTN
J1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
X - RAY ON 1 2
X-RAY IN USE X-RAY IN USE RTN
C3,C4,C6 AND C7 1UF 1500V
3.
3
J2
TB5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A1P8
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C9 THRU C16 2400UF 450VDC
2
WHITE (16AWG) BLACK (16AWG) VIOLET BLUE RED BROWN/YELLOW BLUE/YELLOW BLACK/RED
RS 232 SLAVE PORT
T.S.-2
GRN/YEL (16AWG) BLACK (16AWG) WHITE (16AWG)
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A9P2
AY51-005
J11
2- T.S.
AY51-017
2
48VDC 48VDC 48VDCRTN 48VDCRTN 30VDC 30VDC 30VDCRTN 30VDCRTN 15VDC 15VDCRTN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
6- T.S.
A5P1
J8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
T.S.-1
2.
HV MODULE
AY51-021
TO WALLSTAND
1- T.S.
MAS METER)
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
GROUND 24 VDC RTN 24 VDC BUCKY READY
INNER- PHASE
5- T.S.
A11P4
A6P1 32VAC 32VAC RTN 15VAC 15VAC RTN 11VAC 11VAC RTN 28VAC 28VAC RTN
J5
220 VAC OUT T2 0 VAC OUT T2 120 VAC 0VAC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3- PHASE
A17P1-9 AND 10 MUST BE CONNECTED TO GROUND OR 1.5KE68CA A17 AY20-031
2
1 2 3 4 5 6
115 VAC BUCKY W. ON 115 VAC RTN
CENTER- MAIN
3- PHASE
1.
J1
A9P5
J1
A8P1
TO TABLE
TB4
J3
AY40-005T A6, POWER SUPPLY BD.
C1
1
(16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG)
BUCKY READY
J3 30UF/440VAC (SEE NOTE 3)
4- MAIN
CONNECT MAS METER TO THESE WIRES. (WARNING
1
A8P6
BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK
GROUND
4
MA RTN MA SENSE ANODE RTN ANODE FDBK CATHODE RTN CATHODE FDBK
10
220 VAC IN 220 VAC IN 60VAC ROTOR 0 VAC ROTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OUTER- COMM.
2- MAIN
C5 AND C8 NOT USED
9
5 2 1 3
AY51-012
EMI FILTER
ROTOR DRIVE BD.
115 VAC BUCKY T. ON 115 VAC RTN
J4
10
(SEE NOTE 4)
AY51-018-XX
AY51-009-3P
AY20258 TMI
A
A10P3
11
LINE
TB3
9
GND
A10 AY40-013T
8
1 2 3 4 5 6
17 18
1 2 3
7
A9P4
19 20
J5
AY51-043 TO TUBE STAND
DUNLEE
PA2
C
T.S. T.S.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
6
6
COLL. READY 15V RTN 15VDC GROUND
PA1
6 A10P5
5
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
220 LINE
24 VDC 24 VDC RTN
PC2
5- COMM.
NOTES:
A10P4
J4
TB2
7
3
PC1
VARIAN
1- COMM.
A10TB1
TB1
6
220V 60V
9
1
120
BLK RED WHT
TO COLLIMATOR
5
8
32VAC 0VAC 16VAC 0VAC 11VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 7VAC 0VAC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CHASSIS GRN TEMP. FAULT
1 2 3
4
480VAC
15 7
24 VAC COLL. 24 VAC RTN GROUND
4
6
0
32VAC BLK (16AWG) 0VAC BLK (16AWG) 16VAC BLK (16AWG) 0VAC BLK (16AWG) 11VAC BLK (16AWG) 0VAC BLK (16AWG) 28VAC BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) 0VAC BLK (16AWG) 28VAC BLK (16AWG) 0VAC BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
J1
3
440VAC
VA -
ROTOR MAIN ROTOR PHASE ROTOR COMMON
2
5
2.4K
AY51-010
J1 220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC
1
7
J2
1 2 3 4
4
J3
A10P1
A9P3 BROWN (16 AWG) RED (16 AWG) ORANGE (16AWG)
1 2 3 4
3
220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC
2
J7
TOSHIBA
7
AY20-047
9
J9 J8
+
AY51-079
A18
POWER MODULE
BROWN RED ORANGE YELLOW GREEN BLUE VIOLET GREY WHITE
6
415VAC
280VAC
380VAC
4
8 16
4
3
2
RED/GREEN YELLOW/WHT ORN/BLK BRN/YEL 1
1
(SEE NOTE 2)
3
9 3
3
BLUE
C-
A18R1
1
2
7VAC 0VAC
-20VAC
A9P1
T2
J6
GRN/YEL (10AWG)
A+
2
1
TB1
4 5
AY40-022T-2 A8, LINE MONITOR BD.
-
A18QA
AY51-065
-
2
(SEE NOTE 7)
1 2 3 4
BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE
1 0VAC
0VAC
R1A, R1B R2A, R2B 1.2K/50W
-
5
D1
1N4005
A9P7
AY51-016
A8P3
AY51-022-3P
AY20-047
+3 A18C2
CATHODE
T1
2
VA+/2.4K
2
DB1
A19
+
A18QB
(SEE NOTE 1)
~
1
AY51-065
DB2
LOAD
WHITE(20AWG) BLACK(20AWG) BLUE(20AWG) RED(20AWG)
C16
~
2
A19QA
1
3
A18C1
AY51-073
GRN/YEL (16AWG)
BLUE(20AWG) RED(20AWG)
-
A19QB
LOAD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
C15
A19C2
A19R1
-
+
X-RAY TUBE (SEE TUBE ROTOR CHART FOR ROTOR CONNECTION)
6
3.3/50W ALUM.
2
~
1 2 3 4
AY51-073
TB2
3 10 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 1
+3
+
A19C1
(SEE NOTE 1)
~
1
AY51-079 X4
YELLOW RED
~
1 2
J5 ANODE
IGBT DRIVE BD.
AY51-128 (4X)
BRN BLU BRN BLU AY20-147 R5, R6 4
3
5 6
8
7
9 10
1
D1 1N4005
2
K3
9
K1
AY51-075 (3X)
5
3 4
6
7 8
10
1
D2 1N4005
2
9
K2
C12 10
C13
+
+
8 7
3
AY51-066
~
5
AY51-127 (4X)
C11 +
6
G2 E2
+
OHM 50W
AY51-073 (2X)
4
3
C10
R4 A,B 50
AY51-079
LOAD
TB1 AY51-127 (4X)
AY51-088 (2X)
+
OHM 50W
AY25-001
1 2 3 4
C14
AY51-080
440VAC WHT BLK
L2
BLK WHT
LINE
LINE
N/C N/C
LOAD
CB1 (SEE NOTE 6)
C9 R3 A,B 50
J4 J3
3.15A SB
L1
G2
F2
AY51-007
440VAC
E2
3.15A SB
IGBT DRIVE BD. J7 J6
F1
A19,A1P5
J5 CATHODE
AY40-010T A3,B
E1 G1
AY51-058 X2
GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG)
AY40-010T A3,A
E1 G1
WHT BLK RED BLUE
E2
GROUND TO HV TANK
GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG)
Figure 6-15. Single-Phase 380 - 480 VAC Input (NonSTORED ENERGY) X-ray Generators, 25, 32 and 40 kW Interconnection Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-22
Chapter 6 Diagrams GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG) BLACK (20AWG) WHT (20AWG) BLUE (20AWG)
V SENSE A V SENSE C GROUND 24VDC AUTO SHUT OFF SYSTEM ON 24VDC MAG. 24VDC MAG. RTN OVER VOLTAGE FAULT FAULT RESET NOT USED NOT USED
3
R2A, R2B 50/50W FILAMENT BD. GROUND
BLK/RED WHT/BLK
AY51-004
A1P3 BLK/RED WHT/BLK
1 2 3 4
J3 33VDC 33VDC RTN
CONNECTION)
FOR ROTOR
ROTOR CHART
(SEE TUBE
X-RAY TUBE
G1
E1
G2 E2
C-
AY51-015
J2 J1
J4 J3
J7 J6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A2P1
FIL.COMMON FIL. SMALL
WHT RED
C3, C6, 1UF 1500V
3.
C4,C7 .5UF 1500V
4.
C1 VALUE COULD CHANGE MANUFACTURER OR MODEL.
5.
DISCONNECT A17P1-9 AND10 MAS METER TO THESE WIRES BE CONNECTED TO GROUND
6.
AY51-019-2 IS USED FOR AEC OPTION ONLY. NON AEC GENERATORS USE AY51-019-1.
7.
ADJUST THESE JUMPERS TO THE NEAREST INCOMING AC LINE.
DEPENDING ON TUBE (SEE TUBE DATA SHEET) FROM GROUND AND CONNECT (WARNING A17P1-9 AND 10 OR TO THE MAS METER.)
7
48VDC 48VDCRTN
8
6
5
4
3
1
BLK, L RED, S WHT, C GROUND
2
6
16
15
14
13
12
9
8
11
10
7
6
5
4
AEC WALL 1
5
4
3
1
T.S.-2
C9, THRU C12, 2400 UF/ 450VDC
16 14 15
A17P1 FIL. SHIELD
SHIELD 7
CATH. FDBK CATH. RTN MA FDBK MA RTN ANODE RTN ANODE FDBK AY51-017
AY51-015
AY51-012
J4
A1P1 J1
2- T.S.
A11P2 J2
A11P1 A2P4
J5 AY40-003S A2, KVP BD.
T.S.-1
6- T.S.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
J1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
AY40-031S A11, AEC BD. (OPTIONAL)
J5
AY51-020
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SC50-048T REV. K
A11P3 J3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
AEC TABLE GRN/YEL
A11P5 A16P1 AY51-19-2
(SEE NOTE 6)
BLK (16AWG) WHT (16AWG) AY51-018-XX
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TO OCP ASSEMBLY AY10-004 QUEST AY10-005 ODYSSEY
J2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1- T.S.
J4
AEC WALL 2
A1P2 BROWN (22 AWG) RED (22 AWG) ORANGE (22 AWG) YELLOW (22 AWG) GREEN (22 AWG) BLUE (22 AWG) VIOLET (20 AWG) GREY (20 AWG) WHITE (22 AWG) BLACK (22 AWG) BLK/ORN (22 AWG) WHT/BRN (22 AWG)
A2P5
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
1
AY51-011
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
INNER- PHASE
5- T.S.
AY51-019-2
2
A8P6
A1P5 OCP ON RS-485 RS-485 EXP. PREP 28VDC GND 28VDC GND J5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
J8 GROUND +18 VDC OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
3
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
AY40-023T1 A9, INTERFACE BD.
1 2 3 4 5
4
AY51-005 A6P3
A8P5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
32VAC 32VACRTN 15VAC 15VACRTN 11VAC 11VACRTN 28VAC 28VAC RTN
A2P8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
3- PHASE
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J2
A1P9
2
J3
A9P2 WHITE BLACK VIOLET BLUE RED BRN/YEL BLU/YEL BLK/RED
J9
15VDC 15VDC 15VDCRTN 15VDCRTN -15VDC -15VDCRTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDCRTN 24VDCRTN
CENTER- MAIN
3- PHASE
J2
3
A6P1
24VDC 24VDC RTN 28VDC GROUND BUCKY TABLE BUCKY WALL PREP COLL. READY BUCKY T. BUCKY W. DOOR SPARE TABLE RDY K2, 24VDC EXPOSE PREP RDY 0VAC 7.5VAC 15VDC GROUND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
4- MAIN
A5P2
A2P3
4
J2
J1 32VAC 32VACRTN 15VAC 15VACRTN 11VAC 11VACRTN 28VAC 28VACRTN
AY51-008
RED GREEN/YELLOW BLACK GREEN/YELLOW BLUE VIOLET WHITE WHITE/BLACK YELLOW/WHITE BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE BLUE/YELLOW GREY GREEN/BROWN BROWN GREEN RED/GREEN ORANGE/BLACK BROWN/YELLOW GREEN/ORANGE
AY40-007T A5, FILAMENT CONTROL BD.
5
A9P6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
J3
J1
6
J10 J4
J7 GROUND +18 VDC OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
7
(LOGIC BD.)
1 2 3 4
AY51-013 BRN RED ORN YEL GRN BLU VIO GRY WHT BLK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
8
A6P2
AY40-005T A6, POWER SUPPLY BD.
0 VAC 110 VAC
A1P4
A2P7
A2P6
5
RS 232 MASTER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J6
6
AY40-006S A1, CPU BD.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
OUTER- COMM.
2- MAIN
GRN/YEL (16AWG) WHT (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
15VDC 15VDC 15VDCRTN 15VDCRTN -15VDC -15VDCRTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDCRTN 24VDCRTN
48VDC 48VDC 48VDCRTN 48VDCRTN 30VDC 30VDC 30VDCRTN 30VDCRTN 15VDC 15VDCRTN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2 4 3 1 5 6
9
SLAVE
GRN/YEL
J5
8
J8
DUNLEE
A11P4
TO WALLSTAND
J11 RS 232
AY51-017
3
GROUND 24 VDC 24 VDC RTN BUCKY READY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5- COMM.
A17 AY20-031 HV MODULE
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1.5KE68CA
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TB4
A1P8
VARIAN
1- COMM.
A5P1
J1 SHIELD
A1P8
9
EL28-002
(SEE NOTE 4)
115 VAC BUCKY W.ON 115 RTN
7
A10P3
8
GROUND BUCKY READY
TO TABLE
7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 1 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TOSHIBA
2.
6 5
A10P4
9
A9P5
TB3 115 VAC BUCKY T. ON 115 VAC RTN
6
J5 1 2 3
5
A10P5
AY51-043
9
A10TB1
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
TO TUBE STAND
10
8
19
60 VAC 0VAC
J4
J3
J4 220 VAC
TB1
2
AY40-013T A10, ROTOR DRIVE BD.
1.
A (SEE NOTE 5)
4
+15VDC GROUND
C
FIL. LARGE
CHASSIS GND TEMP. FAULT
PC1
BLK
J1
PA2
1 BLK 2 RED 3 WHT 4 5 6 T.S. 7 T.S.
9
7
ROTOR MAIN ROTOR PHASE ROTOR COMMON
MA RTN MA SENSE ANODE RTN ANODE FDBK CATHODE RTN CATHODE FDBK
18
1 2 3 4 5 6
BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
16 17
220VAC 60 VAC 0 VAC
AY51-023
BLK (16AWG)
6
3
9
6
A9P4
14 15
2
J7
J6
2
1 2 3 4
TO COLLIMATOR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
NOTES:
PC2
AY51-010
A9P3
1 2 3
J6
J5
1
BROWN (16 AWG) RED (16 AWG) ORANGE (16AWG)
1 2 3 4
AY51-012
9
BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
110/220 0VAC 0VAC SW. 110/220VAC SW.
BATT + A VA+/1.2K VC+/1.2K BATT + C 1.2K/ A 1.2K/ C
J9 J8
4
220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC
6
8
0VAC 7VAC
5
13
PA1
SEE NOTE 7
A8P2
R1B 1.2K/50W
130VAC
240VAC
10
1
5
A8P7
AY51-022-SE YELLOW (20AWG/600V) RED (20AWG/600V) BROWN (20AWG/600V) GREEN (20AWG/600V) 3
7
2
8
J1
A8P8 R4B 1.2K/50W
1 2 3 4
220VAC
3
2
1
220VAC
PCB DOOR GROUND GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG) STUD
60VAV 110VAC
12
5 6
4
STUD
GRN/YEL
4
J2
J1 0VAC 32VAC 0VAC 16VAC 0VAC 11VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 7VAC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
X-RAY TUBE ROTOR CONNECTION CHART
C4
ANODE POWER MODULE
C7
3
LINE
10 AMP
LOAD WHT LINE
3
0VAC 220VAC
AY51-039-SE
-10VAC 0VAC
2
J4
RTN RTN J8
T1
TB1
LOAD
LOAD
EL70-004
LOAD CB1 LINE BLK
10
11
(16AWG)
GND LINE
EL99-001
EMI FLT
A9P1 (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
C3
1
AY20-047
AY51-018-XX
GRN/YEL GRN/YEL
X - RAY ON
1
BATT- A BATT- C VAVC-
RTN
2
A18R1 1
C6
CATHODE POWER MODULE
23
AY51-012
BRN GRY WHT BLK
1 2 3 9 10 11 4 12 5 6 13 14 7 15 8 16
1 2
22
-
A18QA
ROTOR CABLE AY20-047
TB5 X-RAY ON X-RAY ON RTN TB2 24 VDC TB6 24 VDC RTN DOOR DOOR COLL. READY
1 2
21
AY40-028T A8, LINE MONITOR/CHARGER BD.
ORN RED BLU VIO RED BLU
1
A10P1
DOOR INTERLOCK
R3A, R3B A8P4 50/50W
MAIN GROUND
GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG) 23 21 22 20 BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) A8P1
A19QA
TB1
20
BLK 0VAC 32VAC BLK 0VAC BLK BLK 16VAC 0VAC BLK 11VAC BLK 0VAC BLK 28VAC 0VAC 28VAC
2
A19R1
24VAC COLL. 24VAC RTN GROUND
0VAC
0VAC
A19QB 1
J3
220 VAC 220 VAC 0 VAC 0 VAC
110/220 VAC
-
C1, 30UF/440VAC
GROUND TO HV TANK BROWN BLACK WHITE BUE RED GREY VIOLET ORANGE
(16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG)
-
-
A18QB
AY51-077
5
J7
BLK BLK BLK BLK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2
(SEE NOTES 2-3)
(SEE NOTES 2-3)
8
BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE
AY51-077
ORANGE BROWN GREY VIOLET
GRN
BLU RED
2
A9P7 BLACK (10AWG)
AY51-085
GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG)
R4A 1.2K/50W
RED (10AWG)
3
GRN/YEL
+ 3 A19C2
4
1 2 3
RED
BLACK
R1A 1.2K/50W
_
2
A20 AY20-044
_
_
F1,F2 500VAC
_
+
1
30A SB
_
+
+
3 + A19C1
+ 3 A18C2
_
_
AY51-016
_
VIOLET RED (10AWG) ORANGE BLACK (10AWG) BROWN GREY
_
+
+ _
_
_
_
3 + A18C1
A+
AY51-076
_
AY51-076
AY51-128 (4X)
(SEE NOTE 1)
K1
C12
SHIELD
+
+
3
+
AY51-128 (4X)
+
+
1
+
A18,A1P5
BROWN RED ORANGE YELLOW GREEN BLUE VIOLET GREY WHITE AY51-021
+
A19.A1P5
A19
1 2 3 4
A18 E1 G1
C10
1 2
+
+
9
_
D1
+
+
GRN/YEL (10AWG) GRN/YEL (20AWG) GRN/YEL (20AWG)
+ _
_
J5 IGBT DRIVE BD
C11
+
+
+ _
10
1 2 3 4
2
+ _
IGBT DRIVE BD
2
+ _
BLK(10AWG) AY51-133 (2X)
J5
A3,B AY40-010T
C9
AY51-023
BLK(10AWG)
J2 J1
RED(10AWG)
8 7
1
+
_
_
G1
_
_
E1
+
_
E2
+
_
_
(SEE NOTE 1)
+
GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG)
_
J4 J3
6 5
_
_
A3,A AY40-010T
RED (20AWG) BLK (10AWG) RED(10AWG)
3
+
G2
+
J7 J6
+
J9 J8
+
E1 G1
+
+
G2 E2
+
G2 E2
4
AY51-127 (2X)
+
AY51-132 X2 RED(10AWG)
Figure 6-16. Single-Phase (STORED ENERGY) X-ray Generator, 20 kW Interconnection Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-23
Chapter 6 Diagrams GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG) BLK (20AWG)
A19R1 1
BLK/RED WHT/BLK
1 2 3 4
J3 33VDC 33VDC RTN
CONNECTION)
A+
FOR ROTOR
ROTOR CHART
AY51-128 (4X)
(SEE TUBE
X-RAY TUBE
G1
E1
G2 E2
C-
AY51-015
J2 J1
J7 J6 E1 G1
16 14 15 FIL.COMMON FIL. SMALL
WHT RED
A17P1
FIL. LARGE FIL. SHIELD
SHIELD 7
A2P1
DISCONNECT A17P1-9 AND #10 FROM GROUND AND CONNECT THE MAS METER ACROSS THESE WIRES (WARNING A17P1-9 AND 10 MUST BE CONNECTED TO GROUND OR TO THE MAS METER.)
4.
AY51-019-2 AND AY51-020 ARE USED FOR AEC OPTION ONLY. NON AEC GENERATORS AY51-020 IS NOT INSTALLED
7
48VDC 48VDCRTN
8
6
5
4
3
2
1
BLK, L RED, S WHT, C GROUND
C1 VALUE COULD CHANGE DEPENDING ON TUBE MANUFACTURER OR MODEL. (SEE TUBE DATA SHEET)
3.
AND AY51-019-2 IS REPLACED WITH AY51-019-1. 5.
ADJUST THESE JUMPERS TO THE NEAREST INCOMING AC LINE VOLTAGE.
6.
CAPACITORS VALUES: C3,C4,C4A,C6,C7,C7A FOR THE FAMILY OF SE GEN.
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
SE 4
C3
C4
32KW
1uF
0.5uF
1uF
0.5uF
40KW
1uF
1uF
1uF
1uF
50KW
1uF
1uF
1uF
1uF
GEN.
C4A
C6
C7
C7A
A11P2 J4
AEC WALL 1
J2
A11P1
AY51-020
J1 AY40-031S A11, AEC BD. (OPTIONAL)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SC50-049T REV. U
A11P5 GRN/YEL
A16P1 AY51-19-2
0.25uF
A11P3
AEC WALL 2
SEE NOTE 4
0.25uF
J3
J5
AEC TABLE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1
5
BLK
CATH. FDBK CATH. RTN MA FDBK MA RTN ANODE RTN ANODE FDBK 1
C8, THRU C15, 2400 UF/ 450VDC.
6
J2
(SEE NOTE 4) AY51-018-XX
BLK (16AWG) WHT (16AWG)
1. 2.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TO OCP ASSEMBLY AY10-004 QUEST AY10-005 ODYSSEY
AY51-004
R2A, R2B 50/50W
FILAMENT BD. GROUND
A1P3 BLK/RED WHT/BLK
J1
J5 AY40-003S A2, KVP BD.
A1P1
NOTES:
AY40-007T A5, FILAMENT CONTROL BD.
AY51-019-2
A2P4
J4
GRN/YEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
J1
A5P2
A2P3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
J8 GROUND +18 VDC OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A2P5
J3
BRN RED ORN YEL GRN BLU VIO GRY WHT BLK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J2 V SENSE A V SENSE C GROUND 24VDC AUTO SHUT OFF SYSTEM ON 24VDC MAG. 24VDC MAG. RTN OVER VOLTAGE FAULT FAULT RESET NOT USED NOT USED
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J7 GROUND +18 VDC OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
AY51-013
5
BROWN (22 AWG) RED (22 AWG) ORANGE (22 AWG) YELLOW (22 AWG) GREEN (22 AWG) BLUE (22 AWG) VIOLET (20 AWG) GREY (20 AWG) WHITE (22 AWG) BLACK (22 AWG) BLK/ORN (22 AWG) WHT/BRN (22 AWG)
A1P5 OCP ON RS-485 RS-485 EXP. PREP 28VDC GND 28VDC GND J5
4
1
A1P2
AY51-011
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J6
A2P6
2
A8P6
A2P8
A1P9
15VDC 15VDC 15VDCRTN 15VDCRTN -15VDC -15VDCRTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDCRTN 24VDCRTN
1 2 3 4
GRN/YEL (16AWG) WHT (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
A5P1
3
AY40-023T1 A9, INTERFACE BD.
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
2
32VAC 32VACRTN 15VAC 15VACRTN 11VAC 11VACRTN 28VAC 28VAC RTN
A2P7
AY51-017
4
AY51-005
A6P3
A8P5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
24VDC 24VDC RTN 28VDC GROUND BUCKY TABLE BUCKY WALL PREP COLL. READY BUCKY T. BUCKY W. DOOR SPARE TABLE RDY K2, 24VDC EXPOSE PREP RDY 0VAC 7.5VAC 15VDC GROUND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J4
J9
T.S.-2
5
J3
WHITE BLACK VIOLET BLUE RED BRN/YEL BLU/YEL BLK/RED
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J2
J10
AY51-008
RED GREEN/YELLOW BLACK GREEN/YELLOW BLUE VIOLET WHITE WHITE/BLACK YELLOW/WHITE BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE BLUE/YELLOW GREY GREEN/BROWN BROWN GREEN RED/GREEN ORANGE/BLACK BROWN/YELLOW GREEN/ORANGE
A1P8
DUNLEE
A17 AY20-031 HV MODULE
6
32VAC 32VACRTN 15VAC 15VACRTN 11VAC 11VACRTN 28VAC 28VACRTN
A9P2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
(LOGIC BD.)
2- T.S.
1.5KE68CA
7
A6P1
0 VAC 110 VAC
A1P4
RS 232 MASTER
AY40-006S A1, CPU BD.
T.S.-1
6- T.S.
J1
J8
SLAVE
1- T.S.
8
A9P6
J11 RS 232
INNER- PHASE
5- T.S.
A11P4
J5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CENTER- MAIN
3- PHASE
3
GROUND 24 VDC 24 VDC RTN BUCKY READY
TO WALLSTAND
4- MAIN
3- PHASE
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2- MAIN
6
J1
2 4 3 1 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TB4 115 VAC BUCKY W.ON 115 RTN
6 5 2 1 3 4
BROWN RED ORANGE YELLOW GREEN BLUE VIOLET GREY WHITE AY51-021
A1P8
OUTER- COMM.
1
AY40-005T A6, POWER SUPPLY BD.
15VDC 15VDC 15VDCRTN 15VDCRTN -15VDC -15VDCRTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDCRTN 24VDCRTN J2
60 VAC 0VAC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(SEE NOTE 2)
J4 220 VAC
A10P4
A10P3
EL28-002
5- COMM.
7
A6P2
BUCKY READY
J6
48VDC 48VDC 48VDCRTN 48VDCRTN 30VDC 30VDC 30VDCRTN 30VDCRTN 15VDC 15VDCRTN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
GROUND
TO TABLE
VARIAN
1- COMM.
9
9
A9P5
J3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TOSHIBA
SEE NOTE 3
AY51-017
1 2 3
AY51-043
TB3 115 VAC BUCKY T. ON 115 VAC RTN
X-RAY TUBE ROTOR CONNECTION CHART 10
8
19
1 2 3 4 5 6
J4
C A
A10TB1
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
J5
A10P5
1
2
BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
18
1
J2
BLK (16AWG)
BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0VAC 32VAC 0VAC 16VAC 0VAC 11VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 7VAC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
TB1
TO TUBE STAND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
+15VDC GROUND
PA2 PC1
9
7
(16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
A9P4
14 15
60VAV
AY51-022-SE
J6
BATT- A BATT- C VAVC-
0VAC 7VAC
9
16 17
240VAC
9
6
8
6
SEE NOTE 5
10
1
5
5
220VAC
6
A8P7 3
4
7
2
130VAC
13
5
110/220 0VAC 0VAC SW. 110/220VAC SW.
J7
110VAC
1 2 3 4
3
YELLOW (20AWG/600V) RED (20AWG/600V) BROWN (20AWG/600V) GREEN (20AWG/600V)
4
J5
3
J1
1 BLK 2 RED 3 WHT 4 5 6 T.S. 7 T.S.
3
CHASSIS GND TEMP. FAULT
1
LINE
10 AMP
LOAD WHT LINE
LOAD
LOAD
EL70-004
LOAD CB1 LINE BLK LINE
GRN/YEL 8
BATT + A VA+/1.2K VC+/1.2K BATT + C 1.2K/ A 1.2K/ C
A8P2
R1B 1.2K/50W
R4B 1.2K/50W
-10VAC 0VAC
3
J1
PCB DOOR GROUND STUD GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG)
12
1
220VAC
11
TB1
J4
AY51-039-SE
BLK 0VAC 32VAC BLK 0VAC BLK 16VAC BLK 0VAC BLK BLK 11VAC 0VAC BLK 28VAC 0VAC 28VAC
10
T1
(16AWG)
GND
EL99-001
EMI FLT
A9P1
A8P8 R4A 1.2K/50W
J1 AY40-013T A10, ROTOR DRIVE BD.
23
0VAC 220VAC
RTN RTN J8
RTN
X - RAY ON
3
2
1 1 2 3 9 10 11 4 12 5 6 13 14 7 15 8 16
22
2
0VAC
1 2
21
AY51-012
GRN/YEL GRN/YEL
DOOR INTERLOCK
AY40-028T A8, LINE MONITOR/CHARGER BD.
BLU RED
BRN GRY WHT BLK
STUD
MAIN GROUND
GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG) GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG) 23 21 22 20 BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) ORN RED BLU VIO RED BLU
TB5 X-RAY ON X-RAY ON RTN TB2 24 VDC TB6 24 VDC RTN DOOR DOOR COLL. READY
1 2
20
R3A, R3B A8P4 50/50W 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A8P1
R1A 1.2K/50W
ROTOR MAIN ROTOR PHASE ROTOR COMMON
TO COLLIMATOR
C1, 30UF/440VAC
GROUND TO HV TANK BROWN BLACK WHITE BLUE RED GREY VIOLET ORANGE
GRN
GRN/YEL (10AWG) GRN/YEL (20AWG) GRN/YEL (20AWG)
220VAC 60 VAC 0 VAC
2
1 2 3 4
A10P1
0VAC
ROTOR CABLE
PA1 PC2
AY51-010
A9P3
1 2 3
24VAC COLL. 24VAC RTN GROUND
110/220 VAC
C4A
C7A
TB1 220 VAC 220 VAC 0 VAC 0 VAC
C4
1
AY20-047 ANODE POWER MODULE
C7 AY20-047 CATHODE POWER MODULE
BROWN (16 AWG) RED (16 AWG) ORANGE (16AWG)
1 2 3 4
C3
A18R1 1
MA RTN MA SENSE ANODE RTN ANODE FDBK CATHODE RTN CATHODE FDBK
220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC J3
BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
2
A18QA
SHIELD
BLK (10AWG) GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG)
1
SEE NOTE 1
C6
-
SEE NOTE 6
8
A9P7
J7 GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG)
C11
2
-
AY51-015
BLACK
-
A19QA
2
A18QB
SHIELD
GRN/YEL
-
C15 AY51-076
SEE NOTE 6
AY51-023
1 2 3
RED
2
A19QB
+ 3 A18C2
AY51-018-XX
RED
_
+ 3 A19C2
3 + A18C1
AY51-012
AY51-085
A21 AY20-044
+ _
3 + A19C1
+
+ _
SEE NOTE C10 1
AY51-077
+ _
_
AY51-016
+ _
_
BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE
_
C14
4
_
3
_
2
BLACK
+ _
1 2 3
GRN/YEL
_
1
AY51-085 RED
+ _
_
_
RED (6AWG) ORANGE RED (6AWG) BLACK (6AWG) BROWN GREY VIOLET BLACK (6AWG)
_
F1,F2 500VAC
A20 AY20-044
_
_
+
+
+ _
_
_
30A SB
_
+
+ _
_
30A SB
+
_
F1, F2 500VAC
_
_
+
AY51-076
_
G2 E2
A19,A1P5
A19
D1
A18
AY51-012
+
+
+
C9
1 2
1 2 3 4
A18,A1P5
C13
+
+
+
9
K1
_
J5 IGBT DRIVE BD
9
+
+
+
_
_
10
+
9
+
_
BLK(6AWG) AY51-133 (2X)
1 2 3 4
IGBT DRIVE BD
8
+
+
_
_
+
J5
A3,B AY40-010T
C8
+
RED(6AWG)
7
7
_
+
+
_
6
+
+
_
_
5
+
_
_
+
_
8
+
+
_
+
_
4
_
+
+
_
7
+
_
+
+
_
_
3
_
_
+
_
6
+
_
2
+
+
_
5
_
+
_
G2 E2
+
+
_
_
+
GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG)
_
AY51-023
BLK(6AWG)
8
5
_
_
J9 J8
C12 6
4
+
+
3
+
2
+
+
AY51-128 (4X)
+
J2 J1
+
+
G1
+
J4 J3
+
E1
+
G2 E2
+
+
J7 J6
+
J9 J8
+
RED(6AWG)
3
E1 G1
+
A3,A AY40-010T
+
AY51-132 (2X) 4 RED(6AWG)
J4 J3
WHT (20AWG) BLK (6AWG) RED (20AWG)
BLU (20AWG)
Figure 6-17. Single-Phase (STORED ENERGY) X-ray Generators, 32, 40 and 50 kW Interconnection Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-24
Chapter 6 Diagrams
MAIN GROUND
STUD GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG)
GROUND TO HV TANK WHITE BLACK BLUE RED
AY51-011 BROWN (22 AWG) RED (22 AWG) ORANGE (22 AWG) YELLOW (22 AWG) GREEN (22 AWG) BLUE (22 AWG) VIOLET (20 AWG) GREY (20 AWG) WHITE (22 AWG) BLACK (22 AWG) BLACK/ORANGE (22 AWG) WHITE/BROWN (22 AWG)
AY51-080
J2 J1
J4 J3 G2 E2
E1 G1
E1 G1
ROTOR CABLE
G2 E2
J2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
V SENSE A V SENSE C GROUND 24VDC AUTO SHUT OFF SYSTEM ON 24VDC MAG. 24VDC MAG. RTN MISSING PHASE FAULT RESET NOT USED NOT USED
AY51-023
16 14
CATH. FDBK CATH. RTN MA FDBK MA RTN ANODE RTN ANODE FDBK
15 8
FIL. LARGE
FIL.COMMON FIL. SMALL
7 SHIELD
WHT WHT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A1P1
A2P5
J5
AY40-003S A2, KVP BD. J4
C3, C4 ,C6 AND C7 1UF/1500VAC C5 AND C8 ARE NOT INSTALLED.
3.
C9 THRU C16, 2400UF/450VDC
4.
DISCONNECT A17P1-9 AND 10 FROM GROUND AND CONNECT THE MAS METER TO THESE WIRES. (WARNING A17P1-9 AND 10 MUST BE CONNECTED TO GROUND OR MAS METER.)
5.
C1 VALUE COULD CHANGE DEPENDING ON TUBE MANUFACTURER OR MODEL (SEE TUBE DATA BASE)
6.
32 AND 40KW GENERATORS CB1 MUST BE 30 AMP. 50KW GENERATORS CB1 MUST BE 50 AMP.
7.
AY51-019-2 IS USED FOR AEC OPTION ONLY. NON AEC GENERATORS USE AY51-019-1.
8.
ADJUST THESE JUMPERS TO THE NEAREST INCOMING AC LINE INPUT.
AEC WALL 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A2P4
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
AY51-020
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SC50-052T REV. T
A11P3 J3
J1
J5
AEC TABLE
A11P1
A11P5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
GRN/YEL
A16P1
AY51-019-2
TO OCP ASSEMBLY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
(SEE NOTE 7)
DOOR GROUND GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG)
T.S.-2
2.
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
BLK, L RED, S WHT, C GROUND
48VDC 48VDCRTN
FIL. SHIELD BLK
6
5
J1
4
A2P1
AY51-017
3
2
1
AY51-012
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
9
AY51-021
9
J1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AY40-031S A11, AEC BD. (OPTIONAL)
AEC WALL 2
A1P2
2- T.S.
1
AY51-012
T.S.-1
6- T.S.
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
R1A, R1B R2A, R2B 1.2K/50W
AY51-066
1 2 3 4
INNER- PHASE
1- T.S.
A11P2 J2
2
33VDC 33VDC RTN
AY40-006S A1, CPU BD. (LOGIC BD.)
3- PHASE
5- T.S.
J4
2
BLACK/RED WHT/BLK
J3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
+18 VDC GROUND OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
3
A1P3
J7 1 2 3 4
A1P9 A1P5
OCP ON RS-485 RS-485 EXP. PREP 28VDC GND 28VDC GND J5
3- PHASE
A1P3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3
AY40-023T A9, INTERFACE BD.
A2P7
J3
+18 VDC GROUND OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
4
X-RAY ON RTN X-RAY ON
J8 1 2 3 4 5
4
1 2
J9
CENTER- MAIN
J2
5
TB5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A5P2
5
X - RAY ON
DOOR DOOR RTN
A2P8
A1P10
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
A1P6
5
TB6 1 2
J10
J6
4
INTERLOCK
24VDC 24VDC RTN 28VDC GROUND BUCKY TABLE BUCKY WALL PREP COLLIMATOR READY BUCKY T. READY BUCKY W. READY DOOR INTERLOCK SPARE TABLE RDY K2, 24VDC EXPOSE PREP RDY 0VAC 7.5VAC 15VDC GROUND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
6
DOOR
RED GREEN/YELLOW BLACK GREEN/YELLOW BLUE VIOLET WHITE WHITE/BLACK YELLOW/WHITE BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE BLUE/YELLOW GREY GREEN/BROWN BROWN GREEN RED/GREEN ORANGE/BLACK BROWN/YELLOW GREEN/ORANGE
4- MAIN
1.
J1
AY40-007T A5, FILAMENT CONTROL BD.
7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
8
32VAC 32VAC RTN 15VAC 15VAC RTN 11VAC 11VAC RTN 28VAC 28VAC RTN
RS 232 MASTER PORT
OUTER- COMM.
2- MAIN
A11P4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
AY51-013 BRN RED ORN YEL GRN BLU VIO GRY WHT BLK
3
AY51-005
A1P4
A1P8
GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) WHT (16AWG) A5P1
2
AY51-008
AY51-017
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
MA RTN MA SENSE ANODE RTN ANODE FDBK CATHODE RTN CATHODE FDBK
A9P6
A17 AY20-031 HV MODULE
J3
J8
DUNLEE
NOTES:
9
A6P2
J11
5- COMM.
1.5KE68CA
6
A6P3
J2
J6
J2
5 2 1 3
7
J3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
GROUND 24 VDC 24 VDC RTN BUCKY READY
TO WALLSTAND
VARIAN
1- COMM. 6
A10P3
C1, 30UF/440VAC (SEE NOTE 5)
TOSHIBA
9
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A9P2 1 WHITE (16AWG) 2 BLACK (16AWG) 3 VIOLET 4 BLUE 5 RED 6 BROWN/YELLOW 7 BLUE/YELLOW 8 BLACK/RED
220 VAC OUT 0 VAC OUT 120 VAC 0VAC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
10
4
AY51-015
48VDC 48VDC 48VDCRTN 48VDCRTN 30VDC 30VDC 30VDCRTN 30VDCRTN 15VDC 15VDCRTN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
115 VAC BUCKY W. ON 115 VAC RTN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AY51-012
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J5
X-RAY TUBE ROTOR CONNECTION CHART
A
8
A8P4
ROTOR DRIVE BD.
A10
J1 J4
J7 J6
J9 J8 + +
AY51-079
J2 J1
J4 J3
J7 J6
+
AY40-013T
TO TABLE
PA2
9
VC-
AY40-53S2 A8, LINE MONITOR BD.
32VAC 32VAC RTN 15VAC 15VAC RTN 11VAC 11VAC RTN 28VAC 28VAC RTN
PA1
C
AY51-018-XX
2.4K
10
A8P2
9
J2
VC+/2.4K
8
VA -
1 2 3 4 5 6
AY51-004
7
2.4K
A8P5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
6
VA+/2.4K
BLK
5
BLUE(20AWG) RED(20AWG)
RED(20AWG) BLUE(20AWG)
A8P1
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
J1
AY40-005T A6, POWER SUPPLY BD.
BLK BLK
4
J6 24VRTN K2 24V K2 24VRTN K3 24V K3
A9P5
A6P1
3
J5 4 3 2 1
BLK
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
PHASE C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2
PHASE B PHASE N.
A8P6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
PHASE A
1
INCOM. LINE INCOM. LINE WHITE(20AWG) BLACK(20AWG) BLUE(20AWG) RED(20AWG) RED/GREEN YELLOW/WHITE ORN/BLK BRN/YEL
J3 PHASE C,IN PHASE A,IN
(16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG)
PC2
A10P4
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDCRTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
TB4 BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK
A8P3 8 3 10 5 1 6 7 2 4 9
GROUND 220 VAC IN 220 VAC IN 60VAC ROTOR BUCKY READY 0 VAC ROTOR
10
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
115 VAC BUCKY T. ON 115 VAC RTN
J5 1 2 3
8
LINE LOAD
GRN/YEL (16AWG)
+15VDC GROUND
A10P5
AY51-043
7
TB2
COLL. READY
6
12
11
LINE
C3
AY51-128 (4X)
PC1
TO TUBE STAND
GRN/YEL
AY20258 TMI
11
1 2 3 4 5 6
17 18
LOAD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5
EMI FLT
J4
C4
C6
A10TB1
J4
TB2 24 VDC 24 VDC RTN
4
220
10
A9P4
C7
(SEE NOTE 4)
TB3
6 19 20
TB1
3
4
CHASSIS GRN TEMP. FAULT
2
7
9
J1
TO COLLIMATOR
1
6
480
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 BLK 2 RED 3 WHT 4 5 6 T.S. 7T.S.
BROWN RED ORANGE YELLOW GREEN BLUE VIOLET GREY WHITE
440
8
1 AND 2)
9
7
0 60 120
15 7
J1 32VAC 0VAC 16VAC 0VAC 11VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 7VAC 0VAC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A10P1
TB1 24 VAC COLL. 24 VAC .RTN GROUND
9
5
ANODE
ROTOR MAIN ROTOR PHASE ROTOR COMMON
8
415
4
0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 7VAC 0VAC
(16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG)
AY51-010
8
6
8 16
BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK
220VAC 60 VAC 0 VAC
1 2 3 4
7
380
3
32VAC 0VAC 16VAC 0VAC 11VAC 0VAC 28VAC
J3
1 2 3 4
6
2
1 2 3 4
5
4
T1 PHASE C
220
3
1 2 3 4
A9P1
1
0
POWER MODULE
1
T2
7
285
AY51-071 (3X)
BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE
9
2
220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC
J7
1
5 (SEE NOTE 8)
RED (20AWG) YELLOW (20AWG)
480
A9P3 BROWN (16 AWG) RED (16 AWG) ORANGE (16AWG)
A9P7
AY51-016
4
6
(SEE NOTE
A18
7
440
1
BLK (10AWG) BLK (10AWG) BLK (8AWG)
3
5
1
6
415
C-
AY51-128 (4X)
5
4
CATHODE
4
3
380
POWER MODULE
3
285
(SEE NOTE 3)
2
2
A19
- 2
A18QA A18R1
RS 232 SLAVE PORT
220
+
1
1
A19R1
2
0
1
A18C2
A18QB
1
7
DB2
A19QA
A+
+ 3
2
-
1
480
(SEE NOTE 3)
3 A18C1
C16 AY51-065
6
A19QB
X-RAY TUBE (SEE TUBE ROTOR CHART FOR ROTOR CONNECTION)
1 2 3 4
AY20-047
+
BLK(16AWG)
5
440
- 2
BLK(16AWG)
415
DB2
AY51-127 (4X)
~ -
A19C2
2
AY51-066
4
C12
J5
A18,A1P5
C14
C15
~
+ 3
A19C1
~ -
1 2
+
380
10 9
K1
WHT/BLK BLACK/RED WHT (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
3
T1 PHASE A
2
285
D3 1N4005
BRN BLU ORN 4
AY51-069 (3X)
3
5 6
7 8
10
9
1
D1 1N4005
2
K3
220
T1 PHASE B
3 4
6
8
5
7
9 10
1
2
D2 1N4005
AY20-146 R8 R9 R10 3.3/50W ALUM.
BRN BLU ORN
7
K2
3
+
+
~
A19,A1P5
~ +
C11
8
C13
E1 G1
5
NEUTRAL 0 1
IGBT DRIVE BD, ANODE
1 2 3 4
AY51-073 (2X)
AY20-047
G2 E2
~ +
6
C10
G2 E2
4 3
AY51-068 (3X)
J9 J8
50W
AY51-073 (2X)
J5
E1 G1
AY25-001
C9
AY51-080
440VAC
IGBT DRIVE BD,CATHODE +
3.15A SB
R3 A,B 50 OHM 50W R4 A,B 50 OHM
AY51-065
LOAD
LOAD
N N
440VAC
+
B L2
F2
3.15A SB
AY51-079
BLK16AWG WHT16AWG
LINE
LINE
LINE
CB1 (SEE NOTE 6)
TB1
C L3 LOAD
GRN/YEL (10AWG) GRN/YEL (16AWG)
F1
AY51-007 A L1
WHT BLK16AWG
AY51-074 (3X)
FILAMENT BD. GROUND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
AY10-004 QUEST AY10-005 ODYSSEY AY10-005-1 ODYSEY TECHVISION AY10-009-1 T. RAD PLUS TECHVISION AY10-009 T. RAD PLUS
AY51-018-XX
Figure 6-18. Three-Phase (380-480) Input (32, 40 and 50 kW without High Speed Starter) X-ray Generators Interconnection Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-25
Chapter 6 Diagrams MAIN GROUND STUD
GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG)
GROUND TO HV TANK WHT BLK BLUE RED
DOOR GROUND
BROWN (22 AWG) RED (22 AWG) ORANGE (22 AWG) YELLOW (22 AWG) GREEN (22 AWG) BLUE (22 AWG) VIOLET (20 AWG) GREY (20 AWG) WHITE (22 AWG) BLACK (22 AWG) BLK/ORN (22 AWG) WHT/BRN (22 AWG)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
V SENSE A V SENSE C GROUND 24VDC AUTO SHUT OFF SYSTEM ON/OFF 24VDC MAG. 24VDC MAG. RTN MISSING PHASE FAULT RESET NOT USED NOT USED
J2 J1
J4 J3 G2 E2
E1 G1
ROTOR CABLE
8 15
WHT FIL.COMMON 16 14 RED FIL. SMALL
FIL. SHLD BLK FIL. L.
7 SHIELD
CATH. FDBK CATH. RTN MA FDBK MA RTN ANODE RTN ANODE FDBK
AY51-023
9
J1
A2P1 6
5
4
3
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A1P1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A2P5
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN J5
AY40-003S A2, KVP BD.
J4
8
48VDC 48VDCRTN
7
6
5
4
3
2
BLK, L RED, S WHT, C GROUND
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A2P4
16
15
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
J2
AY40-031S A11, AEC BD. (OPTIONAL)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SC50-050T REV. N
A11P3 J3
J1
A11P1
J5
A11P5
AY51-019-2
GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG)
6
A11P2 J4
AEC WALL 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
+18 VDC GROUND OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
AY51-019-2
5
J7 1 2 3 4
A1P5 OCP ON RS-485 RS-485 EXP. PREP 28VDC GND 28VDC GND J5
1
AY51-017
AY51-021
AY51-012
A2P7
AY40-007T A5, FILAMENT CONTROL BD.
14
7
6
5
4
3
2
8 8
7
6
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
+18 VDC GROUND OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
GRN/YEL
AEC TABLE
(SEE NOTE 6)
FILAMENT BD. GROUND AY51-018-XX
A16P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
AY10-005-1 ODYSEY TECHVISION AY10-009-1 T. RAD PLUS TECHVISION AY10-009 T. RAD PLUS
AY40-53S3 A8, LINE MONITOR BD.
AY51-011
J2
AY51-019-2 IS USED FOR AEC OPTION ONLY. NON AEC GENERATORS USE AY51-019-1. ADJUST THESE JUMPERS TO THE NEAREST INCOMING AC LINE INPUT.
TO OCP ASSEMBLY AY10-004 QUEST AY10-005 ODYSSEY.
J1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A1P2
6.
J1
AEC WALL 2
2.4K
AY51-012
C1 VALUE COULD CHANGE DEPENDING ON TUBE MANUFACTURER OR MODEL (SEE TUBE DATA BASE)
9
A8P4
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
1 2 3 4 5
9
A6P2 VC+/2.4K
AY40-006S A1, CPU BD. (LOGIC BD.)
1 2 3 4
5.
J2
8
33VDC 33VDC RTN
J8
A1P9
A5P2 A1P3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
8
J3
A2P8
J9
A1P6
7
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
BLACK/RED WHT/BLK
AY51-004
VA -
VC-
E1 G1
G2 E2
AY51-066
+
A1P3
J3
7
AY40-023T A9, INTERFACE BD.
J6
A1P10
6
X-RAY ON RTN X-RAY ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
6
1 2
24VDC 24VDC RTN 28VDC GROUND BUCKY TABLE BUCKY WALL PREP COLLIMATOR READY BUCKY T. READY BUCKY W. READY DOOR INTERLOCK SPARE TABLE RDY K2, 24VDC EXPOSE PREP RDY 0VAC 7.5VAC 15VDC GROUND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
J10 RS 232 MASTER PORT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5
TB5
X - RAY ON
J4
J8
AY51-013 BRN RED ORN YEL GRN BLU VIO GRY WHT BLK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
DOOR DOOR RTN
A1P4
FROM GROUND AND DISCONNECT A17P1-9 AND 10 CONNECT THE MAS METER TO THESE WIRES. (WARNING A17P1-9 AND 10 MUST CONNECTED TO GROUND OR MAS METER.)
GRN/YEL (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) WHT (16AWG)
AY51-017
4
TB6 1 2
AY51-008
RED GREEN/YELLOW BLACK GREEN/YELLOW BLUE VIOLET WHITE WHITE/BLACK YELLOW/WHITE BLACK/RED GRAY/WHITE BLUE/YELLOW GREY GREEN/BROWN BROWN GREEN RED/GREEN ORANGE/BLACK BROWN/YELLOW GREEN/ORANGE
C9 THRU C16, 2400UF/450VDC
4.
A17 AY20-031 HV MODULE
5
A6P3
INTERLOCK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
C5 AND C8 ARE NOT INTALLED
3.
7.
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J11
A9P6
J6
32VAC 32VAC RTN 15VAC 15VAC RTN 11VAC 11VAC RTN 28VAC 28VAC RTN
1.5KE68CA
2
J2
TO WALLSTAND
5
GROUND 24 VDC 24 VDC RTN BUCKY READY
2.
A5P1 J1
A1P8 4
220 VAC OUT 0 VAC OUT 120 VAC 0VAC
C3, C4 ,C6 AND C7 1UF/1500VAC.
9
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J3
ROTOR DRIVE BD.
C1, 30UF/440VAC (SEE NOTE 5) 115 VAC BUCKY W. ON 115 VAC RTN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10
6 5 2 1 3 4
A10P3
2.4K
J4
J7 J6
J9 J8
AY51-080
+ +
J2 J1
J4 J3 G2 E2
E1 G1
G2 E2
AY51-066
A10
1.
A11P4
A9P2 1 WHITE (16AWG) 2 BLACK (16AWG) 3 VIOLET 4 BLUE 5 RED 6 BROWN/YELLOW 7 BLUE/YELLOW 8 BLACK/RED
A
4
J2
AY40-013T
TO TABLE
PA2
3
AY51-005
PA1
MA RTN MA SENSE ANODE RTN ANODE FDBK CATHODE RTN CATHODE FDBK
1 2 3 4 5 6
PC2
3
R1A, R1B R2A, R2B 1.2K/50W
J3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
T.S.-2
2
AY51-007
VA+/2.4K
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
BLUE(20AWG) RED(20AWG)
RED(20AWG) BLUE(20AWG)
A8P2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
GROUND 220 VAC IN 220 VAC IN 60VAC ROTOR 0 VAC ROTOR BUCKY READY
DOOR 48VDC 48VDC 48VDCRTN 48VDCRTN 30VDC 30VDC 30VDCRTN 30VDCRTN 15VDC 15VDCRTN
2- T.S.
1
J2 A8P1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
T.S.-1
6- T.S.
2
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
1- T.S.
1
J1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
INNER- PHASE
5- T.S.
C3
AY51-020
AY51-009-3P
A8P5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3- PHASE
C4
C6
C
AY51-015
J6 24VRTN K2 24V K2 24VRTN K3 24V K3
AY40-005T A6, POWER SUPPLY BD.
BLK
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
4 3 2 1
A6P1 32VAC 32VAC RTN 15VAC 15VAC RTN 11VAC 11VAC RTN 28VAC 28VAC RTN
CENTER- MAIN
3- PHASE
C7
AY51-128(4X)
PC1
AY51-012
J5
A8P6
A9P5
BLK
4- MAIN
NOTES:
AY51-018
PHASE C
J4
1 2 3
GRN/YEL
PHASE B
2- MAIN
A10P4
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDCRTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
TB4 (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG)
BLK BLK
5 2 3 4 1 6 7 8
AY51-043
J5
3
BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK
2
INCOM. LINE INCOM. LINE
AY51-022-3P
WHITE(20AWG) BLACK(20AWG) BLUE(20AWG) RED(20AWG) RED/GREEN YELLOW/WHITE ORN/BLK BRN/YEL
PHASE N. PHASE A
+15VDC GROUND
10
AY20-258 TMI
J3 PHASE C,IN PHASE A,IN
COLL. READY
A10P5
9
LINE LOAD GND
GRN/YEL (16AWG)
OUTER- COMM.
1 AND 2
TO TUBE STAND
2
11
LOAD LINE
12
1 2 3 4 5 6
17 18
EMI FLT
11
5- COMM.
(SEE NOTE 4) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
9
220
120 60
10
VARIAN
1- COMM.
A10TB1
J4
TB2 24 VDC 24 VDC RTN
TB3
A9P4
19 20
TB1
115 VAC BUCKY T. ON 115 VAC RTN
6
4 280
CHASSIS GRN TEMP. FAULT
DUNLEE
TOSHIBA SEE NOTE
1 BLK 2 RED 3 WHT 4 5 6 T.S. 7T.S.
J1
TO COLLIMATOR
8
7
9
15 7
1 2 3
220
240
8
0
J1 32VAC 0VAC 16VAC 0VAC 11VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 7VAC 0VAC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3
8
4
5 5A 6
(16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG)
A10P1
TB1 24 VAC COLL. 24 VAC .RTN GROUND
7
220
ANODE
ROTOR MAIN ROTOR PHASE ROTOR COMMON
7
5
8 16
BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK
J3
220VAC 60 VAC 0 VAC
1 2 3 4
6
3
X-RAY TUBE ROTOR CONNECTION CHART
AY51-010
5
208
6 7
8 3 10 5 1 6 7 2 4 9
32VAC 0VAC 16VAC 0VAC 11VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 7VAC 0VAC
WHT/BLK BLACK/RED WHT (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
220 220 240 280
4
E1 G1
1 2 3 4
A9P3 BROWN (16 AWG) RED (16 AWG) ORANGE (16AWG)
1 2 3 4
1
9
T1 PHASE C
SEE NOTE 7
AY51-078 X3
RED YELLOW
2
J7 J6
J9 J8
1 2 3 4
A9P1
1 198
POWER MODULE
BROWN RED ORANGE YELLOW GREEN BLUE VIOLET GREY WHITE
BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE
T2
3
A18
1
AY51-016
0
2
220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC
J7
C-
1
AY51-128(4X)
A9P7
7
1
A+
2 BLK (10AWG) 2 BLK (10AWG) 2 BLK (8AWG)
6
TB2
1
4
5A
- 2
A18QA
(SEE NOTE 3)
CATHODE
POWER MODULE
FOR ROTOR CONNECTION)
A18R1
6
4 5
A19
A18C2
2
-
ROTOR CHART
+ 3
A18QB
3
220
A19R1
C16
3 A18C1
5
3
1
DB1
X-RAY TUBE (SEE TUBE
+
4
208
1 (SEE NOTE 3)
~
3
2
A19QA
A18,A1P5
RS 232 SLAVE PORT
198
-
- 2
A19QB
2
1
DB2
2
-
~
1
0
~
A19C2
A19C1
2
7
C12
-
AY51-127 (4X)
+
+ 3
1 2 3 4
AY20-047
C15
1
280
1 2
3
C14
BLK(16AWG)
220 4 220 5 220 5A 240 6
~
9
K1
+
~
BLK(16AWG)
3
D3 1N4005
2
T1 PHASE A
198 208
T1 PHASE B
BRN BLU ORN 4
AY20-146 R8 R9 R10 3.3/50W ALUM.
BRN BLU ORN
3 4 3 6
5
6
5
7 8
10 10
1
2
D1 1N4005
9
K3
7
1
2
D2 1N4005
8
9
K2
AY51-075 (3X)
RED YELLOW
10
C11
A19,A1P5
AY51-072 (2X)
AY20-047
J5
IGBT DRIVE BD, ANODE
C13
+
+
7
1 2 3 4
AY51-065
8
NEUTRAL 1
+
0
C10
~
5
AY51-080
AY51-072 (2X)
6
J5
+
50W
4
3
AY51-088 (3X)
C9
50W R4 A,B 50 OHM
AY51-066
AY25-001
IGBT DRIVE BD,CATHODE
R3 A,B 50 OHM
+
440VAC
+
LOAD
LOAD
N L4
440VAC
3.15A SB
AY51-066
B L2
3.15A SB
AY51-065
BLK16AWG WHT16AWG
LINE
LINE
LINE
F2
C L3 LOAD
CB1
50 AMP/3P
GRN/YEL (10AWG) GRN/YEL (16AWG)
F1
TB1
A L1
WHT BLK16AWG
AY51-007
AY51-058 (3X)
Figure 6-19. Three-Phase (208-240) Input (32, 40 and 50 kW without High Speed Starter) X-ray Generators Interconnection Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-26
Chapter 6 Diagrams MAIN GROUND STUD
GROUND TO HV TANK
GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG) WHT BLK BLUE RED
CONNECTION)
FOR ROTOR
ROTOR CHART
CA+
(SEE TUBE
G2 E2
E1 G1
E1 G1
2- T.S.
T.S.-2
ROTOR CABLE
WHT FIL.COMMON RED FIL. SMALL
H7 BLK
PHASE
MAIN
COMM
H8 RED
T.S. T.S.
H9 WHT
AY51-023
AY51-015
16 14 15
C5 AND C8, .5 UF/1500VAC.
3.
C9 THRU C16, 2400UF/450VDC
4.
DISCONNECT A17P1-9 AND 10 AND CONNECT THE MAS METER TO THESE
5.
50 KW GENERATOR STANDARD HV MODULE
6.
AY51-019-2 IS USED FOR AEC OPTION ONLY, AY51-019-1
7.
DIGITAL GENERATOR, AY40-023T IS REPLACED WITH AY40-034T. AY51-089 CABLE IS USED WITH AY40-034T BD. ONLY FOR
8.
ADJUST THESE JUMPERS TO THE NEAREST INCOMING AC LINE INPUT.
IS AY30-031 125 KV NON AEC GENERATORS USE
TO
AY51-033
GND
GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) WHT (16AWG)
AY51-017
A5P1
A2P1
J2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A1P1
A2P5
J5
AY40-003S A2, KVP BD.
J4
8
48VDC 48VDCRTN
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
L BLK,
RED, S WHT, C GROUND
6
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
A11P4
5
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
AY51-019-2
J4
A11P2 J2
AY40-031S A11, AEC BD. (OPTIONAL)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A2P4
A11P1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SC50-054T REV. U
A11P3 J3
J1 J5
A11P5
AEC WALL 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
GROUND +18 VDC OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AEC WALL 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4
J8 1 2 3 4 5
AY40-007T A5, FILAMENT CONTROL BD.
J2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
GRN/YEL
AEC TABLE 9
OCP ON RS-485 RS-485 EXP. PREP 28VDC GND 28VDC GND J5
3
MA RTN MA SENSE ANODE RTN ANODE FDBK CATH RTN CATH FDBK
A2P8
A5P2 A2P3
8
A1P9
GROUND +18 VDC OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
J1
9
V SENSE A V SENSE C GROUND 24VDC AUTO SHUT OFF SYSTEM ON 24VDC MAG. 24VDC MAG. RTN MISSING PHASE FAULT RESET NOT USED NOT USED
J7 1 2 3 4
A2P6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J3 A2P7
A1P5
J1 BROWN (22 AWG) RED (22 AWG) ORANGE (22 AWG) YELLOW (22 AWG) GREEN (22 AWG) BLUE (22 AWG) VIOLET (20 AWG) GREY (20 AWG) WHITE (22 AWG) BLACK (22 AWG) BLACK/ORANGE (22 AWG) WHITE/BROWN (22 AWG)
J6
AY51-013 BRN RED ORN YEL GRN BLU VIO GRY WHT BLK
8
J9
SHIELD SHIELD
A1P10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
1
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
AY40-006S A1, CPU BD. (LOGIC BD.)
SHLD
ORN 9
8
7
6
5
RED BRN GRN
J11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
6
J3
J1
7
1 2 3 4
A1P8
A16P1
AY51-012
GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG)
X-RAY TUBE
J2 J1
J4 J3
J7 J6
J9 J8
AY51-066
+
30VDC 30VDC RTN
A1P2 DOOR GROUND
T.S.-1
6- T.S.
DO NOT INSTALL C5 AND C8 IN 50KW GENERATORS.
200VAC
6
AY40-053S2 A8, LINE MONITOR BD.
(SEE NOTE 5)
AY51-011
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1- T.S.
C3, C4, C6 AND C7 1UF/1500VAC
L2
5
J1
INNER- PHASE
5- T.S.
2.
L1
4
VC-
G2 E2
+
E1 G1
J4
A1P3 A8P4
A17 AY30-032 HV MODULE
RS 232 SLAVE PORT
24VDC 24VDC RTN 28VDC GROUND BUCKY TABLE BUCKY WALL PREP COLLIMATOR READY BUCKY T. READY BUCKY W. READY DOOR INTERLOCK SPARE TABLE RDY K2, 24VDC EXPOSE PREP RDY 0VAC 7.5VAC 15VDC GROUND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
A6P2 J4
3- PHASE
240VAC
AID ROTOR CONTROLLER MODEL LC102
1.5KE68CA
J8
A1P4
RED GREEN/YELLOW BLACK GREEN/YELLOW BLUE VIOLET WHITE WHITE/BLACK YELLOW/WHITE BLACK/RED GRAY/WHITE BLUE/YELLOW GREY GREEN/BROWN BROWN GREEN RED/GREEN ORANGE/BLACK BROWN/YELLOW GREEN/ORANGE
BLACK/RED WHT/BLK
3
3
(SEE NOTE 7) A9, INTERFACE BD.
AY40-023T
2
2
X-RAY ON RTN X-RAY ON
P/O TB2
4
9
1
5
1 2
7 8
TS2
4
TB5
CENTER- MAIN
3- PHASE
WALL
A9P6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
P/O TB1
3
X - RAY ON
DOOR DOOR RTN
AY51-017
J10
AY51-008
TB6 1 2
DIGITAL
AY40-034 D.R. CONFIGURATION (SEE NOTE 7)
VC+/2.4K 2.4K
AY51-080
+
J2 J1
J4 J3
J7 J6 J6
TO RECEPTOR
RED
1 2 3 4
2
32VAC 32VAC RTN 15VAC 15VAC RTN 11VAC 11VAC RTN 28VAC 28VAC RTN
4- MAIN
DIGITAL GENERATOR WITH STANDARD AEC.
2
10
9
8
7
6
5
VA -
4
2.4K
A6P3
DOOR INTERLOCK
J2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 9 6 9
GRN
1 2
1
J3 J2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A9P2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BLK
1 2
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
WHITE (16AWG) BLACK (16AWG) VIOLET BLUE RED BROWN/YELLOW BLUE/YELLOW BLACK/RED
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
5 9
1
R1A, R1B R2A, R2B 1.2K/50W
A8P2
48VDC 48VDC 48VDCRTN 48VDCRTN 30VDC 30VDC 30VDCRTN 30VDCRTN 15VDC 15VDCRTN
AY51-005
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
GROUND 24 VDC RTN 24 VDC BUCKY READY
PREP 1 PREP 2 RECP. RDY PREP RDY 1 PREP RDY 2 EXPOSE 1 EXPOSE 2 DR RDY RAD HV ON 1 HV ON 2 24VDC 24VDC RTN
BRN ORN
AY51-020
A8P1
J2
VA+/2.4K
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AY51-004
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
32VAC 32VAC RTN 15VAC 15VAC RTN 11VAC 11VAC RTN 28VAC 28VAC RTN
220V OUT 0 VAC OUT 120 VAC 0VAC
4
AY51-012
J6
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
2
A8P6
24VRTN K2 24V K2 24VRTN K3 24V K3
1
4 3 2 1
J1
A8P5
WALL 1 BUCKY 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
115 VAC BUCKY W. ON 115 VAC RTN
5 2 1 3
TABLE
TB7
TO
J5
6
RECEPTOR
AY51-018-XX
J5
A6P1 AY40-005T A6, POWER SUPPLY BD.
BLK
CH. GND GND BUCKY READY
BUCKY
DIGITAL
9
GRN/YEL
PHASE C
220V IN 220V IN 60V ROTOR 0V ROTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
115 VAC BUCKY W. ON 115 VAC RTN
A 10
(SEE NOTE 4)
4
1 2 3 4 5 6
WHT/BLK BLACK/RED WHT (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
PHASE B
TABLE
PA2
C
TO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
PA1
3
A9P5
BLK BLK
5 2 3 4 1 6 7 8
TO
TB4 BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
PHASE C,IN PHASE A,IN
PHASE N. PHASE A
J4
10
LOAD
+15VDC GROUND
TB3 PREP 1 PREP 2 RECP. RDY PREP RDY 1 PREP RDY 2 EXPOSE 1 EXPOSE 2 DR RDY RAD HV ON 1 HV ON 2 24VDC 24VDC RTN
PC2
2
1 2 3 4 5 6
LINE
GND
COLL. READY
PC1 BLU VIO GRY WHT AY51-089
FIL. SHIELD 8 BLK FIL. LARGE
LINE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
OUTER- COMM.
2- MAIN
1.
YEL
1
A9P4
17 18
TO TUBE STAND
TB2 24 VDC 24 VDC RTN
TB3
6
11
1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
BLK
4
32VAC 0VAC 16VAC 0VAC 11VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 7VAC 0VAC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J3 8 3 10 5 1 6 7 2 4 9
G2 E2
+
0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 7VAC 0VAC
19 20
BLK
INCOM. LINE INCOM. LINE
AY51-022-3P
7
60 120
1 2 3
LOAD
AY51-007
BLUE(20AWG) RED(20AWG)
0
BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
32VAC 0VAC 16VAC 0VAC 11VAC 0VAC 28VAC
15 7
EMI FLT
9
GRN/YEL (16AWG)
WHITE(20AWG) BLACK(20AWG) BLUE(20AWG) RED(20AWG) RED/GREEN YELLOW/WHITE ORN/BLK BRN/YEL
6
220
10
A8P3
9
8 16
8
12
RED(20AWG) BLUE(20AWG)
T2
COLL.
TB1 24 VAC COLL. 24 VAC RTN GROUND
J1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TO
9
6 7
440
A9P1
J3
DUNLEE
TO MAS METER.)
C3
8
5
BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE
A9P8 BRN
9
4
415
AY51-016
A9J8
8
380
5
1 2 3 4
5- COMM.
WIRES. (WARNING A17P1-9 AND 10 MUST BE CONNECTED TO GROUND OR
C6
1 2 3 4
BLU VIO GRY WHT
4
AY51-128 (6X) C4
220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC
7
3
3
ANODE
C5
A9P7
7
2
285
POWER MODULE
C7 AND 2)
GRN
220
A18QA
C8 NOTE 1
AY51-128(6X)
6
2
11
AY51-009-3P
BLK (10AWG) BLK (10AWG) BLK (8AWG) J7
VARIAN
1- COMM.
NOTES:
1
A18
(SEE NOTE 3)
5
1
CATHODE
4
1
0
2
TOSHIBA
A18R1
6
7
-
-
1
5
6
480
2
A18QB
4
440
A18C2
C16
3
5
POWER MODULE
A18C1
RS 232 MASTER PORT
415
A19
+3
(SEE
T1 PHASE B
4
DB1
1
A19R1
(SEE NOTE 3)
3
380
A19QA
1
X-RAY TUBE ROTOR CONNECTION CHART
+
2
~
+
CATH. FDBK CATH. RTN MA FDBK MA RTN ANODE RTN ANODE FDBK SHIELD 7
220
A19QB
C12
2
AY51-089
1
-
BRN
7
0
DB2
-
3
480
~
2
C15
-
2
6
-
K1
A19C2
1 2 3 4
AY20-047
3
~
1
440
AY51-127 (4X)
A19C1
J5
A18,A1P5
+
2
5
1 2
+ 3
AY51-079
AY51-065
4
415
~
9
D3 1N4005
380
480
T1 PHASE A
3
C11
C14
~
1
AY51-071 X3 (SEE NOTE 8)
RED YELLOW
285
285
TB2
2
T1 PHASE C
AY20-146 R8,R9,R10 3.3/50W ALUM.
220
+
3
+
7
AY51-066
BRN BLU ORN 4
6
8
10
1
1N4005
2
D1
NEUTRAL 1
10
AY51-069 (3X)
3
BRN BLU ORN
4
3
5 5
6
7 7
9
K3
8
10
9
1
2
D2 1N4005
0
+
~
8
IGBT DRIVE BD, ANODE
C13
AY20-047
+
AY51-068(3X)
AY51-079
1 2 3 4
AY51-073 (2X) G2 E2
3 5
K2
J9 J8
C10
6
J5
A19,A1P5
AY51-073 (2X)
4
N L4
IGBT DRIVE BD,CATHODE
C9
G1
AY25-001
R3 A,B 50 OHM 50W R4 A,B 50 OHM 50W
E1
440VAC
AY51-080
440VAC
3.15A SB 3.15A SB
AY51-065
LOAD
F2
+
BLK 16AWG WHT 16AWG
LINE
LINE
B L2 C L3
LOAD
CB1
50
AMP/3P LINE LOAD
GRN/YEL (10AWG) GRN/YEL (16AWG)
F1
AY51-007
TB1
A L1
WHT BLK16AWG
AY51-074 X3
AY51-019-2
FILAMENT BD. GROUND
(SEE NOTE 6)
TO OCP ASSEMBLY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
AY10-004 QUEST AY10-005 ODYSSEY AY10-005-1 ODYSEY TECHVISION AY10-009-1 T. RAD PLUS TECHVISION AY10-009 T. RAD PLUS
AY51-018-XX
Figure 6-20. Three-Phase (50, 65 and 80 kW with AID High Speed Starter) X-ray Generators Interconnection Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-27
Chapter 6 Diagrams MAIN GROUND STUD
GROUND TO HV TANK
GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG) WHT BLK BLUE RED
J2 J1
J4 J3
J7 J6
J9 J8
+
J2 J1
J4 J3
J7 J6
AY51-080
G2 E2 2
A18QA
+
A18R1 1
+
1 ANODE POWER MODULE
(SEE NOTE 3)
A18
14 16 15 FIL. SHIELD 8 BLK FIL. LARGE
1- T.S.
T.S.-1
6- T.S.
2- T.S.
T.S.-2
C3, C4, C6 AND C7 1UF/1500VAC,
C1 VALUE COULD CHANGE DEPENDING ON TUBE MODEL (SEE TUBE DATA SHEET)
3.
C9 THRU C16, 2400UF/450VDC
4.
DISCONNECT A17P1-9 AND 10 AND CONNECT (WARNING A17P1-9 AND 10 MUST BE CONNECTED TO GROUND OR TO MAS METER.)
5.
DIGITAL GENERATOR, AY40-023T IS REPLACED WITH AY40-034T.
6.
GENERATORS WITH TOMO OPTION, AY40-006S MUST BE REV F OR HIGHER
7.
GENERATOR WITHOUT DIGITAL RECEPTOR OPTION AY51-090 IS REPLACED WITH AY51-048.
8.
32 AND 40 KW GENERATORS MUST BE 30 AMP. 50 KW GENERATORS MUST BE 50 AMP.
9.
ADJUST THESE JUMPERS TO THE NEAREST INCOMING AC LINE INPUT.
C5 AND C8 ARE NOT USED
9
7
6
5
8
8
7
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TB10 AY40-027S A11, UNIVERSAL AEC BD.
WALL STAND
48VDC 48VDCRTN
TB1 300VDC
1 2 3 4 5 6
J7 TOMO SWEEP TIME
A11P1
J1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
J5 1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
J6 1
1 2 3
24VDC RTN GROUND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
.4S .6S .8S 1.2S 2S
GRN/YEL
TO OCP ASSEMBLY
A16P1
GROUND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
AY10-004 QUEST AY10-005 ODYSSEY AY10-005-1 ODYSEY TECHVISION AY10-009-1 T. RAD PLUS TECHVISION AY10-009 T. RAD PLUS
A11P5
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
A11P6
AY51-049
SC50-053T REV. H
A11TB11
TB11 A11P7
AY40-007T A5 FILAMENT BD.
A11TB10 24VDC PREP EXPOSE BUCKY RDY
A11TB12 1 24VDC 2 PREP 3 EXPOSE 4 BUCKY RDY 5 24VDC RTN 6 GROUND
TB12
J9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TOMO TABLE
(OPTIONAL)
1 2 3 4
AY51-019-2
9
8
AY51-013
10
7
6
5
4
4
A11P8 2
1
3
3
2
8
7
6
5
9
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
A11P10
4
3
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AY51-062 AY51-090 OR AY51-048 (SEE NOTE 7)
AY51-048 BLACK (20AWG) WHITE (20AWG)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A11P13 J13
J11
AUX.
A2P3
A11P12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
AEC WALL 2
A5P1
GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) WHT (16AWG)
THE MAS METER TO THESE WIRES.
J12
AEC WALL 1
10
9
8
7
6
J8
AEC TABLE
A11TB1
J2
6
1
1
J10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A11P9
J1
3
AY51-017
5
4
6
A11P11
2
CATH. FDBK CATH. RTN MA FDBK MA RTN ANODE RTN ANODE FDBK SHIELD 7 AY51-017 3
2
A2P1
1
J1
MA RTN MA SENSE ANODE RTN CATH RTN ANODE FDBK CATH FDBK
AY40-003S A2, KVP BD.
A1P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
WHT FIL.COMMON RED FIL. SMALL
AY51-015
AY51-023
A1P8
9
8
7
6
4
3
5 5
4
3
2
1
A1P12
AY51-012
SHLD
AY51-021
AY51-012
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
A10P3
V SENSE A V SENSE C GROUND 24VDC AUTO SHUT OFF SYSTEM ON 24VDC MAG. 24VDC MAG. RTN MISSING PHASE FAULT RESET NOT USED NOT USED
J12
FILAMENT BD. GROUND
INNER- PHASE
5- T.S.
2.
A17 AY30-031 HV MODULE
8
AY40-053S2 A8, LINE MONITOR BD.
J1
J2
1.5KE68CA
A2P4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
J6
7
DOOR GROUND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J3
J5
6
A1P2 BROWN (22 AWG) RED (22 AWG) ORANGE (22 AWG) YELLOW (22 AWG) GREEN (22 AWG) BLUE (22 AWG) VIOLET (20 AWG) GREY (20 AWG) WHITE (22 AWG) BLACK (22 AWG) BLACK/ORANGE (22 AWG) WHITE/BROWN (22 AWG)
AY40-006S A1, CPU BD. (LOGIC BD.) (SEE NOTE 6)
1 2 3 4
AY51-047
A2P5
6
33VDC 33VDC RTN
J3
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5
BLACK/RED WHT/BLK
A1P3
A1P9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J8
GROUND 18 VDC OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
1 2 3 4 5
A1P5 OCP ON RS-485 RS-485 EXP. PREP 28VDC GND 28VDC GND J5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
J4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J9
A2P8
5
AY51-062
AY51-011
R1A, R1B R2A, R2B 1.2K/50W
3- PHASE
AY51-017
AY51-020
4
SEE NOTE 5 AY40-023T A9, INTERFACE BD.
J11
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
J7
3
X-RAY ON RTN X-RAY ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
A2P7
2
TB5
RS 232 SLAVE PORT
24VDC 24VDC RTN 28VDC GROUND BUCKY TABLE BUCKY WALL PREP COLLIMATOR READY BUCKY T. READY BUCKY W. READY DOOR INTERLOCK SPARE TABLE RDY K2, 24VDC EXPOSE PREP RDY 0VAC 7.5VAC 15VDC GROUND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
DOOR DOOR RTN
RED GREEN/YELLOW BLACK GREEN/YELLOW BLUE VIOLET WHITE WHITE/BLACK YELLOW/WHITE BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE BLUE/YELLOW GREY GREEN/BROWN BROWN GREEN RED/GREEN ORANGE/BLACK BROWN/YELLOW GREEN/ORANGE
A8P4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A B
5
J4
AY40-034 D.R. CONFIGURATION SEE NOTE 5
J8
GND 18VDC
1 2 3 4
4
A6P2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
TB6
VCJ1
J10
A1P4
X - RAY ON 1 2
RECEPTOR
4
J6
32VAC 32VAC RTN 15VAC 15VAC RTN 11VAC 11VAC RTN 28VAC 28VAC RTN
DIGITAL WALL
AY51-090
3
J2
2)
TO
SHLD
3
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2.4K
A6P3
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
4
2
J3 J2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
GROUND 24 VDC RTN 24 VDC BUCKY READY
NOTE
9
5 2 1 3
A2P6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
220V OUT 0 VAC OUT 120 VAC 0VAC
A9P6
1 WHITE (16AWG) 2 BLACK (16AWG) 3 VIOLET 4 BLUE 5 RED 6 BROWN/YELLOW 7 BLUE/YELLOW 8 BLACK/RED DOOR INTERLOCK
CENTER- MAIN
3- PHASE
1.
PA2
6
BRN RED ORN YEL GRN BLU VIO GRY WHT BLK
48VDC 48VDC 48VDCRTN 48VDCRTN 30VDC 30VDC 30VDCRTN 30VDCRTN 15VDC 15VDCRTN
A9P2
AY51-005
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(SEE
10
(SEE NOTE 4)
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
115 VAC BUCKY W. ON 115 VAC RTN
C1, 30 UF
TB7 PREP 1 PREP 2 RECP. RDY PREP RDY 1 PREP RDY 2 EXPOSE 1 EXPOSE 2 DR RDY RAD HV ON 1 HV ON 2 24VDC 24VDC RTN
A10P4
1
A8P2 VC+/2.4K
32VAC 32VAC RTN 15VAC 15VAC RTN 11VAC 11VAC RTN 28VAC 28VAC RTN
4- MAIN
A
A5P2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
J2
1 2 3 4 5 6
J1
A8P5
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
A9P5
A6P1 AY40-005T A6, POWER SUPPLY BD.
OUTER- COMM.
2- MAIN
PC2
L BLK S RED C WHT GROUND
BLK
5- COMM.
C3
C
1
PHASE C
(16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG)
BLK BLK
5 2 3 4 1 6 7 8
BUCKY
TB4 BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK
VARIAN
1- COMM.
NOTES:
C4
PA1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
GRN/YEL
PHASE B
WALL
10
WHT/BLK BLACK/RED WHT (20AWG) WHT (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (20AWG)
PHASE N. PHASE A
TO
J3
PC1
BROWN RED ORANGE YELLOW GREEN BLUE VIOLET GREY WHITE
LINE LOAD GND
BUCKY READY
J5
2
11
CH. GND GND
220V IN 220V IN 60V ROTOR 0V ROTOR
TABLE
1
1 2 3 4 5 6
17 18
LOAD LINE
J4
DIGITAL RECEPTOR
9
A9P4
1 BUCKY 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
115 VAC BUCKY W. ON 115 VAC RTN
6 19 20
TABLE
TB3
PREP 1 PREP 2 RECP. RDY PREP RDY 1 PREP RDY 2 EXPOSE 1 EXPOSE 2 DR RDY RAD HV ON 1 HV ON 2 24VDC 24VDC RTN
9
AY20258 TMI
TO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
3
4
+15VDC GROUND
J4
TO
TB3
8
220 EMI FLT
(SEE NOTE 1)
A10TB1
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
A9P8
A9J8
8
60 120
COLL. READY
2
7
0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 7VAC 0VAC
15 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TB1 AY40-013T A10 ROTOR DRIVE BD.
BLU VIO GRY WHT AY51-090
A10P5
480
1 2 3
TO TUBE STAND
TB2 24 VDC 24 VDC RTN
CHASSIS GRD TEMP. FAULT
YEL
YEL
0
1 2 3
J1
BLU VIO GRY WHT
6
24 VAC COLL. 24 VAC RTN GROUND
J1 32VAC 0VAC 16VAC 0VAC 11VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 7VAC 0VAC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 BLK 2 RED 3 WHT 4 5 6 T.S. 7 T.S.
ROTOR MAIN ROTOR PHASE ROTOR COMMON
A10P1
7
5
440
(16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG)
1 2 3 4
BRN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
6
415
BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5
8 16
32VAC 0VAC 16VAC 0VAC 11VAC 0VAC 28VAC
TB1
TO COLL.
4
A9P1 9
1 2 3 4
J3
7
4
T2
DUNLEE
TOSHIBA
AY51-128(8X)
220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC
6
380
BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE
BROWN (16AWG) RED (16AWG) ORANGE (16AWG)
5
4
220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC
1 2 3 4
AY51-016
J5
GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG)
ROTOR CABLE
AY51-065
E1 G1
E1 G1
G2 E2
G2 E2
E1 G1
+
AY51-066
-
C-
AY51-010 J7
BLK
INCOM. LINE INCOM. LINE BLUE(20AWG) RED(20AWG)
-
X-RAY TUBE ROTOR CONNECTION CHART
A+
C6 A9P7
A8P3
AY51-022-3P
WHITE(20AWG) BLACK(20AWG) BLUE(20AWG) RED(20AWG) RED/GREEN YELLOW/WHITE ORN/BLK BRN/YEL
2
C16
4
3
GRN/YEL (16AWG)
RED(20AWG) BLUE(20AWG)
DB1
1 CATHODE POWER MODULE
A19
+3 A18C2
BLK (10AWG) BLK (10AWG) BLK (8AWG)
12
A8P1
G2 E2
(SEE NOTE 3)
+
A18C1
RS 232 SLAVE PORT
2
285
VA -
AY51-066
A19R1 1
C12
X-RAY TUBE (SEE TUBE ROTOR CHART FOR ROTOR CONNECTION)
A18,A1P5
A18QB
1
220
3
2.4K
~ -
A19QA
AY51-043
6
2
VA+/2.4K
2
BRN
440
1
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
-
-
3
5
7
10
AY51-007
C15
2
4
415
0
AY51-009-3P
1 2 3 4
AY20-047
3
~
1
380
480
J6 24VRTN K2 24V K2 24VRTN K3 24V K3
A19C2
3
3
9
4 3 2 1
~ +
2
2
T1 PHASE B
1
285
T1 PHASE C
0 220
8
A8P6
A19C1
A19QB
DB2
J5
C7
6 7
8 3 10 5 1 6 7 2 4 9
+ 3
2
~ -
7
1
J3 PHASE C,IN PHASE A,IN
J9 J8 + +
K1
6
480
1 2
D3 1N4005
5
T1 PHASE A
415
C11
~
9
AY51-127 (4X)
+
3
C14 AY51-079
1
RED YELLOW
4
440
5 (SEE NOTE 9)
3
380
AY51-069 (3X)
3 4
5 8
6
9 10
1
285
TB2
AY51-071 X3
D1 1N4005
2
K3
7
1N4005
AY20-146 R8 R9 R10 3.3/50W ALUM.
D2
2
AY51-073 (2X)
AY20-047
8 7 10
220
IGBT DRIVE BD, ANODE
C13
+
BRN BLU ORN BRN BLU ORN
4
3
5 6
7
9 10
1
2
8
RED YELLOW
K2
NEUTRAL 1
1 2 3 4
A19,A1P5
C10
~ + AY51-079
5
0
J5
E1 G1
AY51-068 (3X)
AY51-073 (2X)
4 6
IGBT DRIVE BD,CATHODE
C9
AY51-080
AY25-001 3
R3 A,B 50 OHM 50W R4 A,B 50 OHM 50W
440VAC
AY51-065
LOAD
N L4
440VAC
3.15A SB
WHT BLK16AWG
BLK16AWG WHT16AWG
C L3
3.15A SB
F2
+
F1
AY51-007
TB1
B L2
LINE
LINE
A L1
LOAD
LOAD
CB1
50 AMP/3P
GRN/YEL (10AWG) GRN/YEL (16AWG)
LINE
AY51-074 (3X) (SEE NOTE 8)
AY51-018-XX
BLACK YELLOW/GREEN WHITE BROWN BLACK/RED YELLOW/WHITE
Figure 6-21. Three-Phase (32, 40 and 50 kW without High Speed Starter, with Universal AEC Board) Xray Generators Interconnection Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-28
Chapter 6 Diagrams
GROUND TO HV TANK
TB5 1 2
X-RAY ON RTN X-RAY ON (SEE NOTE 6) AY40-023T A9, INTERFACE BD.
R1A, R1B R2A, R2B 1.2K/50W
AY40-053S2 A8, LINE MONITOR BD.
30VDC 30VDC RTN
(SEE NOTE 3)
ROTOR CABLE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
T.S.-2
1.
C3, C4, C6 AND C7 1UF/1500VAC,
2.
DO NOT INSTALL C5 AND C8 IN 50KW GENERATORS.
3.
C9 THRU C16, 2400UF/450VDC
4.
DISCONNECT A17P1-9 AND 10 AND CONNECT (WARNING A17P1-9 AND 10 MUST BE CONNECTED TO GROUND OR TO MAS METER.)
5.
50 KW GENERATOR STANDARD HV MODULE
C5 AND C8 .5 UF/1500VAC
THE MAS METER TO THESE WIRES
IS AY30-031, 125 KV
6.
DIGITAL GENERATOR, AY40-023T IS REPLACED WITH AY40-034T
7.
GENERATORS WITH TOMO OPTION, AY40-006S MUST BE REV F OR HIGHER
8.
GENERATOR WITH UNIVERSAL AEC AND DIGITAL RECEPTOR AY51-048
9.
ADJUST THESE JUMPERS TO THE NEAREST INCOMING AC LINE INPUT.
H8 RED
H7 BLK MAIN
PHASE
H9 WHT
3
COMM
2
L1
200VAC TO
L2
240VAC
GND
J11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
A1P9 A1P5
J1
V SENSE A V SENSE C GROUND 24VDC AUTO SHUT OFF SYSTEM ON 24VDC MAG. 24VDC MAG. RTN MISSING PHASE FAULT RESET NOT USED NOT USED
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A2P5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J8
GROUND 18 VDC OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
J3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
J5
J6
A2P4
J10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A11P11
J8
AEC TABLE
AEC WALL 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A1P1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
(OPTIONAL)
J9
TOMO TABLE
1 2 3 4 5 6
TB12
TB1 300VDC
J7
1 2 3 4 5 6
TOMO SWEEP TIME
A11P1
J1
1 2 3
J6
A11TB10 24VDC PREP EXPOSE BUCKY READY 24VDC RTN GROUND A11TB12 24VDC PREP EXPOSE BUCKY READY 24VDC RTN GROUND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SC50-055T REV. H
GRN/YEL
A11TB11
TB11
AY40-007T A5 FILAMENT.BD.
J1
WALL STAND
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TB10 AY40-027S A11, UNIVERSAL AEC BD.
A11TB1
A11P7
J2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A11P13 J13
J11
AUX.
A2P3
A11P12
J12
AEC WALL 2
A11P9
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
AY40-003S A2, KVP BD.
GRN/YEL
J2
J7
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A2P7 A2P8
GRN/YEL
J5
A B
J4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J9
GRD 18VDC
1 2 3 4
AY51-020
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A11P10
1 2 3 4 5 6
A1P8
A11P8
AY51-017 A2P1
AY51-017
.4S .6S .8S 1.2S 2S
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
GROUND
J5
A5P1 AY51-049
A1P12
GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) WHT (16AWG) BLACK (20AWG) WHITE (20AWG)
AY51-012
2- T.S.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SHLD
RS 232 SLAVE PORT
AY40-006S A1, CPU BD. (LOGIC BD.) SEE NOTE 7
DOOR GROUND STUD FILAMENT BD. GROUND
TUBE ROTOR CHART FOR ROTOR CONNECTIONS.)
A+ T.S. T.S. SHLD
(SEE NOTE 5)
J12
GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG)
C-
J2 J1
G2 E2
E1 G1
A17 AY30-032 HV MODULE
J3 1 2 3 4
A1P2 BROWN (22 AWG) RED (22 AWG) ORANGE (22 AWG) YELLOW (22 AWG) GREEN (22 AWG) BLUE (22 AWG) VIOLET (20 AWG) GREY (20 AWG) WHITE (22 AWG) BLACK (22 AWG) BLACK/ORANGE (22 AWG) WHITE/BROWN (22 AWG)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J4 J3
J7 J6 E1 G1
G2 E2
+
A1P3 BLACK/RED WHT/BLK
AY51-011
J1
J4
P/O TB2
1
AID ROTOR CONTROLLER MODEL LC102
1.5KE68CA
J8
24VDC 24VDC RTN 28VDC GROUND BUCKY TABLE BUCKY WALL PREP COLLIMATOR READY BUCKY T. READY BUCKY W. READY DOOR INTERLOCK SPARE TABLE RDY K2, 24VDC EXPOSE PREP RDY 0VAC 7.5VAC 15VDC GROUND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
AY51-047 A8P4
X-RAY TUBE ( SEE
AY51-079
A1P4
A6P2
VCJ4
J9 J8 AY51-080
+
J2 J1
J4 J3
J7 J6
DOOR DOOR RTN
X - RAY ON
T.S.-1
6- T.S.
A11P5
2.4K
A6P3
TB6
9
WALL
J10
RED GREEN/GREEN BLACK GREEN/YELLOW BLUE VIOLET WHITE WHITE/BLACK YELLOW/WHITE BLACK/RED GRAY/WHITE BLUE/YELLOW GREY GREEN/BROWN BROWN GREEN RED/GREEN ORANGE/BLACK BROWN/YELLOW GREEN/ORANGE
1- T.S.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J2
1 2
RECEPTOR
AY40-034 D.R. CONFIGURATION (SEE NOTE 6)
A9P6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
INNER- PHASE
5- T.S.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J6
32VAC 32VAC RTN 15VAC 15VAC RTN 11VAC 11VAC RTN 28VAC 28VAC RTN
CENTER- MAIN
3- PHASE
A11P6
VC+/2.4K
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J2
DIGITAL
AY51-062 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4- MAIN
3- PHASE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A8P2
VA -
48VDC 48VDC 48VDCRTN 48VDCRTN 30VDC 30VDC 30VDCRTN 30VDCRTN 15VDC 15VDCRTN
1 WHITE (16AWG) 2 BLACK (16AWG) 3 VIOLET 4 BLUE 5 RED 6 BROWN/YELLOW 7 BLUE/YELLOW 8 BLACK/RED DOOR INTERLOCK
OUTER- COMM.
2- MAIN
IS REPLACED WITH AY51-090
AY51-062
J2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A9P2
AY51-005
GROUND 24 VDC RTN 24 VDC BUCKY READY
TO
7 8
4
RED
TS2
AY51-019-2
2.4K
A8P5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
220V OUT 0 VAC OUT 120 VAC 0VAC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
P/O TB1
AY51-013
A8P1
VA+/2.4K
J5
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WHT/BLK BLACK/RED WHT (20AWG) WHT (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (20AWG)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J6 24VRTN K2 24V K2 24VRTN K3 24V K3
32VAC 32VAC RTN 15VAC 15VAC RTN 11VAC 11VAC RTN 28VAC 28VAC RTN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4 3 2 1
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
PHASE C
J1
AY40-005T A6, POWER SUPPLY BD.
WALL
PREP 1 PREP 2 RECP. RDY PREP RDY 1 PREP RDY 2 EXPOSE 1 EXPOSE 2 DR RDY RAD HV ON 1 HV ON 2 24VDC 24VDC RTN
1 2 3 4
48VDC 48VDCRTN
1 2 3 4 5 6
TB7
1 BUCKY 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
115 VAC BUCKY W. ON 115 VAC RTN
J5
4
1 2
J1
A9P5
A6P1 BLK
BUCKY READY
TB4 BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
BLK BLK
5 2 3 4 1 6 7 8
BLK
AY51-022-3P
PHASE B
A8P6
AY51-009-3P
PHASE N. PHASE A
CH. GND GND
TO
10
GRD
A8P3 J3 PHASE C,IN PHASE A,IN
220V IN 220V IN 60V ROTOR 0V ROTOR
5 2 1 3
TABLE
1 9 6 9
1 2
MA RTN MA SENSE ANODE RTN CATH RTN ANODE FDBK CATH FDBK
LINE LOAD
J4
BUCKY
DUNLEE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
LINE
GRN/YEL (16AWG)
1 2 3 4 5 6
17 18
LOAD
12
A9P4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
6
RECEPTOR
BLK GRN
A2P6
FILTER
11
TB3
DIGITAL
9
5 9
BRN RED ORN YEL GRN BLU VIO GRY WHT BLK
EMI
9
TABLE
115 VAC BUCKY W. ON 115 VAC RTN
6 19 20
TO
10
(SEE NOTE 4)
BRN ORN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
+15VDC GROUND
A
TO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
PREP 1 PREP 2 RECP. RDY PREP RDY 1 PREP RDY 2 EXPOSE 1 EXPOSE 2 DR RDY RAD HV ON 1 HV ON 2 24VDC 24VDC RTN
C
A5P2
8
1 2 3
COLL. READY
TB3
PA2
L BLK S RED C WHT GROUND
220
10
INCOM. LINE INCOM. LINE
7
60 120
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
PA1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
480
6
0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 7VAC 0VAC
15 7
TO TUBE STAND
TB2 24 VDC 24 VDC RTN
PC1 PC2
AY51-023
AY51-071 X3 SEE NOTE 9
RED YELLOW
440
6 7
0
32VAC 0VAC 16VAC 0VAC 11VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 7VAC 0VAC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
YEL BLU VIO GRY WHT AY51-090
AY51-015
5
8 16
BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
TO COLL.
5- COMM.
C3
AY51-033
4
415
32VAC 0VAC 16VAC 0VAC 11VAC 0VAC 28VAC
1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A9P8 BRN
AY51-090
380
5
9
TB1 24 VAC COLL. 24 VAC RTN GROUND
J1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SHLD
4
A9P1
T2
J3
A9J8
ORN
3
BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE
C6
1 2 3 4
14
2
285
AY51-128 X6 C4
220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC
1 2 3 4
16
220
3
C5
C7 AND2)
15
2
C8 NOTE 1
AY51-128 X6
AY51-016
ANODE
POWER MODULE
(SEE
WHT FIL.COMMON FIL. SMALL RED
1
A18
RED BRN GRN
0
CATHODE
1
FIL. SHIELD 8 BLK FIL. LARGE
7
1
T1 PHASE B
6
480
POWER MODULE
VARIAN
1- COMM.
NOTES:
A18QA
1
TOSHIBA
2
A18R1
C16
A9P7
5
440
TB2
8 3 10 5 1 6 7 2 4 9
A19
-
A18QB
DB1
BLK (10AWG) BLK (10AWG) BLK (8AWG)
T1 PHASE C
415
BLUE(20AWG) RED(20AWG)
(SEE NOTE 3)
-
BLK
4
1
A18C2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3
380
1
A18C1 2
BLU VIO GRY WHT
285
A19QA A19R1
DB2
~ -
+3
CATH. FDBK CATH. RTN MA FDBK MA RTN ANODE RTN ANODE FDBK SHIELD 7
2
A19QB
2
YEL
220
-
+
RS 232 MASTER PORT
1
-
+
7
0
~
+
480
2
C12
~ -
A19C2
3
BRN
6
K1
A19C1
X-RAY TUBE ROTOR CONNECTION CHART
AY20-047
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
440
AY51-066
5
+
4
415
1 2
AY51-127 X4
+ 3
+
380
T1 PHASE A
3
+
C15
J7
4
6
8
2 1
10
K3 D1 1N4005
285
~
9
~ +
C14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3
5
7
9
AY51-069 X3
2
D3 1N4005
BRN BLU ORN
4
6
8
10
2 1
AY20-146 R8,R9, R10 3.3/50W ALUM.
BRN BLU ORN 3
5
7
9
YELLOW
K2
WHITE(20AWG) BLACK(20AWG) BLUE(20AWG) RED(20AWG) RED/GREEN YELLOW/WHITE ORN/BLK BRN/YEL
C11
10
D2 1N4005
RED(20AWG) BLUE(20AWG)
3
7
AY51-073 X2
1 2 3 4
A3,A P5
AY51-066
8
RED 220
AY51-079
AY20-047
J5
IGBT DRIVE BD, ANODE
C13
AY51-073 X2
~ +
5
NEUTRAL 0 1
AY51-068 X3
J9 J8
C10 AY51-073 X2
4 6
1 2 3 4
A3,B P5
G2 E2
3
J5
E1 G1
N L4
IGBT DRIVE BD,CATHODE
C9
G2 E2
AY25-001
R3 A,B 50 OHM 50W R4 A,B 50 OHM 50W
E1 G1
440VAC
AY51-080
3.15A SB
AY51-065
LOAD
3.15A SB
F2
+
BLK16AWG WHT16AWG
LINE
LINE
LINE
LOAD
C L3 LOAD
CB1
50 AMP/3P
GRN/YEL (10AWG) GRN/YEL (16AWG)
B L2
F1
+
AY51-007
TB1
A L1
WHT BLK16AWG
AY51-074 X3
GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG) WHT BLK BLUE RED 440VAC
AY51-065
MAIN GROUND STUD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TO OCP ASSEMBLY AY10-004 QUEST AY10-005 ODYSSEY AY10-005-1 ODYSSEY TECHVISION AY10-009-1 T. RAD PLUS TECHVISION AY10-009 T. RAD PLUS
A16P1
AY51-048 OR AY51-090 (SEE NOTE 8) AY51-018-XX
BLACK YELLOW/GREEN WHITE BROWN BLACK/RED YELLOW/WHITE
Figure 6-22. Three-Phase (65 and 80 kW with AID High Speed Starter, Universal AEC Board) X-ray Generators Interconnection Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-29
Chapter 6 Diagrams
GROUND TO HV TANK
GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG) WHT BLK BLUE RED
J2 J1
J4 J3
J7 J6
J9 J8
AY51-080
ROTOR CABLE
E1 G1
G2 E2
+
G2 E2
E1 G1
AY51-079
8 FIL. SHLD BLK FIL. L.
15 WHT FIL.COMMON RED FIL. SMALL
CATH. FDBK CATH. RTN MA FDBK MA RTN ANODE RTN ANODE FDBK SHIELD 7
16 14
9
OUTER- COMM.
2- MAIN
4- MAIN
CENTER- MAIN
3- PHASE
3- PHASE
INNER- PHASE
5- T.S.
1- T.S.
T.S.-1
6- T.S.
2- T.S.
T.S.-2
DUNLEE
A17 AY30-031 HV MODULE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
J5
AY40-003S A2, KVP BD. J6
C3, C4, C6 AND C7 1UF/1500VAC, C5 AND C8 ARE NOT USED
2.
C1 VALUE COULD CHANGE DEPENDING ON TUBE MODEL (SEE TUBE DATA SHEET)
3.
C9 THRU C16, 2400UF/450VDC
4.
DISCONNECT A17P1-9 AND 10 AND CONNECT THE MAS METER TO THESE WIRES. (WARNING A17P1-9 AND 10 MUST BE CONNECTED TO GROUND OR TO MAS METER.)
5.
DIGITAL GENERATOR, AY40-023T IS REPLACED WITH AY40-034T.
6.
GENERATORS WITH TOMO OPTION, AY40-006S MUST BE REV F OR HIGHER
7.
GENERATOR WITH UNIVERSAL AEC AND DIGITAL RECEPTOR, AY51-048 IS REPLACED WITH AY51-090.
8.
ADJUST THESE JUMPERS TO THE NEAREST INCOMING AC LINE INPUT.
8
7
6
5
4
9 9
8
7
6
5
4
2
1
3
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
9 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
A11P10
3
2
A11P8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
AEC WALL 2
AY51-013
48VDC 48VDCRTN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A11P13 J13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
TOMO TABLE
(OPTIONAL)
J9
TB12
4 5 6
TB1 300VDC
J7 TOMO SWEEP TIME
A11P1
J1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
.4S .6S .8S 1.2S 2S
A16P1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TO OCP ASSEMBLY AY10-004 QUEST AY10-005 ODYSSEY AY10-005-1 ODYSEY TECHVISION AY10-009-1 T. RAD PLUS TECHVISION AY10-009 T. RAD PLUS
GROUND
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
GRN/YEL
A11P5
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
A5P1
A11P6
24VDC RTN GROUND
J5 1
8
7
6
5
4
3
J6 1
8
1 2 3
SC50-051T REV. G
24VDC RTN GROUND
A11TB11
TB11 1 2 3 4 5 6
A11TB10 24VDC PREP EXPOSE
A11TB12 1 24VDC 2 PREP 3 EXPOSE
WALL STAND
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TB10 AY40-027S A11, UNIVERSAL AEC BD.
A11TB1
AY40-007T A5 FILAMENT.BD.
7
J12
AEC WALL 1
AUX.
A2P3
A11P7
J2
J1
J8
AEC TABLE
10
8
7
6
5
9 9
8
10
A1P1
1
1
A11P12 J10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A11P9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
2
AY51-017 AY51-020
6
5
4
3
A2P1 2
J1
MA RTN MA SENSE ANODE RTN CATH RTN ANODE FDBK CATH FDBK J3
A11P11
A2P4
AY51-048 BLACK (20AWG) WHITE (20AWG)
1.
1.5KE68CA
AY51-049
GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) WHT (16AWG)
AY51-012
AY51-015
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
A1P12
FILAMENT BD. GROUND
AY51-023
AY51-012
8
9
A1P8
9
J1
A2P5
7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J2 V SENSE A V SENSE C GROUND 24VDC AUTO SHUT OFF SYSTEM ON 24VDC MAG. 24VDC MAG. RTN MISSING PHASE FAULT RESET NOT USED NOT USED
A1P5
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
AY40-006S A1, CPU BD. (LOGIC BD.) (SEE NOTE 6)
J8
GROUND 18 VDC OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
1 2 3 4 5
A1P9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A2P8
6
A1P2
8
OCP ON RS-485 RS-485 EXP. PREP 28VDC GND 28VDC GND J5
J7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
J4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J9
J3 1 2 3 4
7
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
A2P7
3
33VDC 33VDC RTN
AY51-047
6
5
4
3
J11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
6
A1P3
BROWN (22 AWG) RED (22 AWG) ORANGE (22 AWG) YELLOW (22 AWG) GREEN (22 AWG) BLUE (22 AWG) VIOLET (20 AWG) GREY (20 AWG) WHITE (22 AWG) BLACK (22 AWG) BLACK/ORANGE (22 AWG) WHITE/BROWN (22 AWG)
7
AY51-021 BROWN RED ORANGE YELLOW GREEN BLUE VIOLET GRAY WHITE 2
8
9
1
9
RS 232 SLAVE PORT
24VDC 24VDC RTN 28VDC GROUND BUCKY TABLE BUCKY WALL PREP COLLIMATOR READY BUCKY T. READY BUCKY W. READY DOOR INTERLOCK SPARE TABLE RDY K2, 24VDC EXPOSE PREP RDY 0VAC 7.5VAC 15VDC GROUND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A B
5
J4
J8
GRD 18VDC
1 2 3 4
2
J10
AY51-062
BLACK/RED WHT/BLK
6
5
4
3
1
A10P5
3
2
2
AY51-043
WALL
5
(SEE NOTE 5) AY40-023T A9, INTERFACE BD.
RECEPTOR
4
X-RAY ON RTN X-RAY ON
DIGITAL
4
TB5 1 2
AY51-090
2)
TO
3
DOOR DOOR RTN
X - RAY ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
10
AY51-017
J12
GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG)
5- COMM.
NOTES:
SHLD
1
TB6
(SEE NOTE
AY40-034 D.R. CONFIGURATION (SEE NOTE 5)
RED GREEN/YELLOW BLACK GREEN/YELLOW BLUE VIOLET WHITE WHITE/BLACK YELLOW/WHITE BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE BLUE/YELLOW GREY GREEN/BROWN BROWN GREEN RED/GREEN ORANGE/BLACK BROWN/YELLOW GREEN/ORANGE
A8P4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
VARIAN
1- COMM.
PA2
SHLD
3
A9P6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
C1, 30 UF
2
J6
J3
A2P6
J2 32VAC 32VAC RTN 15VAC 15VAC RTN 11VAC 11VAC RTN 28VAC 28VAC RTN
J5
8
GROUND 24 VDC RTN 24 VDC BUCKY READY
TABLE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BRN RED ORN YEL GRN BLU VIO GRY WHT BLK
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 BUCKY 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PREP 1 PREP 2 RECP. RDY PREP RDY 1 PREP RDY 2 EXPOSE 1 EXPOSE 2 DR RDY RAD HV ON 1 HV ON 2 24VDC 24VDC RTN
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
PA1
6 5 2 1 3 4
A10P4
2
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
A6P3
1 WHITE (16AWG) 2 BLACK (16AWG) 3 VIOLET 4 BLUE 5 RED 6 BROWN/YELLOW 7 BLUE/YELLOW 8 BLACK/RED DOOR INTERLOCK
220V OUT 0 VAC OUT 120 VAC 0VAC
RECEPTOR
TB7 TO WALL
115 VAC BUCKY W. ON 115 VAC RTN
J5
DIGITAL
BLU VIO GRY WHT
BUCKY READY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
7
CH. GND GND
TO
PC2
A10TB1
TB1 J4
7
J4 220V IN 220V IN 60V ROTOR 0V ROTOR
TABLE BUCKY
AY40-013T A10 ROTOR DRIVE BD.
BLU VIO GRY WHT
1
J3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TOSHIBA
A
A5P2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A9P2
AY51-005
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AY51-128 (4X)
C
L BLK S RED C WHT GROUND
AY40-053S3 A8, LINE MONITOR BD.
C4 C3
(SEE
(SEE NOTE 4)
1
48VDC 48VDC 48VDCRTN 48VDCRTN 30VDC 30VDC 30VDCRTN 30VDCRTN 15VDC 15VDCRTN
J2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
115 VAC BUCKY W. ON 115 VAC RTN
PREP 1 PREP 2 RECP. RDY PREP RDY 1 PREP RDY 2 EXPOSE 1 EXPOSE 2 DR RDY RAD HV ON 1 HV ON 2 24VDC 24VDC RTN
CHASSIS GRND TEMP. FAULT
1
TO
J1
YEL
YEL
+15VDC GROUND
A9P8 BRN
TB3
AY51-011
DOOR GROUND
C7 C6
1 BLK 2 RED 3 WHT 4 5 6 T.S. 7 T.S.
ROTOR MAIN ROTOR PHASE ROTOR COMMON
AY51-018-XX
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A6P2
R1A, R1B R2A, R2B 1.2K/50W
+
J2 J1
J4 J3
J7 J6
COLL. READY
VCJ1
A8P1 J4
ANODE
PC1
GRN/YEL
J1 32VAC 32VAC RTN 15VAC 15VAC RTN 11VAC 11VAC RTN 28VAC 28VAC RTN
2.4K
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
6
1 2 3 4 5 6
WHT/BLK BLACK/RED WHT (20AWG) WHT (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (20AWG)
AY40-005T A6, POWER SUPPLY BD.
A8P5
VC+/2.4K
X-RAY TUBE ROTOR CONNECTION CHART
AY51-128 (4X)
220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC
1 2 3 4
6
A9P5
A6P1 BLK
1
BLUE(20AWG) RED(20AWG)
(16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG)
BLK BLK
A8P2
TB2
TB4 BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK
GND
TO COLL.
TO TUBE STAND
24 VDC 24 VDC RTN
10
LOAD
BLK
INCOM. LINE INCOM. LINE
AY51-022-3P
WHITE(20AWG) BLACK(20AWG) BLUE(20AWG) RED(20AWG) RED/GREEN YELLOW/WHITE ORN/BLK BRN/YEL RED(20AWG) BLUE(20AWG)
AY51-007
J2
C-
A10P1
5
1 2 3 4 5 6
17 18 11
1 2 3
TB3
A9P4
A8P3
VA -
32VAC 0VAC 16VAC 0VAC 11VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC 7VAC 0VAC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
LINE
2.4K
TB1
6
LOAD
GRN/YEL (16AWG)
J3 24 VAC COLL. 24 VAC RTN GROUND
J1
BROWN (16AWG) RED (16AWG) ORANGE (16AWG) A9J8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4
4
(16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG) (16AWG)
1 2 3 4
3
220
15 7
220VAC 60 VAV 0 VAC
5
7
1 2 3
LINE
VA+/2.4K
A+
1
POWER MODULE
A18
4
280
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A18QA
CONNECTION)
(SEE NOTE 3)
3
240
0 60 120
EMI FLT
AY51-009-3P
CATHODE
FOR ROTOR
2
1
2
4 5 5A 6
8 16
BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK 28VAC BLK 0VAC BLK 7VAC BLK 0VAC BLK
32VAC 0VAC 16VAC 0VAC 11VAC 0VAC 28VAC 0VAC
19 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
-
RS 232 MASTER PORT
208
3
220
J5
2
AY51-090
2
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
AY51-066
+
A9P1
T2
T1 PHASE C
198
J6 24VRTN K2 24V K2 24VRTN K3 24V K3
A18C2
A18R1
AY51-010 1 2 3 4
BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE
9
4 3 2 1
A18C1
-
ROTOR CHART
1)
AY51-016
10
A8P6
POWER MODULE
+3
A18QB
BRN
240 280
3
PHASE C
C16
DB1
1
(SEE NOTE 3)
J7
9
5 2 3 4 1 6 7 8
A19QA
1
-
~
2
220 220
SEE NOTE 8
RED YELLOW
AY51-078 X3
6 7
1
PHASE N. PHASE A
2
A9P7
0
PHASE B
A19QB
+
NOTE
2
J3 PHASE C,IN PHASE A,IN
-
-
BLK (10AWG) BLK (10AWG) BLK (8AWG)
4 5 5A
4
8 3 10 5 1 6 7 2 4 9
2
~
X-RAY TUBE (SEE TUBE
3
1
220
11
A19C2
AY20-047
C15
A19R1
3
8
A19C1
+
C14
1
208
6 7
+ 3
A19
2
5
1 2 3 4
1
198
1
C12
7
0
TB2
DB2
AY51-127 (4X)
J5
AY51-019-2
280
K1
~
+
AY51-065
6
1 2
D3 1N4005
4 5 5A
T1 PHASE A
3
220 220 220
T1 PHASE B
3.3/50W ALUM.
BRN BLU ORN
208
-
9
2
240
AY51-075 (3X)
AY20-146 R8 R9 R10
BRN BLU ORN
3 4 3 6
4
5 8
5
7 8
10
9
1
D1 1N4005
2
K3
6
7
9 10
1
2
YELLOW RED
D2 1N4005
C11
~
AY51-066
7
~
+
3
AY51-072 (2X)
+
8 10
198
AY20-047
G2 E2
5
NEUTRAL 1
0
+
~
C13
E1 G1
6
IGBT DRIVE BD, ANODE
1 2 3 4
A19,A1P5
C10
G1
3
AY51-088 (3X)
K2
J9 J8
AY51-072 (2X)
G2 E2
4
E1
AY25-001
N L4
C9
AY51-080
440VAC
+
3.15A SB
A18,A1P5 J5
IGBT DRIVE BD,CATHODE
R3 A,B 50 OHM 50W R4 A,B 50 OHM 50W
+
F2
440VAC
+
LOAD
3.15A SB
AY51-065
LINE
LINE
LINE
LOAD
CB1
C L3
50 AMP/3P LOAD
GRN/YEL (10AWG) GRN/YEL (16AWG)
BLK16AWG WHT16AWG
TB1
B L2
F1
AY51-079
AY51-007 A L1
WHT BLK16AWG
AY51-058 (3X)
2
MAIN GROUND STUD
AY51-062 AY51-048 0R AY51-090 (SEE NOTE 7)
BLACK YELLOW/GREEN WHITE BROWN BLACK/RED YELLOW/WHITE
Figure 6-23. Three-Phase (208-240) Input (32, 40 and 50 kW without High Speed Starter, with Universal AEC Board) X-ray Generators Interconnection Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-30
Chapter 6 Diagrams
X-RAY TUBE ROTOR CONNECTION CHART
XRAY ON
DOOR DOOR RTN
TB5 1 2
X-RAY ON X-RAY ON RTN (SEE NOTE 5) AY40-061T A9, INTERFACE BD.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
J4
J1 AY40-053S3 A8, LINE MONITOR BD.
A8P4
DOOR GROUND
5 380V BLK
ROTOR CABLE ORANGE BLACK
A20,A2TB4
1 2
WHITE
RED
BLACK
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
TEMP. TEMP.
MAIN
COMM.
G2 E2
E1 G1
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
BROWN RED ORANGE YELLOW GREEN BLACK AY51-131
BLACK
BROWN RED ORANGE YELLOW GREEN BLUE VIOLET GREY WHITE BLK WHT/BRN WHT/RED WHT/ORN WHT/YEL AY51-130
1 2 3 4 5
RED
AY51-146
A20 A2TB3
G2 E2
AY51-066
E1 G1
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AY51-023
AY51-015
AY40-035S HSS CONTROL BD. A20, A1
6.
TO GROUND OR TO MAS METER) AY51-019-2 IS USED FOR AEC OPTION
Q-HSS DIGITAL GENERATOR ONLY, Q-HSS NON DIGITAL GENERATOR USE AY40-061T.
USE CABLE AY51-151 CABLE FOR INTERFACING TO RS-580 SYSTEM: - CONNECT WIRES FROM P81-7,-8 TO P2-1 - CONNECT WIRES FROM P81-4,-5 TO P2-2 - CONNECT WIRE FROM P81-4 TO GND - CONNECT WIRE FROM P81-1 INTERFACE BOARD A9TB1-2 - CONNECT WIRE FROM P81-2 TO INTERFACE BOARD A9TB1-1 - CONNECT WIRE FROM P81-3 TO INTERFACE BOARD A9TB1-3 FOR SYSTEMS OTHER THAN RS-580 CONSULT RESPECTIVE MANUALS
A20,A1P2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A17
A20 Q-HSS AY20-177
J2 A20,A1P1
8.
ADJUST THESE JUMPERS TO THE NEAREST INCOMING AC LINE INPUT.
BRN RED ORN YEL GRN BLU VIO GRY WHT
AY20-031 HV MODULE AY51-012-1
BLACK (16AWG) WHITE (16AWG)
AY51-145
1 2 3
J10
J8
RS 232 MASTER PORT
RS 232 SLAVE PORT 24VDC 24VDC RTN 28VDC GROUND BUCKY TABLE BUCKY WALL PREP COLLIMATOR READY BUCKY T. READY BUCKY W. READY DOOR INTERLOCK SPARE TABLE RDY K1, 24VDC EXPOSE PREP RDY 7VAC RTN 7VAC 15VDC GROUND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
J11
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
J4
A1P4 A1P3 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J3 28VDC 28VDC RTN
AY40-006S A1, CPU BD. (LOGIC BD.) J2 V SENSE A V SENSE C GROUND 28VDC AUTO SHUT OFF SYSTEM ON 28VDC MAG. 28VDC MAG. RTN MISSING PHASE FAULT RESET NOT USED NOT USED
J1
A2P7 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J9 OCP ON RS-485 RS-485 EXP. PREP 28VDC GND 28VDC GND J5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J7 GROUND +18 VDC OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
J4 1 2 3 4 5
A2P5
A1P9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J8 GROUND +18 VDC OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
J3
J5 15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A1P5
A1P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A5P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J1 BLK L RED S WHT C GROUND
48VDC 48VDCRTN
A2P4
A11P1
A1P3
A11P4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
J6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
J5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J1
A11P3
J3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
GRN/YEL
A16P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
P2-1
P2-2
(SEE NOTE 7)
J2
AY51-018-XX
1
EL68-007 OPTIONAL POWER SUPPLY (28VDC/8 AMP)
A11P2 J2
J4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
AY40-003S A2, KVP BD. A2P8
1 2 3
A11P5 J1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
P1-L
X - RAY ON
A2P1
SHIELD
SHIELD
P1-N
AY51-021
A1P8
BLK (16AWG) WHT (16AWG) GRN/YEL (16AWG)
FILAMENT BD. GROUND
C2B 12uF 440V
J1
AY51-012-1 GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG)
PHASE
A18,A1P5
J2 J1
J4 J3
J7 J6
J9 J8 AY51-080
+ + +
BROWN (22 AWG) RED (22 AWG) ORANGE (22 AWG) YELLOW (22 AWG) GREEN (22 AWG) BLUE (22 AWG) VIOLET (20 AWG) GREY (20 AWG) WHITE (22 AWG) BLACK (22 AWG) BLACK/ORANGE (22 AWG) WHITE/BROWN (22 AWG)
AY40-062T INTERFACE BOARD IS USED ON
AY51-017
A1P2
AY51-011
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CONNECTED
5.
AY51-017
AY51-047-1
VC-
1.5KE68CA
J5
WALL
AY40-062T D.R. CONFIGURATION (SEE NOTE 5)
BLACK/RED WHT/BLK
A6P2
J4
RECEPTOR
RED GREEN/YELLOW BLACK GREEN/YELLOW BLUE VIOLET WHITE WHITE/BLACK YELLOW/WHITE BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE BLUE/YELLOW GREY GREEN/BROWN BROWN GREEN RED/GREEN ORANGE/BLACK BROWN/YELLOW GREEN/ORANGE
AY51-008
DISCONNECT A17P1-9,-10 AND CONNECT THE MAS METER TO THESE WIRES. (WARNING A17P1-9 AND -10 MUST BE
1
TB6 1 2
A9P6
TUBE DATA BASE)
4.
1
DOOR INTERLOCK
J6
32VAC 32VAC RTN 15VAC 15VAC RTN 11VAC 11VAC RTN 24VAC 24VAC RTN
DIGITAL
TUBE MANUFACTURER OR MODEL, (SEE
AY51-019-1.
A20,A1P5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
AY10-005 ODYSSEY, AY10-005-1 ODYSSEY TECHVISION, AY10-009-1 T. RAD PLUS TECHVISION, AY10-009 T. RAD PLUS
A6P3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TO
A20,A1P4
J3
9
J1
C2A 12uF 440V
TO OCP ASSEMBLY AY10-004 QUEST
J3 J2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J2
A9P2
AY51-005 WHITE (16AWG) BLACK (16AWG) BLUE VIOLET RED BROWN/YELLOW BLUE/YELLOW BLACK/RED
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TB5 X-RAY ON RTN X-RAY ON
A20,A1P3
TABLE 6 5 2 1 3 4
C1 VALUE COULD CHANGE DEPENDING ON
ONLY, NON AEC GENERATORS USE
AEC TABLE
GROUND 24 VDC RTN 24 VDC BUCKY READY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
10
(SEE NOTE 4)
C3, C6 1uF/1500V, C4,C7 .5uF/1500V C5 AND C8 ARE NOT INSTALLED
3.
7.
A
RECEPTOR
A20,A2P4
AEC WALL 1
1 BUCKY 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
115 VAC BUCKY W. ON 115 VAC RTN
DIGITAL
J4
C9 THRU C16, 2400uF/450VDC
2.
C1 25uF/440V
AEC WALL 2
WALL
PA2
WHT/BLK BLACK/RED 1 (SEE NOTE 3) 2 3 4 5
TB3
AY51-020
220V OUT 0 VAC OUT 115 VAC 0VAC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
3 2 1
J3
AY40-031S A11, AEC BD. (OPTIONAL)
48VDC 48VDC 48VDCRTN 48VDCRTN 28VDC 28VDC 28VDCRTN 28VDCRTN 15VDC 15VDCRTN
VC+/2.4K 2.4K
(SEE NOTE 1)
J2 J1
J4 J3 TO
PA1
C
TO
A20,A2P3
1 2 3 4 5 6
TB8
1 2 3 4
PC1 PC2
TB4
PREP 1 PREP 2 RECP. RDY PREP RDY 1 PREP RDY 2 EXPOSE 1 EXPOSE 2 DR RDY RAD HV ON 1 HV ON 2 24VDC 24VDC RTN
C3
MA RTN MA SENSE ANODE RTN ANODE FDBK CATH RTN CATH FDBK
A9TB8
TB4
(SEE NOTE 6)
A8P2
E1 G1
G2 E2
220V IN 0V IN
BUCKY
BLU VIO GRY WHT
NOTES: 1.
AY51-019-2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
VA -
BLUE
TABLE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2)
A1P6
A8P5
J1 32VAC 32VAC RTN 15VAC 15VAC RTN 11VAC 11VAC RTN 24VAC 24VAC RTN
2.4K
R1A, R1B R2A, R2B 1.2K/50W
TO
C4
YEL
TB3
PREP 1 PREP 2 RECP. RDY PREP RDY 1 PREP RDY 2 EXPOSE 1 EXPOSE 2 DR RDY RAD HV ON 1 HV ON 2 24VDC 24VDC RTN
NOTE
A5P2
J2
+15VDC GROUND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
C6
A5, FILAMENT CONTROL BD. AY40-007T
VA+/2.4K
COLL. READY
TB4
WHT/BLK BLACK/RED WHT/BLK BLACK/RED WHT (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) WHT (20AWG) BLK (20AWG)
AY51-009-3P
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
1 STAND 2 3 4 5 6 7
BUCKY READY
A6P1 AY40-005T A6, POWER SUPPLY BD.
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
J6 24VRTN K2 24V K2 24VRTN K3 24V K3
TB2 24 VDC 24 VDC RTN
BLK BLK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4 3 2 1
TUBE
TB7
1 2
TO COLL.
TO
TB3
A9TB7
11
BLK J5
A8P6
1 2 3
CH. GND GND
17 18
LINE LOAD
LOAD GND LINE
TB1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A9P8 BRN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
19 20
T.S.-2
A20,A2P2
A20,A2P1
(SEE
AY51-013 BRN RED ORN YEL GRN BLU VIO GRY WHT BLK
6
2- T.S.
J2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5
0VAC
115 VAC BUCKY W. ON 115 VAC RTN
BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
BLK
PHASE C
J1
AY51-012-1
380
6- T.S.
AY40-036S HSS DRIVER BD. A20, A2
AY51-018-XX
4
T.S.-1
TB2
ANODE
AY51-141 (2X)
GRN/YEL
220
7
J8 1 2 3
24 VAC COLL. 24 VAC RTN GROUND
10
5 2 3 4 1 6 7 8
POWER MODULE
FIL.SHLD 8 BLK FIL.L. 15 WHT FIL.COM. 16 RED FIL.SMALL 14
3
1- T.S.
2
A18R1
A18
J3
32VAC 0VAC 16VAC 0VAC 11VAC 0VAC 24VAC 0VAC 24VAC 0VAC 7VAC 0VAC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
INNER- PHASE
5- T.S.
A+
1
CATHODE
RED BRN ORN YEL GRN BLU VIO GRY WHT
1 2 2A
120
BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
3- PHASE
A20,A2TB2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
32VAC 32VAC RTN 16VAC 16VAC RTN 11VAC
EMI FLT
PHASE B
POWER MODULE
220VAC
J1
CENTER- MAIN
3- PHASE
A18QA
BLU FDBK GRN RTN RED FDBK BRN RTN ORN RTN YEL FDBK SHLD 7
0 60 80
7 285
PHASE N. PHASE A
A18QB 1
J3 PHASE C,IN PHASE A,IN
J7 J6
J9 J8 +
A9P1
15
12
8 3 10 5 1 6 7 2 4 9
DB1
-
4- MAIN
A20,A2TB1
A18C2
-
2- MAIN
C-
TB1 2
OUTER- COMM.
FOR ROTOR
1
J7
9
8 16
PHASE C
4 5 5A 6
+
PHASE A
T1 T1
T2
T1
198
AY51-078 (3X)
208 220 220 220 240
10 11 (SEE NOTE 8)
AY51-016 BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE
7
3
C16
DUNLEE
5- COMM.
SEE MANUAL
+3
A18C1
VARIAN
1- COMM.
CONNECTION
A19R1
A19
1 2 3 4
11VAC RTN 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC RTN 24VAC RTN 7VAC 7VAC RTN
285
6
9
AY51-022-3P
1
+
AY51-141(2X)
A9P7
2
8
~ -
A19QA
1 2 3 4
AY51-128(4X)
1
7
-
AY51-065
C7
5A
240
6
-
A19QB
BLK (10AWG) BLK (10AWG) BLK (8AWG)
BLK (8AWG)
GRN/YEL (16AWG)
RED
C12
2
BLU VIO GRY WHT
4
5
A19C2
J5
AY20-047
3
GRN
220
0
~
AY51-089
3
4
A8P1
AY51-065
C15
+3
+
A19C1 2
DB2
PHASE B
2
3
RED
~ -
K1
3
AY51-079
BRN
5 220
AY51-075 (6X)
5
0
208
2
RED (20AWG) YELLOW (20AWG)
AY51-127 (4X)
C14
~ +
1
198
TB2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2
1N4005
1
AY51-007
~
9
7
220
A8P3
C11
10
C13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
285
3 4
6
9
7 8
10
2 1
D1 1N4005
7
D3
1N4005 K3
4 5 5A 6
220 220 220 240
C10 AY51-079
A19,A1P5
AY51-072 (2X)
E1 G1
3
AY51-072 (2X)
~ +
8
G2 E2
208
6
AY51-080
4
SEE NOTE 1
2
AY51-066
1
IGBT DRIVE BD, ANODE
AY20-047
+
0 198
C9
1 2 3 4
+
LOAD
BRN BRN BLU BLU ORN ORN AY20-146 R8, R9 R10 3.3/50W ALUM.
3 4
6
5
7 8
10
9
2 1
D2
BLUE
440VAC
3.15A SB
AY25-001
5
K2
WHITE(20AWG) BLACK(20AWG) BLUE(20AWG) RED(20AWG) RED/GREEN YELLOW/WHITE ORN/BLK BRN/YEL
R3 A,B 50 OHM 50W R4 A,B 50 OHM 50W
3
N L4
AY51-088(3X)
INCOM. LINE INCOM. LINE
F2
J5
IGBT DRIVE BD,CATHODE
+
BLK16AWG WHT16AWG
TB1
B L2 C L3
3.15A SB
WHT BLK
AY51-007 A L1
LINE
LINE
LINE LOAD
CB1
50 AMP/3P
LOAD
GRN/YEL (16AWG) GRN/YEL (10AWG) GRN/YEL (16AWG)
F1
TOSHIBA
CHART #1
SEE TUBE
+
AY51-058 (3X)
GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG) WHITE BLACK BLUE RED 440VAC
X-RAY TUBE
_
GROUND TO HV TANK
1 0V BLK 2 60V BLK 2A 80V BLK 3 120V BLK 4 220V BLK
MAIN GROUND STUD
SC50-071T REV. C
GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG)
1 2 3
NOT USED, TIE BACK
Figure 6-24. Three-Phase (208-240) Input (50 kW with QMI High Speed Starter) X-ray Generator Interconnection Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-31
Chapter 6 Diagrams
X-RAY TUBE ROTOR CONNECTION CHART # 1 X-RAY TUBE
MAIN GROUND STUD
SEE TUBE
TB5 1 2
X-RAY ON RTN X-RAY ON
(SEE NOTE 5) AY40-061T A9, INTERFACE BD.
A6P2 J4
AY40-053S3 A8, LINE MONITOR BD.
A8P4 BROWN (22 AWG) RED (22 AWG) ORANGE (22 AWG) YELLOW (22 AWG) GREEN (22 AWG) BLUE (22 AWG) VIOLET (20 AWG) GREY (20 AWG) WHITE (22 AWG) BLACK (22 AWG) BLACK/ORANGE (22 AWG) WHITE/BROWN (22 AWG)
J3 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ROTOR CABLE
5 380V BLK
ORANGE GREEN A20,A2TB4 1 2
WHITE
RED
BLACK
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
TEMP. TEMP.
C0MM.
MAIN
PHASE
A20 A2TB3
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5
J9
V SENSE A V SENSE C GROUND 24VDC AUTO SHUT OFF SYSTEM ON 24VDC MAG. 24VDC MAG. RTN MISSING PHASE FAULT RESET NOT USED NOT USED
BROWN RED ORANGE YELLOW GREEN BLACK AY51-131
BROWN RED ORANGE YELLOW GREEN BLUE VIOLET GREY WHITE BLK WHT/BRN WHT/RED WHT/ORN WHT/YEL AY51-130
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
BLACK
OCP ON RS-485 RS-485 EXP. PREP 28VDC GND 28VDC GND J5
(LOGIC BD.)
J1
1 2 3 4 5 6
GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) WHT (16AWG)
BRN RED ORN YEL GRN BLU VIO GRY WHT
1
1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A11P8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A11P10
1 2 3 4 5 6
A2P1
GROUND 18 VDC OUTPUT A OUTPUT B J4 J3
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A2P5
J5
AY40-003S A2, KVP BD.
A1P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A2P4
A11P11
J12
AEC WALL 2
J11
AUX. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
TB10 AY40-027S A11, UNIVERSAL AEC BD. (OPTIONAL)
A11P9
L BLK S RED C WHT GROUND
48VDC 48VDCRTN J1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TOMO TABLE
J9
TB12 WALL STAND
1 2 3 4
TB1 300VDC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6
A11P1 1 2 3
J7 TOMO SWEEP TIME
J1 J6
A11TB10 24VDC PREP EXPOSE BUCKY RDY
P2-1
A16P1
TO OCP ASSEMBLY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A11TB11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
P2-2
SEE NOTE 7
24VDCRTN GROUND
A11TB12 1 24VDC 2 PREP 3 EXPOSE 4 BUCKY RDY 5 24VDCRTN 6 GROUND
TB11 A11P7
EL68-007 OPTIONAL POWER SUPPLY (28VDC/8 AMP)
A11P13 J13
A2P3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
AEC WALL 1
P1-L
J8
AEC TABLE
P1-N
J10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A11TB1
J2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
AY51-020
A B
J8 1 2 3 4 5
A1P9
GND 18VDC
J7
A2P8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ADJUST THESE JUMPERS TO THE NEAREST INCOMING AC LINE INPUT.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A2P7
A1P5
AY40-006S A1, CPU BD.
J2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A1P12
AY51-012-1
AY51-015
AY51-023
14 16 15
8
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
28VDC 28VDC RTN
DOOR GROUND
FILAMENT BD. GROUND
RED
AY51-146
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A1P3
J11
J12
GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG)
1 0V BLK 2 60V BLK 2A 80V BLK 3 120V BLK 4 220V BLK
J2 J1
J4 J3
E1 G1
G2 E2
E1 G1
G2 E2 AY51-066 J4
A1P2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J7 J6
J9 J8
+
(SEE NOTE 1)
AY51-080
J2 J1 E1 G1
+
A1P4
AY51-047-1 AY51-011
R1A, R1B R2A, R2B 1.2K/50W
SEE NOTE 6 BLACK/RED WHT/BLK
VC-
J1
AY51-062
FOR SYSTEMS OTHER THAN RS-580 CONSULT RESPECTIVE MANUALS
8.
1
DOOR DOOR RTN
24VDC 24VDC RTN 28VDC GROUND BUCKY TABLE BUCKY WALL PREP COLLIMATOR READY BUCKY T. READY BUCKY W. READY DOOR INTERLOCK SPARE TABLE RDY K1, 24VDC EXPOSE PREP RDY 0VAC 7.5VAC 15VDC GROUND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
NON DIGITAL GENERATOR WITH TOMO OPTION
USE CABLE AY51-151 CABLE FOR INTERFACING TO RS-580 SYSTEM: - CONNECT WIRES FROM P81-7,-8 TO P2-1 - CONNECT WIRES FROM P81-4,-5 TO P2-2 - CONNECT WIRE FROM P81-4 TO GND - CONNECT WIRE FROM P81-1 INTERFACE BOARD A9TB1-2 - CONNECT WIRE FROM P81-2 TO INTERFACE BOARD A9TB1-1 - CONNECT WIRE FROM P81-3 TO INTERFACE BOARD A9TB1-3
1
TB6
RED YELLOW/GREEN BLACK YELLOW/GREEN BLUE VIOLET WHITE WHITE/BLACK YELLOW/WHITE BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE BLUE/YELLOW GREY GREEN/BROWN BROWN GREEN RED/GREEN ORANGE/BLACK BROWN/YELLOW GREEN/ORANGE
DIGITAL GENERATORS WITH NO TOMO OPTION
.4S .6S .8S 1.2S 2S
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
AY10-004 QUEST AY10-005 ODYSSEY, AY10-005-1 ODYSSEY TECHVISION, AY10-009-1 T. RAD PLUS TECHVISION, AY10-009 T. RAD PLUS
AY51-018-XX GRN/YEL
GROUND
J5 A11P5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2.4K
A6P3
1 2
X - RAY ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
6.
AY51-145
A11P6
J3 J2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
32VAC 32VAC RTN 15VAC 15VAC RTN 11VAC 11VAC RTN 24VAC 24VAC RTN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
AY40-062T INTERFACE BOARD IS USED ON
AY51-090 IS REPLACED WITH AY51-089.
A20 Q-HSS AY20-177
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A8P2
VC+/2.4K
48VDC 48VDC 48VDCRTN 48VDCRTN 28VDC 28VDC 28VDCRTN 28VDCRTN 15VDC 15VDCRTN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RS 232 SLAVE PORT
5.
A11P12 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
AY51-019-2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 WHITE (16AWG) 2 BLACK (16AWG) 3 VIOLET 4 BLUE 5 RED 6 BROWN/YELLOW 7 BLUE/YELLOW 8 BLACK/RED DOOR INTERLOCK
SHLD
AY51-049
A8P5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AY40-062T D. R. CONFIGURATION (SEE NOTE 5)
J8
RS 232 MASTER PORT
DISCONNECT A17P1-9 AND -10 AND CONNECT THE MAS METER TO THESE WIRES. (WARNING A17P1-9 AND -10 MUST BE CONNECTED TO GROUND OR TO MAS METER.)
12uF 440V
A1P8
A5P2
32VAC 32VAC RTN 15VAC 15VAC RTN 11VAC 11VAC RTN 24VAC 24VAC RTN
AY51-005
AY51-012-1
AY40-007T A5 FILAMENT.BD.
J1
A9P6
J10
4.
A20,A1P2
MA RTN MA SENSE ANODE RTN CATH RTN ANODE FDBK CATH FDBK
AY40-005T A6, POWER SUPPLY BD.
J6
X-RAY ON RTN X-RAY ON
C1 COULD CHANGE DEPENDING ON TUBE
NON DIGITAL GENERATOR USE AY40-061T.
BLACK (16AWG) WHITE (16AWG)
AY51-021
3.
AY51-062 IS REPLACED WITH AY51-008 AND
A20,A1P5
AY51-017
1 2 3
C3, C6 1uF/1500V, C4,C7 .5uF/1500V C5 AND C8 ARE NOT INSTALLED
C2A
440V
AY51-017
X - RAY ON
TB5
C9 THRU C16, 2400uF/450VDC.
2.
AY51-090 IS REPLACED WITH AY51-048.
J2 A20,A1P1
SHLD
J1
J2
WALL
1.5KE68CA
A17 AY20-031 HV MODULE
1.
Q-HSS DIGITAL GENERATOR ONLY, Q-HSS
J5
J1
J6
A6P1
RECEPTOR
T.S.-2
BASE)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J2
A9P2
GROUND 24 VDC RTN 24 VDC BUCKY READY
DIGITAL
T.S.-1
2- T.S.
CONTROL BD. A20, A1
BRN RED ORN YEL GRN BLU VIO GRY WHT BLK
VA -
220V OUT 0 VAC OUT 115 VAC 0VAC
A20,A1P4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2.4K
BLUE
A8P1
VA+/2.4K
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
1 2 3 4
1 BUCKY 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
115 VAC BUCKY W. ON 115 VAC RTN
TB8
BLK BLK
5 2 3 4 1 6 7 8
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
24VRTN K2 24V K2 24VRTN K3 24V K3
A9TB8
WHT/BLK BLACK/RED WHT/BLK BLACK/RED WHT (20AWG) WHT (16AWG) BLK (20AWG) BLK (16AWG)
J5
4 3 2 1
RED
BLK BLK PHASE C
WALL
TO
INNER- PHASE
1- T.S.
6- T.S.
7.
AY40-035S HSS
A2P6
TO
TB4
10 BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
J6
AY51-007
BLUE
PHASE B
A8P6
RED
PHASE N. PHASE A
PHASE C,IN PHASE A,IN
J4 J3
220V IN 0V IN
1 2
6 5 2 1 3 4
3- PHASE
5- T.S.
C2B 12uF
9
AY51-013
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
AY51-022-3P
AY51-009-3P
WHITE(20AWG) BLACK(20AWG) BLUE(20AWG) RED(20AWG) RED/GREEN YELLOW/WHITE ORN/BLK BRN/YEL
J3
8 3 10 5 1 6 7 2 4 9
G2 E2
BUCKY READY
GRN/YEL (16AWG)
A8P3
J7 J6
TB7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
10
(SEE NOTE 4)
A5P1
A9TB7
TABLE
TB4 PREP 1 PREP 2 RECP. RDY PREP RDY 1 PREP RDY 2 EXPOSE 1 EXPOSE 2 DR RDY RAD HV ON 1 HV ON 2 24VDC 24VDC RTN
A20,A2P4
A
RECEPTOR
3- PHASE
1(SEE NOTE 3) 2 3 4 5
TB3
J4
J3
DIGITAL
CENTER- MAIN
WHT/BLK BLACK/RED
J4
A20,A2P2
A20,A1P3
PA2
GRN/YEL
TB2
1 BUCKY 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CH. GND GND
17 18
LINE LOAD
LOAD GND LINE
FLT
TABLE
TB3 115 VAC BUCKY W. ON 115 VAC RTN
19 20
EMI
12
TO
PA1
C
WHT FIL.COM. RED FIL. SMALL
6
+15VDC GROUND
PC1 PC2
TO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
FIL. SHLD BLK FIL. L.
5
COLL. READY
BLU VIO GRY WHT
BRN RED ORN YEL GRN BLU VIO GRY WHT
4
STAND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
YEL
4- MAIN
MODEL AND MANUFACTURER. (SEE TUBE DATA
AY51-141 (2X)
C4 C3
TB3 PREP 1 PREP 2 RECP. RDY PREP RDY 1 PREP RDY 2 EXPOSE 1 EXPOSE 2 DR RDY RAD HV ON 1 HV ON 2 24VDC 24VDC RTN
(SEE NOTE 2)
C6
A1P10
220
TB2 24 VDC 24 VDC RTN
A9P8 BRN
OUTER- COMM.
2- MAIN
C1 25uF/440V
J2
A20,A2P1
DUNLEE
A20,A2P3 3 2 1
ANODE
(4X)
5- COMM.
NOTES:
J3
DRIVER BD. A20, A2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3
15 7
TO TUBE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TB4
AY40-036S HSS
1
POWER MODULE
BLU FDBK GRN RTN RED FDBK BRN RTN ORN RTN YEL FDBK SHLD 7
120
380
10 11
A18
YEL
7 285
9
60 80
1 2 2A
1 2 3
24 VAC COLL. 24 VAC RTN GROUND
32VAC 0VAC 16VAC 0VAC 11VAC 0VAC 24VAC 0VAC 24VAC 0VAC 7VAC 0VAC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
TO COLL.
TB1 J1
2
A18R1
BLU VIO GRY WHT
6
240
0
BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
TB2
A18QA
1
AY51-090 SEE NOTE 6
T1
8 16
PHASE C
4 5 5A
8 (3X)
A9P1 32VAC 0VAC 16VAC 0VAC 11VAC 0VAC 24VAC
-
C16
C7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3
0VAC
AY51-016
9
T1
7 AY51-078
T2
-
AY51-128
J3
220VAC
1 2 3 4
7
3
J7
BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE
2
VARIAN
1- COMM.
A20,A2TB2
A20,A2TB1
TB1
J1
A9J8
24VAC 0VAC 0VAC 7VAC 0VAC
240 220 220 220 220
6
INCOM. LINE INCOM. LINE
(SEE NOTE 8)
5
BLK (10AWG) BLK (10AWG) BLK (8AWG)
A9P7
2
4
CATHODE
AY51-141 (2X)
0 1 198 208
A19
+3 A18C2
A18QB
DB1
BRN
4
C15
~ -
1
POWER MODULE
+
A18C1
3
~
2
A19QA
1
SEE MANUAL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3
-
A18,A1P5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2
208
-
A19QB
C12
PHASE B
198
3
A19C2
2
1
220
2
A19C1
A+
AY20-047
~ +
A19R1
0
6
1
+3
AY51-065
AY51-072 (X2)
+
C14
AY51-079
+
DB2
D3 1N4005
AY51-127
220 220 5 220
(4X)
~ -
285
3
+
K1
C11
~
1 2
AY51-072 (2X)
C-
1 2 3 4
BD, ANODE
+
10 9
5A
1N4005
~ +
7
7
(6X)
4
6
8
6
PHASE A
4 5
C13
J5
CONNECTION
+
AY51-079 8
T1
3
220 5 5A
208
240
AY51-075
3
5
7 10
2 1
D1
9
K3
2
285
BRN BLU ORN
D2 1N4005
AY20-146 R8, R9 R10 3.3/50W ALUM.
BRN BLU ORN
5
3 4
6
7
9 10
2 1
8
RED YELLOW
K2
198
J9 J8
C10
5
(3X)
+
OHM 50W
E1 G1
440VAC
6
IGBT DRIVE
AY20-047
G2 E2
4
3
1 2 3 4
A19,A1P5
AY51-080
3.15A SB
NEUTRAL 0 1
AY51-065
N L4
C9
+
C L3
J5
BD,CATHODE R3 A,B 50 OHM 50W R4 A,B 50
F2 WHT BLK16AWG
B L2
AY51-088
RED YELLOW
IGBT DRIVE
440VAC
(SEE NOTE 1)
3.15A SB
AY51-066
F1 BLK16AWG WHT16AWG
LINE
LINE
AY51-007
A L1
LOAD
LINE
LOAD
CB1
50 AMP/3P
LOAD
GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG) GRN/YEL (10AWG) GRN/YEL (16AWG)
TB1
FOR ROTOR
TOSHIBA
+
WHITE BLACK BLUE RED
AY51-058 (3X)
CHART #1
GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG)
_
GROUND TO HV TANK
AY51-090 (SEE NOTE 6)
AY51-062 (SEE NOTE 5) BLACK (20AWG) WHITE (20AWG) BLACK YELLOW/GREEN WHITE BROWN BLACK/RED YELLOW/WHITE
SC50-072T REV. C
GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG)
Figure 6-25. Three-Phase (208-240) Input (50 kW with QMI High Speed Starter and Tomography Interface) X-ray Generator Interconnection Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-32
Chapter 6 Diagrams
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A8P2
J3 J2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A6P3
INTERLOCK
TB6 1 2
DOOR DOOR RTN
X - RAY ON
TB5 1 2
X-RAY ON X-RAY ON RTN
AY40-061T
(SEE NOTE 5) A9, INTERFACE BD.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
J4
VC-
AY40-053S2 A8, LINE MONITOR BD.
A8P4
ROTOR CABLE ORANGE GREEN 1 2 TEMP. TEMP.
MAIN
A20 A2TB3
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
BROWN RED ORANGE YELLOW GREEN BLACK AY51-131
BLACK
A20,A2TB4
RED
WHITE
BLACK
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 RED
AY51-146
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AY51-015
BRN RED ORN YEL GRN BLU VIO GRY WHT
ADJUST THESE JUMPERS TO THE NEAREST INCOMING AC LINE INPUT.
AY51-145
1 2 3
J10
A1P4
J8
RS 232 MASTER PORT
24VDC 24VDC RTN 28VDC GROUND BUCKY TABLE BUCKY WALL PREP COLLIMATOR READY BUCKY T. READY BUCKY W. READY DOOR INTERLOCK SPARE TABLE RDY K1, 24VDC EXPOSE PREP RDY 7VAC RTN 7VAC 15VDC GROUND
V SENSE A V SENSE C GROUND 28VDC AUTO SHUT OFF SYSTEM ON 28VDC MAG. 28VDC MAG. RTN MISSING PHASE FAULT RESET NOT USED NOT USED
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
AY40-006S A1, CPU BD. (LOGIC BD.)
J1
A2P7 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J9 OCP ON RS-485 RS-485 EXP. PREP 28VDC GND 28VDC GND J5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J4 1 2 3 4 5
A2P5
A1P5
J8 GROUND +18 VDC OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
J3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A2P4
A11P1
A1P3
A11P4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
J5 15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 1
1 2 3
J7 GROUND +18 VDC OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
AY40-003S A2, KVP BD. A2P8
A1P9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
J5
EL68-007 OPTIONAL POWER SUPPLY (28VDC/8 AMP)
A11P2 J2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J1 J4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
P1-L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
P1-N
A11P5 J1
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
J3 28VDC 28VDC RTN
J2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J11
J4
1 2 3 4
SHIELD
A1P8
RS 232 SLAVE PORT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
A2P1
SHIELD
A1P1
BLK (16AWG) WHT (16AWG) GRN/YEL (16AWG)
FILAMENT BD. GROUND
5 380V BLK
1 0V BLK 2 60V BLK 2A 80V BLK 3 120V BLK 4 220V BLK A18,A1P5
G2 E2
C4 C3
C5
1 2 3 4 5
X - RAY ON
A1P2 BROWN (22 AWG) RED (22 AWG) ORANGE (22 AWG) YELLOW (22 AWG) GREEN (22 AWG) BLUE (22 AWG) VIOLET (20 AWG) GREY (20 AWG) WHITE (22 AWG) BLACK (22 AWG) BLACK/ORANGE (22 AWG) WHITE/BROWN (22 AWG)
DOOR GROUND
16 14
AY51-021
A1P3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
BLACK (16AWG) WHITE (16AWG)
AY51-017
BLACK/RED WHT/BLK
AY51-011
FOR SYSTEMS OTHER THAN RS-580 CONSULT RESPECTIVE MANUALS
9.
AY51-017
RED GREEN/YELLOW BLACK GREEN/YELLOW BLUE VIOLET WHITE WHITE/BLACK YELLOW/WHITE BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE BLUE/YELLOW GREY GREEN/BROWN BROWN GREEN RED/GREEN ORANGE/BLACK BROWN/YELLOW GREEN/ORANGE
AY51-012-1
USE CABLE AY51-151 CABLE FOR INTERFACING TO RS-580 SYSTEM: - CONNECT WIRES FROM P81-7,-8 TO P2-1 - CONNECT WIRES FROM P81-4,-5 TO P2-2 - CONNECT WIRE FROM P81-4 TO GND - CONNECT WIRE FROM P81-1 INTERFACE BOARD A9TB1-2 - CONNECT WIRE FROM P81-2 TO INTERFACE BOARD A9TB1-1 - CONNECT WIRE FROM P81-3 TO INTERFACE BOARD A9TB1-3
A20,A1P2
(SEE NOTE 7)
WALL
AY40-062T D. R. CONFIGURATION (SEE NOTE 5)
AY51-008
50 KW GENERATOR STANDARD HV MODULE IS AY30-031 125 KV
RECEPTOR
AY51-047-1
2.4K
GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG)
A9P6
C0MM.
J2 J1
J4 J3
J7 J6
J9 J8 G2 E2
E1 G1
E1 G1
+
AY51-080
(SEE NOTE 1)
+
J2 J1
J4 J3
E1 G1
G2 E2
32VAC 32VAC RTN 15VAC 15VAC RTN 11VAC 11VAC RTN 24VAC 24VAC RTN
A6P2
VC+/2.4K
R1A, R1B R2A, R2B 1.2K/50W
J6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DOOR 48VDC 48VDC 48VDCRTN 48VDCRTN 28VDC 28VDC 28VDCRTN 28VDCRTN 15VDC 15VDCRTN
2.4K VA -
AY51-005 WHITE (16AWG) BLACK (16AWG) BLUE VIOLET RED BROWN/YELLOW BLUE/YELLOW BLACK/RED
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ONLY, NON AEC GENERATORS USE
A20 Q-HSS AY20-177
J2
A20,A1P1
AY51-019-2 IS USED FOR AEC OPTION AY51-019-1
A11P3
J3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
P2-1
P2-2 1
A8P5
J1 32VAC 32VAC RTN 15VAC 15VAC RTN 11VAC 11VAC RTN 24VAC 24VAC RTN
NON DIGITAL GENERATOR USE AY40-061T. TO GROUND OR TO MAS METER)
1
AY40-005T A6, POWER SUPPLY BD.
X-RAY ON RTN X-RAY ON
AY40-062T INTERFACE BOARD IS USED ON
C2B 12uF 440V
AEC TABLE
BLK
J2
A9P2
5.
CONNECTED
(SEE NOTE 8)
A5P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J1 BLK L RED S WHT C GROUND
48VDC 48VDCRTN
J2
GRN/YEL
A16P1
AY51-018-XX
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TECHVISION, AY10-009 T. RAD PLUS
J2
A6P1
DISCONNECT A17P1-9,-10 AND CONNECT THE MAS METER TO THESE WIRES. (WARNING A17P1-9 AND -10 MUST BE
6.
TECHVISION, AY10-009-1 T. RAD PLUS
VA+/2.4K
BLK BLK
5 2 3 4 1 6 7 8
TB5
AY20-032 HV MODULE
4.
C2A 12uF 440V
AY10-005 ODYSSEY, AY10-005-1 ODYSSEY
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
GROUND 24 VDC RTN 24 VDC BUCKY READY
DIGITAL
C1 VALUE COULD CHANGE DEPENDING ON
Q-HSS DIGITAL GENERATOR ONLY, Q-HSS
TO OCP ASSEMBLY AY10-004 QUEST
J1
BLUE
RED
220V OUT 0 VAC OUT 115 VAC 0VAC
TO
3.
A20,A1P5
AEC WALL 1
J6 24VRTN K2 24V K2 24VRTN K3 24V K3
AY51-009-3P
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4
115 VAC BUCKY W. ON 115 VAC RTN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
C3, C4, C6 AND C7 1uF/1500VAC C5 AND C8, .5 uF/1500V DO NOT INSTALL C4 AND C7 IN 50KW GENERATORS
8.
AEC WALL 2
J5
4 3 2 1
AY51-007
TB8
A9TB8
1 BUCKY
PREP 1 PREP 2 RECP. RDY PREP RDY 1 PREP RDY 2 EXPOSE 1 EXPOSE 2 DR RDY RAD HV ON 1 HV ON 2 24VDC 24VDC RTN
C9 THRU C16, 2400uF/450VDC
2.
J6
PHASE C
WALL
TB4
10 BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
PHASE B
A8P6
A8P1
PHASE N. PHASE A
BLK
AY51-022-3P
PHASE C,IN PHASE A,IN
TB4
TO
J3
8 3 10 5 1 6 7 2 4 9
CH. GND GND BUCKY READY
GND
EMI FLT
A8P3
220V IN 0V IN
11
LINE LOAD
GRN/YEL (16AWG)
1 2
17 18
A17
1.
7.
AY40-035S HSS CONTROL BD. A20, A1 J1
CENTER- MAIN
TUBE DATA BASE)
WHT/BLK BLACK/RED
1 2 3 4 5 6
INCOM. LINE INCOM. LINE
LOAD LINE
12
1.5KE68CA
T.S.-2
J5
MA RTN MA SENSE ANODE RTN ANODE FDBK CATH RTN CATH FDBK
19 20
11
TB7
A9TB7
J1
2- T.S.
2 3 4 5
J4
J3
9
6 5 2 1 3 4
TABLE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
6
5
BUCKY
10
(SEE NOTE 4)
RECEPTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
380
TABLE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DIGITAL
AY51-013 BRN 1 RED 2 ORN 3 YEL 4 GRN 5 BLU 6 VIO 7 GRY 8 WHT 9 BLK 10
480
10
285
TO
TB3 115 VAC BUCKY W. ON 115 VAC RTN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
AY51-023
4
+15VDC GROUND
PREP 1 PREP 2 RECP. RDY PREP RDY 1 PREP RDY 2 EXPOSE 1 EXPOSE 2 DR RDY RAD HV ON 1 HV ON 2 24VDC 24VDC RTN
T.S.-1
C1 25uF/440V 1 (SEE NOTE 3)
A20,A2P4
A20,A1P4
A20,A1P3
A
AY51-012-1
3
220
2 3 4 5 6 7
COLL. READY
C
TO
TB3
GRN/YEL
120
24 VDC 24 VDC RTN
PA2
15
6 7
9
1 STAND
PA1
WHT FIL.COM. RED FIL. SMALL
440
7
TUBE
PC1 PC2
8
5
1 2 2A
TO
TB2
BLU VIO GRY WHT
FIL. SHLD BLK FIL. L.
415
15 0 60 80
32VAC 0VAC 16VAC 0VAC 11VAC 0VAC 24VAC 0VAC 24VAC 0VAC 7VAC 0VAC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
YEL
1- T.S.
TUBE MANUFACTURER OR MODEL, (SEE
3 2 1
J4
J2 A20,A2P2
A20,A2P1
RED BRN ORN YEL GRN BLU VIO GRY WHT
(SEE NOTE 9)
8
4
BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
WHT/BLK BLACK/RED WHT/BLK BLACK/RED WHT (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) WHT (20AWG) BLK (20AWG)
RED (20AWG) YELLOW (20AWG)
7
3
32VAC 32VAC RTN 16VAC 16VAC RTN 11VAC
1 2 3
24 VAC COLL. 24 VAC RTN GROUND
J1
J1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
220 380
6
T1
4
A9P1 8 16
PHASE C
2
TB1
9
TO COLL.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2)
BLU FDBK GRN RTN RED FDBK BRN RTN ORN RTN GRN FDBK SHLD 7
1
J3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
NOTE
C6
BLU VIO GRY WHT
0
T2
0VAC
J8
GRN
7
1 2 3 4
AY51-016 BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE
1 2 3
C7
INNER- PHASE
5- T.S.
A20,A2P3
J3
TB3
AY51-141 (2X)
A9P8 BRN
AY51-089
3
6
480
220VAC
BRN
2
AY51-128(8X)
J7
TB4
AY40-036S HSS DRIVER BD. A20, A2
ANODE
(SEE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5
PHASE B
415 440
1
AY51-071 (3X)
4
5
BLUE
POWER MODULE
C8
A9P7
11VAC RTN 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC RTN 24VAC RTN 7VAC 7VAC RTN
TB2
380
BLK (10AWG) BLK (10AWG) BLK (8AWG)
BLK (10AWG)
T1
4
AY51-069 (3X)
3
5 8
6
7
9 10
2 1
K3
WHITE(20AWG) BLACK(20AWG) BLUE(20AWG) RED(20AWG) RED/GREEN YELLOW/WHITE ORN/BLK BRN/YEL
A18
CATHODE
AY51-141(2X)
1N4005
RED
1
A18R1
POWER MODULE
PHASE
+
A19
TB2
3- PHASE
1 2 3 4 5 6
3
1
A19R1
1N4005
TB1
4- MAIN
3- PHASE
NOTES:
A20,A2TB2
A20,A2TB1
2
A18QA
OUTER- COMM.
2- MAIN
6- T.S.
AY40-031S A11, AEC BD. (OPTIONAL)
2
-
A18QB
1
1
+
A18C2
-
AY51-020
220 285
2
DUNLEE
5- COMM.
(SEE NOTE 6)
1
DB1
A19QA
+
A18C1
AY51-019-2
0
C16
VARIAN
1- COMM.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
7
A19QB
AY51-065
~ -
2
A1P6
480
D3
-
A5P2
6
C12
DB2
~
A19C2
-
2
SEE MANUAL
3
A5, FILAMENT CONTROL BD. AY40-007T
440
+
A19C1
3
A
BROWN RED ORANGE YELLOW GREEN BLUE VIOLET GREY WHITE BLK WHT/BRN WHT/RED WHT/ORN WHT/YEL AY51-130
5
K1
AY51-065
C15
C-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
415
4
~ -
+
380
C11
~
1 2
AY51-079
AY51-066
10 9
AY51-127 (4X)
~ +
+3
1 2 3 4
AY20-047
+
3
C14
+
2
285
T1 PHASE A
D2
220
3 AY51-066
BRN BRN BLU BLU ORN ORN AY20-146 R8, R9 R10 3.3/50W ALUM.
5
3 4
6
7 8
2 1
10
9
K2
J7 J6
J9 J8
C10 AY51-079
7
J5
IGBT DRIVE BD, ANODE
C13
AY51-073 (2X)
G2 E2
+
AY51-073 (2X)
~ +
8
1 2 3 4
AY20-047
E1 G1
6 5
1
(SEE NOTE 1)
3
N L4
AY51-068(3X) 0
C9
50W
AY51-080
440VAC
4
+
LOAD
3.15A SB
F2
AY25-001
J5
IGBT DRIVE BD,CATHODE
R3 A,B 50 OHM 50W R4 A,B 50 OHM
WHT BLK
BLK16AWG WHT16AWG
TB1
LINE
LINE
LINE LOAD
CB1
50 AMP/3P
LOAD
GRN/YEL (16AWG) GRN/YEL (10AWG) GRN/YEL (16AWG)
B L2 C L3
A19,A1P5
TOSHIBA
+
A L1
3.15A SB
F1
AY51-007
WHITE BLACK BLUE RED 440VAC
SEE TUBE CHART #1 FOR ROTOR CONNECTION
_
AY51-074 (3X)
GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG)
+
GROUND TO HV TANK
D1 1N4005
X-RAY TUBE ROTOR CONNECTION CHART #1
X-RAY TUBE
MAIN GROUND STUD
SC50-057T REV. C
GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG)
1 2 3
NOT USED TIE BACK
Figure 6-26. Three-Phase (65 and 80 kW with QMI High Speed Starter) X-ray Generator Interconnection Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-33
Chapter 6 Diagrams
J1
J1 32VAC 32VAC RTN 15VAC 15VAC RTN 11VAC 11VAC RTN 24VAC 24VAC RTN
A8P5
VA+/2.4K 2.4K VA -
J2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A8P2
VC+/2.4K
48VDC 48VDC 48VDCRTN 48VDCRTN 28VDC 28VDC 28VDCRTN 28VDCRTN 15VDC 15VDCRTN
J3 J2
2.4K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A6P3
AY51-005
1 WHITE (16AWG) 2 BLACK (16AWG) 3 VIOLET 4 BLUE 5 RED 6 BROWN/YELLOW 7 BLUE/YELLOW 8 BLACK/RED DOOR INTERLOCK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2
TB6 DOOR DOOR RTN
X - RAY ON
TB5 1 2
X-RAY ON RTN X-RAY ON (SEE NOTE 5) AY40-061T A9, INTERFACE BD.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
RED YELLOW/GREEN BLACK YELLOW/GREEN BLUE VIOLET WHITE WHITE/BLACK YELLOW/WHITE BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE BLUE/YELLOW GREY GREEN/BROWN BROWN GREEN RED/GREEN ORANGE/BLACK BROWN/YELLOW GREEN/ORANGE AY51-062 (SEE NOTE 6)
BLUE
BLUE
A8P4
MONITOR BD.
BROWN (22 AWG) RED (22 AWG) ORANGE (22 AWG) YELLOW (22 AWG) GREEN (22 AWG) BLUE (22 AWG) VIOLET (20 AWG) GREY (20 AWG) WHITE (22 AWG) BLACK (22 AWG) BLACK/ORANGE (22 AWG) WHITE/BROWN (22 AWG)
V SENSE A V SENSE C GROUND 24VDC AUTO SHUT OFF SYSTEM ON 24VDC MAG. 24VDC MAG. RTN MISSING PHASE FAULT RESET NOT USED NOT USED
AY40-006S A1, CPU BD. (LOGIC BD.)
J1
1 2 3 4 5 6
AY51-062 (SEE NOTE 6)
A1P12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A B J7
A2P8 1 2 3 4 5
A1P9
J8
ORANGE GREEN
A20,A2TB4
1 2
WHITE
RED
BLACK
TEMP. TEMP.
C0MM.
MAIN
PHASE
A20 A2TB3
1 2 3 4 5 6
BROWN RED ORANGE YELLOW GREEN BLACK AY51-131 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
BLACK
RED
GROUND 18 VDC OUTPUT A OUTPUT B J4
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J3
A2P5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
GRN/YEL (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) WHT (16AWG)
AY51-012-1
BROWN RED ORANGE YELLOW GREEN BLUE VIOLET GREY WHITE BLK WHT/BRN WHT/RED WHT/ORN WHT/YEL AY51-130
1 2 3 4 5
OCP ON RS-485 RS-485 EXP. PREP 28VDC GND 28VDC GND J5
GND 18VDC
A2P7
A1P5
J12
FILAMENT BD. GROUND
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
E1 G1
FOR SYSTEMS OTHER THAN RS-580 CONSULT RESPECTIVE MANUALS
J5
AY40-003S A2, KVP BD. J6
A1P1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3
A11P8
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A2P4
J10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A11P11
J8
AEC TABLE
AEC WALL 1
J12
AEC WALL 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J13
J11
AUX. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TB10 AY40-027S A11, UNIVERSAL AEC BD. (OPTIONAL)
A11P9
TOMO TABLE
1 2 3 4 5 6
TB12
J9
WALL STAND
A11TB1 1 2 3 4
L BLK S RED C WHT GROUND
48VDC 48VDCRTN J1
TB1 300VDC
1 2 3 4 5 6
A11P1 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J7 TOMO SWEEP TIME
J1 J6
A11TB10 24VDC PREP EXPOSE BUCKY RDY 24VDCRTN GROUND A11TB12 24VDC PREP EXPOSE BUCKY RDY 24VDCRTN GROUND
.4S .6S .8S 1.2S 2S
P2-1
P2-2
(SEE NOTE 8)
A16P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A11TB11
TB11 A11P7
EL68-007 OPTIONAL POWER SUPPLY (28VDC/8 AMP)
A11P13
A2P3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
AY51-145
A11P12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
J2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ADJUST THESE JUMPERS TO THE NEAREST INCOMING AC LINE INPUT.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
G2 E2
AY51-146 J2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J9
28VDC 28VDC RTN
DOOR GROUND
GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG)
ROTOR CABLE
J2 J1
J4 J3
J7 J6
J9 J8
E1 G1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J11
J3 1 2 3 4
A1P2
AY51-011
AY40-053S2 A8, LINE
AY51-080
G2 E2
BLACK/RED WHT/BLK
SHLD
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
J4
A1P4
AY51-047-1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
24VDC 24VDC RTN 28VDC GROUND BUCKY TABLE BUCKY WALL PREP COLLIMATOR READY BUCKY T. READY BUCKY W. READY DOOR INTERLOCK SPARE TABLE RDY K1, 24VDC EXPOSE PREP RDY 0VAC 7.5VAC 15VDC GROUND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
A6P2
R1A, R1B R2A, R2B 1.2K/50W
AY51-066
RS 232 SLAVE PORT
USE CABLE AY51-151 CABLE FOR INTERFACING TO RS-580 SYSTEM: - CONNECT WIRES FROM P81-7,-8 TO P2-1 - CONNECT WIRES FROM P81-4,-5 TO P2-2 - CONNECT WIRE FROM P81-4 TO GND - CONNECT WIRE FROM P81-1 INTERFACE BOARD A9TB1-2 - CONNECT WIRE FROM P81-2 TO INTERFACE BOARD A9TB1-1 - CONNECT WIRE FROM P81-3 TO INTERFACE BOARD A9TB1-3
BLACK (16AWG) WHITE (16AWG)
A1P8
J8
RS 232 MASTER PORT
A9P6
A1P3
VC-
J4
SEE NOTE 1
+ + +
J10
AY40-062T D. R. CONFIGURATION (SEE NOTE 5)
J6
32VAC 32VAC RTN 15VAC 15VAC RTN 11VAC 11VAC RTN 28VAC 28VAC RTN
X-RAY ON RTN X-RAY ON
AY51-012-1
AY51-017
AY51-021
50 KW GENERATOR STANDARD HV MODULE IS AY30-031, 125 KV.
8.
9.
AY51-017
1 2 3
AY51-090 IS REPLACED WITH AY51-048.
P1-L
J2
TB5
NON DIGITAL GENERATOR WITH TOMO OPTION
P1-N
A9P2
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
GROUND 24 VDC RTN 24 VDC BUCKY READY
AY51-090 IS REPLACED WITH AY51-089.
1
AY40-005T A6, POWER SUPPLY BD.
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
A8P1
220V OUT 0 VAC OUT 115 VAC 0VAC
DIGITAL GENERATORS WITH NO TOMO OPTION AY51-062 IS REPLACED WITH AY51-008 AND
C2A 12uF 440V
1
BLK
A6P1
J6
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN
115 VAC BUCKY W. ON 115 VAC RTN
TB8
1 2 3 4
NON DIGITAL GENERATOR USE AY40-061T.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TO OCP ASSEMBLY AY10-004 QUEST AY10-005 ODYSSEY, AY10-005-1 ODYSSEY TECHVISION, AY10-009-1 T. RAD PLUS TECHVISION, AY10-009 T. RAD PLUS
AY51-018-XX GRN/YEL
GROUND
J5 A11P5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J5
A9TB8
1 BUCKY
(SEE NOTE 7)
Q-HSS DIGITAL GENERATOR ONLY, Q-HSS
6.
A20,A1P2
A11P6
PHASE C
10 BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
WHT/BLK BLACK/RED WHT/BLK BLACK/RED WHT (20AWG) WHT (16AWG) BLK (20AWG) BLK (20AWG)
PHASE B
TB4
BLK BLK
5 2 3 4 1 6 7 8
BLK
AY51-022-3P
PHASE N. PHASE A
WALL
WALL
A20,A1P1
A11P10
LOAD GND
GRN/YEL (16AWG)
RED
TO
LINE
RECEPTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TB2
DIGITAL
AY40-062T INTERFACE BOARD IS USED ON
A20 Q-HSS AY20-177
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BUCKY READY
A17 AY20-032 HV MODULE
5.
BRN RED ORN YEL GRN BLU VIO GRY WHT
CH. GND GND
220V IN 0V IN
TO
AY51-020
1 2
17 18
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
AY51-019-2
LOAD LINE
TB4 PREP 1 PREP 2 RECP. RDY PREP RDY 1 PREP RDY 2 EXPOSE 1 EXPOSE 2 DR RDY RAD HV ON 1 HV ON 2 24VDC 24VDC RTN
AY51-049
19 20
EMI FLT
115 VAC BUCKY W. ON 115 VAC RTN
TB7
A9TB7
DISCONNECT A17P1-9 AND -10 AND CONNECT THE MAS METER TO THESE WIRES. (WARNING A17P1-9 AND -10 MUST BE CONNECTED TO GROUND OR TO MAS METER.)
7.
J2
SHLD
4.
C2B 12uF 440V
J1 1.5KE68CA
A5P2
6
BUCKY
AY40-007T A5 FILAMENT.BD.
5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5 2 1 3 4
2 3 4 5
AY40-035S HSS CONTROL BD. A20, A1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
380
TABLE
TB3
6
A2P1
4
TO
9
C1 COULD CHANGE DEPENDING ON TUBE
J5
1 2 3 4 5 6
3
220
7
+15VDC GROUND
10
(SEE NOTE 4)
J1
1 2 2A
120
TABLE
3.
A20,A1P5
J4
J3
A
RECEPTOR
C1 25uF/440V 1 (SEE NOTE 3)
A20,A2P4
A20,A1P4
MA RTN MA SENSE ANODE RTN CATH RTN ANODE FDBK CATH FDBK
60 80
COLL. READY
DIGITAL
C9 THRU C16, 2400uF/450VDC. C3, C4, C6 AND C7 1uF/1500VAC, C5 AND C8 .5 uF/1500VAC. DO NOT INSTALL C4 AND C7 IN 50KW GENERATORS.
WHT/BLK BLACK/RED
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A20,A1P3
C
TO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
PA2
BRN RED ORN YEL GRN BLU VIO GRY WHT BLK
5
440
15 7
TB2 24 VDC 24 VDC RTN
TB3 PREP 1 PREP 2 RECP. RDY PREP RDY 1 PREP RDY 2 EXPOSE 1 EXPOSE 2 DR RDY RAD HV ON 1 HV ON 2 24VDC 24VDC RTN
PA1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
415
7
0
TO TUBE STAND
PC1 PC2
3 2 1
J4
A20,A2P2
AY51-015
6
4
J1 32VAC 0VAC 16VAC 0VAC 11VAC 0VAC 24VAC 0VAC 24VAC 0VAC 7VAC 0VAC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
BLU VIO GRY WHT
A2P6
380
BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG) BLK (16AWG)
YEL
1. 2.
BASE) A20,A2P3
J3
J2
A20,A2P1
AY51-013
5
32VAC 0VAC 16VAC 0VAC 11VAC 0VAC 24VAC
TO COLL. 1 2 3
A9P8 BRN
J1
A5P1
280
3
TB1 24 VAC COLL. 24 VAC RTN GROUND
AY51-141 (2X)
C4 C3
T.S.-2
MODEL AND MANUFACTURER. (SEE TUBE DATA
TB4
TB3
14
T1 PHASE C
220
2
480
2)
DUNLEE
NOTES:
A20,A2TB2
TB2
16
A9P1 8 16
0VAC
AY51-016
9
1 2 3
T.S.-1
2- T.S.
ANODE
15
1
NOTE
WHT FIL.COM. RED FIL. SMALL
0
220VAC
1 2 3 4
BLACK/RED GREY/WHITE
T2
J3
1- T.S.
6- T.S.
A+
AY40-036S HSS DRIVER BD. A20, A2
C5
GRN/YEL
2
(SEE
8
6 7
POWER MODULE
FIL. SHLD BLK FIL. L.
5
480
J3
A18 C8
YEL
415
T1 PHASE B
4
J7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5- T.S.
A18QA
C6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
INNER- PHASE
A20,A2TB1
2
1
C7
A9P7
3- PHASE
C-
A18R1
(8X)
A9J8 380
-
-
1
BLU VIO GRY WHT
3
A18C2
2
A18QB
AY51-141 (2X) AY51-128
11
RED
+
CATHODE
CENTER- MAIN
3- PHASE
CONNECTION
SEE MANUAL
AY51-023
+
POWER MODULE
OUTER- COMM.
4- MAIN
FOR ROTOR
TB1
C16
AY51-090 SEE NOTE 6
280
440
24VRTN K2 24V K2 24VRTN K3 24V K3
DB1
1
C12
A19
A18C1
BLU FDBK GRN RTN RED FDBK BRN RTN ORN RTN YEL FDBK SHLD 7
2
12
4 3 2 1
E1 G1
G2 E2
E1 G1
A19R1
BRN
220
10 11
A8P6
~ -
1
1
PHASE C,IN PHASE A,IN
~
2
A19QA
BLK (10AWG) BLK (10AWG) BLK (8AWG)
9
8 3 10 5 1 6 7 2 4 9
J2 J1
J4 J3
J7 J6
J9 J8 AY51-066
+
-
+3
BRN RED ORN YEL GRN BLU VIO GRY WHT
7
-
+
3
A1P10
6
4
A8P3
~ + C15
5- COMM.
2- MAIN
A18,A1P5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
440 480
DB2 AY51-073 (X2)
2
A19QB 1
AY51-065
5
D3 1N4005
415
C11
~
1 2
~ (4X)
4
9
K1 AY51-127
380
3
(SEE NOTE 9)
+3 A19C2
3
1 2 3 4
VARIAN
1- COMM.
CHART #1
AY20-047
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
(4X)
AY51-069
4
3
0
8
INCOM. LINE INCOM. LINE
2 280
24VAC 0VAC 0VAC 7VAC 0VAC
RED YELLOW
AY51-071 (3X)
1N4005
+
A19C1
C14
AY51-079
10
3
5 6
9
7 8
2 1
D1
10
K3
AY51-073 (2X)
J5
IGBT DRIVE BD, ANODE
C13
AY20-047
~ +
7
1 2 3 4
AY51-065
AY51-079 8
NEUTRAL 1
T1 PHASE A
BRN BLU ORN BRN BLU ORN
D2
AY20-146 R8, R9 R10 3.3/50W ALUM.
3 4
6
5
7 8
10
2 1
K2
9
RED YELLOW
220
0
+
C10
5
1N4005
AY51-009-3P
440VAC
6
AY51-068
WHITE(20AWG) BLACK(20AWG) BLUE(20AWG) RED(20AWG) RED/GREEN YELLOW/WHITE ORN/BLK BRN/YEL
4
3
J5
A19,A1P5
G2 E2
3.15A SB
C9 (SEE NOTE 1)
N L4
R3 A,B 50 OHM 50W R4 A,B 50 OHM 50W
AY51-080
C L3
F2 WHT BLK16AWG
B L2
(4X)
AY51-007
IGBT DRIVE BD,CATHODE
440VAC
3.15A SB
+
F1
BLK16AWG WHT16AWG
LINE
LINE
AY51-007
A L1
LOAD
LINE
LOAD
CB1
50 AMP/3P
LOAD
GRN/YEL (16AWG) GRN/YEL (10AWG) GRN/YEL (16AWG)
TB1
TOSHIBA
SEE TUBE
+
WHITE BLACK BLUE RED
AY51-074 (3X)
1 0 VAC BLK 2 60 VAC BLK 2A 80 VAC BLK 3 120 VAC BLK 4 220 VAC BLK
GREEN/YELLOW (10AWG)
X-RAY TUBE
_
GROUND TO HV TANK
5 380 VAC BLK
X-RAY TUBE ROTOR CONNECTION CHART # 1 MAIN GROUND STUD
AY51-090 (SEE NOTE 6)
BLACK (20AWG) WHITE (20AWG) BLACK YELLOW/GREEN WHITE BROWN BLACK/RED YELLOW/WHITE
GREEN/YELLOW (16AWG)
SC50-058T REV. C
Figure 6-27. Three-Phase (65 and 80 kW with QMI High Speed Starter and Tomography Interface) X-ray Generator Interconnection Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-34
Chapter 6 Diagrams
AY10-004 OCP QUEST OR AY10-005 OCP ODYSSEY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A16,A1P7
AY51-025
A16,A1P1
RED
AY51-084
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
BLACK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
AY20-158 2
3
LCD DISPLAY (QUEST)
EL31-005
A16A2
J1
J2
A16,A1P2
2K 5
1
A16,R1
LCD DISPLAY ADJUSTMENT POT
J8
AY51-026 BRN (22AWG) ORN (22AWG) RED (22AWG) YEL (22AWG)
ON/OFF SWITCH ASSY.
A16,A1P4
1 2 3
RS 232
A16,A1P6 J4
1
AY51-042
J6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A16,A1P8
GENERATOR PROGRAM (Q-WANE)
RS 232
A16J2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
2
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
AY40-004S1 OCP MICROPROCESSOR, A16A1
J3
A16,A1P3
A16J1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J5
2A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
AY51-041
FROM GENERATOR
SERIAL COMM.
GRN/YEL
J7
1 2 3 4
EL31-004
LCD DISPLAY (ODYSSEY)
TB1 PREP EXPOSE COMM. GROUND
1 2 3 4
A16A2
A16
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A16,A1P5
AY50-002 FRONT PANEL A16A3 (ODYSSEY) AY50-001 FRONT PANEL (QUEST)
SC50-070 REV. A
Figure 6-28. Operator Control Panel - ODYSSEY/ QUEST Wiring Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-35
J8 RS 232 SLAVE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J3 28VDC 28VDC RTN 28VDC T.V. 28VDC RTN J2 V SENSE A V SENSE C GROUND 28VDC AUTO SHUT OFF SYSTEM ON 28VDC MAG. 28VDC MAG.RTN MISSING PHASE FAULT RESET NOT USED NOT USED
J11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2 EXPOSE
1
RED
2
GREEN WHITE
HAND SWITCH ITE COMPUTER SYSTEM
A1P9
J1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AY40-073S A1A1, OCP INTERFACE J2
J4
L-COM MODULAR 6 JACK P1 J1 1 2 3 4 5 6
A1P1
PREP BLUE EXPOSE YELLOW +28V GREEN Gnd RED GENERATOR ON BEEP/PWRSWITCH
1 2
SW1
DISPLAY
2.4k 1/2W R3
3 4
POWER SWITCH
R1 750 ohm 1W
R2 1.5k 0.5W
J5
P/O Q-CONNECT OPTION AY10-029
1 2 3 4 5 6
BLACK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
WHITE
15VDC 15VDC 15VDC RTN 15VDC RTN -15VDC -15VDC RTN 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC RTN 24VDC RTN J9
Vz=13V Pz=5W D1
COMPUTER D2 POWER LED
ETHERNET
1 2 3 4
24VDC 24VDC RTN 28VDC GROUND BUCKY TABLE BUCKY WALL PREP COLLIMATOR READY BUCKY T. READY BUCKY W. READY DOOR INTERLOCK SPARE TABLE RDY K1, 24VDC EXPOSE PREP RDY 7VAC RTN 7VAC 15VDC AY40-006S GROUND A1, CPU BD. (LOGIC BD.)
PORT
PREP
BLACK
AY51-243-XXX
RS 232 MASTER PORT
J4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
SW 2 1
SEE NOTE 2
J10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Chapter 6 Diagrams
Vin+ GND
B1 AI-550AS/TRIP-80PS
TO HOSPITAL LAN
J1
AY20-271 P/O Q-CONNECT OPTION AY10-029
ETHERNET SWITCH
TECHVISION (OPTION) ETHERNET J2 EL75-058-XXX
EL75-058-XXX
J3
ETHERNET
SEE NOTE 2 AY51-244-XX SEE NOTE 2 PART OF GENERATOR SC50-090 REV. A NOTES: 1.
2.
THIS BLOCK DIAGRAM SHOWS ONLY CONNECTIONS OF AY40-006S FOR Q-CONNECT OPTION. THE REST OF THE CONNECTIONS OF AY40-006S ARE SHOWN IN GENERATORS BLOCK DIAGRAM. EMI SUPPRESSION FERRITE CABLE SNAP ITS (1) X EL54-012 + (1) X EL54-013
Figure 6-29. Q-Connect Interconnection Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Option
System
Revision W
6-36
Chapter 6 Diagrams
Figure 6-30. Operator Control Panel Circuit Block Diagram (Non-Q-VISION OCP)
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-37
Chapter 6 Diagrams
Figure 6-31. Generator Logic Circuit Block Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-38
Chapter 6 Diagrams
Figure 6-32. Filament Regulator Control Circuit Block Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-39
Chapter 6 Diagrams
Figure 6-33. KVP & Filament Control Circuit Block Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-40
Chapter 6 Diagrams
Figure 6-34. Single-Phase (Non-STORED ENERGY) and Three-Phase Line Monitor Circuit Block Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-41
Chapter 6 Diagrams
-15VDC
+15VDC
BATTERY+ VOLTAGE
AMPLIFIER
.
CHARGER .
200VAC IN
U1A
DIODE
.
.
ON
CHARGER (+) OUTPUT TRIAC
BRIDGE .
V SENSE (V+)
AMPLIFIER
BATTERY+ VOLTAGE RTN
FROM OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL CIRCUIT
.
AMPLIFIER
.
.
.
U1B
.
RELAY .
OVERVOLT FAULT
FROM LOGIC CIRCUIT
TO LOGIC CIRCUIT
AMPLIFIER .
.
ON
CONTROL CIRCUIT . TURN-OFF
D12
.
+15VDC
DELAY CIRCUIT
1N4148 FROM CAPACITOR BANK
.
DELAY CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT .
U1C U1D
CHARGING TURN-ON
SYSTEM SYSTEM ON .
TO BATTERY PACK
ADJUSTABLE REF
-15VDC
D15 OVERVOLT FAULT . AMPLIFIER BATTERY- VOLTAGE
AMPLIFIER
.
.
TO LOGIC CIRCUIT
1N4148
U4D
U4A . AMPLIFIER
V SENSE (V-)
U4B
.
TO LOGIC CIRCUIT CHARGER 200VAC IN
BATTERY- VOLTAGE RTN
.
AMPLIFIER
.
DIODE
.
.
ON
CHARGER (-) OUTPUT TRIAC
BRIDGE RELAY .
U4C
.
+24VDC
CHARGING TURN-ON .
.
CONTROL
FROM LOGIC CIRCUIT
AUTO SHUTOFF
CIRCUIT .
CIRCUIT SHUTOFF
TURN-OFF .
RELAY . FROM OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL CIRCUIT
.
DELAY
AUTO
.
SYSTEM ON/OFF
DELAY CIRCUIT
INRUSH SYSTEM ON/OFF
RESISTORS BYPASS
TO CONTACTOR K1
RELAY
RELAY .
+24VDC (P/S)
. CAPACITORS TO CAPACITOR BANK
DISCHARGE RELAY
110/220VAC IN .
110VAC/220VAC IN
20VAC OUT
24VDC .
DIODE
.
VOLTAGE
+24VDC
BRIDGE TRANSFORMER
+15VDC
-15VDC
+24VDC
DC RTN
+15VDC
-15VDC
+24VDC
REGULATOR
+15VDC
-15VDC
+24VDC (P/S)
DC RTN
Figure 6-35. Single-Phase STORED ENERGY Line Monitor Circuit Block Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-42
Chapter 6 Diagrams SECONDARY AC INPUT F1 7A SB
J1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J2 32_VAC 32_VAC_RTN 15_VAC 15_VAC_RTN 10.5_VAC 10.5_VAC_RTN 24_VAC 24_VAC_RTN
F2 2A SB
F3 6A SB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CON8 TO POWER SUPPLIES
F4 3A SB
CON12
TB1
ROTOR 220VAC F5 8A SB
J3
ROTOR 60VAC
S
1 2 3 4
TO ROTOR
F7
COLLIMETOR
F6 8 A SB
4A SB
24VAC 24VAC RTN F8 3A SB
CH GND
8_VAC
CON4 J4
TUBE STAND
1 2 3 4 5 6
FROM T1
TB2 F9
3 A F/A 24_VDC
1
24_VDC_RTN F17
CON6
2
10A SB JP4
2
1
3
R1 JUMPER
COLLIMATOR_READY
4
FOR T2 5
100 J5
8A SB 2
F10 220_VAC
TO T2
+15VF
JP1 110_VAC 0_VAC
7
JUMPER
24V
'
24V RTN
'
SPAER
'
COLL RDY
'
15V RTN
'
15V
'
GND
1
1 2 3 4 5 6
6
'
MANUAL COLLIMETOR
CON6 F11
TB7
2 A SB
TABLE TB3
220VAC
110VAC
ROTOR BOOST
1 2
115VAC RTN
3
100 2
R3
115VAC BUCKY ON
TO MICROCONTROLLER
INSTALL 5
JP2
JUMPER
115 VAC
1
J6
6
NON BUCKY TABLE 2 7
2
7
3 6
4 5
SW1
1 8
8
110VAC
'
BUCKY ON
'
115VAC RTN
' '
CH GND
'
GND
' '
BUCKY RDY
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
4
'
0 VAC D1 SW SLIDE-SPDT
LS1 R4
1N4005 793-P-1CS-24VDC TB4
150 F12
115VAC
1
BUCKY ON
2
R5
+15V_RTN
115VAC RTN
150
3 4
CON20 R2 R6
5
115 VAC
0 VAC
R8
3
6
2
D2
N.I.
7
2
PREP
INSTALL
150
1N4005 D3
1
JUMPER NON BUCKY WALL
1N4005
+15VF
SW2 8
JP3
PREP
'
110VAC
'
BUCKY ON
'
115VAC RTN
'
100
10k
F13
WALL
2 A SB
2 7 4 5
SW SLIDE-SPDT
CH GND
'
24V RTN
'
24V
'
BUCKY RDY
3 6 1 8
LS3 2 7
D4 LS2 793-P-1CS-24VDC
'
1N4005 4 5
TB5
X-RAY ON
3 6 1 8
D5 793-P-1CS-24VDC
1N4005
TB6
DOOR
DOOR_INTERLOCK R10
PD4
100 R11
33 2W
R12 33 2W TO CONTACTORS J7 D6
F14 8A SB
PD7
1 2 3 4
1N4005
PD8
CON4
PD9
R7 0 PD1
SC40-023T REV. S
Figure 6-36. Interface Board A9 (AY40-023T/AY40-023T1) Schematic Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-43
Chapter 6 Diagrams
Figure 6-37. Interface Board, Digital Receptor A9 (AY40-034T) Interface Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-44
Chapter 6 Diagrams SECONDARY AC INPUT
F1 7A SB
J1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J2 32_VAC 32_VAC_RTN 15_VAC 15_VAC_RTN 10.5_VAC 10.5_VAC_RTN 24_VAC 24_VAC_RTN
F2 2A SB
F3 6A SB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CON8 F4 3A SB
TO POWER SUPPLIES
CON12
TB1
COLLIMATOR
F6 8 A SB F5
J3
3A SB
24VAC
1 2 3
TO 28V POWER
24VAC RTN F8 3A SB
SUPPLY
F7
CON3
CH GND
8_VAC
3A SB
TUBE STAND TB7
TB2 F9
3 A F/A 24_VDC
1
24_VDC_RTN
FROM T1
F17
2
JP4
2
15A SB
1
3
R1 JUMPER
COLLIMATOR_READY
4
FOR T2
TB8
5
100 15A SB 2
F10 220_VAC
6
+15VF
JP1
7
TO/FROM T2
' '
24V 24V RTN SPARE
'
COLL RDY
'
15V RTN
'
15V
'
GND
1
JUMPER
'
110_VAC
MANUAL COLLIMETOR
0_VAC
F11
2 A SB
TABLE TB3 1 2
115VAC RTN
3
100 2
R3
115VAC BUCKY ON
TO MICROCONTROLLER
5
JP2
JUMPER
115 VAC
1
J6
6
NON BUCKY TABLE 2 7
2
7
3 6
4 5
SW1
1 8
8
110VAC
'
BUCKY ON
'
115VAC RTN
' '
CH GND
'
GND
' '
BUCKY RDY
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
4 INSTALL
'
0 VAC
D1 LS1
SW SLIDE-SPDT
R4
1N4005 793-P-1CS-24VDC TB4
150 F12
115VAC
1
BUCKY ON
2
R5
+15V_RTN
150
115VAC RTN
3 4
CON20 R2 R6
5 115 VAC
3
6
2
N.I
0 VAC
R8
D2
7
2
PREP
150
1N4005 D3
8 1
JUMPER NON BUCKY WALL
1N4005
+15VF
SW2
INSTALL
JP3
PREP
'
110VAC
'
BUCKY ON
'
115VAC RTN
'
100
10k
F13
WALL
2 A SB
2 7 4 5
SW SLIDE-SPDT
CH GND
'
24V RTN
'
24V
'
BUCKY RDY
3 6 1 8
LS3 2 7
D4 LS2 793-P-1CS-24VDC
'
1N4005 4 5
TB5
X-RAY ON
3 6 1 8
D5 793-P-1CS-24VDC
1N4005
TB6
DOOR
DOOR_INTERLOCK
PD4
R10
PD5
100 R11
33 2W
R12 33 2W TO CONTACTORS
J7 F14
D6
F15
8A SB
3A SB
PD7
1N4005
PD8
1 2 3 4
CON4
PD9
R7 0 PD1
PD2
SC40-061T REV. C
Figure 6-38. Interface Board, Digital Receptor A9 (AY40-061T) Interface Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-45
Chapter 6 Diagrams
Figure 6-39. Power Supply Board A6 (AY40-005T) Schematic Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-46
Chapter 6 Diagrams
AC RTN TP3
60 VAC TP13
COM TP1
220 VAC TP12
K2 1
4 3
1
220VAC 60VAC
1 2 3 4
1
1
J1 1 2
COM
Q1
RTN
RELAY SPST
TB1
1
VA230LA20A
RELAY ON
ROTOR RUN TP7
J5
1
RELAY RTN ON
1
ROTOR ON TP5
. . . . . . .
MAIN PHASE COM
CHASSIS GND TEMP. FAULT
MAIN CURRENT SENSE
Q2 DRIVE SIGNAL
Q1 DRIVE SIGNAL
1
VA230LA20A
* *
MOV3 * *
MOV2
Q4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2
2
MAIN
BOOST ON TP6
1 2 3
TP2 MAIN
P5 1 2 3
C1 SEE NOTE
1
1
TEMPERATURE SENSE J3
RUN ON ROTOR ROTATING TEMP. FAULT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PHASE TP4
CONTROL CIRCUITS
1
ROTOR ON BOOST ON
PHASE CURRENT SENSE SAMPLE OF MAIN CURRENT SAMPLE OF PHASE CURRENT
+15V TP10
SENSE CIRCUITS
NOTE: 1. THE VALUE OF THE CAPACITOR IS DEPENDENT ON TUBE TYPE.
1
+15V 100uf 25V
+
J4
C7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TP11 1
GND
REV. B
Figure 6-40. Rotor Circuit Block Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-47
Chapter 6 Diagrams
12uF 25uF
+15V TP2
TUBE DEPENDENT
CONTROL BOARD
+5V TP4
1
1
+15V C1
REGULATOR
12uF
5V
100uf 25V
+
J1
TB3
AY40-036S DRIVE BOARD
VOLTAGE
1 2 3 4 5
AY40-035S
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TB1 TP1
380VAC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1
GND -15V
FROM T2
TP3 -15V
1
FROM POWER SUPPLY
C6
F5
220VAC FUSE 0.1A 250V
INPUT VOLTAGE 80VAC 60VAC RTN
BRIDGE RECTIFIER AND FILTER
RELAYS F5
CONTROL
K1 4
IGBT H BRIDGE AND GATE DRIVERS
FUSE 15A 500V
CON7
3 A B
+
100uf 25V ROTOR ON D4 RUN ON TP4
P5
BOOST
LEVEL
RUN
J3 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SYNCRONIZING
CIRCUIT
CONTROL
CONVERSION
DRIVER
CIRCUITS
P3
COMM
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1
J1
DRIVE 1 DRIVE 2
TP16
P4
J4
TP19
+15V
CONTROL CIRCUITS
GENERTOR
1
TP10 GND
+15V
1
60/180 Hz
SPEED
-15V
V_FEEDBACK
ROTATING
RESET CURR_LIMIT C_FEEDBACK TUBE_TEMP
TIMING CONTROL & LIMITS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
J2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
P2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
TP18 18VDC
15V
TP7 -15V
ANALOG
TO TUBE ROTOR
FUSE FLQ15
P1
1
60 Hz/180 Hz
1 2 3 4 5 6
PHASE F4
HIGH/LOW SPEED TP8
CON9
TB2
MAIN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TP9 TP6 I feedback 2 1
1
RTN
ISOLATION &
DRIVE 1 TP6
1N4005
1 2 3 4 5 6
1
RUN ON ROTOR ROTATING TEMP. FAULT HIGH/LOW SPEED FAULT
DRIVE CONTROL
1
BOOST ON
FROM LOGIC BOARD
ROTOR ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
P5
1
J2 ROTOR ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
1
DRIVE 2 TP5
1
BOOST ON TP7
OUTPUT 1 -15V
PD7
PD6 TP2 I feedback 1 1
OUTPUT 2
F6
QUAD OUTPUT 14VDC
FUSE THERMAL 0.5A
J3 36VDC RTN
POWER SUPPLY
RESET
1 2 3
OUTPUT 3
FROM POWER SUPPLY
OUTPUT 4
TP14 V feedback
1
CURRENT SENSING
K3
TEMP.
VOLTAGE SENSING 2
& FUALT PROTECTION
DRIVE
3
FREQUENCY ROTOR ON BOOST
RELAYS CONTROL CIRCUITS
RUN SPEED HIGH/LOW
J5
P5
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
8 7
+15V
TP15 I feedback 2
D27 MBRS360TR
1
MONITOR
4 9
+15V
1 10
TQ2SA-12V R59
2
F5 TP11 OVERCURRENT 1
FUSE 0.1A 250V
TB4 1 2
100 2W
TO TUBE TEMP. SWITCH
D29
1
SMCG18
SC50-069 REV. A
Figure 6-41. QMI High-Speed Starter Circuit Block Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-48
Chapter 6 Diagrams
CONNECTOR J8 (SEE TABLE FOR PIN OUT)
JUMPER JP6 (HSS)
TEST POINT 3
TEST POINT 9
JUMPER JP7
JUMPER CONFIGURATION
R26
TEST POINT 5 C36 C35
R39
TEST POINT 1
C20
C6
TEST POINT 10 1
Y2
R59 R60
16
15
TEST POINT 6
R23
R24
R53 R40
1C22
R19 C33
C32 R17 C34
R5
J1
TEST POINT 2
C39
R18
2
1
JP1 - ALWAYS INSTALLED JP6 - INSTALLED ONLY ON SYSTEMS USING AID HIGH SPEED STARTER, NOT INSTALLED ON NON-HIGH SPEED STARTER SYSTEMS JP7 - INSTALL ON PINS 2-3
TEST POINT DESCRIPTIONS
C23
R48
TP1 - +5 VDC TP2 - HIGH VOLTAGE ON
C37
1
R66
C9
TP6 - WALL BUCKY GRID MOVING
TEST POINT 4
TP10 - +4.8 VDC REF ON U14 (A-D)
C43
4
R21
J3
R63 R64
TP8 - OCP COMMUNICATION
CONNECTOR J8 PIN OUT
C28
NOTE: “
1
2
1
1
TEST POINT 8
1
1
C27
J9
C26
1
10
9
J6
3
JUMPER JP1 (RS-485)
TP5 - TABLE BUCKY GRID MOVING
S/N
J7
CNTRL LOGIC PCB REV. E ASSY AY40-006S REV.
R54 R65
TEST POINT 7
J8-1 J8-2 J8-3 J8-4 J8-5 J8-6 J8-7 J8-8
HSS ON BOOST ON RUN ON ROTATING TEMP FAULT HIGH/LOW SPEED OVER CURRENT HSS DETECT
” DENOTES JUMPER LOCATION AY40-006S REV. K
Figure 6-42. Logic Board A1 (AY40-006S) Test Point/ Jumper Location Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-49
Chapter 6 Diagrams
TEST POINT 14
JP7 R110
C39
1
TEST POINT 6
R122
+
R108 +15V -15V
+
TEST POINT 5 -15V
U19
1
D13
1
JP11
R34
R92
+
TP5
D27 R52
R106
C81
R133
+
R134
C89
TP8
C27 R93
10
C72
R58
C68
R104
C41 U13
MA MON
MA CONT
+
2
+
1
R70 R135
R61+18V TP26 R131
TEST POINT 27
TEST POINT 3 +15V
+
CATHODE ADJ. POT. R34
TEST POINT 12
TEST POINT 7 MA FEEDBACK
TEST POINT 24 CATHODE DRIVE TEST POINT 18
15
16
R128 R109
C82
U21
C54
R7 TP25 Q4 TP1
C29 R67 JP3
R112
ERROR BYPASS
U1
+
R3
R21D7
C9 R54 R121R120
R60 R79 R4R126C6 TP18U17R3
SIZE
U9
R1
R2
D19 C56 D25
-
C11
D34 TP19 R56 R117 1
R33 FIL C4 R28
TEST POINT 23 CATHODE DRIVE
ERROR
R13 R27 TP2 C33 R49 C2 TP21 OUT B
C5
OUT B
5
ANODE ADJ. POT. R3
TP23
1
TEST POINT 22 ANODE DRIVE
+ R39C93C15R37OUT A C16
4
TEST POINT 21 ANODE DRIVE
R89
C95 C84 D26
R150 C12 R139 C24 R24 1 R29 TP22R18C1 R12OUT A C92
+
TEST POINT 1 ANODE FEEDBACK
TEST POINT 16 TEST POINT 17
D37
R143 R141 D36
TEST POINT 2 CATHODE FEEDBACK
DAC MODULE AY40-083S
Q1
TEST POINT 25
C23
TEST POINT 20
TEST POINT 13
TEST POINT 26
TEST POINT 9 +18V
TEST POINT 8 +5V
TEST POINT 10
TEST POINT 4
TEST POINT 11
Figure 6-43. KVP Control Board A2 (AY40-003S) Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-50
Chapter 6 Diagrams
TEST POINT 15
TEST POINT 13
TEST POINT 11 FILAMENT SWITCHING (LARGE 24 VDC/SMALL 0 VDC)
TEST POINT 14
TEST POINT 3
D4 Q5 TP14
TP15
J1
TP11
R35 R34 C18 K1
C16
R10
R21 +
C20
U5
D10
C15
D11
D6
U4
D7
R32 C17
FUSE F1 (+48 VDC INPUT)
R22
R33 R29
T2 R28
C24
D12
3 AMP SLO-BLO
C19 C22 D14 D13
J2
R27 C14
R30
C6
R19 C10
C23
TP13 R18
C27
R23
R31 U2 TP3
R9
R8 R26 R7 D8 + C21 R16
R17
D1
X5 R2
T1-8
R3 +
+
TEST POINT 5
C3
C9
28
R5
R6 C2
C12
R24
TP5
U1
R25 C11
T1-7
T1-3
T1-4
U3
TEST POINT 12
TP12 T1-5 +
T1-6
R13
T1-10
T1-9
R14
C1
C7 R15
TEST POINT 6
T1-2
TP6
C8
T1-1
R36
TP4
C26
R12
D2
C5
R11 D9
R1
C4
TP10
TEST POINT 4
D3
C13
D5 +
R20
TEST POINT 10
R4 C25
TP2
TP1
TP9
Q6 TP7
TEST POINT 2
TEST POINT 1
TEST POINT 9
TEST POINT 7
TP8
TEST POINT 8
Figure 6-44. Filament Control Board A5 (AY40-007T) - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-51
Chapter 6 Diagrams
Figure 6-45. Power Supply Board A6 (AY40-005T) Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-52
Chapter 6 Diagrams
0 43
240 VAC
240 VAC
C VA
480 VAC
FUSE F2 3 AMPS
380 VAC 240 VAC
43 0
240 VAC
240 VAC
VA C
480 VAC
JUMPER
380 VAC 240 VAC
JUMPER
AC INPUT VOLTAGE JUMPER POSITIONS: LINE INPUT 200-260 VAC, 1PH
INSTALLED JUMPER 240 (3 PLACES SHOWN ABOVE)
FUSES F1, F3
FUSE
RATING
FUNCTION
FUSE F1
1/4A (FOR 480 VAC INPUT) 1/2A (FOR 240 VAC INPUT)
AC INPUT PROTECTION
FUSE F2
3A
FUSE F3
1/4A (FOR 480 VAC INPUT) 1/2A (FOR 240 VAC INPUT)
+30 VDC OUTPUT USED TO TURN ON GENERATOR AND FOR EXTERNAL TUBE STAND POWER SUPPLY) AC INPUT PROTECTION
Figure 6-46. Line Monitor Board A8 (AY40-022T1), Single-Phase Systems - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-53
Chapter 6 Diagrams
FUSE F6 3 AMPS
FUSE
RATING
FUNCTION
F1, F3
4A (SLO-BLOW)
AC SUPPLY PROTECTION
F2, F4
3A (SLO-BLOW)
DC OUTPUT PROTECTION (FOR BATTERY CHARGING)
F5, F7
1A (FOR 230 VAC INPUT) 2A (FOR 115 VAC INPUT)
AC INPUT PROTECTION
F6
3A
USED TO ENERGIZE K4 AND K5 AND FOR EXTERNAL TUBE STAND POWER SUPPLY)
FUSE F5, F7 (SEE TABLE FOR VALUES)
JUMPER POSITIONS (115 VAC) IMPORTANT! JUMPERS MUST BE INSULATED TO PREVENT CONTACT WITH EACH OTHER
JUMPER POSITION (230 VAC)
TEST POINT TP13 (GND)
TEST POINT TP3 (-205 VDC)
TEST POINT TP20 (V LIMIT CATHODE) FUSE F1, F3 4 AMPS
POTENTIOMETER R60 CATHODE OVERVOLTAGE ADJUST (+2.12 ±0.02 VDC)
FUSE F2, F4 3 AMPS
POTENTIOMETER R70 POS. OUTPUT LIMIT (+205 VDC)
TEST POINT TP21 (V LIMIT ANODE)
POTENTIOMETER R19 ANODE OVERVOLTAGE ADJUST (-2.12 ±0.02 VDC)
TEST POINT TP2 (+205 VDC)
POTENTIOMETER R66 NEG. OUTPUT LIMIT (-205 VDC)
Figure 6-47. Line Monitor/Battery Charger Board A8 (AY40-028T), Stored-Energy Systems - Test Point/ Jumper Location Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-54
Chapter 6 Diagrams
FUSE F2 3 AMPS
240 VAC
240 VAC
43 0 VA
480 VAC
JUMPER POSITIONS
C
COMMON
0 VA C
240 VAC
43
THREE-PHASE 208 VAC CONFIGURATION:
380 VAC 240 VAC
240 VAC
43 0 VA
480 VAC
240 VAC
480 VAC
FUSE F4 = PHASE A FUSE F5 = PHASE B FUSE F6 = PHASE C
240 VA C
380 VAC 240 VAC
C 380 VAC 240 VAC
F6
JUMPER F4
F5
JUMPER
FUSES F1, F3 FUSE
RATING
FUNCTION
F1
1/4A (FOR 480 VAC INPUT) 1/2A (FOR 240 VAC INPUT)
AC INPUT PROTECTION
F2
3A
F3
1/4A (FOR 480 VAC INPUT) 1/2A (FOR 240 VAC INPUT)
+30 VDC OUTPUT USED TO TURN ON GENERATOR AND FOR EXTERNAL TUBE STAND POWER SUPPLY) AC INPUT PROTECTION
Figure 6-48. Line Monitor Board A8 (AY40-022T2/T3), Three-Phase Systems - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-55
Chapter 6 Diagrams FUSE F2 3 AMPS
1 240 VAC
240 VAC
43 0V
480 VA C
JUMPER POSITIONS
AC 380 VAC 240 VAC
1 1
NOTE: AY40-053S2 USED ON 380 - 480 VAC INPUT MODELS 240 VAC 480 VAC
240 VAC
240 VAC
0V AC
480 VAC
THREE-PHASE 208 VAC CONFIGURATION:
43
D AN G ER H IG H VO LTAG E
.25 AM P 250 VAC
.25 AM P 250 VAC
.25 AM P 250 VAC
D ANG ER H IG H VO LTAG E
FUSE F4 = PHASE A FUSE F5 = PHASE B FUSE F6 = PHASE C
AY40-053S3 USED ON 208 - 240 VAC INPUT MODELS
COMMON
380 VAC 240 VAC
JUMPER JUMPER (0 OHM RESISTOR)
FUSES F1, F3 FUSE
RATING
FUNCTION
F1
1/4A (FOR 480 VAC INPUT) 1/2A (FOR 240 VAC INPUT)
AC INPUT PROTECTION
F2
3A
F3
1/4A (FOR 480 VAC INPUT) 1/2A (FOR 240 VAC INPUT)
+30 VDC OUTPUT USED TO TURN ON GENERATOR AND FOR EXTERNAL TUBE STAND POWER SUPPLY) AC INPUT PROTECTION
Figure 6-49. Line Monitor Board A8 (AY40-053S2/ AY40-053S3), Three-Phase QMI High-Speed Starter Systems - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-56
Chapter 6 Diagrams
TB1 COLLIMATOR INTERFACE
TB4 WALL BUCKY INTERFACE
NO WALL BUCKY JUMPER
MANUAL COLLIMATOR JUMPER
TB3 TABLE BUCKY INTERFACE
NO TABLE BUCKY JUMPER
24 VAC TO POWER SUPPLY BD. (FOR +28 VDC)
F5
8A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO (REPLACE ONLY WITH BUSSMAN MDA-8)
LINE INPUT FOR OPTIONAL POWER SUPPLY
F6
8A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
24 VAC TO COLLIMATOR LINE INPUT FOR OPTIONAL POWER SUPPLY
F7 F8
3A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
8 VAC TO LOGIC BD. (FOR +5 VDC)
F9
3A, 250 VAC FAST-ACT
+24 VDC TO TUBE STAND
24VDC
3A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
SPARE
F4
24V RTN
10.5 VAC TO POWER SUPPLY BD. (FOR +15 VDC)
COL RDY
6A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
15V RTN
F3
GND.
15 VAC TO POWER SUPPLY BD. (FOR -15 VDC)
15 VDC
2A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
CHASSIS
F2
24VAC
7A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
F11
2A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
120 VAC FOR TABLE BUCKY
F12
2A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
120 VAC FOR WALL BUCKY
F14
15A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
SPARE
F15
3A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
SPARE
110VAC
LINE INPUT FOR TRANSFORMER T2
F10
FUNCTION
TB7 ROTOR BOOST STATOR VOLTAGE 220VAC/110VAC
220VAC
LINE INPUT FOR TRANSFORMER T2
F17
SETTING
JP1
MAN./AUTO COLL.
JP2
TABLE BUCKY
INSTALLED (NO TABLE BUCKY) NOT INSTALLED (TABLE BUCKY)
JP3
WALL BUCKY
INSTALLED (NO WALL BUCKY) NOT INSTALLED (WALL BUCKY)
TB7
TB5 X-RAY ON LIGHT INTERFACE
250 VAC SLO-BLO 8 AMP
F1
JUMPER DESIG.
TB6 DOOR INTERLOCK
FUNCTION 32 VAC TO POWER SUPPLY BD. (FOR +48 VDC)
24 VAC
RATING
CHASSIS GND.
FUSE
TB2 TUBESTAND INTERFACE
INSTALLED (MANUAL) NOT INSTALLED (AUTO)
INSTALL ON 1 & 2 (TOSHIBA ROTOR BOOST E7242X, E7813X, E7252X, E7239X STATOR VOLTAGE TUBES) INSTALL ON 2 & 3 (ALL OTHER TUBE TYPES)
NOTE: “
” DENOTES JUMPER LOCATION
Figure 6-50. Interface Board (No HSS Non-Digital) A9 (AY40-023T) - Terminal Block/Jumper Location Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-57
Chapter 6 Diagrams
TB2 TUBESTAND INTERFACE
TB1 COLLIMATOR INTERFACE
3A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
24 VAC TO POWER SUPPLY BD. (FOR +28 VDC)
8A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
220 VAC TO ROTOR DRIVE BD.
F5
(REPLACE ONLY WITH BUSSMAN MDA-8)
24 VAC TO COLLIMATOR
F7
3A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
60 VAC TO ROTOR DRIVE BD.
D2
(REPLACE ONLY WITH BUSSMAN MDA-10)
JUMPER ROTOR BOOST STATOR VOLTAGE 220VAC/110VAC
0 VAC SUPPLY FOR TRANSFORMER T2
D4
10A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
F17
F19
220 VAC SUPPLY FOR TRANSFORMER T2
(REPLACE ONLY WITH BUSSMAN MDA-8)
F18
8A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
F10
D7
+24 VDC TO TUBE STAND
D13
3A, 250 VAC FAST-ACT
R17
F9
D20
3A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
D19
F8
8 VAC TO LOGIC BD. (FOR +5 VDC)
F13
(REPLACE ONLY WITH BUSSMAN MDA-3)
R16
8A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
TB3 TABLE BUCKY INTERFACE
R19
F6
TB7 WALL BUCKY INTERFACE
D8
F4
MANUAL COLLIMATOR JUMPER
D12
10.5 VAC TO POWER SUPPLY BD. (FOR +15 VDC)
NO TABLE BUCKY JUMPER
24V
6A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
24V RTN
F3
SPARE
15 VAC TO POWER SUPPLY BD. (FOR -15 VDC) COLL RDY
2A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
15V
F2
15V RTN
32 VAC TO POWER SUPPLY BD. (FOR +48 VDC)
GND
7A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
24VAC
F1
NO WALL BUCKY JUMPER
FUNCTION
24VAC
RATING
CH GND
FUSE
TB6 DOOR INTERLOCK
D14 K3
JUMPER DESIG.
FUNCTION
SETTING
TABLE BUCKY
INSTALLED (NO TABLE BUCKY) NOT INSTALLED (TABLE BUCKY)
JP3
WALL BUCKY
INSTALLED (NO WALL BUCKY) NOT INSTALLED (WALL BUCKY)
JP4 - JP8
NOT USED
_
ROTOR BOOST STATOR VOLTAGE
TB5
JP2
TB5 X-RAY ON LIGHT INTERFACE 1
MAN./AUTO COLL.
R12
R11
INSTALLED (MANUAL) NOT INSTALLED (AUTO)
JP1
NOT INSTALLED INSTALL ON 1 & 2 (TOSHIBA E7242X, E7813X, E7252X, E7239X TUBES) INSTALL ON 2 & 3 (ALL OTHER TUBE TYPES)
NOTE: “
” DENOTES JUMPER LOCATION
Figure 6-51. Digital Interface Board (No HSS with Digital Receptor) A9 (AY40-034T) - Terminal Block/ Jumper Location Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-58
Chapter 6 Diagrams
TB1 COLLIMATOR INTERFACE FUSE
RATING
TB6 DOOR INTERLOCK
TB5 X-RAY ON LIGHT INTERFACE
TB4 WALL BUCKY INTERFACE
NO WALL BUCKY JUMPER
MANUAL COLLIMATOR JUMPER
NO TABLE BUCKY JUMPER
TB3 TABLE BUCKY INTERFACE
FUNCTION
7A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
32 VAC TO POWER SUPPLY BD. (FOR +48 VDC)
F2
2A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
15 VAC TO POWER SUPPLY BD. (FOR -15 VDC)
F3
6A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
10.5 VAC TO POWER SUPPLY BD. (FOR +15 VDC)
F4
3A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
24 VAC TO POWER SUPPLY BD. (FOR +28 VDC)
F5
3A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO (REPLACE ONLY WITH BUSSMAN MDA-3)
LINE INPUT FOR OPTIONAL POWER SUPPLY
F6
8A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
24 VAC TO COLLIMATOR LINE INPUT FOR OPTIONAL POWER SUPPLY
F7 F8
3A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
8 VAC TO LOGIC BD. (FOR +5 VDC)
F9
3A, 250 VAC FAST-ACT
+24 VDC TO TUBE STAND
250 VAC SLO-BLO 15 AMP
F1
LINE INPUT FOR TRANSFORMER T2
F10 F11
2A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
F12
2A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
120 VAC FOR WALL BUCKY
F14
15A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
SPARE
F15
3A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
120 VAC FOR TABLE BUCKY
250 VAC SLO-BLO 3 AMP
SPARE LINE INPUT FOR TRANSFORMER T2
F17
JUMPER DESIG.
TB2 TUBESTAND INTERFACE
FUNCTION
SETTING
JP1
MAN./AUTO COLL.
JP2
TABLE BUCKY
INSTALLED (NO TABLE BUCKY) NOT INSTALLED (TABLE BUCKY)
JP3
WALL BUCKY
INSTALLED (NO WALL BUCKY) NOT INSTALLED (WALL BUCKY)
INSTALLED (MANUAL) NOT INSTALLED (AUTO)
NOTE: “
” DENOTES JUMPER LOCATION
Figure 6-52. Interface Board (HSS Non-Digital) A9 (AY40-061T) Terminal Block/Jumper Location Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-59
Chapter 6 Diagrams
TB2 TUBESTAND INTERFACE
TB1 COLLIMATOR INTERFACE
3A, 250 VAC FAST-ACT
+24 VDC TO TUBE STAND
F10
15A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO (REPLACE ONLY WITH BUSSMAN MDA-15)
LINE INPUT FOR TRANSFORMER T2
F17
15A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO (REPLACE ONLY WITH BUSSMAN MDA-15)
LINE INPUT FOR TRANSFORMER T2 R12
R11
JUMPER DESIG.
SETTING
FUNCTION
JP1
MAN./AUTO COLL.
JP2
TABLE BUCKY
INSTALLED (NO TABLE BUCKY) NOT INSTALLED (TABLE BUCKY)
JP3
WALL BUCKY
INSTALLED (NO WALL BUCKY) NOT INSTALLED (WALL BUCKY)
F18
F9
D2
8 VAC TO LOGIC BD. (FOR +5 VDC)
K3
3A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
D4
F8
D14
3A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO (REPLACE ONLY WITH BUSSMAN MDA-3)
R17
8A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
F19
24 VAC TO COLLIMATOR LINE INPUT FOR OPTIONAL POWER SUPPLY
F6 F7
D7
LINE INPUT FOR OPTIONAL POWER SUPPLY
D8
3A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO (REPLACE ONLY WITH BUSSMAN MDA-3)
R16
F5
D12
24 VAC TO POWER SUPPLY BD. (FOR +28 VDC)
TB3 TABLE BUCKY INTERFACE
R19
3A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
TB4 WALL BUCKY INTERFACE
24V
F4
SPARE
10.5 VAC TO POWER SUPPLY BD. (FOR +15 VDC)
24V RTN
6A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
15V RTN
F3
COLL RDY
15 VAC TO POWER SUPPLY BD. (FOR -15 VDC)
15V
2A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
GND
F2
MANUAL COLLIMATOR JUMPER
NO TABLE BUCKY JUMPER
NO WALL BUCKY JUMPER
D20
7A, 250 VAC SLO-BLO
24VAC
F1
24VAC
FUNCTION 32 VAC TO POWER SUPPLY BD. (FOR +48 VDC)
D19
RATING
CH GND
FUSE
TB6 DOOR INTERLOCK
1
INSTALLED (MANUAL) NOT INSTALLED (AUTO) TB5
NOTE: “
TB5 X-RAY ON LIGHT INTERFACE (PIN 3 NOT USED)
” DENOTES JUMPER LOCATION
Figure 6-53. Digital Interface Board (HSS with Digital Receptor) A9 (AY40-062T) Terminal Block/Jumper Location Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-60
Chapter 6 Diagrams
2
TEST POINT 7 ROTOR RUN
10 1
PD1
U6
TP10 R45 R22
TP7
1
TP6
9
D17 + C7
C16
E
D11 D10
R41
R46
D15
TP15
C E
R11
B
C E
D1
C E
B
C
TP11 C4
R30
78
R33 R4 R5 R7 D2 R8
U1 C3
R3 D14
R27 R19
C
R6
TP8
U5
R17 R16 R32
TP9
R26 Q3
B
B
D3
R12
D6
Q5
R29 TP14
Q10 Q9
Q6
Q7
C E
TP5
D9
D7
Q8
+
TEST POINT 10 +15 VDC
B
PD4
R15
C1
D12 D8 C15
9
J3
J4
Q2
R9
E B
R10
R36 U3 U4
U2
R25 Q4
R20 D4
Q1
D5
R24
MOV4 T1
POTENTIOMETER R20 TUBE CURRENT ADJ. POTENTIOMETER R24 TUBE CURRENT ADJ.
G
T1
G
T2
T2
MOV1
TEST POINT 3 AC RETURN
TP4
J5 3
TP3
1
C2
C6
TEST POINT 4 PHASE
R2 10W
R14 10W
MOV3
J1 4
TP2
1
TP13
K2 R37
D18
TP12
C8
TERMINAL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SIGNAL MAIN PHASE COMMON NOT USED NOT USED GROUND
TEST POINT 12 200 VAC
MOV2 R35 C14 1
PD3
PD2 TB1
TP1
TEST POINT 13 60 VAC
7
TEMP
TERMINAL BLOCK TB1
TEST POINT 1 COMMON
TEST POINT 2 MAIN Figure 6-54. Rotor Drive Board A10 (AY40-013T) Terminal Block Location Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-61
J5 R5
TABLE TP12C13
R20 R21 R15
2
INV dV/dT
R17R11
C16 R10 C14
1
J4
C15 C17
R34
C22 R19 TP13
1
1
R1 WALL#1
R16
1 2 3
C20 R14 0
INSTALL ON 2 & 3 (ALL OTHER CONFIGS.)
1
U8
1 2 3
JUMPER JP7 1 PANEL/2 PANEL SELECT
C21
INSTALL ON 1 & 2 (SINGLE CXDI-50G PANEL USED WITH TWO ION CHAMBERS)
C26
1 PANEL/2 PANEL SELECT
SETTING
J2 R33
JP7
FUNCTION
D7
JUMPER DESIG.
WALL 1
D1
WALL#2
R7
1
J3
WALL#1/WALL#2
D2
POT. R23 WALL#1
TP8
WALL 2
POT. R24 WALL#2
TABLE/WALLS
JP1
Chapter 6 Diagrams
REV. E
Figure 6-55. Standard AEC Board A11 (AY40-031S) Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-62
Chapter 6 Diagrams
Figure 6-56. Universal AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S) Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-63
Chapter 6 Diagrams
TEST POINT 5
1
TEST POINT 6
1
4
TP10 C43 R23
1
TP9
R37 JP12
R18C41
1
1
C27
U19 R34 R35
TEST POINT 10
TEST POINT 8 D16
A16A1JP8 A16A1JP9 A16A1JP10 A16A1JP11 INSTALLED A16A1JP12 INSTALLED A16A1JP16** INSTALL ON PINS 2 & 3
ODYSSEY INSTALLED INSTALLED INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED INSTALLED INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED INSTALL ON PINS 1 & 2
1
QUEST INSTALLED INSTALLED INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED INSTALLED
PD6 PD7
JUMPER A16A1JP1 A16A1JP6* A16A1JP7*
DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE
TEST POINT 9
RS-232
D19
D2 D3 D4
TEST POINT 2
TB1
COMM
” DENOTES JUMPER LOCATION
EXPOSE PREP
NOTE: “
GND
1
11
JP6
R13 R12
R16 R11
JP7
1
TEST POINT 1
10
JP16 20
TP1
RESET
1
*NOTE 2: A16A1JP16 IS INSTALLED ON PINS 2 AND 3 ONLY IF OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL BOARD HAS AN ATTACHED "PIGTAIL" RIBBON CABLE AND CONNECTOR; OTHERWISE INSTALL ON PINS 1 AND 2.
U10
JP11
*NOTE 1: DO NOT INSTALL JP6 AND JP7 TO DISABLE OCP EXPOSE BUTTON (SUCH AS WHEN USING AN OPTIONAL REMOTE HAND SWITCH)
TEST POINT 7
TEST POINT 11
TEST TEST POINT 4 POINT 3
Figure 6-57. OCP Control Board A16A1 (AY40-004S1) - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-64
Chapter 6 Diagrams
S1 (SEE NOTE 1)
J7
C3
R13
Y1
C16
R11 R12
C27
iBUTTON
Q3
J2
C25
R42
R15
R36
R34
R38
R16
TP2
J4
R35
D14
D4
1
R39
J5
C26
R50 R49
R1
C12 R4
C11
R45
R46
1
D7
C10
J1
R3 C1D12
C2
J1
R48
TP1
TP2
J3
TOP
BOTTOM REV. A
NOTE: IP ADDRESS RESET SWITCH - POWER OFF GENERATOR, THEN POWER ON WHILE HOLDING DOWN S1. RELEASE S1 WHEN YEL (D2), GRN (D1), & BLUE LEDS (D10) ARE ILLUMINATED. IP ADDRESS OF OCP INTERFACE BD. (Q-NODE) IS NOW 10.0.0.175.
Figure 6-58. OCP Interface Board A1A1 (AY40-073S) - Test Point/Jumper Location Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-65
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC C31
R78
R74
TP19
R13 R22
Q2
R81
C53
C48 C61 R76
C65 Q11R75 Q10 Q9
R73
R77
1
C51 C59
C56 C37 1
C50 TP15
Q8
R72
R67
TP2
C13
C55
U22
C46
C7
U26 C3
C22
1
C58
U10
C18
10
9
C5
C41
C25 U23 C45
1
C1
C11 C6 U18
1 2
C26 C62 TP1
D9
U20
R27
E
R55
R56
R80
TP10
R54
R62
R66
Q1
R41
C64 U31 C68
1
U24C69
C43 1
TP16 R79 C63
U13 R50
C29
1
TP11 TP18 C23 R20
U11
C30
TEST POINT 17
TP25
TP22
TP23
TP24
J5
S
Q6 D11
TP6 1 R57
D8
R30
C19
R28
R29
R47
C
R36
C
R37
R53 C35R49 R52C10
C8
C9
D3
R16
C21 C15
C14
D2 C16
R14
C17
Chapter 6 Diagrams
POTENTIOMETER R48
IC U17
TEST POINT 1
TEST POINT 3
TEST POINT 2
TEST POINT 4
Figure 6-59. QMI High-Speed Starter Control Board A20A1 (AY40-035S) - Test Point/Potentiometer Location Diagram
Revision W
6-66
C49
C51
R47
R42
TP6
TP8 C29
C27
1 C30
20
C28
R43
TP10
C37
R50
JUMPER JP1 +15V DRIVE PULL-UP (MUST BE INSTALLED)
R26
R20
C6
R2
D11 TP1
HIGH VOLTAGE
DANGERC21
R17 R13
R15
DANGER
L4
L5B
R16
L4B
R11C17
TP2
TEST POINT 18
D6
R5
R68
C2
B
R71
E BE
R73 R72
R67
TEST POINT 17
HIGH VOLTAGE
D12
R18
BE
J1
D14
C7
C33
R64
R66
TEST POINT 15
TEST POINT 10
TEST POINT 16
D22
C47 U9
C42
R58
R54
J3
FUSE F5 0.125A 250V FAST-ACTING
R55 R60
R63
Chapter 6 Diagrams
L5A
TB1
L4A
D4
TEST POINT 14
D31
R28
L5
FUSE F3 (15A, 500V, SLO-BLOW)
FUSE F1 (15A, 500V, SLO-BLOW)
FUSE F4 (15A, 500V, SLO-BLOW)
Figure 6-60. QMI High-Speed Starter Driver Board A20A2 (AY40-036S) - Test Point/Fuse Location Diagram
HF Series X-ray Generator - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
6-67
Appendix
A
AEC CALIBRATION WITH DIGITAL RECEPTOR OR CR FILM PLATE (NOT APPLICABLE ON GENERATORS EQUIPPED WITH Q-CONNECT OPTION)
A-1
A-2
Appendix A AEC Calibration with DR or CR Film Plate
OVERVIEW This appendix provides instructions for successful AEC calibration of the HF Series Xray generator when configured for operation with either: •
a digital receptor (DR) panel and the generator is not equipped with an ethernet adapter (i.e., no Q-Connect option)
•
any non-integrated computed radiography (CR) system.
For additional information, refer to the DR or CR system manufacturer’s installation and operation documentation.
If the HF Series X-ray generator is integrated with an Agfa CR System (i.e., DiRex System), refer to Appendix B, CALIBRATION (DiRex System) for generator configuration and calibration instructions. If the HF Series X-ray generator is integrated with an Agfa NX-DR SeriesDigital Imaging System, a QG-DIG-CXDI Canon/Quantum Integration or has a Q-VISION operator control panel, refer to Appendix D, CALIBRATION (Using Insight) for generator configuration and calibration instructions. CAUTION! Before calibrating unit, perform warmup procedures recommended by tube manufacturer or the warm-up procedure described in Chapter 3 of the Operator’s Manual. SPECIAL CANON DR SYSTEM CONFIGURATION INSTRUCTIONS When the HF Series X-ray generator is used with a fixed Canon CXDI-40G or portable CXDI-50G (or CXDI-50C) digital radiographic receptor, the generator configuration settings must be correct to ensure proper functionality of the associated ion chamber(s) used in the system. Prior to the performance of AEC calibration, it is assumed the Quantum/Canon Integration Software (QG-DIG-CXDI) has been installed and configured in accordance with the instructions provided in Quantum/ Canon Integration Guide DC30-058. Verify the following generator settings are correct for your configuration: 1. Locate jumper JP7 on AEC Board A11 (AY40-031S) on the generator PCB Door (refer to Chapter 6, DIAGRAMS for the PC board layout). 2. If a CXDI-50G (or CXDI-50C) portable DR receptor is used in the system and will be operated such that it can be located in more than one receptor containing an ion chamber (e.g., example, a table with ion chamber and a chest stand with ion chamber), verify Jumper JP7 is installed across pins 1 and 2. All other configurations require Jumper JP7 be installed across pins 2 and 3. 3. If a CXDI-50G (or CXDI-50C) portable DR receptor is used in the system, and will be operated such that it can be located in more than one receptor containing an ion chamber, the ion chamber signal cables must be connected to the WALL1 (A11J2) and WALL2 (A11J3) connectors on AEC Board A11. Do not connect either ion chamber cable to the TABLE (A11J5) connec-
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
A-3
Appendix A AEC Calibration with DR or CR Film Plate
tor, even if it is from a chamber located in the table. 4. At the generator OCP, access the Edit Digital screen (shown below) from the Service Configuration Menu. PRESS THIS KEY TO SELECT DIGITAL RECEPTOR PRESS THIS KEY TO SELECT UNIVERSAL SYSTEM TYPE PRESS THIS KEY TO ENABLE OR DISABLE PREP HOLD FUNCTION
Figure A-1. Edit Digital Screen 5. Press the key located next to the Digital Receptor field until Canon is displayed. 6. If a CXDI-50G (or CXDI-50C) portable DR receptor is used in the system, and will be operated such that it can be located in more than one receptor containing an ion chamber, press the key next to the Universal setting until QV-800 is displayed. Otherwise, set to NONE. 7. Set the Prep Hold setting to ON (notifies the DR system that a Prep cycle has been initiated; the generator must receive a "Prep Hold Release" signal from the DR system to proceed with the Expose cycle). 8. If a CXDI-50G (or CXDI-50C) portable DR receptor is used in the system, at the Canon workstation computer, access the Quantum/Canon Integration Software (QG-DIG-CXDI) Service Menu. Press the Select Receptor Connection button and verify "50G Cassette" field is set to "WALL". (Refer to Quantum/Canon Integration Guide DC30-058.) AEC CALIBRATION WITH DIGITAL RECEPTOR OR CR FILM PLATE INSTALLED WARNING! The following calibration procedures involve taking x-ray exposures. All personnel should be behind the protective barriers. X-rays can be dangerous unless proper precautions and procedures are adhered to. IMPORTANT! Before performing AEC calibration procedure, verify the correct Film/Screen is displayed on the calibration screen (shown in top left field). The Film/Screen setting is selected in the
Revision W
A-4
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix A AEC Calibration with DR or CR Film Plate
AEC Calibration Menu. In most DR or CR film plate systems, the entire imaging area of the digital receptor or CR film plate must be covered with acrylic in order to obtain accurate "S" or "REX" values used for the procedures that follow. Refer to the calibration instructions provided with digital or CR system for specific "S" or "REX" values required for AEC calibration. The paragraphs that follow describe AEC calibration procedures when a digital receptor or a CR film plate is installed in the generator system. Two separate calibration procedures are provided depending on the system configuration: •
The first procedure shall be performed when the generator is used with a single or dual receptor panel system, integrated or non-integrated with the generator, and each of the receptor panels is only used with one ion chamber. An example of this would be a table and wall stand system each equipped with a DR panel (or grid cabinet for CR) and ion chamber. Use this procedure for calibrating all CR Film Plate systems.
•
The second procedure is intended for use with a single receptor panel system (e.g., CXDI-50G or CXDI-50C portable receptor), integrated with the generator, where the single DR panel can be used with more than one ion chamber. An example of this would be a table (with ion chamber) and wall stand (with ion chamber) system, used with a single Canon CXDI-50G or CXDI-50C portable receptor.
Table A-1 shows a summarized presentation of the AEC calibration procedure. An AEC calibration Worksheet is provided in Table A-2 for recording calibration data. Table A-1. DR or CR System AEC Calibration Procedure Sequence FILM/SCREENS TO BE CALIBRATED
REQUIRED AEC CALIBRATION PROCEDURES/ SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
WALL STAND 72" SID FILM/SCREEN (SLOWEST SPEED, LARGEST SID)
1. Perform "Ion Chamber Balancing" procedure. 2. Perform "AEC MAS Balance" procedure for wall stand ion chamber. 3. Perform "AEC Optical Density (OD) Calibration": a. Set desired "base" optical density b. Set "AEC Ref" to 2000. c. Adjust ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer until base optical density is achieved in developed films. 4. Perform "AEC KV Calibration".
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
A-5
Appendix A AEC Calibration with DR or CR Film Plate
Table A-1. DR or CR System AEC Calibration Procedure Sequence
Revision W
A-6
FILM/SCREENS TO BE CALIBRATED
REQUIRED AEC CALIBRATION PROCEDURES/ SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
WALL STAND 40" SID FILM/SCREEN
1. Copy "Wall 72" film/screen to "Wall 40". 2. Perform "AEC Optical Density (OD) Calibration", however, DO NOT re-adjust the ion chamber MASTER GAIN potentiometer. Adjust "AEC Ref" to obtain desired (set) optical density. 3. Perform "AEC KV Calibration".
TABLE 40" SID FILM/ SCREEN
1. If system includes a wall stand, copy "Wall 40" film/screen to "Table 40". 2. Perform "Ion Chamber Balancing" procedure for table ion chamber. 3. Perform "AEC Optical Density (OD) Calibration": a. Set desired "base" optical density b. Set "AEC Ref" to 2000. c. Adjust ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer until base optical density is achieved in developed films. 4. Perform "AEC KV Calibration".
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix A AEC Calibration with DR or CR Film Plate
Table A-2. AEC Calibration Worksheet Film/Screen Combination:
Table 40
Wall 40
Wall 72
AEC OD CALIBRATION Setting:
50 kVp, 200L mA, 5 cm
Optical Density: Sensitivity (REX) Value AEC Ref. AEC KV CALIBRATION Setting:
Step 1 - 50 kVp, 200L mA, 5 cm
Optical Density: Sensitivity (REX) Value Setting:
Step 2 - 60 kVp, 200L mA, 10 cm
Optical Density: Sensitivity (REX) Value Setting:
Step 3 - 80 kVp, 200L mA, 15 cm
Optical Density: Sensitivity (REX) Value Setting:
Step 4 - 100 kVp, 200L mA, 20 cm
Optical Density: Sensitivity (REX) Value Setting:
Step 5 - 110 kVp, 200L mA, 25 cm
Optical Density: Sensitivity (REX) Value Setting:
Step 6 - 120 kVp, 200L mA, 30 cm
Optical Density: Sensitivity (REX) Value Setting:
*Step 7 - 130 kVp, 200L mA, 30 cm
Optical Density: Sensitivity (REX) Value Setting:
*Step 8 - 140 kVp, 200L mA, 30 cm
Optical Density: Sensitivity (REX) Value * Only required on 150 kVp systems
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
A-7
Appendix A AEC Calibration with DR or CR Film Plate
AEC Calibration Instructions - One Ion Chamber Per Panel The following procedure is used to perform AEC calibration of generators used with a single or dual receptor panel, integrated or non-integrated, and each of the receptor panels is only used with one ion chamber. Use this procedure for calibrating all CR Film Plate systems. 1. Verify system is configured correctly per "CANON DR SYSTEM CONFIGURATION INSTRUCTIONS" procedure provided in this appendix. 2. Place a CR film plate in the tray (if CR system) and collimate down to film size. 3. If not already done so, access the AEC Calibration Menu (refer to Chapter 3). 4. Press the key next to the Film/Screen Combination field (upper left field) to select a film/screen combination to calibrate (e.g., "TABLE 40"). 5. The FILM SPEED field shows the default film speed setting for the selected film/screen combination (400). If not, press the up or down keys next to the FILM SPEED field until 400 film speed setting is displayed. 6. When film/screen combination name and film speed settings are correct, press the key next to the AEC OD Calibration field to proceed with AEC Calibration. The AEC Optical Density Calibration Screen is displayed:
AEC REF ADJUSTMENT KEYS
BASE OPTICAL DENSITY SELECT KEYS
Figure A-2. AEC Optical Density Calibration Screen 7. This screen is used to calibrate the digital receptor or CR film plate to a user defined optical density setting (e.g., 1.3). This is accomplished by comparing the digital receptor or CR film plate’s specified sensitivity values (refer to manufacturer’s installation and calibration documentation supplied with CR film plate) with the AEC REF value appearing on AEC Optical Density Calibration screen shown above.
Revision W
A-8
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix A AEC Calibration with DR or CR Film Plate
8. Set the ion chamber detector selection to middle detector and ensure x-ray tube is at correct SID. Ensure the ion chamber has been balanced. 9. Place 5 cm of acrylic in the X-ray beam. 10. Verify the Optical Density field is set to the desired optical density (e.g., "1.30"). If not, press the up or down key located next to the Optical Density field until the "base" optical density setting is equal to the desired optical density (1.30 in this example). Do not change
the optical density setting at any time during this procedure.
11. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA). 12. Process the CR film plate (if CR system) to determine sensitivity value (sometimes referred to as the "REX" or "S" value, depending on CR or DR system manufacturer). a. If the sensitivity value is within acceptable range as defined by the digital receptor or CR film plate manufacturer, press the Next Calibrate key to save the setting and proceed to Reciprocity Calibration. b. If not within range, adjust ion chamber MASTER GAIN as described in the "AEC Optical Density Calibration" procedure in Chapter 3, CALIBRATION. Note that the MASTER GAIN adjustment procedure is different depending on the generator AEC configuration (standard AEC or universal AEC). IMPORTANT! Following a calibration procedure, unless the "Save Calibrate" or "Measure, Calibrate" key is pressed, no change is made to the currently saved calibration value(s). 13. Press the key next to the Next Calibrate field to advance to Reciprocity Calibration. 14. The Reciprocity Calibration Screen is displayed; however, this calibration procedure is not necessary with systems equipped with digital receptor or CR film plate. 15. Press the key next to the Next Calibrate field.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
A-9
Appendix A AEC Calibration with DR or CR Film Plate
16. The AEC KV Calibration screen is displayed. KVP MEASURE SELECT FIELD USE UP AND DOWN ARROW KEYS TO ADJUST TO CORRECT VALUE BASE OPTICAL DENSITY SETTING
Figure A-3. AEC KV Calibration Screen 17. There are a total of six kV calibration points for a 125 kV system (50, 60, 80, 100, 110, and 120 kV); 150 kV systems require an additional two kV calibration points (130 and 140 kV). The image receptor and chamber field settings remain the same as those used in the AEC Optical Density Calibration procedure. 18. Place indicated thickness of acrylic (5 CM for first calibration point) in the X-ray beam.
NOTE Calibration of the first step (50 kVp) is not required as long as AEC Optical Density Calibration procedure in the previous steps was performed prior to AEC KV Calibration. A verification that the "Measured OD" is the same as the "Optical Density" setting is only necessary.
19. Insert a CR film plate and collimate down to film size. 20. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA). 21. Process the CR film plate (if CR system) to determine sensitivity value. a. If the sensitivity value is within acceptable range as defined by manufacturer, press the Measured OD field up or down adjustment keys to set the Measured OD value to Base Optical Optical Density setting (1.3, see Figure A-2). Press the Measure OD key to save the setting and proceed to the next kV calibration point. b. If not within range, press Measured OD field up or down adjustment keys, to increase or decrease sensitivity value. (Note: this adjustment will not be immediately seen in the image until after all AEC KVP Calibration steps are performed.) DO NOT TAKE ANY FURTHER EXPOSURES AT THIS SETTING. 22. Press the key next to the Measure OD field to save the first kV calibration point entry (50 kV, 5 CM). The AEC KV Calibration screen is updated for the next kV calibration point (60 kV, 10 CM).
Revision W
A-10
NOTE Decreasing the Measured OD value below the "Base Optical Density setting" will result in a higher sensitivity value reading of the image. Conversely, increasing the Measured OD value above the "Base Optical Density setting" will result in lower sensitivity value reading of the image.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix A AEC Calibration with DR or CR Film Plate
23. Repeat the previous steps for the 60, 80, 100, 110, 120, and, if 150 kV system, 130 and 140 kV calibration points, placing the specified thickness of acrylic in the x-ray beam as indicated on the AEC KV Calibration screen for each kV calibration point, and taking one exposure per kVp calibration point. 24. Upon completion of the final kV calibration point (i.e., 120 kV on 125 kV systems, 140 kV on 150 kV systems), press the key next to the Measure OD field. The field will now display Save Calibrate. Press this key once again to save the calibration data for the final kV calibration point. IMPORTANT! Unless the "Save Calibrate" key is pressed, the calibration data will not be saved. 25. Repeat AEC KVP Calibration procedure (steps 17 through 23) until all the measured sensitivity values are within required range. 26. Press the key next to the Next Calibrate field to return to the AEC Calibration menu. 27. This completes AEC calibration for this particular film/screen combination. Repeat AEC calibration procedures for all additional film/ screen combinations that will be used with the system. 28. Verify AEC calibration by taking several exposures in AEC mode and checking the resulting "REX" or "S" value. If necessary, repeat AEC calibration procedure to further adjust AEC accuracy.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
A-11
Appendix A AEC Calibration with DR or CR Film Plate
Copy Film/Screen Utility On the AEC Calibration Menu (refer to Chapter 3, CALIBRATION), the AEC calibration data copy utility is provided (Copy Film/Screen key). Following calibration of the first film/screen combination, stored AEC calibration data, such as the kV curves and AEC reference data, can be copied from the first film/screen combination to other film/screen combinations used with the system to reduce calibration time. Although both the AEC Optical Density Calibration and AEC KV Calibration procedures must still be performed, this will set the calibration values for the copied film/ screen combinations to fairly accurate settings, thereby reducing the number of exposures required to calibrate. Proceed as follows: 1. If not displayed, access the AEC Calibration Menu. 2. Press the key next to the Film/Screen field (upper left field) until the the film/screen combination you want to copy calibration data to is displayed. 3. Press the key next to the Copy Film/Screen field. 4. The following screen appears: DISPLAYS DESTINATION FILM/SCREEN NAME PRESS THIS KEY TO SELECT THE FILM/SCREEN TO COPY CALIBRATION DATA FROM
Figure A-4. Copy Film/Screen Screen 5. Copy Film/Screen Menu Screen 6. Press the key next to the "From" field until the name of the film/ screen combination from which calibration data will be copied appears. 7. Press the key next to the Copy Film/Screen field. All AEC calibration data is copied from Wall 40" film/screen combination to the Table 40" film/screen combination. To abort without copying, press the key next to the MAIN field. The AEC Calibration Menu is displayed. 8. Perform the AEC Optical Density and AEC KV Calibration procedures as described in the previous paragraphs for each copied film/screen combination.
Revision W
A-12
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix A AEC Calibration with DR or CR Film Plate
AEC Calibration Instructions - Single Panel, Dual Ion Chambers The following procedure is used to perform AEC calibration of generators used with a single receptor panel system (e.g., CXDI-50G or CXDI-50C portable receptor), integrated with the generator, where the single DR panel can be used with more than one ion chamber. Proceed as follows: 1. Verify system is configured correctly per "CANON DR SYSTEM CONFIGURATION INSTRUCTIONS" procedure provided in this appendix (in particular, "Universal" is set to "QV-800" as described in step 6). 2. Insert DR receptor in the most commonly used receptor cabinet (this cabinet’s ion chamber should be connected to WALL#1 connector A11J2 on AEC Control Board) and collimate down to proper image size. 3. If not already done so, access the AEC Calibration Menu (refer to Chapter 3). 4. Press the key next to the Film/Screen Combination field (upper left field) to select WALL 40" film/screen combination for calibration. 5. The FILM SPEED field shows the default film speed setting for the selected film/screen combination (400). If not, press the up or down keys next to the FILM SPEED field until 400 film speed setting is displayed. 6. When film/screen combination name and film speed settings are correct, press the key next to the AEC OD Calibration field to proceed with AEC Calibration. The AEC Optical Density Calibration Screen is displayed:
AEC REF ADJUSTMENT KEYS.
(ONLY ADJUST IF DENSITY CAN NOT BE ACHIEVED WITH MASTER GAIN POT. AT MAX. ADJUSTMENT)
BASE OPTICAL DENSITY SELECT KEYS
Figure A-5. AEC Optical Density Calibration Screen 7. This screen is used to calibrate the digital receptor or CR film plate to a user defined optical density setting (e.g., 1.30). This is accomplished by comparing the digital receptor’s specified sensitivity values
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
A-13
Appendix A AEC Calibration with DR or CR Film Plate
(refer to manufacturer’s installation and calibration documentation supplied with DR system) with the AEC REF value appearing in AEC Optical Density Calibration screen shown above. 8. Set the ion chamber detector selection to middle detector and ensure x-ray tube is at correct SID. Ensure the ion chamber has been balanced. 9. Verify the Optical Density field is set to the desired optical density (e.g., "1.30"). If not, press the up or down key located next to the Optical Density field until the "base" optical density setting is equal to the desired optical density (1.30 in this example). Do not change
the optical density setting at any time during this procedure.
10. Place 5 cm of acrylic in the X-ray beam. 11. On AEC Control Board AY40-031S, adjust ion chamber MASTER GAIN potentiometer A11R22, A11R23, and A11R24 to midrange. 12. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA). 13. Determine the sensitivity value (sometimes referred to as the "REX" or "S" value, depending on DR system manufacturer). a. If the sensitivity value is within acceptable range as defined by the digital receptor manufacturer, continue at step 14. b. If not within range, adjust the associated ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer and repeat exposure. Continue until the sensitivity ("REX" or "S") value is acceptable. Note the sensitivity value as it will be needed in a later step. 14. Move the DR receptor to the other receptor cabinet (it’s ion chamber should be connected to WALL#2 connector A11J3 on AEC Control Board) and collimate down to proper image size. 15. With 5 cm of acrylic in the X-ray beam, take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA). 16. Determine the sensitivity value (sometimes referred to as the "REX" or "S" value, depending on DR system manufacturer). 17. If necessary, adjust the ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer and repeat exposure until the sensitivity ("REX" or "S") value is the same as the value obtained for the previously calibrated ion chamber in step 13b. Note: If later on it becomes necessary to adjust the optical density of either receptor’s ion chamber, this should be done by adjusting potentiometer A11R23 on the AEC Control Board, and if further adjustment is needed, increasing or
Revision W
A-14
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix A AEC Calibration with DR or CR Film Plate
decreasing the AEC REF value shown in the AEC Optical Density Calibration Screen (see Figure A-4). IMPORTANT! Following a calibration procedure, unless the "Save Calibrate" or "Measure, Calibrate" key is pressed, no change is made to the currently saved calibration value(s). 18. Re-locate the DR receptor to the most commonly used receptor cabinet (this cabinet’s ion chamber should be connected to WALL#1 connector A11J2 on AEC Control Board). 19. Press the key next to the Next Calibrate field to advance to Reciprocity Calibration. 20. The Reciprocity Calibration Screen is displayed; however, this calibration procedure is not necessary with systems equipped with digital receptor. 21. Press the key next to the Next Calibrate field. 22. The AEC KV Calibration screen is displayed. KVP MEASURE SELECT FIELD
NOTE Calibration of the first step (50 kVp) is not required as long as AEC Optical Density Calibration procedure in the previous steps was performed prior to AEC KV Calibration. A verification that the "Measured OD" is the same as the "Optical Density" setting is all that is required.
USE UP AND DOWN ARROW KEYS TO ADJUST TO CORRECT VALUE BASE OPTICAL DENSITY SETTING
Figure A-6. AEC KV Calibration Screen 23. There are a total of six kV calibration points for a 125 kV system (50, 60, 80, 100, 110, and 120 kV); 150 kV systems require an additional two kV calibration points (130 and 140 kV). The image receptor and chamber field settings remain the same as those used in the AEC Optical Density Calibration procedure. 24. Place indicated thickness of acrylic (5 CM for first calibration point) in the X-ray beam. 25. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the center display box (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA).
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
A-15
Appendix A AEC Calibration with DR or CR Film Plate
26. Determine the sensitivity value. a. If the sensitivity value is within acceptable range as defined by manufacturer, press the Measured OD field up or down adjustment keys to set the Measured OD value to Base Optical Optical Density setting (1.3, see Figure A-2). Press the Measure OD key to save the setting and proceed to the next kV calibration point. b. If not within range, press Measured OD field up or down adjustment keys, to increase or decrease sensitivity value. (Note: this adjustment will not be immediately seen in the image until after all AEC KVP Calibration steps are performed.) DO NOT TAKE ANY FURTHER EXPOSURES AT THIS SETTING. 27. Press the key next to the Measure OD field to save the first kV calibration point entry (50 kV, 5 CM). The AEC KV Calibration screen is updated for the next kV calibration point (60 kV, 10 CM). 28. Repeat the previous steps for the 60, 80, 100, 110, 120, and, if 150 kV system, 130 and 140 kV calibration points, placing the specified thickness of acrylic in the x-ray beam as indicated on the AEC KV Calibration screen for each kV calibration point, and taking one exposure per kVp calibration point. 29. Upon completion of the final kV calibration point (i.e., 120 kV on 125 kV systems, 140 kV on 150 kV systems), press the key next to the Measure OD field. The field will now display Save Calibrate. Press this key once again to save the calibration data for the final kV calibration point. IMPORTANT! Unless the "Save Calibrate" key is pressed, the calibration data will not be saved. 30. Repeat AEC KVP Calibration procedure (steps 17 through 23) until all the measured sensitivity values are within required range. 31. Press the key next to the Next Calibrate field to return to the AEC Calibration menu.
NOTE Decreasing the Measured OD value below the "Base Optical Density setting" will result in a higher sensitivity value reading of the image. Conversely, increasing the Measured OD value above the "Base Optical Density setting" will result in lower sensitivity value reading of the image.
32. This completes AEC calibration for this particular film/screen combination. Repeat AEC calibration procedures for all additional film/ screen combinations that will be used with the system. 33. Verify AEC calibration by taking several exposures in AEC mode and checking the resulting "REX" or "S" value. If necessary, repeat AEC calibration procedure to further adjust AEC accuracy.
Revision W
A-16
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix
B
CALIBRATION (Agfa DiRex)
B-1
B-2
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
THIS SECTION NOT APPLICABLE TO QUEST, E-ZVET, Q-VISION, & TOSHIBA HF SERIES GENERATORS
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
B-3
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
OVERVIEW This appendix provides instructions for configuring and calibrating the HF Series X-ray generator using DiRex interface program installed on the Agfa CR system’s workstation computer (refer to DiRex Service Manual DC30-088 for system interconnection and software OCP installation instructions). With DiRex, the workstation computer functions as the generator operator control panel (OCP). The X-ray generator must be equipped with the "Q-Connect option" (i.e., CR/DR system integration) to enable DiRex functionality. NEMA Standards Publication/No. XR8-1979(R1994), Test Methods for Diagnostic X-ray Machines for Use During Initial Installation is recommended as a reference. REQUIRED TOOLS AND MATERIALS The following lists the tools and materials required to perform the procedures contained in this chapter: •
Digital Voltmeter: Fluke Model 87 (or equivalent)
•
Non-invasive kV, mAs, mR meter or Radcal Dynalyzer III (or equivalent)
•
Oscilloscope, 50 Mhz storage: Tek 2210 (or equivalent)
•
5 CM, 10 CM, 15 CM, 25 and 30 CM acrylic phantoms (required for calibrating systems equipped with QG-AEC option).
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION/CALIBRATION The HF Series x-ray generator has been factory configured and calibrated. It is necessary, however, to perform the following procedures to verify system performance. Perform the procedures in the sequence presented, unless otherwise instructed. ACCESSING SERVICE MODE Calibration and configuration can only be performed by accessing the X-ray generator’s Service Mode. To gain access to the Service Mode, password entry is required. This is to prevent unintended and/or unauthorized changes to system settings. To access the Service Options Menu, proceed as follows: 1. Ensure the DR or CR system’s Computer Workstation is properly connected to the generator, and the DiRex System (i.e., Quantum/Agfa Integration) software is installed and configured in accordance with the instructions provided in DiRex Service Manual DC30-088. 2. Ensure the Power/Expose Control Box (AY20-265) is properly connected to the generator as described in Chapter 2, ASSEMBLY & INSTALLATION. 3. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position. 4. Set the power on/standby switch on the Power/Expose Control Box to the standby ( ) position, then to the on ( lamp should illuminate.
Revision W
B-4
) position. The green power LED
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
5. From the Main OCP Overlay Menu, double click the generator status icon. The "Enter Password" screen appears (see Figure 3-1.).
READY INDICATOR
Figure B-1. Enter Password Screen 6. In the Enter Password screen, enter the default Service Technician password (58623) using the keypad, then press Enter. This password enables access to Service Mode for modification of system configuration, calibration and settings.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
B-5
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
7. Upon validation of the password, the Service Options Menu displays:
Figure B-2. Service Options Menu The Service Options Menu offers the following selections:
Revision W
B-6
•
Generator Service - Accesses the generator configuration, generator calibration, Factory Reset, and Statistics utilities.
•
Remoting Service - Accesses the Device Settings and System Settings utilities. (These utilities are described in detail in the DiRex Service Manual DC30-088.)
•
Exit Application - Exits the Quantum generator OCP software application (the Main OCP Overlay Menu will no longer appear on the Workstation Computer)
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
Press the Generator Service button to continue with generator configuration and calibration. The Generator Service Menu appears:
Figure B-3. Generator Service Menu The Generator Service Menu offers the following selections: •
Configuration - The Configuration utility provides access to configuration settings, such as AEC type, rotor drive settings, tube type, etc.
•
Calibration - The Calibration utility provides access to filament, mA, kVp and AEC calibrations (when equipped).
•
Factory Reset - Accesses the Factory Reset function, which provides a list of resettable system calibration and configuration parameters including: Tube curves, AEC (AEC calibration values), History (Error Log), kV, mA, and filament calibration values.
•
Statistics - Provides access to generator and tube usage data, and error and warning reports (refer to Chapter 5, SERVICE MAINTENANCE for more details).
Selecting the Minimize button reduces the Generator Service menu to a button (labelled "Service") visible next to the Generator Control Panel Overlay. Pressing the Service button re-opens the Generator Service menu.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
B-7
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
FACTORY RESET The Factory Reset Menu provides Calibrations and AEC Calibrations reset functions as well as the Backup Configuration utility. Factory Reset may be necessary following tube replacement or when troubleshooting abnormal system behavior.
Figure B-4. Factory Reset Menu Factory Reset The Calibrations Reset function resets the currently saved kV, mA, and filament calibration constants to factory default settings; the AEC Calibrations Reset function resets the currently saved AEC Optical Density and AEC kV calibration constants for all previously calibrated film screens to factory default settings. To perform factory reset, proceed as follows: 1. Press the Reset button corresponding with either "Calibrations" or "AEC Calibrations" shown in Figure 3-4. The Reset Calibrations Screen will display:
Revision W
B-8
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
Note: The Reset Generator Calibrations pop-up screen is shown in the sample screen below. The Reset AEC calibrations pop-up screen (not shown) is similar in operation.
Figure B-5. Reset Calibrations Screen (Typical) NOTE
Following a Factory Reset, the KV, filament, mA and AEC (if equipped) Calibration procedures, described in this chapter, must be performed.
2. Press Yes to continue with reset, press No to cancel reset. The system returns to the Factory Reset Menu (Figure 3-4). Backup Configuration Utility The Backup Configuration utility saves the current configuration settings and calibration data in a "backup file". This data can later be restored back to the generator following factory reset, thereby eliminating the need to re-calibrate the generator. However, re-verification of calibration is required. To create a backup configuration file, press the Save button corresponding with "Backup Configuration" shown in Figure 3-4. The system overwrites existing backup data with current system data and updates the backup date and time fields appearing on the Factory Reset Menu.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
B-9
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
GENERATOR CONFIGURATION Press the Configuration button to access the generator configuration utility. The Load Configuration From menu displays:
Figure B-6. Load Configuration From Menu The Load Configuration From menu offers three choices:
Revision W
B-10
•
Active - Select to load the currently active configuration (This option should be selected under normal circumstances; only when a problem occurs with the system should the Backup or Last options be selected)
•
Backup - Select to load the last backed up configuration. (Refer to Factory Reset description in this chapter for instructions on creating a backup file of the generator calibration data.)
•
Last - Select to load the last automatically-saved generator configuration (Note: The configuration file is automatically backed up every time the Workstation Computer establishes a connection to the generator.)
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
It should be noted that changes made to any of the generator configuration parameters, as described in the following paragraphs, will not be saved until confirmation is made in the Activate Configuration screen shown below:
Figure B-7. Activate Configuration Screen
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
B-11
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
In the Load Configuration From menu, select Active. The Configuration Menu displays:
Figure B-8. Configuration Menu The Configuration Menu provides access to the system's configuration settings. For proper operation of the generator, the settings must accurately reflect the actual configuration of both the generator and the components to which it is interfaced. Typically, these settings are made at the factory in accordance with sales order specifications. However, it is recommended that you review the current configuration settings for accuracy. The following briefly describes the various Configuration Menu selections:
Revision W
B-12
•
Generator Settings: Accesses the Generator Settings screen, which contains Derating, Timeout, AEC Board Type, and Backup mAs settings
•
Tube Settings: Accesses the Tube Type Setting screen, for selection of x-ray tube model used with system
•
Ion Chamber Settings: Accesses the Ion Chamber Configuration screen, which is used to configure each ion chamber interfaced with the system (two separate ion chambers, of either slope or level type, can be interfaced to the generator)
•
Copy Film Screen: Accesses the Copy Film/Screen Menu. The Copy Film/Screen Menu is a utility that enables AEC calibration data to be
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
copied from one calibrated film/screen combination setting to another (for example, it is useful for copying "Wall 40" to "Table 40 " film/screen combination on systems configured with both a wall stand and table). To change a configuration setting, press the button next to the configuration selection to be changed. The following paragraphs provide specific instructions for setting each of the available configuration selections. Generator Settings The Generator Settings Screen, shown below, displays the generator model, power output derating (presented as a percentage of total power output (kW) capacity), Timeout (sleep mode), AEC Board Type, Backup MAS, and Digital Receptor On/Off settings.
PRESS TO SCROLL DOWN LIST FOR ADDITIONAL SETTINGS
Figure B-9. Generator Settings Screen 1. Derating - The derating function is used to limit the output of the system to a percentage of the maximum energy capacity. To derate the energy output, press the Modify button adjacent to the Derating field to choose a derating percentage (choices are 80%, 85%, 90%, 95% or 100% [i.e., no derating]).
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
B-13
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
2. Generator Timeout: The "timeout" period selected represents the amount of delay time, after which if no user activity is detected, the system automatically enters Automatic Power Stand By mode. This mode is entered to help reduce power consumption while protecting system electronics. The timeout period is selectable in 30 minute increments between 0 minutes up to 180 minutes. If "Infinity" is selected, the generator will not timeout, however, the filament will turn off if one hour of inactivity. 3. AEC Board Type: Displays the optional AEC Board type a. Select "Standard" if generator is equipped with standard type AEC Board A11 (AY40-031S) b. Select "Universal" if generator is equipped with universal type AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S) c.
Select "None" if generator is not equipped with optional AEC
4. Backup MAS: Displays the current system-wide backup mAs setting effective on all AEC exposures. The maximum back up mAs setting is 600; note that on certain model generators, such as the Stored Energy models, the maximum mAs capability of the generator is less than 600 mAs. Therefore, the backup mAs setting should not exceed the maximum MAS output of the generator. Refer to Chapter 1, SPECIFICATIONS for a list of the mAs ratings by model number. 5. Digital Receptor: Accesses the digital receptor "PREP HOLD" setting (On or Off). Setting the Prep Hold setting to On configures the generator to send a "Prep Hold" signal to the DR system (notifies the DR system that a Prep cycle has been initiated; the generator must receive a "Prep Hold Release" signal from the DR system to proceed with the Expose cycle). Setting the Prep Hold setting to Off configures the generator for "normal" operation (i.e., non-interrupted Prep cycle). 6. Press the Back button on the lower left side of the screen. The system returns to the Configuration Menu (see Figure 3-8).
Revision W
B-14
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
Tube Settings The Tube Settings Screen, shown below, displays the current tube model and rotor settings. Also provided are the Tube Derating (Tube%) and Heat Warning (Heat% Limit) settings. The tube model and rotor settings are preset at the factory and normally should not be changed, except after replacing the existing tube with a different type tube. (Note: Consult Quantum Service
Department before attempting to re-configure the generator with a tube type that is different than the factory-configured tube type.)
Figure B-10. Tube Settings Screen 1. To change the tube model setting, press the Modify button adjacent to the Model field. The Model sub-menu will display; find the correct tube model (use the Next button to display additional tube models), then select the button with the correct model number appearing on it. 2. To change the tube rotor setting, press the Modify button adjacent to the Rotor field. Scroll through the available rotor drive settings: 50 Hz (no high speed starter), 60 Hz (no high speed starter), AID external highspeed starter (AID HSS), or Quantum internal high-speed starter (QMI HSS).
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
B-15
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
NOTE: On systems equipped with high-speed starter option (HSS), tube "high-speed" mode will only be activated when selected exposure factors exceed the limits used for low-speed operation. 3. The Tube Derating setting provides derating of the tube’s maximum mAs output in percentages of 80%, 85%, 90%, 95% or 100% (i.e., no derating). For example, if at a particular kV and mA the tube normally allows a 10 mAs exposure, then at 80% derating, the tube would permit only an 8 mAs exposure. Derating the tube can extend the life of the tube. Press the button adjacent to the Derating field to choose a derating percentage. 4. The Heat Warning (heat%) provides a heat protection function for the xray tube. For example, setting the Heat Warning for 80% will cause the generator to produce an audible alarm and a visual "Heat Alarm" indication on the OCP when the tube has reached 80% of its total heat unit capacity. The total tube heat unit capacity is dependant upon the tube type. The Heat Warning setting has an adjustment range of anywhere between 50% up to 100% in 10% increments. Note: At 100% setting, the heat alarm is effectively disabled. Press the button next to the Heat Warning field to select the percentage of the total tube heat capacity at which alarm activation will occur. 5. Press the Back button on the lower left side of the screen. The system returns to the Configuration Menu (see Figure 3-8).
Revision W
B-16
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
Ion Chamber Configuration The Select Ion Chamber Menu, shown below, displays available ion chambers that can be interfaced to the HF Series X-ray generator. This screen also provides relay on/off settings for activating either the table and/or wall receptor when the receptor buttons on the OCP are pressed. Note: On systems equipped with a "Standard" type AEC Board (AY40-031S), the "Wall 2" and "Aux" selections are not used. These choices are only effective if the generator is configured with "Universal" type AEC Board (AY40-027S).
Figure B-11. Select Ion Chamber Menu 1. Press the button corresponding with the ion chamber you want to configure: Wall, Table, Wall 2, or Aux (Wall 2 and Aux only used on systems equipped with AEC Board A11, AY40-027S). Be sure that the selected ion chamber is properly interfaced to AEC Board A11 as described in Chapter 2, ASSEMBLY & INSTALLATION.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
B-17
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
2. The system displays the ION CHAMBER Configuration Screen, as shown in the example below:
PRESS THESE BUTTONS TO MODIFY A DETECTOR
PRESS TO SCROLL DOWN LIST FOR ADDITIONAL SETTINGS
NOTE: AID ICX-153 or ICX-1153 RIGHT LOAD USES THIS CONFIGURATION. FOR AID ICX-153 or ICX-1153 LEFT LOAD, SET A=3 AND C=2. Figure B-12. Ion Chamber Settings Screen The Ion Chamber Settings Screen displays the assignment of ion chamber detectors (detector A, B, and C) with respect to the generator’s ion chamber detector select signals (i.e., FIELD SELECT 1, FIELD SELECT 2 and FIELD SELECT 3) generated by AEC Control Board A11. That is, assigning "2" to Field "A" enables detector "2" when the UPPER LEFT chamber detector field is selected at the Operator Control Panel. The Ion Chamber Settings Screen also provides settings that facilitate proper compatibility of the generator with ion chambers that operate differently. These include Ion Chamber Type (Slope/Level), Polarity (+/-), Output (Normal/Inverted), and Relay On/Off o settings. 3. Press the Modify button adjacent to the ion chamber detector (Field A, Field B or Field C) and choose the desired detector setting (1, 2, 3 or Off).
Revision W
B-18
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
4. The "Type" setting determines if the ion chamber connected to the selected receptor AEC output is of the "slope/ramp" (Slope) or a DC Level (Level) type. This setting is ignored unless the "Universal AEC" selection is chosen. The "Standard AEC" board should always be set to Slope. 5. The "Polarity" setting (+ or -) should correspond with the polarity of the ion chamber on the selected receptor port (i.e., a (+) positive logic [active high] or (-) negative logic [active low] model). The positive logic model presents a DC voltage or ramp ranging from 0 to some positive voltage to indicate exposure value. The negative logic model presents a DC voltage or ramp ranging from 0 to a negative voltage. This setting is ignored unless the "Universal AEC" selection is chosen. The "Standard AEC" board is always +. 6. The "Output" setting determines the sense of the signals that select the individual field for the chamber. If "Output" is set to Normal, the idle (non-PREP/EXPOSE) state of the individual field selection is "1" and the state during PREP/EXPOSE is "0" if the field is selected (called "Low Active"). If "Output" is set to Inverted the idle (non-PREP/EXPOSE) state of the field selection is "0" and the state during PREP/EXPOSE is "1" if the field is selected (called "High Active"). This setting is ignored unless the "Universal AEC" selection is chosen. The "Standard AEC" board is should always be set to Normal. 7.
The "Wall Relay" setting controls whether or not the "Wall Relay" on the Universal AEC Board A11 AY40-027S is energized. Similarly, the "Table Relay" setting controls whether or not the "Table Relay" on the Universal AEC Board A11 AY40-027S is energized. These settings provide +28 VDC output for operation of a Siemens bucky. If this field is set to On, the relay is asserted when: • The WALL or TABLE receptor button that selects this receptor is depressed on the OCP or • When a pre-programmed (APR) technique requests this receptor The wall or table relay will remain energized until a receptor with "Wall Relay Off" or "Table Relay Off", respectively, is selected. Depending on the configuration of the generator, set the receptor relays as indicated in Table 3-2 or 3-3.
8. Press the Back button on the lower left side of the screen. The system returns to the Configuration Menu (see Figure 3-8). IMPORTANT: The AID ICX-153 or ICX-1153 ion chamber, which is the default chamber type shipped with standard AEC type generators, requires that detector "A" = 2, "B" = 1, and "C" = 3. The factory default orientation of the ion chamber mounting in the bucky is with the front side toward the tube. However, it may be necessary to mount the chamber with the back side forward (e.g., for left side loading wall stands). In this case, in the Ion Chamber Settings screen, simply switch assignment of cham-
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
B-19
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
ber detector A to "3" and detector C to "2". No wiring modifications are necessary. Table B-1. Ion Chamber Settings for Generator with Standard AEC (AEC Board AY40-031S) Standard AEC Systems Setting
Wall Ion Chamber Settings
Table Ion Chamber Settings
Polarity
+
+
Wall Relay
Off
Off
Table Relay
Off
Off
Invert
No
No
Slope/Lvl
Slope
Slope
Table B-2. Ion Chamber Settings for Generator with Universal AEC Option (AEC Board AY40-027S) Universal AEC Systems Ion Chamber Type Siemens (Level)
AID (Slope) Tomo Systems
AID (Slope) Non-Tomo Systems
Setting
Wall Ion Chamber Settings
Table Ion Chamber Settings
Wall Ion Chamber Settings
Table Ion Chamber Settings
Wall Ion Chamber Settings
Table Ion Chamber Settings
Polarity
+
+
+
+
+
+
Wall Relay
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Table Relay
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Invert
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Slope/Lvl
Level
Level
Slope
Slope
Slope
Slope
Table 3-2 shows the ion chamber and receptor settings for the generator when equipped with standard AEC (i.e., Standard AEC Board A11 (AY40-031S) is installed). Table 3-3 shows the ion chamber and receptor settings for the generator when equipped with universal AEC (i.e., Universal AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S) is installed).
Revision W
B-20
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
Film/Screen Default Settings The Film/Screen Default Settings Screen (see below) is used to configure the default film/screens associated with the various image receptors used with the generator. These settings apply only during AEC mode exposures. Note
that the film/screen(s) selected for use must be calibrated according to the AEC Calibration procedures described in this chapter, otherwise, AEC operation will likely not operate optimally.
The generator has been pre-configured with nine different film/screen combination selections designated "Wall40", "Wall72", "Table40", "100 Speed", "200 Speed", "800 Speed", "Canon", "Agfa", and "Digital" to choose from. The Film/Screen Default Settings screen, shown below, displays the current film/screen combination settings. To change the default film/screen settings, proceed as follows
THESE FILM/ SCREENS ARE USED ONLY ON UNIVERSAL TYPE AEC SYSTEMS
Figure B-13. Film Screen Default Settings Screen 1. Wall40 setting: Press the MODIFY button adjacent to the Wall40 field. The Select Film Screen sub-menu will display; press the button with the appropriate film/screen name appearing on it (use the Next button to
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
B-21
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
display additional choices). The chosen film/screen combination is now the default film/screen combination used when the "WALL 40" image receptor is selected for exposures during AEC exposure mode. 2. Wall72 setting: Press the MODIFY button adjacent to the Wall72 field. The Select Film Screen sub-menu will display; press the button with the appropriate film/screen name appearing on it (use the Next button to display additional choices). The chosen film/screen combination is now the default film/screen combination used when the "WALL 72" image receptor is selected for exposures during AEC exposure mode. 3. Table40 setting: Press the MODIFY button adjacent to the Table40 field. The Select Film Screen sub-menu will display; press the button with the appropriate film/screen name appearing on it (use the Next button to display additional choices). The chosen film/screen combination is now the default film/screen combination used when the "TABLE" image receptor is selected for exposures during AEC exposure mode. 4. Aux setting (enabled only on generators equipped with "Universal" type AEC [i.e., AEC Board A11 AY40-027S is installed]): Press the MODIFY button adjacent to the Aux field. The Select Film Screen sub-menu will display; press the button with the appropriate film/screen name appearing on it (use the Next button to display additional choices). The chosen film/screen combination is now the default film/screen combination used when the "AUX" image receptor is selected for exposures during AEC exposure mode.
NOTE
The "default" film/screen combination settings automatically link specific calibrated film/ screen combinations used in non-APR and APR exposures using AEC. However, the operator may choose any available calibrated film/ screen combination using the Film/Screen selection buttons provided in the AEC and APR mode screens.
5. Wall2 setting (enabled only on generators equipped with "Universal" type AEC [i.e., AEC Board A11 AY40-027S is installed]): Press the MODIFY button adjacent to the Wall2 field. The Select Film Screen sub-menu will display; press the button with the appropriate film/screen name appearing on it (use the Next button to display additional choices). The chosen film/screen combination is now the default film/screen combination used when the "WALL2" image receptor is selected for exposures during AEC exposure mode. 6. Press the Back button on the lower left side of the screen. The system returns to the Configuration Menu (see Figure 3-8).
Revision W
B-22
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
Copy Film Screen Utility The Copy Film Screen utility enables stored AEC calibration data (kV curves, AEC reference data) to be copied from a calibrated film/screen combination to another film/screen combination in order to reduce overall calibration time. For example, if calibration was completed for the wall stand 40 inch SID film/ screen combination (i.e., Wall40), its calibration data can be copied to the uncalibrated table 40 inch SID film/screen combination (i.e., Table40) film/ screen using this utility. Although all required AEC Calibration procedures must still be performed, this will set the calibration values for the Table40 film/screen combination to fairly accurate settings, thereby reducing the number of exposures required for calibration. The Copy Film/Screen utility is most beneficial when the film screen combination being copied to has the same cassette screen, film speed, ion chamber and grid as the film/screen combination it is being copied from. Nevertheless, calibration time is likely to be reduced even if one or more of these elements differ. Proceed as follows: 1. On the Configuration Menu, press Copy Film Screen button (see Figure 3-8). The Selected Calibrated Film Screen menu appears:
Figure B-14. Select Calibrated Film Screen Menu 2. Select a previously calibrated Film/Screen combination to copy calibration data from (use the Next button to display additional choices).
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
B-23
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
3. The Select Destination Film Screen menu appears:
Figure B-15. Select Destination Film Screen Menu CAUTION! Before proceeding, verify the "from" and "to" film screen copy selections are correct. Selecting Copy Film Screen as directed in the next step will cause calibration data for the film screen being copied "to" to be overwritten with the calibration data of the "from" film/screen. 4. Select the film/screen combination to copy the calibration data to (use the Next button to display additional choices). A copy confirmation pop-up will appear. To continue with copying, select Yes; to cancel without copying select No. 5. The system returns to the Configuration Menu (see Figure 3-8). If Yes was selected, all AEC calibration data has been copied from the previously calibrated film/screen combination to the destination film/ screen combination. If No was selected, the operation was aborted without copying. 6. Press the Back button on the lower left side of the Configuration screen. The system returns to the Configuration Menu (see Figure 3-8).
Revision W
B-24
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
GENERATOR CALIBRATION CAUTION! Before calibrating unit, perform warm-up procedures recommended by tube manufacturer or the warm-up procedure described in Chapter 3 of the Operator’s Manual. WARNING! The following calibration procedures involve taking x-ray exposures. All personnel should be behind protective barriers during exposure. X-rays can be dangerous unless proper precautions and procedures are adhered to. To access the generator calibration functions, press the button next to the Calibration field in the Service Options Menu (see Figure 3-3). The Calibration menu displays, shown below:
Figure B-16. Calibration Menu The Calibration menu provides access to the system's various calibration functions. The generator was pre-calibrated at the factory, however, the system will need to be re-calibrated to assure proper operation, verify compliance and set
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
B-25
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
AEC optical density (on systems equipped with AEC option). These procedures should be performed in the order presented in this chapter. The following is a brief description of each of the Calibration Menu selections: •
A/D: Accesses the analog-to-digital (A-D) converters calibration function
•
KV: Accesses KV calibration function
•
Filament: Accesses tube filament offset calibration function
•
MA: Accesses mA calibration function
•
AEC: Accesses the AEC optical density and AEC kVp calibration functions (active on systems equipped with AEC option only). Note that all of the AEC Calibrations must be performed for each table and/or film/screen combination used with the x-ray system. Selection of each film/screen type used with the system is explained in "CONFIGURATION SETTINGS" paragraph described previously in this chapter.
•
Back: Returns to the Generator Service Menu. This function is also provided in each of the above calibration screens, from which you are returned to the main Calibration Menu
The paragraphs that follow describe the procedures for performing each of the above calibration functions. Following initial system installation, these procedures should be performed in the order presented in this chapter. General Calibration Procedure Notes The following notes apply in general to all calibration procedures, including AEC calibration procedures. Please review these notes prior to performing calibration.
Revision W
B-26
•
Press the Next button to advance to the next calibration procedure.
•
Press the Back button to return to the previous calibration procedure.
•
Each calibration screen displays the correct KV, MA, time and thickness (in CM) value required for performing a particular calibration procedural step. However, always ensure the correct values are set prior to performing each procedural step.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
A/D Calibration The A/D (analog/digital converter) calibration utility is used to calibrate, against a traceable calibrated voltage measurement instrument (such as a DMM), various essential supply voltages utilized by the x-ray generator. After A/D calibration has been performed, the A/D calibration utility may then be used as a diagnostic tool allowing the technician to "read out" these voltage measurements without having to remove the cover from the generator cabinet and without connecting a meter. Table B-3 shows the various voltage levels (with tolerances) that can be calibrated using this utility, and it provides the location of the test point at which a calibrated voltmeter must be connected for measuring the actual voltage level: Table B-3. A/D Calibration Voltages Voltage Level
Calibration Accuracy
Test Point Measurement Location
Cathode
±8 VDC
+/- bus bars on Capacitor Bank next to Power Module A19 (left side looking into generator cabinet)
Anode
±8 VDC
+/- bus bars on Capacitor Bank next to Power Module A18 (right side looking into generator cabinet)
+5VDC
±0.1 VDC
TP1 on Logic Board AY40-006S
+15VDC
±0.2 VDC
TP3 on KVP Control Board AY40-003S
-15VDC
±0.2 VDC
TP5 on KVP Control Board AY40-003S
Regulated +24
±0.3 VDC
TP8 on Power Supply Board AY40-005T
Unreg. +24V
±0.3 VDC
Terminal TB2-1 on Interface Board AY40-023T (or AY40-034T)
WARNING! The following procedure requires that power be applied to the generator. Extreme care must be exercised to ensure the safety of service or other personnel in the area. The following procedure calibrates the generator to verify accurate system measurement of the above operating voltages. The same procedure applies to any of the voltage levels available for selection. Voltage measurement accuracy is verified using your pre-calibrated voltmeter (traceable to NIST standard) as the benchmark. Once calibrated, the generator’s CPU continuously monitors these internal voltages and will terminate or not allow exposure if specified tolerances are exceeded. Proceed as follows:
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
B-27
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
1. In the Calibration Menu, press AD button (see Figure B-16). The AD Calibration Menu appears:
VOLTAGE SELECTIONS
PRESS TO SCROLL UP/ DOWN LIST FOR ADDITIONAL SETTINGS
Figure B-17. AD Calibration Menu 2. Refer to Table B-3 and connect a voltmeter to the test point corresponding with the voltage level selected for calibration. 3. Select a voltage level to calibrate by pressing its corresponding Calibrate button (choices are Cathode (400V), Anode (400V), +15 VDC, -15 VDC, Regulated +24 VDC, Unregulated +24 VDC, and +5 VDC). For this example, "Cathode" is selected.
Revision W
B-28
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
4. A keypad will display enabling input of the actual (measured) voltage level, such as the sample Cathode voltage input screen shown below: ENTER VOLTAGE READING FROM METER
Figure B-18. Sample AD Voltage Input Screen (Cathode is shown) 5. On the voltmeter, observe the measured voltage value. Ideally, the value appearing in the AD Voltage Input Screen (below "Cathode") will match the reading on the voltmeter. If not, enter the measured value using the keypad. 6. Press Enter button to save the calibration entry. 7.
Repeat above steps for each of the other AD voltage levels.
8. Press the Back button on the lower left side of the AD Calibration screen. The system returns to the Calibration Menu (see Figure 3-16).
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
B-29
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
kV Calibration This procedure calibrates the generator to verify accurate system measurement of peak tube potential (kVp). The generator’s ability to measure peak tube potential accurately is verified using a pre-calibrated kVp meter (Dynalyzer or equivalent) as a benchmark. Proceed as follows: 1. In the Calibration Menu, press KV button (see Figure B-16). The KV Calibration screen appears:
KV INCREASE/ DECREASE BUTTONS
Figure B-19. KV Calibration Screen WARNING! To avoid injury to personnel, ensure that system power is removed prior to making and removing any electrical connections. 2. Connect a kVp bleeder tank in series between X-ray tube and the generator’s H.V. Transformer (A17), or use a non-invasive kVp meter. 3. Verify 50 KVP appears in the KV Calibration Screen and "Next Measure" appears on the top right button as shown in Figure B-19.
Revision W
B-30
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
4. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the KV Calibration Screen (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA, 100 mS). 5. On the kVp meter, observe the measured kV value. (Ideally, this value should be 50 kVp.) 6. If not 50 kVp, press the 50 kVp adjustment button (located directly below "Measured KVP#1" label). Find the measured KVP value in the scrollable list, select it then press Enter. The values appearing in the list are in onetenth increments. 7.
Press Next Measure button to proceed to 100 kV calibration setting.
8. Verify 100 KVP appears on the KV Calibration Screen and "Save Calibration" now appears on the top right button. 9. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the KV Calibration Screen (i.e., 100 kVp, 200L mA, 100 mS). 10. On the kVp meter, observe the measured kV value. (Ideally, this value should be 100 kVp.) 11. If not 100 kVp, press the 100 kVp adjustment button (located directly below "Measured KVP#2" label). Find the measured KVP value in the scrollable list, select it then press Enter. 12. Press Save Calibration button. The KV Calibration Screen (First Measure) should be displayed. 13. Repeat KV calibration for both 50 and 100 kVp until indicated and measured kVp values agree to within 4% tolerance. 14. To proceed to filament calibration, press the Next button.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
B-31
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
Filament Offset Calibration This procedure establishes the filament current offset and gain corrections. Filament current measurement accuracy is verified using a pre-calibrated Dynalyzer (or equivalent), non-invasive kV meter, or mAs meter as a benchmark. Ensure precision of the measurement instrument is sufficient enough to assure generator accuracy requirements can be met. The Filament Offset Calibration procedure may be performed using an oscilloscope, however, it is not the preferred method. Using this method, the objective is to achieve the "flattest" possible large and small filament waveforms, with no spikes or peaks as shown in Figure B-20 below.
Small Filament Before
After
FLAT CURVE, NO PEAKS
Large Filament Before
After
FLAT CURVE, NO PEAKS
Figure B-20. Filament Offset Current Measurement (Using an Oscilloscope)
Revision W
B-32
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
Access the Filament Calibration Menu (shown below) and proceed as follows:
FILAMENT OFFSET INCREASE/ DECREASE BUTTONS
Figure B-21. Filament Calibration Screen WARNING! To avoid injury to personnel, ensure system power is removed prior to making and removing any electrical connections. 1. If using a Dynalyzer, a kVp bleeder tank should be connected in series between tube and High-Voltage (H.V.) Transformer A17.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
B-33
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
2. If using a mAs meter, remove two (2) green/yellow wires marked "MAS METER", connected to A17P1-9 and A17P1-10, from the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure B-22). Connect the mAs meter in series between removed wires. (Important: These wires must be re-connected when finished calibration.)
MAS METER CONNECTION
MAS METER HOOK-UP WIRES (NORMAL POSITION) H.V. TANK (TOP VIEW)
MAS METER
GROUND STUD
MAS METER LEADS
GREEN/YELLOW WIRES (2X)
GREEN/YELLOW WIRES (2X) CONNECTOR A17P1
HIGH VOLTAGE TANK A17 (AY20-031 or AY20-032)
GENERATOR CABINET (PCB DOOR OPEN)
Figure B-22. MAS Meter Connection
Revision W
B-34
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
3. If using an oscilloscope, connect the scope leads between test point TP7 on KVP Control Board A2 (AY40-003S) and ground. Set scope for 1.0 volt/ division, and 50 ms/division time base. This will give a 100 mA/volt equivalent for mA measurement as shown in the sample waveforms in Figure B-20. 4. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the Filament Calibration Screen (i.e., 70 kVp, 75s mA, 15 msec). If using an oscilloscope, set time to 50 msec. 5. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or mAs meter, observe the measured mA value. (Ideally, this value should be 75 mA or 1.125 mAs.) If using an oscilloscope, observe the small filament current pulse waveform for "flatness" (see Figure B-20). 6. If not 75 mA, or if waveform is not flat, press the small filament offset value button (located directly below "Filament Small" label). The filament offset amperage values (in hundredth increments as shown in the sample screen below) range from +10.00 down to -10.00, with 0.00 equating to no offset applied to the tube’s default filament curve. To increase mA, raise the filament offset value; to decrease mA, lower the filament offset value.
Figure B-23. Sample Filament Offset Values Screen 7.
Re-take exposure at same settings and adjust small filament offset value if necessary. Repeat this step until measured mA equals 75 or when waveform is sufficiently flat. Press the Small Filament button to proceed.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
B-35
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
8. The large filament calibration screen is displayed. Note the "Filament Small" button is now yellow to indicate small filament calibration is complete. 9. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the Filament Calibration Screen (i.e., 70 kVp, 300L mA, 15 msec). If using an oscilloscope, set time to 50 msec. 10. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or mAs meter, observe the measured current value. (Ideally, this value should be 300 mA or 4.5 mAs.) 11. If not 300 mA, or if waveform is not flat, press the large filament offset value button (located directly below "Filament Large" label). To increase mA, raise the filament offset value; to decrease mA, lower the filament offset value. 12. Re-take exposure at same settings and adjust large filament offset value if necessary. Repeat this step until measured mA is 300 or when waveform is sufficiently flat. If so, filament calibration is complete. 13. To proceed to mA calibration, press the Next button. Note: An error message appears if the filament current is set too low, which indicates the filament offset value for the filament being calibrated is set too low or high. If this occurs, increase or decrease the filament current.
Revision W
B-36
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
MA Calibration This procedure calibrates the generator to verify accurate system measurement of tube current (mA). Current measurement accuracy is verified using a pre-calibrated mAs meter (Dynalyzer or equivalent) as a benchmark. Ensure precision of the measurement instrument is sufficient enough to assure generator accuracy requirements can be met. An oscilloscope may be used for mA measurement, however, it likely will not be precise enough to assure generator mA accuracy. To use an oscilloscope for mA measurement, connect scope leads between test point TP7 on KVP Control Board A2 (AY40-003S1) and ground. Set scope for 1.0 volt/division, and 50 ms/division time base. This will give a 100 mA/volt equivalent for mA measurement (see Figure B-23a for sample mA measurements using scope).
Figure B-23a. MA Measurement Using an Oscilloscope Proceed as follows: WARNING! To avoid injury to personnel, ensure that system power is removed prior to making and removing any electrical connections. 1. If not already done so, a kVp bleeder tank should be connected in series between tube and High-Voltage (H.V.) Transformer A17. If using a mAs meter, connect the mAs meter between pins A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 on H.V. Transformer A17. This connection is made by removing the two green/yellow wires connecting A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 to the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure B-22) and connecting the removed wires to the mAs meter. (Note: The MAS meter should remain connected throughout calibration. These wires must be re-connected when finished calibration.)
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
B-37
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
MA INCREASE/ DECREASE BUTTONS
Figure B-24. MA Calibration Screen 2. Verify 75s mA appears in the MA Calibration Screen and "Next Measure" appears on the top right button as shown in Figure B-24. 3. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the MA Calibration Screen (i.e., 60 kVp, 75s mA, 100 mS). 4. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or mAs meter, observe the measured mA value. (Ideally, this value should be 75 or 7.5 mAs.) 5. If not 75 mA, press the 75 mA adjustment button (located directly below "Measured MA#1" label). Find the measured mA value in the scrollable list, select it then press Enter. The values appearing in the list are in onetenth increments. Repeat mA calibration for 75s until indicated and measured mA values agree to within 5%+1 mA. 6. Press Next Measure button to proceed to 400L mA calibration setting. 7.
Revision W
B-38
Verify 400L mA appears in the MA Calibration Screen and "Save Calibration" now appears on the top right button.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
8. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the MA Calibration Screen (i.e., 60 kVp, 400L mA, 100.0 mS). 9. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or on mAs meter, observe the measured mA value. (Ideally, this value should be 400 mA or 40 mAs.) 10. If not 400 mA, press the 400 mA adjustment (located directly below "Measured MA#2" label). Find the measured mA value in the scrollable list, select it then press Enter. The values appearing in the list are in one-tenth increments. 11. Press Save Calibration button. 12. Repeat mA calibration for 400L mA until indicated and measured mA values agree to within 5%+1 mA. Note: The Power Supply Board’s +48 VDC output may require adjusting (using potentiometer A6R17) up to +55 VDC (max.) in cases where long-length high tension cables are used and/or a heavy duty x-ray tube is installed. This can be determined by measuring the mA output (using a Dynalyzer or mAs meter) of an exposure taken at 40 to 50 kVp and the highest mA station available. The mA measured should be the same as the indicated mA (within specified tolerance). If mA output is too low, increase the +48 VDC voltage output as required, but do not exceed +55 VDC. 13. To return to the main calibration screen, press the Back button. If the system is equipped with QG-AEC option, perform AEC calibration. Otherwise, calibration is complete. CAUTION! If using a mAs meter, re-connect the green/yellow wire marked "MAS METER" to the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure B-22).
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
B-39
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
AEC CALIBRATION CAUTION! Before calibrating unit, perform warmup procedures recommended by tube manufacturer or the warm-up procedure described in Chapter 3 of the Operator’s Manual. IMPORTANT! Before performing each AEC calibration procedure, verify the correct Film/Screen is displayed on the calibration screen (shown in top left field). In most DR or CR Film Plate systems, the entire imaging area of the digital receptor or CR Film Plate must be covered with acrylic in order to obtain accurate "S" or "REX" values used for the procedures that follow. Refer to the calibration instructions provided with digital or CR system for specific "S" or "REX" values required for AEC calibration. IMPORTANT! Always place a CR film plate in the cassette holder when taking any measurements or when calibrating, even if the calibration step does not require a film to be exposed. The following procedures must be performed to ensure successful AEC calibration of the HF Series X-ray generator when configured as part of the DiRex System (i.e., integration to Agfa Computed Radiography (CR) Film Plate). Table B-4 shows a summarized presentation of the AEC calibration procedure. An AEC calibration Worksheet is provided in Table B-5 for recording calibration data. Table B-4. CR System AEC Calibration Procedure Sequence
Revision W
B-40
FILM/SCREENS TO BE CALIBRATED
REQUIRED AEC CALIBRATION PROCEDURES/ SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
WALL STAND 72" SID FILM/SCREEN (SLOWEST SPEED, LARGEST SID)
1. Perform "Ion Chamber Balancing" procedure. 2. Perform "AEC MAS Balance" procedure for wall stand ion chamber. 3. Perform "AEC Optical Density (OD) Calibration": a. Set desired "base" optical density b. Set "AEC Ref" to 1200. c. Adjust ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer until base density is achieved in acquired images. 4. Perform "AEC KV Calibration".
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
Table B-4. CR System AEC Calibration Procedure Sequence FILM/SCREENS TO BE CALIBRATED
REQUIRED AEC CALIBRATION PROCEDURES/ SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
WALL STAND 40" SID FILM/SCREEN
1. Copy "Wall 72" film/screen to "Wall 40". 2. Perform "AEC Optical Density (OD) Calibration", however, DO NOT re-adjust the ion chamber MASTER GAIN potentiometer. Adjust "AEC Ref" to obtain desired (set) density. 3. Perform "AEC KV Calibration".
TABLE 40" SID FILM/ SCREEN
1. If system includes a wall stand, copy "Wall 40" film/screen to "Table 40". 2. Perform "Ion Chamber Balancing" procedure for table ion chamber. 3. Perform "AEC Optical Density (OD) Calibration": a. Set desired "base" optical density b. Set "AEC Ref" to 1200. c. Adjust ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer until base density is achieved in acquired images. 4. Perform "AEC KV Calibration".
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
B-41
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
Table B-5. AEC Calibration Worksheet Film/Screen Combination:
Table 40
Wall 40
Wall 72
AEC OD CALIBRATION Setting:
50 kVp, 200L mA, 5 cm
Optical Density: Sensitivity (REX) Value AEC Ref. AEC KV CALIBRATION Setting:
Step 1 - 50 kVp, 200L mA, 5 cm
Optical Density: Sensitivity (REX) Value Setting:
Step 2 - 60 kVp, 200L mA, 10 cm
Optical Density: Sensitivity (REX) Value Setting:
Step 3 - 80 kVp, 200L mA, 15 cm
Optical Density: Sensitivity (REX) Value Setting:
Step 4 - 100 kVp, 200L mA, 20 cm
Optical Density: Sensitivity (REX) Value Setting:
Step 5 - 110 kVp, 200L mA, 25 cm
Optical Density: Sensitivity (REX) Value Setting:
Step 6 - 120 kVp, 200L mA, 30 cm
Optical Density: Sensitivity (REX) Value Setting:
*Step 7 - 130 kVp, 200L mA, 30 cm
Optical Density: Sensitivity (REX) Value Setting:
*Step 8 - 140 kVp, 200L mA, 30 cm
Optical Density: Sensitivity (REX) Value * Only required on 150 kVp systems
Revision W
B-42
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
Ion Chamber Balancing (Three-field Chambers) On systems using a three-field ion chamber, the chamber detectors must be balanced prior to performing AEC calibration (refer to the ion chamber manufacturer’s instruction manual). When balanced, the mAs will be approximately the same (±5%) for exposures taken using any of the three chambers, or with two or more chambers selected simultaneously. This procedure must be performed on each ion chamber used in the system (for example, both table and wall ion chambers when equipped with two). Before proceeding, check that the ion chamber detectors have been correctly configured so when the chamber select buttons on the operator control panel are pressed, the appropriate ion chamber detector is enabled. If not, refer to "Table/Wall Ion Chamber Configuration Screens" procedure described previously in this chapter and re-configure. Proceed as follows: 1. If not already done so, a kVp bleeder tank should be connected in series between tube and High-Voltage (H.V.) Transformer A17. If using a mAs meter, connect the mAs meter between pins A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 on H.V. Transformer A17. 2. Access Generator Settings Screen (see Figure B-9). Make a note of the Backup MAS setting, then change the Backup MAS to "40". 3. Press the Manual/AEC Mode button on the operator control panel and select AEC mode. 4. Using a lead sheet, cover the UPPER RIGHT and CENTER ion chamber detectors. 5. Place 20 CM acrylic over UPPER LEFT ion chamber detector. 6. Set operator control panel for 100 KV, 200L MA, select the UPPER LEFT ion chamber detector and take an exposure. Note the measured mAs reading. 7.
Repeat above steps with the CENTER ion chamber detector selected and UPPER LEFT and UPPER RIGHT detectors covered with lead. The measured mAs reading should be within 5% of the mAs reading noted in the previous step. If not, adjust the CENTER detector gain potentiometer located on the ion chamber amplifier (refer to ion chamber manufacturer’s documentation for details), then re-take exposure and verify it is within tolerance. Repeat as necessary.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
B-43
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
NOTE: If the system is equipped with "universal" type AEC (i.e., AEC Board A11 is part number AY40-027S), and the ion chamber is "level" type (i.e., Siemens), adjust the appropriate detector gain potentiometer on AY40-027S in accordance with the table below: Table B-6. Universal AEC Board A11 Detector Gain Adjustment Potentiometers (Siemens Ion Chamber Only) ION CHAMBER
DETECTOR
AEC BOARD A11 (AY40-027S) POTENTIOMETER
TABLE
1
R61
TABLE
2
R63
TABLE
3
R66
WALL#1
1
R54
WALL#1
2
R55
WALL#1
3
R56
WALL#2
1
R53
WALL#2
2
R58
WALL#2
3
R57
8. Repeat above steps with UPPER RIGHT ion chamber detector selected and UPPER LEFT and UPPER CENTER detectors covered with lead. The measured mAs reading should be within 5% of the mAs reading noted in the previous step. If not, adjust the UPPER RIGHT detector gain potentiometer, re-take exposure and verify it is within tolerance. Repeat as necessary. 9. Access the Generator Settings Screen and reset Backup MAS to original setting noted previously.
Revision W
B-44
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
AEC MAS Balance Verification The generator AEC mAs balance was pre-calibrated at the factory. However, verification of AEC mAs balance assures AEC calibration accuracy. When balanced, the mAs at the specified exposures will be approximately the same (±6%). This procedure only needs to be performed once prior to AEC calibration of the film/screen combination(s) used with the system. Proceed as follows: 1. If not already done so, connect a kVp bleeder tank in series between tube and High-Voltage (H.V.) Transformer A17. If using a mAs meter, connect the mAs meter between pins A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 on H.V. Transformer A17. This connection is made by removing the two green/ yellow wires connecting A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 to the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure B-22) and connecting the removed wires to the mAs meter. (Note: These wires must be re-connected when finished calibration.) 2. Place 20 cm of acrylic in the X-ray beam. (Where practical, adjust acrylic thickness to obtain approximately 100 millisecond exposures.) 3. If calibrating a" level" type ion chamber, ensure all three ion chamber detectors are selected. 4. Press the Manual/AEC Mode button on the operator control panel and select enter AEC mode. 5. Set the operator control panel for 110 kVp (100 kVp if calibrating a "level" type (Siemens) ion chamber - requires AY40-027S AEC board), 75S mA and take an exposure. 6. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or mAs meter, note the measured mAs value. 7.
Set the operator control panel for 110 kVp (100 kVp if calibrating a "level" type (Siemens) ion chamber - requires AY40-027S AEC board) and the highest available mA station. Take an exposure.
8. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or mAs meter, note the measured mAs value. 9. The mAs values noted must be within ±5%. If not, adjustment of the dV/dt potentiometer on AEC Board A11 is necessary: •
If the generator is equipped with "standard" type AEC (i.e., AEC Board A11 is part number AY40-031S), adjust potentiometer A11R12 to increase or decrease the mAs value.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
B-45
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
•
If the generator is equipped with "universal" type AEC (i.e., AEC Board A11 is part number AY40-027S), and the ion chamber is "level" type (i.e., Siemens), adjust potentiometer A11R82 to increase or decrease the mAs value.
•
If the generator is equipped with "universal" type AEC (i.e., AEC Board A11 is part number AY40-027S), and the ion chamber is "slope" type (i.e., AID), adjust potentiometer A11R87 to increase or decrease the mAs value.
10. Re-take exposure at the above settings. Repeat until the two measured values are within range. 11. Take an exposure at 110 kVp (100 kVp if calibrating a "level" type (Siemens) ion chamber), 75S mA, 10 cm. Verify mAs value is within ±5% of previous measurements. 12. Take an exposure at 110 kVp (100 kVp if calibrating a "level" type (Siemens) ion chamber), a mid-range mA value, 10 cm. Verify mAs value is within ±5% of previous measurements. CAUTION! If using a mAs meter, re-connect the green/yellow wire marked "MAS METER" to the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure B-22).
Revision W
B-46
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
Film Screen Selection Calibration of film/screen combinations should be performed in the following sequence, assuming a typical radiographic system having one ion chamber in the wall stand (72" and 40" SID), and a second ion chamber used in the radiographic table (40" SID). If the system is using a wall stand and 200 and 400 speed films, calibrate the Wall 72" film screen combination using 200 speed film first, followed by Wall 72" using 400 speed film. If the system only has a table receptor, perform all AEC calibrations (i.e., ion chamber balance, AEC MAS balance, AEC optical density, and AEC KVP procedures). IMPORTANT NOTE: Typically, the AEC calibration parameters for each of the various receptors used with the generator are quite similar. Therefore, the HF Series generator’s calibration data "Copy Film Screen" function can be used to copy the calibration parameters from one receptor (i.e., a calibrated receptor) to the other receptors. For example, after completing AEC calibration of 72" Wall film/screen, the Copy Film Screen function can be used to copy the 72" film/screen calibration data to 40" Wall film/screen. After copying AEC data, the only further AEC calibration usually required for the 40" film/screen is performing AEC OD Calibration to set the "AEC Ref" value. Similarly, the 40" Wall film/screen calibration data can be copied to the 40" Table, however, the table ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer must be adjusted as required. Be sure to verify the AEC films for each SID/receptor meet applicable regulatory agency requirements. If required, further optical density accuracy can be attained by performing the "AEC KV Calibration" procedure.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
B-47
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
1. From the Calibration Menu (see Figure 3-16), press the AEC button. The Select Film Screen Menu is displayed:
Figure B-25. Select Film Screen Menu 2. Select the film/screen combination to calibrate (use the Next button to display additional choices). The HF Series X-ray generator provides for calibration of up to nine different film/screen combinations. Note that each image receptor used with the generator is configurable for use with a particular film/screen combination using the Film Screen Default Settings Screen described previously in the Configuration section of this chapter (see Figure 3-13). For example, when the operator presses the WALL button on the operator control panel and selects the WALL 72" receptor, the system can be programmed to use the "Wall 72"" designated film/screen combination (i.e., the film/screen type used with the wall stand at 72" SID). On the same system, a different film/screen type, designated as "Table 40" for example, could be configured for use with the TABLE receptor. Typically, on a system using a wall stand and radiographic table, three separate film/screen combinations are used: •
Revision W
B-48
Wall 72" - Used when the operator selects wall receptor at 72 inch source-to-image distance (SID)
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
•
Wall 40" - Used when the operator selects wall receptor at 40 inch source-to-image distance (SID)
•
Table 40" - Used when the operator selects table receptor at 40 inch source-to-image distance (SID)
On generators equipped with "Universal" type AEC (AEC Board A11 AY40027S installed), two additional image receptors and their corresponding film/ screens (default names are "WALL2" and "AUX") may also be configured similar to those listed above. It is important to note that each different type of film/screen combination used with the receptors be calibrated in accordance with the AEC Calibration procedures described in this chapter. Throughout AEC calibration, the film/screen being calibrated is displayed on every AEC calibration screen at the end of the top field. Note that the sample AEC calibration screens show "Wall40" in the instructions that follow; this is because the "Wall40" film screen was selected. The screens will actually reflect whichever of the available nine film screens you choose. When calibrating AEC using a wall stand mounted receptor, ensure that the xray beam is perpendicular to image receptor and that the correct ion chamber detector(s) is selected. IMPORTANT! Use the same configuration of bucky, grid, ion chamber and film cassette/screen that will be used with the "Film/Screen" being calibrated.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
B-49
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
The AEC Calibration Menu WARNING! The following calibration procedures involve taking x-ray exposures. All personnel should be behind the protective barriers. X-rays can be dangerous unless proper precautions and procedures are adhered to. Following selection of a film/screen to calibrate, the AEC Calibration Menu displays:
Figure B-26. AEC Calibration Menu NOTE: In normal AEC mode, select the appropriate receptor (Wall 72", Wall 40", or Table 40") prior to selection of a film/screen combination for AEC calibration. The AEC Calibration menu provides access to the system's various AEC calibration functions, briefly described as follows: •
Revision W
B-50
Optical Density - Calibrates the optical density for the currently selected film/screen and ion chamber combination
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
•
KV - Calibrates the tube voltage settings used in conjunction with the currently selected film/screen and ion chamber combination
•
Change Film Screen - Accesses the Select Film Screen Menu (see Figure 3-23) for selection of a film screen to calibrate.
•
Back - Returns to the Calibration Menu (see Figure 3-16)
Optical Density Calibration This procedure calibrates the generator’s AEC system to a user-selectable, dose calculation (density) setting (e.g., 2.1). This setting determines the basic "brightness" quality of images acquired in AEC mode using the CR system. This is accomplished by comparing the CR Film Plate’s actual Logarithmic Median (LGM) value with the Target Level selected using the AEC Optical Density Calibration screen (see Figure B-27). When calibrating the first film/screen combination, which should be the slowest speed film and/or the largest SID receptor, set the "AEC Base" value to 2000, and adjust the MASTER GAIN potentiometer on the ion chamber until the desired target density is obtained. Proceed as follows:
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
B-51
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
AEC Optical Density Calibration 1. In the AEC Calibration Menu, press Optical Density button (see Figure 3-26). The AEC Optical Density Calibration screen appears:
TARGET DENSITY LEVEL
Figure B-27. AEC Optical Density Calibration Screen 2. If the selected film/screen combination is the first one to be calibrated with the system, perform the following steps: a. Set the ion chamber detector selection to middle detector and ensure x-ray tube is at correct SID. Ensure the ion chamber has been balanced. b. Place 5 cm of acrylic in the X-ray beam. c.
Set the "Target Level" to the desired level (e.g., "1.30" as shown in the figure above). To do so, press the Target Level value button (located directly below "Target Level" label), use the keypad to input the desired value, then press Enter. Do not change the Target Level
setting at any time during this procedure.
Revision W
B-52
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
d. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the AEC Optical Density Calibration Screen (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA, normal density). e. Process the CR Film Plate to determine density level (referred to as the "LGM" value). f.
If the LGM value is within acceptable range of the Target Level as defined by the CR Film Plate manufacturer, press the Next button to save the setting and proceed to AEC KV Calibration.
g. If not within range, perform the following adjustments: NOTE
The series of AEC optical density measurements should be repeated as many times as required until optical density is sufficiently accurate to meet regulatory and facility requirements.
Note: If the system is equipped with "standard type" AEC Board A11 (AY40-031S), the "Table Gain Adj. Potentiometer" is A11R22 and the "Wall Gain Adj. Potentiometer" is A11R23. If the system is equipped with "Universal type" AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S), the "Table Gain Adj. Potentiometer" is A11R77 and the "Wall Gain Adj. Potentiometer" is A11R79. i. Adjust Table Gain Adj. potentiometer (if calibrating the table receptor) or Wall Gain Adj. potentiometer (if calibrating the wall receptor), and repeat exposure. Continue until the measured LGM value equals the Target Level setting to within CR System manufacturer’s specification. ii. If you still cannot achieve the Target Level setting, set Table Gain Adj. potentiometer (if calibrating the table receptor) or Wall Gain Adj. potentiometer (if calibrating the wall receptor) to mid-range, then adjust the ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer until roughly the desired LGM is obtained. Further fine-tuning can then be achieved by adjusting the Table or Wall Gain Adj. potentiometer as described in the previous step. iii. If the measured LGM value still does not equal the Target Level setting even with the ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer set to maximum gain position, increase each chamber detector gain and perform the "AEC MAS Balance Verification" procedure. Repeat AEC Optical Density calibration. iv. If the measured LGM value still does not equal the Target Level setting after adjusting the MASTER GAIN and gain of individual detectors, reduce the AEC Reference until you obtain the desired LGM value. 3. If the selected film/screen combination is not the first one to be calibrated with the system, perform the following steps:
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
B-53
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
i. Set the "Target Level" to the desired level (e.g., "1.30" as shown in Figure 3-27). To do so, press the Target Level value button (located directly below "Target Level" label), use the keypad to input the desired value, then press Enter. Do not
change the Target Level setting at any time during this procedure.
ii. Place 5 CM of acrylic in the X-ray beam. iii. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the AEC Optical Density Calibration Screen (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA, normal density). iv. Process the CR Film Plate to determine density level (referred to as the "LGM" value). v. If the LGM value is within acceptable range of the Target Level as defined by the CR Film Plate manufacturer, press the Next button to save the setting and proceed to AEC KV Calibration. vi. If LGM value is too low, press the AEC Base value button (located directly below "AEC Base" label). Increase the AEC Base value, press Enter, then repeat exposure. If density is too high, press the AEC Base value button, decrease the AEC Base value, then repeat exposure. Continue until the measured LGM value equals the Target Level setting to within CR System manufacturer’s specification. 4. Press the Next button to advance to AEC KV Calibration. IMPORTANT! To ensure AEC density is correctly calibrated to the desired "target" density setting, either the AEC Base value must be adjusted to obtain the target density level (verified using the processed CR Film Plate) or the target density level shown on the AEC Optical Density Calibration Screen must be set to the actual LGM value obtained from the processed CR Film. For example, the calibrator would like the system AEC density to be "2.10". The calibrator must adjust the "AEC Base" value until the actual measured LGM value of the CR Film Plate is 2.10. However, if the actual measured LGM value of the CR Film Plate is 2.20 and you decide not to continue to adjust the AEC Base to achieve exactly 2.10 density, then change the Target Level setting shown on the AEC Optical Density Calibration Screen to "2.20".
Revision W
B-54
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
AEC KV Calibration Procedure The AEC KV Calibration screen (shown below) is used to calibrate the tube voltage to the "Target Level" density setting. There are a total of six kV calibration points for a 125 kV system (50, 60, 80, 100, 110, and 120 kV); 150 kV systems require an additional two kV calibration points (130 and 140 kV). The image receptor and chamber field settings remain the same as those used in the AEC Optical Density Calibration procedure. 1. Access the AEC KV Calibration Screen (shown below) and proceed as follows.
TARGET DENSITY LEVEL NOTE Calibration of the first step (50 kVp) is not required as long as AEC Optical Density Calibration procedure in the previous steps was performed prior to AEC KV Calibration. A verification that the "Measured LGM" is the same as the "Target Level" setting is all that is required.
Figure B-28. AEC KV Calibration Screen 2. Place indicated thickness of acrylic (5 CM for first calibration point) in the X-ray beam. 3. Insert a CR Film Plate and collimate down to film size. 4. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the AEC KV Calibration Screen (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA, normal density).
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
B-55
Appendix B Calibration (DiRex System)
5. Process the CR Film Plate to determine the density level (referred to as the "LGM" value). a. If the sensitivity value is within acceptable range as defined by manufacturer, press the First Point button to proceed to the next AEC kV calibration point. a. If not within range, press the Measured Level value button (located directly below "Measured Level" label), and enter the measured LGM value using the keypad, then press Enter. Press First Point button to proceed to the next AEC kV calibration point. DO NOT TAKE ANY
FURTHER EXPOSURES AT THIS SETTING.
6. Repeat the previous steps for the 60, 80, 100, 110, 120, and, if 150 kV system, 130 and 140 kV calibration points, placing the specified thickness of acrylic in the x-ray beam as indicated on the AEC KV Calibration screen for each kV calibration point, and taking one exposure per kVp calibration point until all the measured density (LGM) values are within required range. 7.
Press the Back button to return to the AEC Calibration menu.
8. This completes AEC calibration for this particular film/screen combination. Repeat AEC calibration procedures for all additional film/screen combinations that will be used with the system. 9. Verify AEC calibration by taking several exposures in AEC mode and checking the resulting "LGM" value. If necessary, repeat AEC calibration procedure to further adjust AEC accuracy.
Revision W
B-56
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix
C
Log4View Error Logger
C-1
C-2
QUANTUM LOGGING VIEWER (LOG4VIEW) USER INSTRUCTIONS GENERAL DESCRIPTION The log viewing program, Log4View, is used to view errors, warnings and other informational events that have occurred with your integrated system. Every time any of the Quantum Programs that form the integrated system make a significant action, it is recorded in a log file. This includes normal operations because all may be useful in both viewing normal customer operation as well as error conditions. These events will help diagnose the state of equipment in the field. The Log4View program is installed along with the Integration System software installation. It is a separate program that is accessible outside of the digital operations. It creates an icon on the desktop that will allow the log to be viewed at any time. The following instructions for use are separated into two sections:
Agfa (DiRex) Integration Log4View User Instructions
Canon (QG-DIG-CXDI) Integration Log4View User Instructions
Refer to the appropriate section corresponding with the type integration utilized with this HF Series X-ray Generator. Note: The Quantum logging facility is only for events within Quantum’s Integration System – The associated CR or DR system workstation has its own logging system and viewer.
Document No.
Revision
Title
Page No.
DC30-090
B
Quantum Logging Viewer Instructions
2 of 7
AGFA (DIREX) INTEGRATION LOG4VIEW INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE 1. From within the NX Program select Main Menu (A) and Desktop (B) (Figure 1).
B A Figure 1. AGFA NX Program 2. The Windows desktop will appear: Click on the Windows “Start” button. 3. Position the mouse pointer over the “Quantum” shortcut, then select “Logs” which allows you to choose from one of five logs configured during software install (refer to the following figure).
Figure 2. Quantum Logs Document No.
Revision
Title
Page No.
DC30-090
B
Quantum Logging Viewer Instructions
3 of 7
4. At this point a log would be chosen based on the type of information being sought.
All Logs: All messages
Quantum.Generator Log: All generator related messages
Quantum.Generator(Error) Log: All generator error messages (In Red)
Quantum.Integration.Agfa Log: Communication debugging between
Quantum.Integration.Agfa.Overlay Log: Communication Debugging
the Agfa software and the Quantum Overlay
between the Quantum Overlay, Quantum Generator and Agfa software.
5. The display is of events that have occurred during the operation of the generator. The date and time stamp lets you determine what occurred and when. Refer to the following figure which shows an example of “Quantum.Integration.Agfa.Overlay” log.
Figure 3. Sample Quantum Integration Agfa Overlay Log 6. If you need to look either at other events in the system and / or non-error events, you can select another log per step three (3) to view the events of that log.
Document No.
Revision
Title
Page No.
DC30-090
B
Quantum Logging Viewer Instructions
4 of 7
Note: If Log4View logs are requested by Quantum Medical Imaging’s Service or Engineering departments for analysis, they are located in: Note: If Log4View logs are requested by Quantum Medical Imaging’s Service or Engineering departments for analysis, they are located in “C:\Agfa\Healthcare\Nx\Bin\Quantum\Logs”. Best practice would be to email the entire “Quantum” folder to avoid multiple file requests.
Document No.
Revision
Title
Page No.
DC30-090
B
Quantum Logging Viewer Instructions
5 of 7
CANON (QG-DIG-CXDI) INTEGRATION LOG4VIEW INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE 1. Press the Windows key () on the Canon Workstation keyboard. The Windows taskbar will appear: Click on the Windows “Start” button. 2. Select Programs. 3. Select Quantum Logs. 4. Choose from one of two logs (Quantum Log.l4v or Quantum Generator Error.l4v) configured during software install as shown in the sample screen below:
Figure 4. Accessing Quantum Logs The Quantum logs available
Quantum Log.l4v: All messages
Quantum.Generator(Error) Log: All generator error messages (In Red)
5. The logs contain a list of events that have occurred during the operation of the generator. The date and time stamp lets you determine what occurred and when. Refer to the following figure which shows an example of “Quantum Log.l4v” log.
Document No.
Revision
Title
Page No.
DC30-090
B
Quantum Logging Viewer Instructions
6 of 7
Figure 5. Sample Quantum/Canon Integration Generator Log (Quantum Log.l4v) 6. If you need to look either at other events in the system and / or non-error events, you can select another log per step four (4) to view the events of that log. Note: If Log4View logs are requested by Quantum Medical Imaging’s Service or Engineering departments for analysis, they are located in: Canon Integration (QG-DIG-CXDI) Quantum.Generator.Log – “C:\Program Files\Quantum\Quantum Generator Service\Quantum\Logs” Quantum.Integration.Canon.Log – “D:\ccr\Quantum\Logs” Best practice would be to email the entire “Quantum” folder to avoid multiple file requests.
Document No.
Revision
Title
Page No.
DC30-090
B
Quantum Logging Viewer Instructions
7 of 7
Appendix
D
CALIBRATION
(Using Generator Service Tools
D-1
D-2
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
THIS SECTION ONLY APPLICABLE ON HF SERIES GENERATORS EQUIPPED WITH Q-CONNECT (ETHERNET) OPTION (EXCEPT DIREX - SEE APPENDIX B)
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-3
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
OVERVIEW This appendix provides instructions for configuring and calibrating the HF Series X-ray generator on systems equipped with the Q-Connect option (ethernet adapter), with the exception of Agfa DiRex Integration Systems (covered in Appendix B). Generator Configuration and Calibration can only be performed using the generator’s "Insight", Generator Configuration, and Calibration Wizard service tools installed on the computer serving as the generator operator control panel (i.e., Q-VISION all-in-one PC or digital imaging system workstation computer). If this is a Quantum/Canon Integration (QG-DIG-CXDI Integration System), refer to Model QG-DIG-CXDI Canon/Quantum Integration Service Manual DC30-094 for system interconnection and integration software installation instructions. NEMA Standards Publication/No. XR8-1979(R1994), Test Methods for Diagnostic X-ray Machines for Use During Initial Installation is recommended as a reference. REQUIRED TOOLS AND MATERIALS The following lists the tools and materials required to perform the procedures contained in this chapter: •
Digital Voltmeter: Fluke Model 87 (or equivalent)
•
Non-invasive kV, mAs, mR meter or Radcal Dynalyzer III (or equivalent)
•
Oscilloscope, 50 Mhz storage: Tek 2210 (or equivalent)
•
5 CM, 10 CM, 15 CM, 25 and 30 CM acrylic phantoms (required for calibrating systems equipped with QG-AEC option).
ACCESSING GENERATOR SERVICE TOOLS The way in which the generator’s service tools are accessed differs depending on the operator control panel configuration of the HF Series X-ray generator (i.e., if it is equipped with either a Q-VISION operator control panel or a Workstation-based operator control panel). However, once the service tools have been accessed, the configuration and calibration screens are identical. Refer to the appropriate section that follows depending on the type operator control panel your system uses. Before starting, be sure the following steps have been performed: 1. If this is an integration system (i.e., generator is integrated with a workstation computer for use as the operator control panel), ensure the DR system’s Computer Workstation is properly connected to the generator, and the integration system software is installed and configured in accordance with the instructions provided in the Integration Service Manual. 2. Ensure the Power/Expose Control Box (AY20-265) is properly connected to the generator as described in Chapter 2, ASSEMBLY & INSTALLATION. 3. Set the ON/OFF circuit breaker CB1 on the generator cabinet to ON position.
Revision W
D-4
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
4. Set the power on/standby switch on the Power/Expose Control Box to the standby ( ) position, then to the on ( lamp should illuminate.
) position. The green power LED
Accessing Generator Service Tools - Q-VISION Operator Control Panel The following instructions apply to generators utilizing a Q-VISION operator control panel (OCP). 1. To gain access to the Generator Service programs, touch the Help button located on the lower right corner of the Q-VISION screen (shown on right). The Generator Help Services Screen (Figure D-1a) appears:
Figure D-1a. Generator Help Services Screen
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-5
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
2. Touch the Login button at the lower left corner of the screen. A password entry keypad displays.
Figure D-1b. Enter Password Screen 3. In the Enter Password screen, enter the default Service Technician password (58623) using the keypad, then select Enter. The word "Login" is replaced with "FieldTech" on the Generator Help Services screen to indicate successful login. 4. On the Generator Help Services screen, select Service option. The General Service Options Menu appears:
Figure D-1c. General Service Options Menu
Revision W
D-6
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
5. Select Generator Service. The following screen appears:
ONLY PRESS THESE BUTTONS WHEN DIRECTED TO DO SO BY TECHNICAL SUPPORT
Figure D-1d. Generator Service Options Menu 6. Proceed to SYSTEM CONFIGURATION/CALIBRATION section. Accessing Generator Service Tools - Workstation-Based Operator Control Panel The following instructions apply to generators utilizing a workstation-based operator control panel (OCP) such as Quantum/Canon Integration (QG-DIGCXDI Integration System). 1. Right mouse click on the Generator Service Monitor icon "Q" (left), which is displayed in the MS Windows Task Bar located in the lower right side of the screen (see Figure D-1e).
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-7
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
Figure D-1e. Sample Screen - Generator Service Monitor Icon ("Q") As shown above, right mouse clicking on the Service Monitor icon will present four service tool choices: •
Insight - Provides information regarding current Generator configuration settings.
•
Calibration - An interactive program that facilitates calibration of Generators compatible with Model QG-DIG-CXDI, Quantum/Canon Integration System.
•
Generator Configuration - Provides access to all Generator, Receptor, Ion Chamber, and X-ray Tube settings.
•
Service Configuration - Provides the Technician with access to the Service Configuration Menu for the purpose of identifying the IP Address of the Generator, and commanding the System to automatically upload all necessary identification data required by the interface software. Details regarding this feature are provided in Model QG-DIG-CXDI Integration System Service Manual DC30-094.
2. Select Generator Configuration.
Revision W
D-8
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
3. The "Enter Password" screen appears (see Figure D-2.).
Figure D-2. Enter Password Screen 4. In the Enter Password screen, enter the default Service Technician password (58623) using the keypad, then press Enter. This password enables access to the Generator Configuration program. 5. Upon validation of the password, the Load Configuration menu displays:
Figure D-3. Load Configuration Menu The Load Configuration menu offers two choices: •
Load From File - Opens a browser window to load a previously saved configuration file stored on the Workstation Computer (refer to Factory Reset description in this chapter for instructions on creating a configuration file of the generator).
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-9
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
•
Load From Generator - Select to load the last automatically-saved generator configuration (Note: The configuration file is automatically backed up every time the Workstation Computer establishes a connection to the generator.) the currently active configuration (This option should be selected under normal circumstances; only when a problem occurs with the system should the Load From File option be selected).
6. Select Load From Generator. The Configuration Menu displays:
Figure D-4. Configuration Menu - Generator Settings Tab
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION/CALIBRATION The HF Series x-ray generator has been factory configured and calibrated. It is necessary, however, to perform the following procedures to verify system configuration and performance (calibration). Perform the procedures in the sequence presented, unless otherwise instructed. The Configuration Menu provides access to all of the generator’s configurable settings organized into seven functional groups, as represented by the following tabs: • Generator Settings - Includes generator power derating, Timeout (sleep), AEC Board Type, and AEC Backup mAs settings • Generator Calibrations - Dates and times when kVp, mA, Filament, and A-D Voltage calibrations were last performed • Tube Settings - Tube Type, Rotor Type, Tube Power Output Derating, and Tube Temperature (Heat Warning) alert settings
Revision W
D-10
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
• Physical Receptors - Defines number, type and identification of connected receptors (contains only factory-authorized settings, not field
configurable)
• Receptors - Enables the creation and identification of AEC calibration profiles associated with each physical receptor (e.g., wall or table) utilized in the system. • Ion Chambers - Defines ion chamber type associated with each of the physical receptors above, and includes relevant configuration settings for each (i.e., detector assignments, polarity, output, etc.) • Licensing - Provides Generator License validation and updating utilities (intended for use only under the direction of Quantum Technical Support) For proper operation of the generator, the settings must accurately reflect the actual configuration of the generator. Typically, these settings are made at the factory in accordance with customer sales order specifications. However, it is recommended that you review the current configuration settings for accuracy. The following paragraphs provide specific instructions for setting each of the available configuration selections.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-11
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
GENERATOR CONFIGURATION The Generator Configuration program is run first - to verify all settings are correct, followed by Calibration - to ensure optimal generator performance. To gain access to either of these utilities, password entry is required. This is to prevent unintended and/or unauthorized changes to system settings. Generator Settings Tab If not already done so, select the Generator Settings tab on the Configuration Menu. The Generator Settings, shown in Figure D-4, includes controls for setting the generator power output derating (presented as a percentage of total power output (kW)), sleep mode timer, AEC Board Type, and AEC Backup mAs settings. 1. DeratingPercentage - The derating function is used to limit the output of the system to a percentage of the maximum energy capacity. To derate the energy output, move the slide control adjacent to the DeratingPercentage field to the desired derating percentage (choices are 80%, 85%, 90%, 95% or 100% [i.e., no derating]). 2. Timeout: The "timeout" period selected represents the amount of delay time after which, if no user activity is detected, the system automatically enters Power Stand By mode. This mode is entered to help reduce power consumption while protecting system electronics. The timeout period is selectable in 30 minute increments between 0 minutes up to 180 minutes. If "Infinity" is selected, the generator will not timeout, however, the filament will turn off if one hour of inactivity. 3. AECBoardType: Displays the AEC Board type installed in the generator (when equipped with AEC option): a. Select "Standard" if generator is equipped with standard type AEC Board A11 (AY40-031S) b. Select "Universal" if generator is equipped with universal type AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S) c.
Select "None" if generator is not equipped with optional AEC
4. AECBackUp Mas: Sets the current system-wide backup mAs setting effective on all AEC exposures. The maximum back up mAs setting is 600; note that on certain model generators, such as the Stored Energy models, the maximum mAs capability of the generator is less than 600 mAs. Therefore, the backup mAs setting should not exceed the maximum MAS output of the generator. Refer to Chapter 1, SPECIFICATIONS for a list of the mAs ratings by model number.
Revision W
D-12
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
Generator Calibrations Tab Selecting the Generator Calibrations tab on the Configuration Menu displays the following screen:
Figure D-5. Configuration Menu - Generator Calibration Tab This screen displays the dates and times when kVp, mA, Filament, and A-D Voltage calibrations were last performed. This screen is provided for informational purposes only; there are no settings required. Tube Settings Tab The Tube Settings Tab Screen, shown below, displays the current tube type (model) and rotor settings. Also provided are the Tube Derating (Tube%) and Heat Warning (Heat% Limit) settings. The tube model and rotor settings are preset at the factory and normally should not be changed, except after replacing the existing tube with a different type tube. (Note: Consult Quan-
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-13
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
tum Service Department before attempting to re-configure the generator with a tube type that is different than the factory-configured tube type.)
Figure D-6. Configuration Menu - Tube Settings Tab 1. To change the tube model setting, touch or mouse click on the Tube field. A drop down list box will open. Scroll through the available tube types and select the desired model. 2. To change the tube rotor setting, touch or mouse click on the Rotor Type field. A drop down list box will open. Scroll through the available rotor drive settings: 50 Hz (no high speed starter), 60 Hz (no high speed starter), AID external high-speed starter (AID HSS), or Quantum internal high-speed starter (QMI HSS). Note: On systems equipped with high-speed starter option (HSS), tube "high-speed" mode will only be activated when selected exposure factors exceed the limits used for low-speed operation. 3. The Tube Derating setting provides derating of the tube’s maximum mAs output in percentages of 80%, 85%, 90%, 95% or 100% (i.e., no derating). For example, if at a particular kV and mA the tube normally allows a 10 mAs exposure, then at 80% derating, the tube would permit only an 8 mAs exposure. Derating the tube can extend the life of the tube. Move the slide control adjacent to the Derating field to choose a derating percentage. 4. The Heat Warning (heat%) provides a heat protection function for the xray tube. For example, setting the Heat Warning for 80% will cause the generator to produce an audible alarm and a visual "Heat Alarm" indication on the OCP when the tube has reached 80% of its total heat unit capacity. The total tube heat unit capacity is dependant upon the tube type. The Heat Warning setting has an adjustment range of anywhere
Revision W
D-14
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
between 50% up to 100% in 10% increments. Note: At 100% setting, the heat alarm is effectively disabled. Move the slide control adjacent to the Heat Warning field to select the percentage of the total tube heat capacity at which alarm activation will occur. Physical Receptors Tab The Physical Receptors Tab (see below) is used to configure the number, type and identification of connected receptors (contains only factory-authorized settings, not field configurable).
Figure D-7. Configuration Menu - Physical Receptors Tab
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-15
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
Receptors Tab The generator has been pre-configured with six "logical" receptor selections designated "None", "Table", "Wall", "Wall72", "Wall2", and "Aux" to choose from as shown below (at left side of screen) in the Receptors Tab Screen.
RECEPTORS LIST
Figure D-8. Configuration Menu - Receptors Tab Logical receptors are created in order to store AEC calibration profiles, following execution of the AEC Calibration function. For example, when a portable receptor (e.g., Canon CXDI-50G) is used on a system equipped with AEC, the default "Wall" receptor might be renamed "50G" as shown in Figure D-8 above. Following this, AEC Calibration would need to be performed with Canon portable receptor inserted in the wall stand, which in this case, is the physical receptor as defined in the PhysicalReceptor field shown in the Configuration menu above. In another case, where a system is equipped with two fixed receptors, such as one in the wall stand and one in the table, there would need to be two logical receptors created (for example - "Canon Table" and "CanonWall"), and each would require independent AEC Calibrations be performed since each location would have its own ion chamber. The Configuration Menu - Receptors Tab displays the system default receptors and settings. The system default receptors shown in the list can be renamed and deleted, or new receptors added as necessary to suit your particular facility requirements. To change the default receptor settings, proceed as follows:
Revision W
D-16
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
1. In the receptors window, select a receptor in the list to modify. 2. To rename the receptor, select the Name field (touch the field or left mouse click on the three dots at the right end of field). A data entry keyboard will display. Using the keyboard, edit the receptor name as required, then press the Enter key. 3. The Group field setting identifies which of the four Receptor buttons on the operator control panel (Wall, None, Table, or Aux) will be linked with this particular receptor. To change the "Group" setting, touch or mouse click on the Group field. A drop down list box of the receptor buttons will open. Select the desired receptor button. (Note: The Aux button is
only functional on generators equipped with "Universal" type AEC.)
4. The PhysicalReceptor field setting identifies the receptor location where the ion chamber is physically located (Table, Wall, Wall2, or Aux). Wall and Wall2 are generally used for separate calibrations of 40 and 72 SID locations of a wall cassette holder. To change the "PhysicalReceptor" setting, touch or mouse click on the PhysicalReceptor field. A drop down list box containing the physical receptors will open. Select the desired receptor. (Note: The Aux and Wall2 receptors are only functional
on generators equipped with "Universal" type AEC.)
5. Aec Enabled Check box: Select "Aec Enabled" to enable AEC operation with this receptor. The only receptor not enabled for AEC is "None". 6. The Target Level, BaseCalibration and KvCalibration are display only fields. Target Level is this desired optical density value selected during AEC calibration; Base and kV calibration dates and times indicate the last time AEC calibration was performed. 7.
The Add, Delete and Duplicate buttons below the receptors window provide the ability to add new receptors and delete existing receptors from the list, and duplicate existing receptors for the purpose of creating copies for modification.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-17
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
Ion Chambers Tab The Ion Chambers Tab (see Figure D-9), displays available ion chambers interfaced to the HF Series X-ray generator, including configuration settings for each.
PRESS THESE BUTTONS TO CONFIGURE DETECTORS AS SHOWN BELOW
A 2
C 3
A 3
C 2
B 1
B 1
DEFAULT RIGHT LOAD DETECTOR ASSIGNMENTS
DEFAULT LEFT LOAD DETECTOR ASSIGNMENTS
Figure D-9. Configuration Menu - Ion Chambers Tab
Revision W
D-18
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
Note: On systems equipped with a "Standard" type AEC Board (AY40-031S), the "Wall2" and "Aux" selections are not used. These choices are only effective if the generator is configured with "Universal" type AEC Board (AY40-027S). Be sure that the selected ion chamber is properly interfaced to AEC Board A11 as described in Chapter 2, ASSEMBLY & INSTALLATION. Initially, the Ion Chambers Tab screen will include system default ion chambers and settings as shown in Figure D-9. The only field configurable parameters are the assignment of ion chamber detectors (detector 1, 2, and 3) with respect to the generator’s ion chamber detector select signals (i.e., FIELD SELECT 1, FIELD SELECT 2 and FIELD SELECT 3) generated by AEC Control Board A11. For example, assigning "2" to Field "A" enables detector "A" when the UPPER LEFT chamber detector field is selected at the Operator Control Panel. The Ion Chamber Settings Screen also provides factory-configurable settings that facilitate proper compatibility of the generator with specific types of ion chambers. These settings include Ion Chamber Type (Slope/Level), Polarity (+/-), Output (Normal/Inverted), and Relay On/Off settings. Consult Quantum Technical Support for instructions on re-configuring these settings. To change the default ion chamber detector settings, proceed as follows: 7.
In the ion chambers window, select an ion chamber in the list to modify.
8. Press the ion chamber detector (Field 1, Field 2 or Field 3) and choose the desired detector setting (1, 2, 3 or Off). IMPORTANT: The AID ICX-153 or ICX-1153 ion chamber, which is the default chamber type shipped with standard AEC type generators, requires that detector "A" = 2, "B" = 1, and "C" = 3. The factory default orientation of the ion chamber mounting in the bucky is with the front side toward the tube. However, it may be necessary to mount the chamber with the back side forward (e.g., for left side loading wall stands). In this case, in the Ion Chamber Settings screen, simply switch assignment of chamber detector "A" to 3 and detector "C" to 2. No wiring modifications are necessary.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-19
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
Licensing Tab The Licensing Tab Screen (see below) is used to validate and add new licenses associated with the generator. These operations should only be performed under the direction of Quantum’s Technical Support staff.
Figure D-10. Configuration Menu - Licensing Tab
Revision W
D-20
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
GENERATOR CALIBRATION CAUTION! Before calibrating unit, perform warm-up procedures recommended by tube manufacturer or the warm-up procedure described in Chapter 3 of the Operator’s Manual. WARNING! The following calibration procedures involve taking x-ray exposures. All personnel should be behind protective barriers during exposure. X-rays can be dangerous unless proper precautions and procedures are adhered to. The generator was pre-calibrated at the factory, however, the system will need to be re-calibrated to assure proper operation, verify compliance and set AEC optical density (on systems equipped with AEC option). Prior to performing Generator Calibration, the Generator Configuration program must be run first as described in the preceding paragraphs. To gain access to the Generator Calibration utility, password entry is required. This is to prevent unintended and/or unauthorized changes to system settings. 1. Right mouse click on the Generator Service Monitor icon "Q" located in the lower right side of the screen. 2. Select Generator Configuration.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-21
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
3. The "Enter Password" screen appears (see Figure D-11.).
Figure D-11. Enter Password Screen 4. In the Enter Password screen, enter the default Service Technician password (58623) using the keypad, then press Enter. This password enables access to the Generator Calibration program. 4. Upon validation of the password, the Load Configuration menu displays:
Figure D-12. Load Configuration Menu The Load Configuration menu offers two choices: •
Revision W
D-22
Load From File - Opens a browser window to load a previously saved configuration file stored on the Workstation Computer (refer to Factory Reset description in this chapter for instructions on creating a configuration file of the generator).
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
•
Load From Generator - Select to load the last automatically-saved generator configuration (Note: The configuration file is automatically backed up every time the Workstation Computer establishes a connection to the generator.) the currently active configuration (This option should be selected under normal circumstances; only when a problem occurs with the system should the Load From File option be selected).
5. Select Load From Generator. The Calibration Wizard - Overview tab displays:
CHECKED = DONE UNCHECKED = NOT DONE
CALIBRATION SELECTION PANE CHECK MARK = PERFORM NO CHECK MARK = DO NOT PERFORM
Figure D-13. Calibration Wizard - Overview Tab The Calibration Wizard provides a sequence of dialog boxes that leads the calibrator through a series of generator calibration steps, performed in a specific sequence. This wizard may be helpful especially to those who may be unfamiliar with this equipment. The "Calibration Selection" pane, shown in the sample screen above, identifies the calibration procedures to be performed as indicated by a check mark next to each procedure. The check mark is an active field; removing a check mark will eliminate that procedure from the performance sequence, adding a check mark includes it.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-23
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
The Calibration Wizard is organized into six groups, as represented by the following tabs: • Overview - Provides brief description of calibration Wizard and includes an activate/deactivate function to determine which generator calibrations to perform • A/D - Accesses the analog-to-digital (A-D) converters calibration function • kVp - Accesses KV calibration function • Filament Offset - Accesses tube filament offset calibration function • mA - Accesses mA calibration function • AEC - Accesses the AEC optical density and AEC kVp calibration functions (active on systems equipped with AEC option only). Note that all of the AEC Calibrations must be performed for each table and/or film/screen combination used with the x-ray system. Selection of each film/screen type used with the system is explained in "CONFIGURATION SETTINGS" paragraph described previously in this chapter. The paragraphs that follow describe the procedures for performing each of the above calibration functions. These procedures should be performed in the order presented. Note that any of the six calibration procedures may be directly accessed and performed by simply selecting the corresponding tab in the Calibration Wizard - Overview screen. A/D Tab The A/D (analog/digital converter) calibration utility is used to calibrate various essential supply voltages utilized by the x-ray generator against a pre-calibrated NIST-traceable voltage measurement instrument (such as a DMM). After A/D calibration has been performed, the generator continuously monitors the critical internal voltages, and will not allow an exposure if certain tolerances are exceeded. Table 3-3 shows the various voltage levels (with tolerances) that can be calibrated using this utility, and it provides the location of the test point at which a calibrated voltmeter must be connected for measuring the actual voltage level: Table D-1. A/D Calibration Voltages Voltage Level
Calibration Accuracy
Test Point Measurement Location
Cathode
±8 VDC
+/- bus bars on Capacitor Bank next to Power Module A19 (left side looking into generator cabinet)
Anode
±8 VDC
+/- bus bars on Capacitor Bank next to Power Module A18 (right side looking into generator cabinet)
+5VDC
±0.1 VDC
Revision W
D-24
TP1 on Logic Board AY40-006S
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
Table D-1. A/D Calibration Voltages Voltage Level
Calibration Accuracy
+15VDC
±0.2 VDC
TP3 on KVP Control Board AY40-003S
-15VDC
±0.2 VDC
TP5 on KVP Control Board AY40-003S
+24VDC
±0.3 VDC
TP8 on Power Supply Board AY40-005T
Unreg. +24V (Brake)
±0.3 VDC
Terminal TB2-1 on Interface Board AY40-023T (or AY40-034T)
Test Point Measurement Location
WARNING! The following procedure requires that power be applied to the generator. Extreme care must be exercised to ensure the safety of service or other personnel in the area. The following procedure calibrates the generator to verify accurate system measurement of the above operating voltages. The same procedure applies to any of the voltage levels available for selection. Voltage measurement accuracy is verified using your pre-calibrated voltmeter (traceable to NIST standard) as a benchmark. Once calibrated, the generator’s CPU continuously monitors these internal voltages and will terminate or not allow exposure if specified tolerances are exceeded. Proceed as follows:
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-25
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
1. In the Calibration Wizard - Overview tab, select the A/D tab (see Figure D-14). The AD Calibration Menu appears:
VOLTAGE SELECTION TABS SHADING INDICATES: BRIGHT = CURRENT SELECTION MEDIUM = NOT YET DONE DARK = DONE
Figure D-14. Calibration Wizard - A/D Calibration Tab 2. Factory Reset check box - when selected, will reset all A/D Calibration values to factory default settings. This normally should not be selected; it should only be selected when calibration values are extraordinarily outof-range (usually signifying a hardware or software abnormality).
Revision W
D-26
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
3. Select Next to proceed with the first voltage calibration, or you may select a particular voltage level to calibrate by touching its corresponding tab (choices are Cathode, Anode, +5 VDC, +15 VDC, -15 VDC, +24 VDC (Regulated), and Brake (unregulated +24 VDC). For this example, "Cathode" is selected, as shown below.
ENTER VOLTAGE READING FROM METER
Figure D-15. Sample A/D Voltage Calibration Screen (400V Cathode is shown) 4. Refer to Table D-1 and connect a voltmeter to the test point corresponding with the voltage level selected for calibration. 5. On the voltmeter, observe the measured voltage value. Enter the actual (measured) value by adjusting the slide control, or by selecting the data entry box and typing the value using a keyboard. The value entered should be to the hundredths decimal place. Press Calibrate button. 6. Ideally, the value appearing in the 400V Cathode Calibration Screen (Step 1.) will match the reading on the voltmeter within its allowable tolerance. If so, press the Confirm button. The Calibration value is saved and the system advances to the next uncalibrated A/D voltage. If not the same, press Repeat and re-enter the measured voltage value.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-27
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
7.
Repeat above steps for each of the other A/D voltage levels. Following the last A/D Calibration, the system advances to the Calibration Wizard kVp Calibration tab.
kVp Calibration Tab The KV Calibration procedure calibrates the generator to verify accurate system measurement of peak tube potential (kVp). The generator’s ability to measure peak tube potential accurately is verified using a pre-calibrated kVp meter (Dynalyzer or equivalent) as a benchmark. Proceed as follows: 1. If not already done so, access the Calibration Wizard - kVp Calibration tab (see Figure D-16).
Figure D-16. Calibration Wizard - kVp Calibration Tab WARNING! To avoid injury to personnel, ensure that system power is removed prior to making and removing any electrical connections. 2. Factory Reset check box - when selected, will reset kVp Calibration values to factory default settings. This normally should not be selected; it should only be selected when calibration values are extraordinarily out-ofrange (usually signifying a hardware or software abnormality).
Revision W
D-28
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
3. Select Next to proceed with the first (50) kVp calibration, or you may select a particular kVp Calibration to perform by selecting its corresponding tab (choices are 50 kVp and 100 kVp). For this example, "50 kVp" is selected, as shown below:
ENTER KVP READING FROM METER EXPOSURE SETTINGS
Figure D-17. Sample kVp Calibration Screen (50 kVp is shown) 4. Connect a kVp bleeder tank in series between X-ray tube and the generator’s H.V. Transformer (A17), or use a non-invasive kVp meter. 5. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the 50kVp Calibration Screen (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA, 100 msec). 6. On the kVp meter, observe the measured kVp value. Enter the actual (measured) value by adjusting the slide control, or by selecting the data entry box and typing the value using a keyboard. The value entered should be to the hundredths decimal place. Press Calibrate button. 7.
Ideally, the value appearing in the 50 kVp Calibration Screen (Step 1.) will match the reading on the kVp meter within allowable tolerance. If so, press the Confirm button. The calibration value is saved and the system advances to the 100 kVp Calibration setting.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-29
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
8. If not within tolerance, press Repeat button, re-take the exposure at same settings and adjust kVp value as necessary. Repeat this step until indicated and measured kVp values agree to within tolerance. Press the Confirm button to proceed to next calibration. 9. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the 100kVp Calibration Screen (i.e., 100 kVp, 200L mA, 100 msec). 10. On the kVp meter, observe the measured kVp value. Enter the actual (measured) value by adjusting the slide control, or by selecting the data entry box and typing the value using a keyboard. The value entered should be to the hundredths decimal place. Press Calibrate button. 11. Ideally, the value appearing in the 100 kVp Calibration Screen (Step 1.) will match the reading on the kVp meter within its allowable tolerance. If so, press the Confirm button. The calibration value is saved and the system advances to the next calibration procedure. 12. If not the same, press Repeat to re-take exposure and re-enter the measured kVp value. 13. Repeat kVp calibration for 100 kVp until indicated and measured kVp values agree to within tolerance. Press Confirm to save calibration value and to advance to next calibration procedure.
Revision W
D-30
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
Filament Offset Calibration This procedure establishes the filament current offset and gain corrections. Filament current measurement accuracy is verified using a pre-calibrated Dynalyzer (or equivalent), non-invasive kV meter, or mAs meter as a benchmark. Ensure precision of the measurement instrument is sufficient enough to assure generator accuracy requirements can be met. The Filament Offset Calibration procedure may be performed using an oscilloscope, however, it is not the preferred method. Using this method, the objective is to achieve the "flattest" possible large and small filament waveforms, with no spikes or peaks as shown in Figure D-18 below.
Small Filament Before
After
FLAT CURVE, NO PEAKS
Large Filament Before
After
FLAT CURVE, NO PEAKS
Figure D-18. Filament Offset Current Measurement (Using an Oscilloscope) Additionally, an "Advanced Filament Calibration" wizard is provided in the Calibration Wizard program as a supplement to the standard Filament Offset Calibration. Advanced Filament Calibration is used to correct for slight
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-31
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
inconsistencies at specific techniques due to variations in tubes, cables, and other factors. A technique is defined as a specific combination of kVp, mA, and filament size. Advanced Filament Calibration is not required to achieve satisfactory generator performance. It should only be performed on techniques where mA accuracy improvement is required, or where mA waveform optimization is desired. This tool is discussed immediately following the standard Filament Offset calibration procedure. Access the Filament Calibration Menu (shown below) and proceed as follows:
Figure D-19. Calibration Wizard - Filament Offset Intro 1 Tab WARNING! To avoid injury to personnel, ensure system power is removed prior to making and removing any electrical connections. 1. Factory Reset check box - when selected, will reset Filament Offset Calibration values to factory default settings. This normally should not be selected; it should only be selected when calibration values are extraordinarily out-of-range (usually signifying a hardware or software abnormality).
Revision W
D-32
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
2. Select Next to proceed to Filament Offset Calibration Intro 2 screen, or you may select a particular Filament Offset Calibration to perform by selecting its corresponding tab (choices are Small and Large). For this example, "Small" is selected, as shown below:
EXPOSURE SETTINGS
ENTER PREHEAT ADJUSTMENT VALUE (BETWEEN -2.00 AND +2.00)
Figure D-20. Sample Filament Offset Calibration Screen (Small is shown) 3. If using an oscilloscope, select Scope radio button (Step 1.) on the Small Filament Offset calibration screen. Connect the scope leads between test point TP7 on KVP Control Board A2 (AY40-003S) and ground. Set scope for 1.0 volt/division, and 50 ms/division time base. This will give a 100 mA/volt equivalent for mA measurement as shown in the sample waveforms in Figure B-20. 4. If using a mAs meter, select Mas Meter radio button (Step 1.) on the Small Filament Offset calibration screen. Remove two (2) green/yellow wires marked "MAS METER", connected to A17P1-9 and A17P1-10, from
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-33
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure D-21). Connect the mAs meter in series between removed wires. (Important: These wires must be re-connected when finished calibration.)
MAS METER CONNECTION
MAS METER HOOK-UP WIRES (NORMAL POSITION) H.V. TANK (TOP VIEW)
MAS METER
GROUND STUD
MAS METER LEADS
GREEN/YELLOW WIRES (2X)
GREEN/YELLOW WIRES (2X) CONNECTOR A17P1
HIGH VOLTAGE TANK A17 (AY20-031 or AY20-032)
GENERATOR CABINET (PCB DOOR OPEN)
Figure D-21. MAS Meter Connection 5. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the Small Filament Offset Calibration Screen (i.e., 70 kVp, 75s mA, 15 msec). If using an oscilloscope, set time to 125 msec.
Revision W
D-34
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
6. If using an oscilloscope, observe the small filament current pulse waveform for "flatness" (see Figure D-18). If using a mAs meter, observe the measured mA value. Ideally, the mA value appearing in the Small Filament Calibration Screen (Step 1.) will match the reading on the mAs meter within allowable tolerance. 7.
Press the Calibrate button.
8. If waveform is acceptable or if mA reading is within tolerance, press the Confirm button. The calibration value is saved and the system advances to the Large Filament Offset Calibration setting. 9. If mA is not within tolerance or if waveform is not flat, press the Repeat button. 10. Increase or decrease the preheat value displayed on the Small Filament Calibration screen (Step 2.) by adjusting the slide control, or by selecting the data entry box and typing the value using a keyboard. The value entered should be to the hundredths decimal place. The preheat value adjustment range is from +2.00 down to -2.00, with 0.00 equating to no offset applied to the tube’s default filament curve. To increase mA, raise the filament offset value; to decrease mA, lower the filament offset value. Note: An error message appears if the filament current is set too low, which indicates the filament offset value for the filament being calibrated is set too low or high. If this occurs, increase or decrease the filament current. 11. Re-take the exposure at same settings and adjust preheat value as necessary. Repeat this step until measured mA is within tolerance, or if using an oscilloscope, when waveform is sufficiently flat. Press the Confirm button to proceed to Large Filament Offset Calibration.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-35
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
12. The Large Filament Offset Calibration screen is displayed:
EXPOSURE SETTINGS
ENTER PREHEAT ADJUSTMENT VALUE (BETWEEN -2.00 AND +2.00)
Figure D-22. Sample Filament Offset Calibration Screen (Large is shown) 13. If using an oscilloscope, select Scope radio button (Step 1.); if using a mAs meter, select Mas Meter. 14. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the Filament Calibration Screen (i.e., 70 kVp, 300L mA (250 mA if Model QG-200-SE generator), 15 msec). If using an oscilloscope, set time to 125 msec. 15. If using an oscilloscope, observe the large filament current pulse waveform for "flatness" (see Figure D-18). If using a mAs meter, observe the measured mA value. Ideally, the mA value appearing in the Large Filament Calibration Screen (Step 1.) will match the reading on the mAs meter within allowable tolerance. 16. Press the Calibrate button. 17. If waveform is acceptable or if mA reading is within tolerance, press the Confirm button. The calibration value is saved and the system advances to the next calibration procedure.
Revision W
D-36
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
18. If mA is not within tolerance or if waveform is not flat, press the Repeat button. 19. Increase or decrease the preheat value displayed on the Large Filament Calibration screen (Step 2.) by adjusting the slide control, or by selecting the data entry box and typing the value using a keyboard. The value entered should be to the hundredths decimal place. The preheat value adjustment range is from +2.00 down to -2.00, with 0.00 equating to no offset applied to the tube’s default filament curve. To increase mA, raise the filament offset value; to decrease mA, lower the filament offset value. 20. Re-take the exposure at same settings and adjust preheat value as necessary. Repeat this step until measured mA is within tolerance, or if using an oscilloscope, when waveform is sufficiently flat. Press the Confirm button to proceed to next calibration procedure.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-37
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
Advanced Filament Calibration Wizard The "Advanced Filament Calibration" wizard is provided to improve system accuracy at a selectable technique (i.e., kVp, mA and filament size). Note that Advanced Filament Calibration is not required in order to achieve satisfactory generator performance. It should only be performed on techniques where mA accuracy or filament offset waveform optimization is desired. To access the Advanced Filament Calibration wizard, proceed as follows: 1. From the Calibration Wizard screen, select Tools>Advanced>Filament. The Calibration Wizard - Advanced Filament Calibration Wizard Intro 1 Tab is displayed:
Figure D-23. Calibration Wizard - Advanced Filament Calibration Wizard Intro 1 Tab 2. Factory Reset check box - When selected, will reset Filament Offset Calibration values to factory default settings. This normally should not be selected; it should only be selected when calibration values are extraordinarily out-of-range (usually signifying a hardware or software abnormality).
Revision W
D-38
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
3. Select Next to proceed to Advanced Filament Calibration Intro 2 Tab. Per the instructions provided on this screen, connect a Digital Oscilloscope (Tektronix Model TDS2024 or equivalent) to test points TP1 (channel 1), TP7 (channel 2), and TP4 (grounds) on KVP Control Board A2 (AY40-003S) located on the generator PCB Door. Adjust the Oscilloscope settings according to the screen instructions. 4. Select Next to proceed to Advanced Filament Calibration Intro 3 (Waveforms) Tab. The sample filament offset waveforms illustrate three scenarios; filament offset adjusted too high, filament offset adjusted too low, and correct filament offset adjustment. Keep these in mind as you proceed through the Advanced Filament Calibration process. 5. Select Next to proceed to Adjustment Point Selection Tab:
Figure D-24. Advanced Filament Calibration - Adjustment Point Selection Tab 6. If using an oscilloscope, select Scope radio button (Step 1.); if using a mAs meter, select Mas Meter.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-39
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
7. Set the kVp and mA techniques to the desired values using the up/ down arrow buttons, then press the Proceed button. The Filament Point Adjustment Tab displays:
Figure D-25. Advanced Filament Calibration - Filament Point Adjustment Tab 8. Take an exposure. 9. Press the Calibrate button. 10. Observe the filament offset waveform captured on the oscilloscope. It should look similar to waveforms shown on the Advanced Filament Calibration Intro 3 (Waveforms) Tab. 11. If the waveform is correct, either press the Next Point button to select another technique to calibrate, or press the Complete button to exit Advanced Filament Calibration. 12. If the waveform is not correct (i.e., Too High or Too Low as shown on Advanced Filament Calibration Intro 3 (Waveforms) Tab), the filament preheat value must be adjusted using the slider control shown in Step 1 of the Filament Point Adjustment screen (see Figure D-25). If waveform is Too Low, increase the filament preheat value by mov-
Revision W
D-40
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
ing slider to the right; if waveform is Too High, decrease the filament preheat value by moving slider to the left. Note: Only a small amount of adjustment may be necessary, make all adjustments in small increments at a time. 13. Press the Repeat button. 14. Re-take the exposure and adjust preheat value if necessary. Repeat this step until mA preheat is optimized. Press Complete button when finished. Confirm optimization using a secondary calibrated mA measurement instrument such as Dynalyzer or mAs meter. MA Calibration Tab This procedure calibrates the generator to verify accurate system measurement of tube current (mA). Current measurement accuracy is verified using a pre-calibrated mAs meter (Dynalyzer or equivalent) as a benchmark. Ensure precision of the measurement instrument is sufficient enough to assure generator accuracy requirements can be met. An oscilloscope may be used for mA measurement, however, it likely will not be precise enough to assure generator mA accuracy. To use an oscilloscope for mA measurement, connect scope leads between test point TP7 on KVP Control Board A2 (AY40-003S1) and ground. Set scope for 1.0 volt/division, and 50 ms/division time base. This will give a 100 mA/volt equivalent for mA measurement (see Figure D-26 for sample mA measurements using scope).
Figure D-26. MA Measurement Using an Oscilloscope
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-41
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
1. Access the mA Calibration Menu (shown below) and proceed as follows:
Figure D-27. Calibration Wizard - mA Calibration Intro 1 Tab WARNING! To avoid injury to personnel, ensure that system power is removed prior to making and removing any electrical connections. 2. Factory Reset check box - when selected, will reset mA Calibration values to factory default settings. This normally should not be selected; it should only be selected when calibration values are extraordinarily out-ofrange (usually signifying a hardware or software abnormality).
Revision W
D-42
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
3. Select Next to proceed to mA Calibration Intro 2 screen, or you may select a particular mA Calibration to perform by selecting its corresponding tab (choices are Low mA and High mA). For this example, "Low mA" is selected, as shown below:
ENTER MA READING FROM METER
Figure D-28. Sample mA Calibration Screen (Low mA is shown) 4. If not already done so, a kVp bleeder tank should be connected in series between tube and High-Voltage (H.V.) Transformer A17. If using a mAs meter, connect the mAs meter between pins A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 on H.V. Transformer A17. This connection is made by removing the two green/yellow wires connecting A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 to the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure D-21) and connecting the removed wires to the mAs meter. (Note: The MAS meter should remain connected throughout calibration. These wires must be re-connected when finished calibration.) 5. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the Low mA Calibration Screen (i.e., 60 kVp, 75s mA, 100 msec).
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-43
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
6. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or mAs meter, observe the measured mA value. Enter the actual (measured) value into the mA field on the Low mA Calibration screen by adjusting the slide control, or by selecting the data entry box and typing the value using a keyboard. The value entered should be to the hundredths decimal place. Press Calibrate button. 7.
Ideally, the value appearing in the Low mA Calibration Screen (Step 1.) will match the reading on the mAs meter within allowable tolerance. If so, press the Confirm button. The calibration value is saved and the system advances to the High mA Calibration setting.
8. If mA is not within tolerance, press Repeat button, re-take the exposure at same settings and re-enter the measured mA value. Repeat this step until indicated and measured mA values agree to within tolerance. Press the Confirm button to proceed to High mA Calibration. 9. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the High mA Calibration Screen (i.e., 60 kVp, 400L mA (250 mA if Model QG-200-SE generator), 100 msec). 10. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or mAs meter, observe the measured mA value. Enter the actual (measured) value into the mA field on the High mA Calibration screen by adjusting the slide control, or by selecting the data entry box and typing the value using a keyboard. The value entered should be to the hundredths decimal place. Press Calibrate button. 11. Ideally, the value appearing in the High mA Calibration Screen (Step 1.) will match the reading on the mAs meter within its allowable tolerance. If so, press the Confirm button. The calibration value is saved and the system advances to the next calibration procedure. 12. If mA is not within tolerance, press Repeat button, re-take the exposure at same settings and re-enter the measured mA value. Repeat this step until indicated and measured mA values agree to within tolerance. Press Confirm to save calibration value and to advance to next calibration procedure. Note: The Power Supply Board’s +48 VDC output may require adjusting (at potentiometer A6R17) up to +55 VDC (max.) in cases where long-length high tension cables are used and/or a heavy duty x-ray tube is installed. This can be determined by measuring the mA output (using a Dynalyzer or mAs meter) of an exposure taken at 40 to 50 kVp and the highest mA station available. The mA measured should be the same as the indicated mA (within tolerance). If mA output is low, increase the +48 VDC voltage output as required, but do not exceed +55 VDC. CAUTION! If using a mAs meter, re-connect the green/ yellow wire marked "MAS METER" to the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure D-21).
Revision W
D-44
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
AEC CALIBRATION CAUTION! Before calibrating unit, perform warmup procedures recommended by tube manufacturer or the warm-up procedure described in Chapter 3 of the Operator’s Manual. IMPORTANT! Before performing each AEC calibration procedure, verify the correct Film/Screen is displayed on the calibration screen (shown in top left field). Note: In most DR or CR Film Plate systems, the entire imaging area of the digital receptor or CR Film Plate must be covered with acrylic in order to obtain accurate "S" or "REX" values used for the procedures that follow. Refer to the calibration instructions provided with digital or CR system for specific "S" or "REX" values required for AEC calibration. The following procedures must be performed to ensure successful AEC calibration of the HF Series X-ray generator when configured as part of the QG-DIG-CXDI Integration System (i.e., integration to Canon Digital Radiography (DR) System). Table D-2 shows a summarized presentation of the AEC calibration procedure. An AEC calibration Worksheet is provided in Table D-3 for recording calibration data. Table D-2. DR System AEC Calibration Procedure Sequence FILM/SCREENS TO BE CALIBRATED
REQUIRED AEC CALIBRATION PROCEDURES/ SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
WALL72 RECEPTOR/ FILM SCREEN
1. Perform "Ion Chamber Balancing" procedure. 2. Perform "AEC MAS Balance" procedure for wall stand ion chamber. 3. Perform "Base Optical Density (OD) Calibration": a. Set desired optical density b. Set "Offset" to 1200. c. Adjust ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer until base density is achieved in acquired images. 4. Perform "AEC kVp Calibration".
WALL RECEPTOR/FILM SCREEN
1. Perform "Base Optical Density (OD) Calibration", however, DO NOT re-adjust the ion chamber MASTER GAIN potentiometer. Adjust "Offset" to obtain desired (set) density. 3. Perform "AEC kVp Calibration". 1. Copy "Wall72" Receptor/ Film Screen to "Wall".
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-45
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
Table D-2. DR System AEC Calibration Procedure Sequence
Revision W
D-46
FILM/SCREENS TO BE CALIBRATED
REQUIRED AEC CALIBRATION PROCEDURES/ SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
TABLE RECEPTOR/FILM SCREEN
1. Perform "Ion Chamber Balancing" procedure for table ion chamber. 2. Perform "Base Optical Density (OD) Calibration": a. Set desired optical density b. Set "Offset" to 1200. c. Adjust ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer until base density is achieved in acquired images. 4. Perform "AEC kVp Calibration".
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
Table D-3. AEC Calibration Worksheet Film/Screen Combination:
Table 40
Wall 40
Wall 72
BASE OD CALIBRATION Setting:
50 kVp, 200L mA, 5 cm
Optical Density: Offset AEC kVp CALIBRATION Setting:
Step 1 - 50 kVp, 200L mA, 5 cm
Optical Density: Setting:
Step 2 - 60 kVp, 200L mA, 10 cm
Optical Density: Setting:
Step 3 - 80 kVp, 200L mA, 15 cm
Optical Density: Setting:
Step 4 - 100 kVp, 200L mA, 20 cm
Optical Density: Setting:
Step 5 - 110 kVp, 200L mA, 25 cm
Optical Density: Setting:
Step 6 - 120 kVp, 200L mA, 30 cm
Optical Density: Setting:
*Step 7 - 130 kVp, 200L mA, 30 cm
Optical Density: Setting:
*Step 8 - 140 kVp, 200L mA, 30 cm
Optical Density: * Only required on 150 kVp systems Ion Chamber Balancing (Three-field Chambers) On systems using a three-field ion chamber, the chamber detectors must be balanced prior to performing AEC calibration (refer to the ion chamber manufacturer’s instruction manual). When balanced, the mAs will be approximately the same (±5%) for exposures taken using any of the three chambers, or with two or more chambers selected simultaneously. This procedure must be performed on each ion chamber used in the system (for example, both table and wall ion chambers when equipped with two). Before proceeding, check that the ion chamber detectors have been correctly configured so when the chamber select buttons on the operator control panel are pressed, the appropriate ion chamber detector is enabled. If not, refer to
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-47
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
"Ion Chamber Tab" configuration procedure described previously in this appendix and re-configure. Proceed as follows: 1. If not already done so, a kVp bleeder tank should be connected in series between tube and High-Voltage (H.V.) Transformer A17. If using a mAs meter, connect the mAs meter between pins A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 on H.V. Transformer A17. 2. Access Generator Settings Screen (see Figure D-4). Make a note of the Backup MAS setting, then change the Backup MAS to "40". 3. Press the Manual/AEC Mode button on the operator control panel and select AEC mode. 4. Using a lead sheet, cover the UPPER RIGHT and CENTER ion chamber detectors. 5. Place 20 CM acrylic over UPPER LEFT ion chamber detector. 6. Set operator control panel for 100 KV, 200L MA, select the UPPER LEFT ion chamber detector and take an exposure. Note the measured mAs reading. 7.
Revision W
D-48
Repeat above steps with the CENTER ion chamber detector selected and UPPER LEFT and UPPER RIGHT detectors covered with lead. The measured mAs reading should be within 5% of the mAs reading noted in the previous step. If not, adjust the CENTER detector gain potentiometer located on the ion chamber amplifier (refer to ion chamber manufacturer’s documentation for details), then re-take exposure and verify it is within tolerance. Repeat as necessary.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
Note: If the system is equipped with "universal" type AEC (i.e., AEC Board A11 is part number AY40-027S), and the ion chamber is "level" type (i.e., Siemens), adjust the appropriate detector gain potentiometer on AY40-027S in accordance with the table below: Table D-4. Universal AEC Board A11 Detector Gain Adjustment Potentiometers (Siemens Ion Chamber Only) ION CHAMBER
DETECTOR
AEC BOARD A11 (AY40-027S) POTENTIOMETER
TABLE
1
R61
TABLE
2
R63
TABLE
3
R66
WALL#1
1
R54
WALL#1
2
R55
WALL#1
3
R56
WALL#2
1
R53
WALL#2
2
R58
WALL#2
3
R57
8. Repeat above steps with UPPER RIGHT ion chamber detector selected and UPPER LEFT and UPPER CENTER detectors covered with lead. The measured mAs reading should be within 5% of the mAs reading noted in the previous step. If not, adjust the UPPER RIGHT detector gain potentiometer, re-take exposure and verify it is within tolerance. Repeat as necessary. 9. Access the Generator Settings Screen and reset Backup MAS to original setting noted previously.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-49
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
AEC MAS Balance Verification The generator AEC mAs balance was pre-calibrated at the factory. However, verification of AEC mAs balance assures AEC calibration accuracy. When balanced, the mAs at the specified exposures will be approximately the same (±6%). This procedure only needs to be performed once prior to AEC calibration of the film/screen combination(s) used with the system. Proceed as follows: 1. If not already done so, connect a kVp bleeder tank in series between tube and High-Voltage (H.V.) Transformer A17. If using a mAs meter, connect the mAs meter between pins A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 on H.V. Transformer A17. This connection is made by removing the two green/ yellow wires connecting A17P1-9 and A17P1-10 to the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure D-21) and connecting the removed wires to the mAs meter. (Note: These wires must be re-connected when finished calibration.) 2. Place 20 cm of acrylic in the X-ray beam. (Where practical, adjust acrylic thickness to obtain approximately 100 millisecond exposures.) 3. If calibrating a" level" type ion chamber, ensure all three ion chamber detectors are selected. 4. Press the Manual/AEC Mode button on the operator control panel and select enter AEC mode. 5. Set the operator control panel for 110 kVp (100 kVp if calibrating a "level" type (Siemens) ion chamber - requires AY40-027S AEC board), 75S mA and take an exposure. 6. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or mAs meter, note the measured mAs value. 7.
Set the operator control panel for 110 kVp (100 kVp if calibrating a "level" type (Siemens) ion chamber - requires AY40-027S AEC board) and the highest available mA station. Take an exposure.
8. On the Dynalyzer Digital Display or mAs meter, note the measured mAs value. 9. The mAs values noted must be within ±5%. If not, adjustment of the dV/dt potentiometer on AEC Board A11 is necessary: •
Revision W
D-50
If the generator is equipped with "standard" type AEC (i.e., AEC Board A11 is part number AY40-031S), adjust potentiometer A11R12 to increase or decrease the mAs value.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
•
If the generator is equipped with "universal" type AEC (i.e., AEC Board A11 is part number AY40-027S), and the ion chamber is "level" type (i.e., Siemens), adjust potentiometer A11R82 to increase or decrease the mAs value.
•
If the generator is equipped with "universal" type AEC (i.e., AEC Board A11 is part number AY40-027S), and the ion chamber is "slope" type (i.e., AID), adjust potentiometer A11R87 to increase or decrease the mAs value.
10. Re-take exposure at the above settings. Repeat until the two measured values are within range. 11. Take an exposure at 110 kVp (100 kVp if calibrating a "level" type (Siemens) ion chamber), 75S mA, 10 cm. Verify mAs value is within ±5% of previous measurements. 12. Take an exposure at 110 kVp (100 kVp if calibrating a "level" type (Siemens) ion chamber), a mid-range mA value, 10 cm. Verify mAs value is within ±5% of previous measurements. CAUTION! If using a mAs meter, re-connect the green/yellow wire marked "MAS METER" to the ground stud on top of the H.V. Transformer (see Figure D-21).
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-51
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
The AEC Calibration Tab WARNING! The following calibration procedures involve taking x-ray exposures. All personnel should be behind the protective barriers. X-rays can be dangerous unless proper precautions and procedures are adhered to. Access the AEC Calibration menu (shown below) and proceed as follows:
Figure D-29. Calibration Wizard - AEC Calibration Intro 1 Tab The AEC Calibration menu provides access to the system's various AEC calibration functions, briefly described as follows:
Revision W
D-52
•
Receptor - Provides for selection of a Receptor/Film Screen for AEC calibration
•
Optical Density - Calibrates the currently selected Receptor/Film Screen and ion chamber combination to a user-selectable, base optical density (gray level) setting. This target level, referred to as the "Base OD setting", determines the basic "gray-level" quality of images acquired in AEC mode
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
•
KV - Calibrates the tube voltage settings used in conjunction with a particular Receptor/Film Screen and ion chamber combination
•
Copy - The Copy Receptor Calibration utility enables stored AEC calibration data (kV curves, AEC offset data) to be copied from a calibrated receptor/film screen to another receptor/film screen in order to reduce overall calibration time. IMPORTANT! When calibrating AEC using a wall stand mounted receptor, ensure that the x-ray beam is perpendicular to image receptor and that the correct ion chamber detector(s) is selected.
Proceed as follows: 1. Factory Reset check box - when selected, will reset AEC Calibration values to factory default settings. This normally should not be selected; it should only be selected when calibration values are extraordinarily outof-range (usually signifying a hardware or software abnormality).
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-53
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
2. Select Next to proceed to AEC Calibration Intro 2 screen, or you may select a particular AEC Calibration to perform by selecting its corresponding tab (choices are Receptor, OD, kVp Intro and kVp calibration steps 1 through 8, and Copy). For this example, "Receptor" is selected, as shown below:
Figure D-30. Calibration Wizard - AEC Calibration Intro 1 Tab Note: Each physical receptor used with the generator is configurable for use with a particular Receptor/Film Screen using the Receptors Configuration utility described previously in the Configuration section of this appendix (see Figure D-8). 3. Select a Receptor/Film Screen to calibrate (touch or click on the down arrow at the right end of receptor field to display additional choices). For this example, "Wall72" is selected. Press Next button.
Revision W
D-54
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
4. The Calibration Wizard - Base Optical Density (OD) Calibration screen appears:
Figure D-31. Calibration Wizard - Base OD Tab
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-55
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
Base OD Calibration Procedure Note: When calibrating the first Receptor/Film Screen, set the "Offset" value to 1200, and adjust the MASTER GAIN potentiometer on the ion chamber until the desired target density is obtained. Note: If the system is equipped with "standard type" AEC Board A11 (AY40-031S), the "Table Gain Adj. Potentiometer" is A11R22 and the "Wall Gain Adj. Potentiometer" is A11R23. If the system is equipped with "Universal type" AEC Board A11 (AY40-027S), the "Table Gain Adj. Potentiometer" is A11R77 and the "Wall Gain Adj. Potentiometer" is A11R79. If the selected film/screen combination is the first one to be calibrated with the system, perform the following steps: 1. Set the ion chamber detector selection to middle detector and ensure xray tube is at correct SID. Ensure the ion chamber has been balanced. 2. Set the Optical Density to the desired target level (e.g., "650.00" as shown in Figure D-31). To do so, set the OD range (located directly below "Optical Density" field) for 10-1000. Enter the Optical Density value by adjusting the slide control, or by selecting the data entry box and typing the value using a keyboard. The value entered should be to the hundreths decimal place. Do not change the Target Level setting at
any time during this procedure.
3. Set the Offset value displayed on the Base OD Calibration screen (Step 2.) to "1200" by adjusting the slide control, or by selecting the data entry box and typing the value using a keyboard. The Offset value adjustment range is from 500 to 4000.
NOTE
The series of AEC optical density measurements should be repeated as many times as required until optical density is sufficiently accurate to meet regulatory and facility requirements.
4. Place 5 cm of acrylic in the X-ray beam completely covering the ion chamber detectors. 5. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the Base OD Calibration Screen (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA, normal density). 6. On film systems, develop the film and then measure its optical density. On CR or DR systems, observe the density level displayed on the integrated system’s workstation computer. 7.
Press the Calibrate button.
8. If the density value is within acceptable range of the Target Level (on CR or DR systems, refer to manufacturer’s specifications), press the Confirm button to save the setting and proceed to AEC kVp Calibration.
Revision W
D-56
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
9. If not within range, press Repeat button and perform the following adjustments: a. Adjust Table Gain Adj. potentiometer (if calibrating the table receptor) or Wall Gain Adj. potentiometer (if calibrating the wall receptor), and re-take exposure. Continue until the measured density value equals the Target Level setting to within DR System manufacturer’s specification. b. If you still cannot achieve the Target Level setting, set Table Gain Adj. potentiometer (if calibrating the table receptor) or Wall Gain Adj. potentiometer (if calibrating the wall receptor) to mid-range, then adjust the ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer until roughly the desired density is obtained. Further fine-tuning can then be achieved by adjusting the Table or Wall Gain Adj. potentiometer as described in the previous step. c.
If the measured density value still does not equal the Target Level setting even with the ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer set to maximum gain position, increase gain of each chamber detector and perform the "AEC MAS Balance Verification" procedure. Repeat Base OD calibration.
d. If the measured density value still does not equal the Target Level setting after adjusting the MASTER GAIN and gain of individual detectors, reduce the Offset value until the desired density value is obtained. If the selected Receptor/Film Screen is not the first one to be calibrated with the system, perform the following steps: 1. Set the "Target Level" to the desired level (e.g., "650.00" as shown in Figure D-31). To do so, set the OD range (located directly below "Optical Density" field) for 10-1000. Enter the Optical Density value by adjusting the slide control, or by selecting the data entry box and typing the value using a keyboard. The value entered should be to the hundreths decimal place. Do not change the Target Level setting at any time during this
procedure.
2. Place 5 CM of acrylic in the X-ray beam completely covering the ion chamber detectors. 3. Take an exposure at the setting indicated on the Base OD Calibration Screen (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA, normal density). 4. On film systems, develop the film and then measure its optical density. On CR or DR systems, observe the density level displayed on the integrated system’s workstation computer. 5. If the density value is within acceptable range of the Target Level (on CR or DR systems, refer to manufacturer’s specifications), press the Calibrate button to save the setting and proceed to AEC kVp Calibration.
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-57
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
6. If density value is too low, decrease the Offset value displayed on the Base OD Calibration screen (Step 2.) by adjusting the slide control, or by selecting the data entry box and typing the value using a keyboard. The Offset value adjustment range is from 500 to 4000. Increase or decrease the Offset value as required, then press Calibrate. 7.
Press Repeat button to re-take exposure.
8. Continue until the measured density value equals the Target Level optical density setting to within DR System manufacturer’s specification. When it does, press Confirm button. The system advances to AEC kVp Calibration. AEC kVp Calibration Procedure The AEC KV Calibration screen (shown below) is used to calibrate the tube voltage to the Base (Target Level) optical density setting. There are a total of six kV calibration points for a 125 kV system (50, 60, 80, 100, 110, and 120 kV); 150 kV systems require an additional two kV calibration points (130 and 140 kV). The image receptor and chamber field settings remain the same as those used in the Base OD Calibration procedure described previously.
Revision W
D-58
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
1. Access the AEC kVp Calibration Tab (shown below) and proceed as follows.
TARGET DENSITY LEVEL
Figure D-32. Calibration Wizard - AEC kVp Calibration Tab
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Revision W
D-59
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
2. Press the Next button to proceed. The Calibration Wizard - 50 kVp 5cm Calibration screen displays:
TARGET DENSITY LEVEL
Figure D-33. Calibration Wizard - 50 kVp 5cm Calibration 3. Place indicated thickness of acrylic (5 CM for first calibration point) in the X-ray beam. 4. Take an exposure at the setting indicated in the Calibration Wizard - 50 kVp 5cm Calibration screen (i.e., 50 kVp, 200L mA, normal density). 5. On film systems, develop the film and then measure its optical density. On CR or DR systems, observe the density level displayed on the integrated system’s workstation computer. 6. Enter the observed density value in the 50 kVp 5cm Calibration screen (Step 1.) by adjusting the slide control, or by selecting the data entry box and typing the value using a keyboard. The value entered should be to the hundreths decimal place. Press the Calibrate button. a. If the density value is within acceptable range of the Target Level (on CR or DR systems, refer to manufacturer’s specifications), press the Confirm button to proceed to the next AEC kVp calibration point. b. If not within range, press the Repeat button to re-take the exposure
Revision W
D-60
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
and re-enter the observed density value. Continue until the measured density value equals the Target Gray Level setting to within acceptable limits. When it does, press Confirm button. c. 7.
The system advances to Calibration Wizard - 60kVp 10cm Calibration screen.
Repeat the previous steps for the 60, 80, 100, 110, 120, and, if 150 kV system, 130 and 140 kVp calibration points, placing the specified thickness of acrylic in the x-ray beam as indicated on the Calibration Wizard AEC kVp Calibration screen for each kV calibration point, until all the observed density values are within required range.
8. This completes AEC calibration for this particular Receptor/Film Screen. Repeat AEC calibration procedures for all additional Receptor/Film Screens that will be used with the system. 9. Verify AEC calibration by taking several exposures in AEC mode and checking the resulting density value. If necessary, repeat AEC calibration procedure to further adjust AEC accuracy.
Revision W
D-61
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
Copy Receptor Calibration Tab Typically, the AEC calibration parameters for each of the various Receptors/ Film Screens used with the generator are quite similar. Therefore, the "Copy" function (shown below) can be used to copy calibration parameters from one Receptor/Film Screen to another. For example, after completing AEC calibration of "Wall72" Receptor/Film Screen, the Copy Receptor Calibration function can be used to copy its AEC calibration data to the "Table" receptor.
Figure D-34. Calibration Wizard - Copy Receptor Calibration After copying the "Wall72" AEC Calibration data to "Wall", the only further AEC calibration usually required is performing Base OD Calibration to set the "Offset" value. Similarly, the "Wall" Receptor/Film Screen calibration data can be copied to the "Table", however, the table ion chamber’s MASTER GAIN potentiometer must be adjusted as required. Be sure to verify the AEC images for each SID/receptor meet applicable regulatory agency requirements. If required, further optical density accuracy can be attained by performing the "AEC kVp Calibration" procedure for each copied receptor. Proceed as follows:
Revision W
D-62
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
1. On the Calibration wizard - Copy Receptor Calibration screen (Step 1.), select a previously calibrated Receptor/Film Screen to copy calibration data from (touch or click on the down arrow at the right end of source field to display additional choices). For this example, "Wall72" is selected. 2. On the Calibration wizard - Copy Receptor Calibration screen (Step 2.), select the Destination Receptor/Film Screen(s) to copy the calibration data to. CAUTION! Before proceeding, verify the "SOURCE" and "DESTINATION" copy selections are correct. Selecting Copy as directed in the next step will cause calibration data for the destination Receptor/Film Screen to overwrite existing calibration Receptor/ Film Screen data. 3. Press the Copy button. 4. A Copy Results dialogue box will appear to confirm the copy function was executed successfully. Press Ok.
Revision W
D-63
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
5. The Calibration wizard - Copy Receptor Calibration screen (Step 3.) is displayed (see below). To perform another copy operation, press Yes button and repeat steps above. To exit the copy utility, press No button.
Figure D-35. Calibration Wizard - Copy Receptor Calibration (Step 3)
Revision W
D-64
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
6. The system displays the Calibration Report screen as in the example shown in Figure D-36.
Figure D-36. Calibration Wizard - Copy Receptor Calibration (Step 3) 7.
The Calibration Report screen should state "All selected calibrations complete", as shown in the sample screen above. If so, press the Exit button to close the calibration wizard.
8. If all selected calibration procedures were not completed, the Calibration report screen will state "Incomplete" and list the procedures not performed. Select Perform another calibration to perform the calibrations, or select Exit to close the calibration wizard.
Revision W
D-65
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
Appendix D Calibration (Using Generator Service Tools)
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Revision W
D-66
HF Series X-ray Generators - Service Manual Quantum Medical Imaging, LLC
